Dell™ Multifunction Color Laser Printer 3115cn
User's Guide
Notes, Notices, and Cautions
Click the links to the left for information on the features, options, and operation of your multifunction printer.
For information on other documentation included with your multifunction printer, see "Finding Information."
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
1 Optional duplexer
7
Transfer belt unit
2 Operator panel
8
Front cover
NOTE: You
can open the
front cover by
pushing the
button (right
side).
3 Standard 250-sheet tray
9
4 Optional 550-sheet paper feeder
10 Control board
Power switch
NOTE: Your multifunction
printer allows for a
maximum of three trays
(standard 250-sheet tray,
optional 550-sheet paper
feeder, and multipurpose
feeder).
5 Multipurpose feeder
11 Control board cover
6 Button (right side)
12 Automatic
Document Feeder
(ADF)
To order replacement print cartridges or supplies from Dell:
1. Double-click the icon on your desktop.
2. Visit Dell's website, or order Dell printer supplies by phone.
www.dell.com/supplies
For best service, have your Dell printer Service Tag available.
For help locating your Service Tag number, see "Express Service Code and Service Tag number."
Notes, Notices, and Cautions
NOTE: A NOTE indicates important information that helps you make better use of your multifunction
printer.
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
NOTICE: A NOTICE indicates either potential damage to hardware or loss of data and tells you how
to avoid the problem.
CAUTION: A CAUTION indicates a potential for property damage, personal injury, or death.
Information in this document is subject to change without notice.
© 2008 Dell Inc. All rights reserved.
Reproduction in any manner whatsoever without the written permission of Dell Inc. is strictly forbidden.
Trademarks used in this text: Dell, the DELL logo and Dell ScanCenter are trademarks of Dell Inc.; Microsoft,
Windows, Windows Server, and Windows Vista are either trademarks or registered trademarks of Microsoft
Corporation in the United States and/or other countries; Macintosh, MacOS, EtherTalk and TrueType are
trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries; AppleTalk is a registered trademark of
Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries; UNIX is a registered trademark of The Open Group in
the United States and other countries; Red Hat and RPM are trademarks or registered trademarks of Red Hat
Inc. in the United States and other countries; Linux is a trademark or registered trademark of Linus Torvalds
in the United States and other countries; The Common UNIX Printing System, CUPS, and the CUPS logo are
the trademarks of Easy Software Products; PCL is a registered trademark of Hewlett-Packard in the United
States; ENERGY STAR is a registered trademark of the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency. As an ENERGY
STAR Partner, Dell Inc. has determined that this product meets the ENERGY STAR guidelines for energy
efficiency.
As for libtiff
Copyright © 1988-1997 Sam Leffler
Copyright © 1991-1997 Silicon Graphics, Inc.
THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS-IS" AND WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS, IMPLIED OR
OTHERWISE, INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION, ANY WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
IN NO EVENT SHALL SAM LEFFLER OR SILICON GRAGHICS BE LIABLE FOR ANY SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL,
INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OF ANY KIND, OR ANY DAMAGES WHATSOEVER RESULTING FROM
LOSS OF USE, DATA OR PROFITS, WHETHER OR NOT ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF DAMAGE, AND ON
ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, ARISING OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR PERFORMANCE OF
THIS SOFTWARE.
This software uses the Independent JPEG Group's JPEG software library. Other trademarks and trade names
may be used in this document to refer to either the entities claiming the marks and names or their products.
Dell Inc. disclaims any proprietary interest in trademarks and trade names other than its own.
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
UNITED STATES GOVERNMENT RESTRICTED RIGHTS
This software and documentation are provided with RESTRICTED RIGHTS. Use, duplication or disclosure by
the Government is subject to restrictions as set forth in subparagraph (c)(1)(ii) of the Rights in Technical
Data and Computer Software clause at DFARS 252.227-7013 and in applicable FAR provisions: Dell Inc., One
Dell Way, Round Rock, Texas, 78682, USA.
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to
Part 15 of the FCC rules.
November 2008 Rev. A02
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Finding Information
What are you looking Find it here
for?
· Drivers for my
multifunction printer
· My User's Guide
Drivers and Utilities CD
The Drivers and Utilities CD contains documentation and drivers for your
multifunction printer. You can use the CD to uninstall/reinstall drivers or access
your documentation.
Readme files may be included on your CD to provide last-minute updates about
technical changes to your multifunction printer or advanced technical reference
material for experienced users or technicians.
· Safety information
· How to use my
multifunction printer
· Warranty information
Owner's Manual
CAUTION: Read and follow all safety instructions in your Owner's
Manual prior to setting up and operating your multifunction
printer.
NOTE: The Owner's Manual may not be available in your country or region.
· Safety information
Product Information Guide
· Warranty information
CAUTION: Read and follow all safety instructions in the Product
Information Guide prior to setting up and operating your multifunction
printer.
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
NOTE: The Product Information Guide may not be available in your country or
region.
How to set up my
multifunction printer
Setup diagram
Troubleshooting Guide
Troubleshooting Guide:
- User Settings
- Configuration
- Troubleshooting Instructions
- Others
Express Service Code
and Service Tag
number
The Express Service Code and Service Tag numbers are located inside the front
door of your multifunction printer.
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
· Latest drivers for my
Dell Support Website
multifunction printer
· Answers to technical
The Dell Support Website provides several online tools, including:
service and support
questions
· Solutions - Troubleshooting hints and tips, articles from technicians, and
online courses
· Documentation for my
multifunction printer
· Upgrades - Upgrade information for components, such as memory
· Customer Care - Contact information, order status, warranty, and repair
information
· Downloads - Drivers
· Reference - Multifunction printer documentation and product specifications
You can access Dell Support at support.dell.com. Select your region on the
support page, and fill in the requested details to access help tools and
information.
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool
Using the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool
One of the features of the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool is the E-Mail Alert Setup, which sends you
or the key operator an e-mail when the multifunction printer needs supplies or intervention.
To fill out printer inventory reports requiring the asset tag number of all of the multifunction printer in your
area, use the Printer Information feature in the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool . Just type the IP
address of each printer on the network to display the asset tag number.
The Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool feature also lets you change printer settings and keep track of
printing trends. If you are a network administrator, you can easily copy the printer's settings to one or all
printers on the network using your Web browser.
To launch the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool , type your network printer's IP address in your Web
browser.
If you do not know what your printer's IP address is, print a printer settings page, which lists the IP address:
1. Press
until >SETUP appears, and then press
2.
3.
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
.
1.
2. Press
until >Reports appears, and then press
3. System Settings is displayed. Press
.
.
The system settings page is printed.
If the IP address shows 0.0.0.0 (the factory default), an IP address has not been assigned. To assign one
for your multifunction printer, see "Assign an IP Address ."
Use the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool for:
Printer Status
Use the Printer Status menu to get immediate feedback on printer supply status. When print cartridge is
running low, click the Order Supplies link on the first screen to order additional print cartridges.
Printer Jobs
Use the Printer Jobs menu to contain information on Job List page and Completed Jobs page.
These pages show the details of the status regarding each protocol or the print jobs.
Printer Settings
Use the Printer Settings menu to change printer settigns and view the operator panel remotely.
Print Server Settings
Using the Print Server Settings menu, you can change the type of printer interface and necessary
conditions for communications.
Copy Printer Settings
Use the Copy Printer Settings menu to copy the printer's settings to another printer or printers on the
network just by typing each printer's IP address.
NOTE: You must log in as an administrator to use this feature.
Address Book
Use the Address Book menu to organize E-Mail Address, Server Address and Phone Book.
Print Volume
Use the Print Volume option to keep track of printing trends, such as paper usage and types of jobs being
printed, and limit which users use the color mode and the maximum number of pages they can print.
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Printer Information
Use the Printer Information menu to get the information you need for service calls, inventory reports, or
the status of current memory and engine code levels.
Tray Settings
Use the Tray Settings menu to get the information about the paper type and size for each tray.
E-Mail Alert
Use the E-Mail Alert menu to receive an e-mail when the multifunction printer needs supplies or
intervention. Type your name or the key operator's name in the e-mail list box to be notified.
Set Password
Use the Set Password menu to lock the operator panel with a password so that other users don't
inadvertently change the printer settings you selected.
NOTE: You must log in as an administrator to use this feature.
Online Help
Click Online Help to visit the Dell web page, and see the User's Guide on that page to verify configured
settings.
Order Supplies at:
www.dell.com/supplies
Contact Dell Support at:
support.dell.com
Using the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool
Be sure to activate JavaScript in your browser before using the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool.
Environment Settings for Web Browsers
Dell recommends configuring the environment settings for your Web browsers, before using the Dell Printer
Configuration Web Tool .
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
NOTE: The Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool pages may be displayed unreadable if you browse the
pages that were configured by using the browser of which language setting is different with your
browser's.
For Internet Explorer 6.0/7.0
Setting Up the Display Language
1. Select Preferences from the Edit menu.
2. Select Languages in the General tab.
3. Specify the display language in order of preference in the Language in order of preference list.
For example:
Italian (Italy) [it]
Spanish (Traditional Sort) [es]
German (Germany) [de]
French (France) [fr]
English [en] or English (United States) [en-us]
Setting the Printer's IP Address to Non-proxy
1. Select Internet Options from the Tools menu.
2. Select Proxy server under LAN Settings in the Connections tab.
3. Do either of the following:
Clear the Use a proxy sever for your LAN check box.
Click Advanced , and then specify the printer's IP address in the Do not use proxy server for
addresses beginning with field under Exceptions .
When you have finished setting the language and proxy, type <http://nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn/> (the printer's IP
address) in the URL entry field of the browser to activate the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool .
For Netscape Communicator 7.1
Setting Up the Display Language
1. Select Preferences from the Edit menu.
2. Select Languages under the the Navigator group.
3. Specify the display language in order of preference in the Language in order of preference list.
For example:
English [en] or English/United States [en-us]
German [de]
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
French [fr]
Italian [it]
Spanish [es]
Netherlands [nl]
Norwegian [no]
Swedish [sv]
Setting the Printer's IP Address to Non-proxy
1. Select Preferences from the Edit menu.
2. In the Navigator group, select Proxies in the Advanced tab.
3. Select either Direct connection to the Internet or Manual proxy configuration .
When you select Manual proxy configuration , specify the printer's IP address in the No Proxy for:
box.
When you have finished setting the language and proxy, type <http://nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn/> (the printer's IP
address) in the URL entry field of the browser to activate the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool .
For Firefox 1.5 or Later
Setting Up the Display Language
1. Select Options from the Tools menu.
2. In the Navigator group, select Proxies in the Advanced tab.
3. Click Edit Languages in the General tab.
4. Specify the display language in order of preference in the Language in order of preference list.
For example:
English [en] or English/United States [en-gb]
Italian [it]
Spanish [es]
German [de]
French [fr]
Netherlands [nl]
Norwegian [no]
Swedish [sv]
Setting the Printer's IP Address to Non-proxy
1. Select Options from the Tools menu.
2. Click General on the Options dialog box.
3. Click Connection Settings
Connection Settings.
4. Do one of the following:
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
4.
"Select the Direct connection to the Internet check box.
"Select the Auto-detect proxy settings for this network check box
"Select the Manual proxy configuration check box, and then enter the printer's IP address in the
No Proxy for edit box.
"Select the Automatic proxy configuration URL check box
When you have finished setting the language and proxy, type <http://nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn/> (the printer's IP
address) in the URL entry field of the browser to activate the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool .
Page Display Format
The layout of the page is divided into three sections mentioned below:
Top Frame
Located at the top of all pages is the Top Frame. When Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool is activated,
the current status and specifications of the multifunction printer are displayed in the Top Frame on every
page.
The following items are displayed in the Top Frame.
Dell MFP
Laser 3115cn
Displays the printer product name.
IP Address:
Displays the printer's IP address.
Location:
Displays the printer's location. The location can be changed in Basic Information on the
Print Server Settings page.
Contact
Person:
Displays the printer's administrator's name. The name can be changed in the Basic
Information on the Print Server Settings page.
Printer
Console
Displays the status of the printer operator panel display and indicators. This is
automatically refreshed at the set interval. The interval can be changed in the Basic
Information on Print Server Settings page.
Help
Links to the Dell web page. See the User's Guide on the Dell Support site for help on this
product.
Printer
Bitmap
Shows the printer bitmap. The Printer Status menu appears in the Right Frame by
clicking the bitmap.
Left Frame
Located at the left side of all pages is the Left Frame. The titles of menus displayed in the Left Frame are
linked to corresponding menus and pages. You can go to the corresponding page by clicking their characters.
The following menus are displayed in the Left Frame.
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Printer Status
Links to the Printer Status menu.
Printer Jobs
Links to the Printer Jobs menu.
Printer Settings
Links to the Printer Settings Report menu.
Print Server Settings
Links to the Print Server Reports menu.
Copy Printer Settings
Links to the Copy Printer Settings menu.
Print Volume
Links to the Print Volume menu
Address Book
Links to the Address Book menu.
Printer Information
Links to the Printer Status menu.
Tray Settings
Links to the Tray Settings menu.
E-Mail Alert
Links to the Print Server Settings menu.
Set Password
Links to the Other Features menu.
Online Help
Links to the Dell web page. See the User's Guide on that page.
Order Supplies at:
Links to the Dell web page.
Contact Dell Support at: Links to the Dell support page.
Web address: http://support.dell.com/
Right Frame
Located at the right side of all pages is the Right Frame. The contents of the Right Frame correspond to the
menu that you select in the Left Frame. For details on the items displayed in the Right Frame, see "Details of
Menu Items ."
Buttons on the Right Frame
Refresh Button
Receives the current printer configuration and updates the latest information
in the Right Frame.
Apply New Settings
Button
Submits new settings made on the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool
to the multifunction printer. The old printer settings will be replaced by the
new settings.
Restart printer to
apply new settings
Button
Submits new settings made on the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool
to the multifunction printer and reboots the multifunction printer. The old
printer settings will be replaced by the new settings.
Restore Settings
Button
Restores the old settings from before changes made. New settings will not
be submitted to the multifunction printer.
Changing the Settings of Menu Items
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Some menus allow you to change the printer settings through the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool .
When you are accessing these menus, the authentication dialog appears on the screen. Type a user name
and password for the printer's administrator by following the prompts displayed in the dialog box.
The default user name is admin , and the default password is left blank (NULL). You can change only the
password in the Set Password page in the Print Server Settings menu. The user name cannot be
changed. See "Set Password " for more information.
Details of Menu Items
"Printer Status "
"Printer Status "
"Printer Events "
"Printer Information "
"Printer Jobs "
"Job List "
"Completed Jobs "
"Printer Settings "
"Printer Settings Report " "Menu Settings "
"Reports "
"Printer Settings"
"System Settings "
"Parallel Settings "
"Network Settings " * 4
"USB Settings " * 4
"PCL Settings "
"PS Settings "* 4
"Secure Settings "
"Copy Defaults "
"Copy Color Balance "
"Copy Settings "
"Scan Defaults "
"Fax Defaults "
"Fax Settings "
"Printer Maintenance "
"Paper Density "
"Adjust BTR "
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
"Adjust Fuser "
"Auto Registration Adjustment "
"Color Registration Adjustments "
"Adjust Altitude "
"Reset Defaults "
"Clear Storage " * 1
"Non-Dell Toner "
"Initialize PrintMeter "
"Clock Settings "
"Web Link Customization "
"Print Server Settings " "Print Server Reports "
"Print Server Setup Page "
"NetWare Setup Page " * 2
"E-Mail Alert Setup Page "
"Print Server Settings "
"Basic Information "
"Port Settings "
"Wireless LAN " * 3
"TCP/IP "
"NetWare "* 2
"SMB "* 2
"AppleTalk " * 3
"E-Mail Alert "
"Bonjour (mDNS) "* 2
"SNMP "
"Scan to PC "
"Other Features "
"Set Password "
"Security "* 3
"IPsec " * 2
"Reset Print Server "
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
"Copy Printer Settings "
"Copy Printer Settings "
"Copy Printer Settings Report "
"Print Volume "
"Print Volume "
"Dell ColorTrack "
"Address Book "
"E-Mail Address "
"Server Address - Top Page "
"Phone Book "
"Tray Settings "
"Tray 1 Paper Type "
"Tray 1 Paper Size "
"Tray 1 Custom Size - Y "
"Tray 1 Custom Size - X "
"Tray 2 Paper Type "* 5
"Tray 2 Paper Size "* 5
"Tray 2 Custom Size - Y " * 5
"Tray 2 Custom Size - X " * 5
"MPF Mode "
"Display Popup "
"MPF Paper Type "
"MPF Paper Size "
"MPF Custom Size - Y "
"MPF Custom Size - X "
* 1 This item is only available when the RAM disk is set to on.
* 2 This item is only available when the optional multi-protocol card is installed.
* 3 This item is only available when the optional wireless printer adapter is installed.
* 4 This item is only available with the printer using the PostScript driver.
* 5 This item is only available when the optional 550-sheet paper feeder is installed.
Printer Status
Use the Printer Status menu to check the status of consumables, hardware, and specifications of the
multifunction printer.
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
The following pages are displayed in the Printer Status menu.
Printer Status
Purpose:
To check the status of remaining consumables and trays.
Values:
Cyan Cartridge Level
Magenta Cartridge Level
Yellow Cartridge Level
Displays the percent of toner remaining in each print cartridge. When a
cartridge is empty, a message appears. The text Print Cartridge is
linked to the Dell Printer Supplies website.
Black Cartridge Level
Consumables Status n%
Indicates the toner remaining in each print cartridge as %. "n" is a
number.
Paper Trays
Indicates that there is some paper in the tray but the quantity is
unknown.
Status OK
Add
Paper
Output Tray
Cover
Indicates that there is no paper in the tray.
Capacity
Displays the maximum capacity of the paper tray.
Size
Displays the size of paper in the tray.
Status OK
Indicates that the tray is available.
Capacity
Displays the maximum capacity of the paper tray.
Status Closed
Indicates that the cover is closed.
Open
Indicates that the cover is open.
Printer Type
Displays the type of printing for the multifunction printer. Color Laser
is displayed normally.
Printing Speed
Displays the printing speed for the multifunction printer.
Printer Events
Purpose:
When printer faults occur such as running out of paper or running out of print cartridge , the details of all
alerts or indications of faults are displayed in the Printer Events page.
Values:
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Location Displays the location where the printer fault occurred.
Details
Displays the details of the printer fault.
Printer Information
Purpose:
To verify the printer details such as hardware configuration and software version. This page can also be
displayed by clicking Printer Information in the Left Frame.
Values:
Dell Service Tag Number
Displays Dell's service tag number.
Asset Tag Number
Displays the printer's asset tag number.
Printer Serial Number
Displays the printer's serial number.
Memory Capacity
Displays the memory capacity.
Processor Speed
Displays the processing speed.
Printer Revision Levels Firmware Version
Displays the revision date (revision level).
Network Firmware Version Displays the revision date (revision level).
Printer Jobs
The Printer Jobs menu contains information on the Job List and Completed Jobs pages. These pages
show the details of the status regarding each protocol or the print jobs.
Job List
Purpose:
To confirm the print jobs that are being processed. Click the Refresh button to update the screen.
Values:
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
ID
Displays the job id.
Job Name
Displays the file name of the job being printed.
Owner
Displays the job owner's name.
Host Name
Displays the name of the host computer.
Job Status
Displays the status of the job being printed.
Job Type
Displays the type of the job.
Host I/F
Displays the status of the host interface.
Job Submitted Time Displays the date the print job was submitted.
Completed Jobs
Purpose:
To check the completed print jobs. Up to the last 22 print jobs are displayed. Click the Refresh button to
update the screen.
Values:
Id
Displays the job id.
Job Name
Displays the file name of the completed print job.
Owner
Displays the job owner's name.
Host Name
Displays the name of the host computer.
Output Result
Displays the status of completed print jobs.
Job Type
Displays the type of the job.
Impression Number Displays the number of pages in the print job.
No. of Sheets
Displays the number of sheets in the print job.
Host I/F
Displays the status of the host interface.
Job Submitted Time Displays the date the print job was submitted.
Printer Settings
Use the Printer Settings menu to display the printer settings report and to configure printer settings.
The following tabbed pages are displayed at the top of the Right Frame.
Printer Settings Report
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
The Printer Settings Report tab includes the Menu Settings and Reports pages.
Menu Settings
Purpose:
To display the current settings of the operator panel menus.
Values:
System
Settings
Power Saver
Mode2
Displays the status for the power saver mode 2.
Power Saver
Timer Mode 1
Displays the amount of time before the multifunction printer enters
the power saver timer mode 1 after it finishes a print job.
Power Saver
Timer Mode 2
Displays the amount of time before the multifunction printer enters
the power saver timer mode 2 after it finishes a print job.
Auto Reset
Displays the amount of time before the printer is reset.
Panel Select
Tone
Displays the selected tone for the panel.
Panel Alert Tone Displays the alert tone for the panel.
Machine Ready
Tone
Displays the tone when the machine becomes ready.
Copy Job Tone
Displays the tone when copying starts.
Non-Copy Job
Tone
Displays the tone when copying is complete.
Fault Tone
Displays the tone when an error occurs.
Alert Tone
Displays whether the multifunction printer sounds an alarm when an
error occurs.
Out of Paper
Tone
Displays the tone when the paper runs out.
Low Toner Tone
Displays the tone when the toner is low.
Auto Clear Alert
Tone
Displays the tone when the jam is cleared.
Base Tone
Displays the base tone.
All Tones
Displays all tones.
Time-Out
Displays specify the amount of time the multifunction printer waits
to receive additional bytes of data from the computer.
Panel Language
Displays the language of the text on the operator panel screen.
Auto Log Print
Displays whether the printer outputs logs automatically.
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Print ID
Displays a location where the user ID is printed.
Print Text
Displays whether the multifunction printer outputs PDL (Page
Description Language) data, which is not supported by the
multifunction printer, as text when the multifunction printer receives
it
Banner Sheet
Insert Position
Displays the position of banner sheet.
Banner Sheet
Specify Tray
Displays the tray in which the banner sheet is loaded.
RAM Disk
Displays whether to allocate memory to the RAM disk file system for
the Secure Print and Proof Print features.
This item is only available when the 256 MB, or higher, optional
memory card is installed.
Substitute Tray
Displays whether or not to use another size paper when the paper
that is loaded in the specified tray does not match the paper size
settings for the current job.
mm/inch
Displays the measurement unit on the operator panel screen.
Fax Activity
Displays the status for printing the fax activity.
Fax Transmit
Displays the status for printing the fax transmission.
Fax Broadcast
Displays the status for printing the fax broadcast.
Protocol Monitor Displays the status for printing the protocol monitor.
Parallel
Settings
ECP
Displays the ECP (Extended Capability Port) communication mode of
the parallel interface.
Adobe Protocol
Displays PostScript communication protocol for each interface.
Network
Settings
Adobe Protocol
Displays PostScript communication protocol for each interface.
USB Settings
Adobe Protocol
Displays PostScript communication protocol for each interface.
PCL Settings
Paper Tray
Displays the input tray.
Paper Size
Displays the default paper size.
Custom Size - Y
Displays the length of paper.
Custom Size - X
Displays the width of paper.
Orientation
Displays how text and graphics are oriented on the page.
2 Sided
Displays whether to do duplexing as the default for all print jobs.
This item is only available when the optional duplexer is installed.
Font
Displays the default font from the registered fonts in the
multifunction printer.
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
PS Settings
Symbol Set
Displays a symbol set for a specified font.
Font Size
Displays the font size for scalable typographic fonts.
Font Pitch
Displays the font pitch for scalable monospaced fonts.
Form Line
Displays the number of characters in a line.
Quantity
Displays the number of copies you want for the printer default value.
Image
Enhancement
Displays whether to perform the image enhancement feature.
Hex Dump
Displays whether the Hex Dump feature is on or off.
Draft Mode
Displays whether to print in the draft mode.
Line
Termination
Displays whether to set the line termination.
Default Color
Displays the color mode setting.
PS Error Report
Displays whether the multifunction printer outputs error contents for
a PS (PostScript) error.
PS Job Time-Out Displays the execution time for one PostScript job.
Secure
Settings
Copy Defaults
Paper Select
Mode
Displays the tray that is selected in the PostScript printing.
Panel Lock Set
Displays whether or not to lock Admin menu with a password.
Copy/Scan/Fax
Set
Displays whether or not to lock Copy , Scan , or Fax menus with a
password.
Secure Receive
Set
Displays whether or not to require the password for printing
received fax documents.
Color
Prints in the Color or Black&White mode.
Input Tray
The paper is fed from the selected tray.
Reduce/Enlarge
Enlarges or reduces the size of a copied image.
Custom
Reduce/Enlarge
Reduces or enlarges the image to the custom size (25-400%) if
Reduce/Enlarge is set to Custom.
Original Type
Uses for documents with both text or photo/gray tones.
Lighter/Darker
Works with light print or dark print.
Sharpness
Makes the copy sharper or softer than the original.
Color Saturation
Adjusts the amount of color to make the colors deeper or lighter
than the original.
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Copy Color
Balance
Auto Exposure
Adjusts the overall brightness to make the copy overexposed than
the original.
Auto Exposure
Level
Displays the level of the overall brightness.
Yellow Low
Dens.
Displays the yellow low density.
Yellow Medium
Dens.
Displays the yellow medium density.
Yellow High
Dens.
Displays the yellow high density.
Magenta Low
Dens.
Displays the magenta low density.
Magenta
Medium Dens.
Displays the magenta medium density.
Magenta High
Dens.
Displays the magenta high density.
Cyan Low Dens.
Displays the cyan low density.
Cyan Medium
Dens.
Displays the cyan medium density.
Cyan High Dens.
Displays the cyan high density.
Black Low Dens.
Displays the black low density.
Black Medium
Dens.
Displays the black medium density.
Black High Dens. Displays the black high density.
Copy Settings
Auto Fit
2Sided *2
On
Fits the image on the paper currently loaded.
Off*
Does not fit the image on the paper currently
loaded.
1->1Sided
Does not print a 2-sided original document
onto one sheet of paper.
LongEdgeBinding
Uses for long-edge binding when you perform
duplex printing.
ShortEdgeBinding Uses for short-edge binding when you perform
duplex printing.
Multiple-Up
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Off*
Does not perform multiple-up printing.
Auto
Automatically reduces the original pages to fit
onto one sheet of paper.
Collated* 3
Poster
Poster Docu.
Size
ID Copy
Prints the original pages onto one sheet of
paper in the original size.
Manual
Prints the original pages onto the one sheet of
paper in the size specified in Reduce/Enlarge.
Uncollated
Does not sort the copy job.
Collated
Sorts the copy job.
Off*
Does not print an image onto several sheets of
paper.
2x2
Prints an image onto 4 sheets of paper (2 by
2).
3x3
Prints an image onto 9 sheets of paper (3 by
3).
4x4
Prints an image onto 16 sheets of paper (4 by
4).
A4
Displays the size of the divided sheets.
Letter*
B5
A5
Image Repeat
Margin
Scan Defaults
Off*
Does not print multiple image copies from the
original document on a single page.
On
Prints multiple image copies from the original
document on a single page.
Off*
Does not specify the margin of the copy.
On
Specifies the margin of the copy.
Margin
Top/Bottom
4-50 mm (0.2-2.0 Displays the size of the top and bottom
inch)
margins. The default is 5 mm.
Margin
Left/Right
4-50 mm (0.2-2.0 Displays the size of the right and left margins.
inch)
The default is 5 mm.
Margin Middle
0-50 mm (0.0-2.0 Displays the size of the middle margin. The
inch)
default is 10 mm.
Send to Client
Server
Stores the scanned image on the server by
using the FTP (File Transfer Protocol) protocol.
Computer*
Stores the scanned image on the computer by
using the SMB (Server Message Block)
protocol.
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Network Port * 4
File Format
Color
Resolution
Original Type
Document Size
Lighter/Darker
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Wired*
Stores data via the wired connection.
Wireless
Stores data via the wireless connection.
PDF*
Saves the scanned copy in PDF.
MultiPageTIFF
Saves the scanned copy in MultiPageTIFF.
TIFF
Saves the scanned copy in TIFF.
JPEG
Saves the scanned copy in JPEG.
MP TIFF
NonComp *3
Saves the scanned copy in MP TIFF NonComp.
TIFF NonComp * 3
Saves the scanned copy in TIFF NonComp.
Color*
Prints in the color mode.
Black&White
Prints in the black and white mode.
150*
Scans an image in 150 dpi.
300
Scans an image in 300 dpi.
400
Scans an image in 400 dpi.
600
Scans an image in 600 dpi.
Text&Photo
Uses for documents with both text and
photo/gray tones.
Photo
Uses for documents with photo or gray tones.
Text
Uses for documents with text.
A4
Sets the document size in A4.
Letter
Sets the document size in Letter.
B5
Sets the document size in B5.
A5
Sets the document size in A5.
Executive
Sets the document size in Executive.
8.5x13" * 5
Sets the document size in 8.5"x13".
Legal * 5
Sets the document size in Legal.
Normal*
Works well with standard typed or printed
documents.
Darker1
Works well with light print or faint pencil
markings.
Darker2
Darker3
Lighter3
Works well with dark print.
Lighter2
Lighter1
Sharpness
Softer
Adjusts sharpness of color to make the copy
softer than the original.
Normal*
Does not adjust sharpness of color to make
the copy sharper or softer than the original.
Sharper
Adjusts sharpness of color to make the copy
sharper than the original.
Normal*
Does not adjust the amount of color in a
specified hue to make the copy sharper or
softer than the original.
Higher
Adjusts the amount of color in a specified hue
to make the copy sharper than the original.
Lower
Adjusts the amount of color in a specified hue
to make the copy softer than the original.
Auto Exposure
On
Adjusts the overall brightness to make the
copy overexposed than the original.
Auto Exposure
Level
Normal*
Displays the level of the overall brightness in
Normal.
Higher(1)
Displays the level of the overall brightness in
Higher(1).
Higher(2)
Displays the level of the overall brightness in
Higher(2).
TIFF V6*
Sets the file in the TIFF V6 format.
TTN2
Sets the file in the TTN2 format.
Lower
Compresses an image in Lower.
Normal*
Compresses an image in Normal.
Higher
Compresses an image in Higher.
Max E-Mail Size
50-16384
Sets a maximum volume of e-mail data. The
default is 2048 bytes.
Resolution
Standard*
For documents with normal sized characters.
Contrast
TIFF File Format
Image
Compression
Fax Defaults
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
*3
Original Type
Lighter/Darker
Fine
For documents containing small characters or
thin lines or documents printed using a dotmatrix printer.
SuperFine
For documents containing extremely fine
detail. The super fine mode is enabled only if
the remote printer also supports the Super
Fine resolution.
Text&Photo
Uses for documents with both text and
photo/gray tones.
Photo
Uses for documents with photo or gray tones.
Text*
Uses for documents with text.
Normal*
Works well with standard typed or printed
documents.
Darker1
Works well with light print or faint pencil
markings.
Darker2
Darker3
Lighter3
Works well with dark print.
Lighter2
Lighter1
Fax Settings
Delayed Start
Saves scanned documents for transmission at a specified time (023:59) in order to take advantage of lower long distance rates. The
default is 21:00.
Interval Timer
Specifies the interval time (3-255 minutes) of the resend attempts.
The default is 8min.
Number of
Redial
Specifies the number of redial attempts, 0-9. If you enter 0, the
multifunction printer will not redial. The default is 3.
Interval of
Redial
Automatically redials a remote fax machine if it was busy. Intervals
from 1-15 minutes can be entered. The default is 1min.
Answer Select
Selects the default fax receiving mode.
· TEL Mode
· FAX Mode (automatic receive mode)
· TEL/FAX Mode*
· Ans/FAX Mode
· DRPD (Distinctive Ring. Pattern Detection) Mode (DRPD is a service
provided by some telephone companies.)
Auto Answer
Fax
Answers an incoming call and automatically goes into the receive
mode in 0-255 seconds. The default is 1sec.
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Auto Answer
TEL/FAX
Shares one telephone line with an external telephone in 0-255
seconds. The default is 6sec.
Auto Answer
Ans/FAX
Shares one telephone line with an answering machine in 0-255
seconds. The default is 48sec.
Line Monitor
off
Turns off the volume for the line monitor.
Min
Specifies the volume in Min for the incoming
faxes.
Middle*
Specifies the volume in Middle for the
incoming faxes.
Max
Specifies the volume in Max for the incoming
faxes.
None
Turns off the volume for the incoming faxes.
Min
Specifies the volume in Min for the incoming
faxes.
Middle
Specifies the volume in Middle for the
incoming faxes.
Max*
Specifies the volume in Max for the incoming
faxes.
PSTN*
Sets PSTN (Public Switched Telephone
Network) as the line type.
PBX
Sets PBX (Private Branch Exchange) as the line
type.
PB*
Sets PB (Push Button) as the dial type.
DP (10PPS)
Sets "DP (10PPS)" (Dial Pulse, 10 Pulse Per
Second) as the dial type.
DP (20PPS)
Sets "DP (20PPS)" (Dial Pulse, 20 Pulse Per
Second) as the dial type.
On
Only accepts faxes from numbers registered in
the PhoneBook. Incoming faxes from numbers
whose G3ID is not registered correctly are not
accepted even if the number is registered in
the PhoneBook.
Off*
Accepts faxes from numbers that are not
registered in the PhoneBook.
On
Receives a fax by pressing the remote receive
code on the external telephone.
Off*
Does not receive a fax by pressing the remote
receive code on the external telephone.
Ring Tone
Volume
Line Type
Dialing Type
DM Prevention
Remote Receive
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Remote Receive
Tone
Specifies the tone in 2-digit numbers (00-99) when Remote Receive
is set to On.
Duplex Print
On
Uses duplex printing when you receive a fax.
Off*
Does not use duplex printing when you receive
a fax.
On*
Creates cover pages for the faxes.
Off
Does not create cover pages for the faxes.
Send Header
Send Header
Name
Includes the header name in the cover pages for the faxes.
G3ID
Contains your telephone number in the cover pages for the faxes.
Local Name
Contains the local name in the cover pages for the faxes.
DRPD Pattern
Patternn
Sets the DRPD pattern from Pattern1 to
Pattern5. DRPD is a service provided by some
telephone companies.
Forwarding
Settings
Trans. At Error
Forwards the incoming faxes when an error
occurs.
Trans. Always.
Always forwards the incoming faxes.
Not Trans.*
Does not forward the incoming faxes.
Forward
Displays the Forward Settings number.
Settings Number
Forward Set
Print
Prefix Dial
On
Prints the ongoing faxes when you can set the
multifunction printer to forward the faxes.
Off*
Does not prints the ongoing faxes when you
can set the multifunction printer to forward the
faxes.
On
Adds the prefix number when you send a
fax.Prefix Dial is only available when PBX is set
as the line type.
Off
Does not add the prefix number when you
send a fax.
Prefix Dial
Number
Sets a prefix dial number up to five digits.
Discard Size
On
Discards any excess document at the bottom
of the page.
Off*
Does not discard any excess document at the
bottom of the page.
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Color Fax
Extel Hook
Thresh
Fwd. Error Print
Country*
Paper Density
6
Plain
Label
Adjust BTR
Auto Reduction
Automatically reduces the size if there is any
excess document at the bottom of the page.
On
Allows color faxes to be sent and received
(select color or black and white when sending
a fax).
Off*
Faxes are sent and received in black and white
only.
Lower
Sets Lower in the threshold value.
Normal*
Sets Normal in the threshold value.
Higher
Sets Higher in the threshold value.
On*
Prints documents that failed to transfer when
Forward Set Print is set to Off.
Off
Does not print documents that failed to
transfer when Forward Set Print is set to Off.
United States
Sets the country for the fax.
Light
Displays the paper density in Light for the
plain paper.
Normal*
Displays the paper density in Normal for the
plain paper.
Light*
Displays the paper density in Light for the
label.
Normal
Displays the paper density in Normal for the
label.
Plain
Displays the voltage settings of the transfer roller (-3-3) for plain
paper. The default is 0.
Plain Thick
Displays the voltage settings of the transfer roller (-3-3) for thick
plain paper. The default is 0.
Transparency
Displays the voltage settings of the transfer roller (-3-3) for
transparencies. The default is 0.
Covers
Displays the voltage settings of the transfer roller (-3-3) for cover
paper. The default is 0.
Covers Thick
Displays the voltage settings of the transfer roller (-3-3) for thick
cover paper. The default is 0.
Label
Displays the voltage settings of the transfer roller (-3-3) for labels.
The default is 0.
Coated
Displays the voltage settings of the transfer roller (-3-3) for coated
paper. The default is 0.
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Coated Thick
Displays the voltage settings of the transfer roller (-3-3) for thick
coated paper. The default is 0.
Envelope
Displays the voltage settings of the transfer roller (-3-3) for
envelopes. The default is 0.
Plain
Displays the temperature settings of the fuser unit (-2-2) for plain
paper. The default is 0.
Plain Thick
Displays the temperature settings of the fuser unit (-2-2) for thick
plain paper. The default is 0.
Transparency
Displays the temperature settings of the fuser unit (-2-2) for
transparencies. The default is 0.
Covers
Displays the temperature settings of the fuser unit (-2-2) for cover
paper. The default is 0.
Covers Thick
Displays the temperature settings of the fuser unit (-2-2) for thick
cover paper. The default is 0.
Label
Displays the temperature settings of the fuser unit (-2-2) for labels.
The default is 0.
Coated
Displays the temperature settings of the fuser unit (-2-2) for coated
paper. The default is 0.
Coated Thick
Displays the temperature settings of the fuser unit (-2-2) for thick
coated paper. The default is 0.
Envelope
Displays the temperature settings of the fuser unit (-2-2) for
envelopes. The default is 0.
Auto
Registration
Adjustment
Auto Registration
Adjustment
Displays the Displays whether to adjust the registration
automatically.
Adjust
Altitude
Adjust Altitude
Displays whether to adjust the height of the installation location of
the printer.
Non-Dell
Toner
Non-Dell Toner
Displays whether to use a refilled print cartridge.
Clock Settings
Date Format
Specifies the date format.
Time Format
Specifies the time format in 24H or 12H.
Time Zone
Specifies the time zone.
Set Date
Sets the date.
Set Time
Sets the time.
Select Reorder
URL
Regular*
Adjust Fuser
Web Link
Customization
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Displays the URL
(http://accessories.us.dell.com/sna ) that
Order Supplies at links to in the left frame.
Premier
Tray Settings
Displays the URL (http://premier.dell.com )
that Order Supplies at links to in the left
frame.
Tray 1 Paper
Type
Displays the type of paper loaded in the standard 250-sheet tray
Tray 1 Paper
Size
Displays the size of paper loaded in the standard 250-sheet tray
Tray 1 Custom
Size - Y
Displays the length of paper loaded in the standard 250-sheet tray.
Tray 1 Custom
Size - X
Displays the width of paper loaded in the standard 250-sheet tray.
Tray 2 Paper
Type
Displays the type of paper loaded in the optional 550-sheet paper
feeder.
Tray 2 Paper
Size
Displays the size of paper loaded in the optional 550-sheet paper
feeder.
Tray 2 Custom
Size - Y
Displays the length of paper loaded in the optional feeder.
Tray 2 Custom
Size - X
Displays the width of paper loaded in the optional feeder.
MPF Mode
Displays the paper size and type when paper is loaded in the
multipurpose feeder.
Display Popup
Displays a popup menu when paper is loaded in the multipurpose
feeder.
MPF Paper Type
Displays the type of paper loaded in the multipurpose feeder.
MPF Paper Size
Displays the size of paper loaded in the multipurpose feeder.
MPF Custom
Size - Y
Displays the length of paper loaded in the multipurpose feeder.
MPF Custom
Size - X
Displays the width of paper loaded in the multipurpose feeder.
* 1 All changes made on the Printer Settings , Copy Printer Settings , Dell ColorTrack , and Tray
Settings menus on the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool are discarded if they are made while the
multifunction printer in power saver mode. Exit the mode to change the settings.
* 2 This item is only available when the optional duplexer is installed.
* 3 This item is only available when the optional memory card is set to on.
* 4 This item is only available when the optional wireless printer adapter is installed.
* 5 You can only use the Auto Document Feeder (ADF) to read the 8.5"x13" and Legal documents.
* 6 click Restart printer to apply new settings for change to take effect.
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Reports
Purpose:
To print various types of reports and lists.
Values:
System Settings
Click the Start button to print the system settings page.
Panel Settings
Click the Start button to print the panel settings page.
PCL Fonts List
Click the Start button to print the PCL (Hewlett-Packard Printer Control Language)
fonts list.
PCL Macro List
Click the Start button to print the PCL Macro list.
Job History
Click the Start button to print the job history report.
Error History
Click the Start button to print the error history report.
PS Fonts List
Click the Start button to print the PS fonts list.
Print Meter
Click the Start button to print the print volume report.
Color Test Page
Click the Start button to print the color test page.
Stored
Documents
Click the Start button to print the stored documents list.
This item is only available when the Ram disk is set to on.
Speed Dial
Click the Start button to print the Speed Dial report.
Protocol Monitor
Click the Start button to print the Protocol Monitor report.
Address Book
Click the Start button to print the Address Book report.
Server Address
Click the Start button to print the server address report.
Fax Activity
Click the Start button to print the fax activity report.
Fax Pending
Click the Start button to print the pending faxes report.
Printer Settings
The Printer Settings tab includes System Settings , Parallel Settings , Network Settings, USB
Settings , PCL Settings , PS Settings , and Secure Settings pages.
System Settings
Purpose:
To configure the basic printer settings.
Values:
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Power Saver
Mode2
Displays the status for the power saver mode 2.
Power Saver
Timer Mode 1
Displays the amount of time before the multifunction printer enters the power saver
timer mode 1 after it finishes a print job.
Power Saver
Timer Mode 2
Displays the amount of time before the multifunction printer enters the power saver
timer mode 2 after it finishes a print job.
Auto Reset
Displays the amount of time before the setting is reset automatically.
Panel Select Tone
Displays the selected tone for the panel.
Panel Alert Tone
Displays the alert tone for the panel.
Machine Ready
Tone
Displays the tone when the machine becomes ready.
Copy Job Tone
Displays the tone when copying starts.
Non-Copy Job
Tone
Displays the tone when copying is complete.
Fault Tone
Displays the tone when an error occurs.
Alert Tone
Specifies whether the multifunction printer sounds an alarm when an error occurs.
Out of Paper Tone
Displays the tone when the paper runs out.
Low Toner Tone
Displays the tone when the toner is low.
Auto Clear Alert
Tone
Displays the tone when the jam is cleared.
Base Tone
Displays the base tone.
All Tones
Displays all types of tones.
Time-Out
Specifies the amount of time the multifunction printer waits to receive additional
bytes of data from the computer. When this timeout expires, the print job is
canceled.
Panel Language
Determines the language of the text on the operator panel screen.
Auto Log Print
Specifies whether the multifunction printer outputs logs automatically.
Print ID
Specifies a location where the user ID is printed.
Print Text
Specifies whether the multifunction printer outputs PDL data, which is not supported
by the multifunction printer, as text when the multifunction printer receives it.
Banner Sheet
Insert Position
Specifies the position of banner sheet.
Banner Sheet
Specify Tray
Specifies the tray in which the banner sheet is loaded.
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
RAM Disk
Specifies whether to allocate memory to the RAM disk file system for the Secure
Print and Store Print features.
This item is only available when the 256 MB, or higher, optional memory card is
installed.
Substitute Tray
Specifies whether or not to use another size paper when the paper that is loaded in
the specified tray does not match the paper size settings for the current job.
mm/inch
Specifies the measurement unit on the operator panel screen as either mm or
inches.
Fax Activity
Displays the status for printing the fax activity.
Fax Transmit
Displays the status for printing the fax transmission.
Fax Broadcast
Displays the status for printing the fax broadcast.
Protocol Monitor
Displays the status for printing the protocol monitor.
Parallel Settings
Purpose:
To configure the parallel interface.
Values:
ECP
Specifies the ECP communication mode of the parallel interface.
Adobe Protocol Specifies PostScript communication protocol for each interface.
Network Settings
Purpose:
To Specify the PostScript communication protocol for this multifunction printer.
Values:
Adobe Protocol Specifies PostScript communication protocol for each interface.
USB Settings
Purpose:
To change printer settings affecting a USB (Universal Serial Bus) port.
Values:
Adobe Protocol Specifies PostScript communication protocol for each interface.
PCL Settings
Purpose:
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
To change printer settings that only affect jobs using the PCL emulation printer language.
Values:
Paper Tray
Specifies the input tray.
Paper Size
Specifies the default paper size.
Custom Size - Y
Specifies the length of paper. The available range is from 98 mm (3.89 in.) to 355 mm
(13.98 in.).
Custom Size - X
Specifies the width of paper. The available range is from 77 mm (3.03 in.) to 220 mm
(8.66 in.).
Orientation
Specifies how text and graphics are oriented on the page.
2 Sided
Sets duplexing as the default for all print jobs. This item is only available when the
optional duplexer is installed.
Font
Specifies the default font from the registered fonts in the multifunction printer.
Symbol Set
Specifies a symbol set for a specified font.
Font Size
Specifies the font size for scalable typographic fonts.
Font Pitch
Specifies the font pitch for scalable monospaced fonts.
Form Line
Specifies the number of characters in a line.
Quantity
Sets the number of copies you want for the printer default value.
Image
Enhancement
Specifies whether to perform the image enhancement feature.
Hex Dump
Specifies whether to help isolate the source of a print job problem. With Hex Dump
selected, all data sent to the multifunction printer is printed in hexadecimal and
character representation. Control codes are not executed.
Draft Mode
Specifies whether to print in the draft mode.
Line
Termination
Sets the line termination.
Default Color
Specifies the color mode to Color or Black . This setting is used when the color
printing mode setting is not specified for the print job that is sent to the multifunction
printer.
PS Settings
Purpose:
To change printer settings that only affect jobs using the PostScript emulation printer language.
Values:
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
PS Error Report
Specifies whether the multifunction printer outputs error contents for a PostScript
error.
PS Job Time-Out
Specifies the execution time for one PostScript job.
Paper Select
Mode
Specifies the way to select the tray for the PostScript mode.
Secure Settings
Purpose:
To set or change the password to limit access to the menus from the operator panel.
Set the password of the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool from Set Password in Print Server
Settings .
Values:
Panel Lock
Copy/Scan/Fax
Lock
Secure Receive
Panel Lock Set
Specifies whether to limit access to the Admin menu.
New Password
Sets a password to limit access to the menus.
Re-enter
Password
Type the new password again to confirm.
Copy/Scan/Fax
Set
Specifies whether to limit access to the Copy , Scan ,
and Fax menus.
New Password
Sets a password to limit access to the menus.
Re-enter
Password
Type the new password again to confirm.
Secure Receive
Set
Specifies whether to limit printing received fax
documents.
New Password
Sets a password for receiving faxes.
Re-enter
Password
Type the new password again to confirm.
NOTE: This menu sets a password to lock the operator panel. When changing the password for the
Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool , click Set Password on the left frame and set the password.
Copy Defaults
Purpose:
To create your own default Copy settings.
Values:
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Color
Prints in the Color or Black&White mode.
Input Tray
The paper is fed from the selected tray.
Reduce/Enlarge
Enlarges or reduces the size of a copied image.
Custom Reduce/Enlarge
Reduces or enlarges the image to the custom size (25-400%) if
Reduce/Enlarge is set to Custom.
Original Type
Uses for documents with both text or photo/gray tones.
Lighter/Darker
Works with light print or dark print.
Sharpness
Makes the copy sharper or softer than the original.
Color Saturation
Adjusts the amount of color to make the colors deeper or lighter than the
original.
Auto Exposure
Adjusts the overall brightness to make the copy overexposed than the
original.
Auto Exposure Level
Displays the level of the overall brightness.
* 1 All changes made on the Tray Setting menus on the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool are
discarded if they are made while the multifunction printer in power saver mode. Exit the mode to change
the settings.
Copy Color Balance
Purpose:
To set the Copy color balance.
Values:
Yellow Low Dens.
Displays the yellow low density.
Yellow Medium Dens.
Displays the yellow medium density.
Yellow High Dens.
Displays the yellow high density.
Magenta Low Dens.
Displays the magenta low density.
Magenta Medium Dens. Displays the magenta medium density.
Magenta High Dens.
Displays the magenta high density.
Cyan Low Dens.
Displays the cyan low density.
Cyan Medium Dens.
Displays the cyan medium density.
Cyan High Dens.
Displays the cyan high density.
Black Low Dens.
Displays the black low density.
Black Medium Dens.
Displays the black medium density.
Copy Settings
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Black High Dens.
Displays the black high density.
Copy Settings
Purpose:
To confirm the Copy settings.
Values:
Auto Fit
2Sided* 1
Multiple-Up
Collated* 2
Poster
Poster Docu.
Size
On
Fits the image on the paper currently loaded.
Off*
Does not fit the image on the paper currently loaded.
1->1Sided
Does not print a 2-sided original document onto one sheet of
paper.
LongEdgeBinding
Uses for long-edge binding when you perform duplex
printing.
ShortEdgeBinding
Uses for short-edge binding when you perform duplex
printing.
Off*
Does not perform multiple-up printing.
Auto
Automatically reduces the original pages to fit onto one sheet
of paper.
ID Copy
Prints the original pages onto one sheet of paper in the
original size.
Manual
Prints the original pages onto the one sheet of paper in the
size specified in Reduce/Enlarge.
Uncollated
Does not sort the copy job.
Collated
Sorts the copy job.
Off*
Does not print an image onto several sheets of paper.
2x2
Prints an image onto 4 sheets of paper (2 by 2).
3x3
Prints an image onto 9 sheets of paper (3 by 3).
4x4
Prints an image onto 16 sheets of paper (4 by 4).
A4
Displays the size of the divided sheets.
Letter*
B5
A5
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Image Repeat
Off*
Does not print multiple image copies from the original
document on a single page.
On
Prints multiple image copies from the original document on a
single page.
Off*
Does not specify the margin of the copy.
On
Specifies the margin of the copy.
Margin
Top/Bottom
4-50 mm (0.2-2.0
inch)
Displays the size of the top and bottom margins.
Margin
Left/Right
4-50 mm (0.2-2.0
inch)
Displays the size of the right and left margins.
Margin Middle
0-50 mm (0.0-2.0
inch)
Displays the size of the middle margin.
Margin
* 1 This item is only available when the optional duplexer is installed.
* 2 This item is only available when the optional memory card is set to on.
Scan Defaults
Purpose:
To create your own default Scan settings.
Values:
Send to Client
Network Port
File Format
Server
Stores the scanned image on the server by using the FTP
protocol.
Computer*
Stores the scanned image on the computer by using the SMB
protocol.
Wired
Stores data via the wired connection.
Wireless
Stores data via the wireless connection.
PDF*
Saves the scanned copy in PDF.
Multi Page TIFF
Saves the scanned copy in MultiPageTIFF.
TIFF
Saves the scanned copy in TIFF.
JPEG
Saves the scanned copy in JPEG.
MP TIFF
NonComp
Saves the scanned copy in MP TIFF NonComp.
TIFF NonComp
Saves the scanned copy in TIFF NonComp.
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Color
Resolution
Original Type
Document Size
Color*
Prints in the color mode.
Black&White
Prints in the black and white mode.
150*
Scans an image in 150 dpi.
300
Scans an image in 300 dpi.
400
Scans an image in 400 dpi.
600
Scans an image in 600 dpi.
Text&Photo*
Uses for documents with both text and photo/gray tones.
Photo
Uses for documents with photo or gray tones.
Text
Uses for documents with text.
A4
Sets the document size in A4.
Letter
Sets the document size in Letter.
B5
Sets the document size in B5.
A5
Sets the document size in A5.
Executive
Sets the document size in Executive.
8.5"x13"*
Legal*
Lighter/Darker
1
1
Sets the document size in 8.5"x13".
Sets the document size in Legal.
Normal*
Works well with standard typed or printed documents.
Darker1
Works well with light print or faint pencil markings.
Darker2
Darker3
Lighter3
Works well with dark print.
Lighter2
Lighter1
Sharpness
Contrast
Softer
Adjusts sharpness of color to make the copy softer than the
original.
Normal*
Does not adjust sharpness of color to make the copy sharper or
softer than the original.
Sharper
Adjusts sharpness of color to make the copy sharper than the
original.
Normal*
Does not adjust the amount of color in a specified hue to make
the copy sharper or softer than the original.
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Higher
Adjusts the amount of color in a specified hue to make the copy
sharper than the original.
Lower
Adjusts the amount of color in a specified hue to make the copy
softer than the original.
Auto Exposure
On
Adjusts the overall brightness to make the copy overexposed than
the original.
Auto Exposure
Level
Normal*
Displays the level of the overall brightness in Normal.
Higher(1)
Displays the level of the overall brightness in Higher(1).
Higher(2)
Displays the level of the overall brightness in Higher(2).
TIFF V6*
Sets the file in the TIFF V6 format.
TTN2
Sets the file in the TTN2 format.
Lower
Compresses an image in Lower.
Normal*
Compresses an image in Normal.
Higher
Compresses an image in Higher.
50-16384
Sets a maximum volume of e-mail data. The default is 2048 K
bytes.
TIFF File Format
Image
Compression
Max E-Mail Size
* 1 You can only use the Auto Document Feeder (ADF) to read the 8.5"x13" and Legal documents.
Fax Defaults
Purpose:
To create your own default Fax settings.
Values:
Resolution
Original Type
Standard*
For documents with normal sized characters.
Fine
For documents containing small characters or thin lines or documents
printed using a dot-matrix printer.
SuperFine
For documents containing extremely fine detail. The super fine mode is
enabled only if the remote printer also supports the Super Fine
resolution.
Text&Photo Uses for documents with both text and photo/gray tones.
Photo
Uses for documents with photo or gray tones.
Text*
Uses for documents with text.
Lighter/Darker Normal*
Works well with standard typed or printed documents.
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Darker1
Works well with light print or faint pencil markings.
Darker2
Darker3
Lighter3
Works well with dark print.
Lighter2
Lighter1
Delayed Start
21:00*
Saves scanned documents for transmission at a specified time in order to
take advantage of lower long distance rates.
00:0023:59
Fax Settings
Purpose:
To confirm the Fax settings.
Values:
Interval Timer
Specifies the interval time (3-255 minutes) of the resend attempts.
Number of Redial
Specifies the number of redial attempts, 0-9. If you enter 0, the multifunction
printer will not redial. The default is 3.
Interval of Redial
Automatically redials a remote fax machine if it was busy. Intervals from 1-15
minutes can be entered.
Answer Select
You can select the default fax receiving mode.
· TEL Mode
· FAX Mode (automatic receive mode)
· TEL/FAX Mode
· Ans/FAX Mode
· DRPD (Distinctive Ring. Pattern Detection) Mode (DRPD is a service provided by
some telephone companies.)
Auto Answer Fax
Answers an incoming call and automatically goes into the receive mode.
Auto Answer
TEL/FAX
Shares one telephone line with an external telephone.
Auto Answer
Ans/FAX
Shares one telephone line with an answering machine.
Line Monitor
Specifies the volume of the external telephone (line monitor).
Ring Tone Volume
Specifies the volume for the incoming faxes.
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Line_Type
PSTN
Sets PSTN as the line type.
PBX
Sets PBX as the line type.
PB
Sets PB as the dial type.
DP (10PPS)
Sets DP (10PPS (Pulse Per Seconds)) as the dial type.
DP (20PPS)
Sets DP (20PPS) as the dial type.
DM Prevention
On
Does not accept faxes including junk fax sent from remote stations.
Remote Receive
On
Receives a fax by pressing the remote receive code on the external
telephone.
Remote Receive
Tone
Specifies the tone when Remote Receive is set to On.
Duplex Print* 1
On
Uses duplex printing when you receive a fax.
Send Header
On
Creates cover pages for the faxes.
Send Header Name
Includes the header name in the cover pages for the faxes.
G3ID
Contains your telephone number in the cover pages for the faxes.
Local Name
Contains the local name in the cover pages for the faxes.
DRPD Pattern
Patternn
Sets the DRPD pattern from Pattern1 to Pattern5. DRPD is a service
provided by some telephone companies.
Forward Settings
Trans. At
Error*
Forwards the incoming faxes when an error occurs.
Trans.
Always.
Always forwards the incoming faxes.
Not Trans.
Does not forward the incoming faxes.
Dialing Type
Forward Settings
Number
Sets the number of the multifunction printer to forward the incoming faxes.
Forward Set Print
On
Prints the ongoing faxes when you can set the multifunction printer
to forward the faxes.
Off
Does not print the ongoing faxes when you can set the
multifunction printer to forward the faxes.
On
Adds the prefix number when you send a fax.
Off
Does not add the prefix number when you send a fax.
Prefix Dial
Prefix Dial Number
Sets a prefix dial number up to five digits.
Discard Size
On
Discards any excess document at the bottom of the page.
Off*
Does not discard any excess document at the bottom of the page.
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Color Fax
On
Allows color faxes to be sent and received (select color or black and
white when sending a fax).
Off*
Faxes are sent and received in black and white only.
Lower
Sets Lower in the threshold value.
Normal*
Sets Normal in the threshold value.
Higher
Sets Higher in the threshold value.
Fwd. Error Print
On
Prints the documents failed to transfer when Forward Set Print is
set to Off.
Country* 2
United
States
Sets the country for the fax.
Extel Hook Thresh
* 1 This item is only available when the optional duplexer is installed.
* 2 click Restart printer to apply new settings for change to take effect.
Printer Maintenance
The Printer Maintenance tab includes Paper Density , Adjust BTR , Adjust Fuser , Auto Registration
Adjustment , Color Registration Adjustments , Adjust Altitude , Reset Defaults , Clear Storage ,
Non-Dell Toner , Initialize PrintMeter , Clock Settings, and Web Link Customization pages.
Paper Density
Purpose:
To specify the paper density.
Values:
Plain
Light
Normal
Label Light
Normal
Adjust BTR
Purpose:
To specify the reference voltage settings for the transfer roller.
Values:
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Plain
Sets the reference voltage settings for the transfer roller for plain paper.
Plain Thick
Sets the reference voltage settings for the transfer roller for thick plain paper.
Transparency Sets the reference voltage settings for the transfer roller for transparencies.
Covers
Sets the reference voltage settings for the transfer roller for cover paper.
Covers Thick
Sets the reference voltage settings for the transfer roller for thick cover paper.
Label
Sets the reference voltage settings for the transfer roller for labels.
Coated
Sets the reference voltage settings for the transfer roller for coated paper.
Coated Thick
Sets the reference voltage settings for the transfer roller for thick coated paper.
Envelope
Sets the reference voltage settings for the transfer roller for envelopes.
Adjust Fuser
Purpose:
To specify the temperature settings value for the fuser unit.
Values:
Plain
Sets the temperature settings for the fuser unit for plain paper.
Plain Thick
Sets the temperature settings for the fuser unit for thick plain paper.
Transparency Sets the temperature settings for the fuser unit for transparencies.
Covers
Sets the temperature settings for the fuser unit for cover paper.
Covers Thick
Sets the temperature settings for the fuser unit for thick cover paper.
Label
Sets the temperature settings for the fuser unit for labels.
Coated
Sets the temperature settings for the fuser unit for coated paper.
Coated Thick
Sets the temperature settings for the fuser unit for thick coated paper.
Envelope
Sets the temperature settings for the fuser unit for envelopes.
Auto Registration Adjustment
Purpose:
Specifies whether to adjust the color registration automatically.
Values:
Auto Registration Adjustment Specifies whether to adjust the color registration automatically.
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Color Registration Adjustments
Purpose:
To print the color registration chart and to adjust the color registration by using the chart.
This function is required after the multifunction printer is set up or moved.
Values:
Auto Correct
Click Start to adjust color registration automatically.
Color Regi Chart
Click Start to print the color registration chart.
Enter Number Yellow
Specifies the values that are found in the color registration chart.
Magenta
Cyan
Adjust Altitude
Purpose:
To adjust the height of the installation location of the multifunction printer.
Values:
0 meter
Select the value close to the height of the installation location of the multifunction
printer.
1000
meters
2000
meters
3000
meters
Reset Defaults
Purpose:
To initialize the non-volatile memory (NVM). After executing this function and rebooting the multifunction
printer, all the menu parameters are reset to their default values.
Values:
Reset Defaults and restart printer. Click Start to initialize the non-volatile memory (NVM) memory.
Reset Defaults User Section
Clear Storage
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Click Start to initialize the user section.
Purpose:
To clear all files that are stored as Secure and Proof Print in the RAM disk. This item is only available when
the RAM disk is set to on.
Values:
Clear Storage Click Start to clear all files stored in the RAM disk.
Non-Dell Toner
Purpose:
Specifies whether to use the refilled print cartridge or not. When this setting is on, you can use print
cartridges provided by other companies.
Values:
NonDell
Toner
Overrides factory print cartridge setting.
Non-Dell-brand print cartridges may disable some printer features, reduce print quality and
reduce the reliability of your multifunction printer. Dell recommends only new Dell-brand print
cartridges for your multifunction printer. Dell does not provide warranty coverage for problems
caused by using accessories, parts, or components not supplied by Dell.
Initialize PrintMeter
Purpose:
To initialize the print meter of the multifunction printer. Executing this function restarts the multifunction
printer.
Values:
Initialize PrintMeter Click Start to initialize the print meter.
Clock Settings
Purpose:
To specify the clock settings.
Values:
Date Format Specifies the date format.
Time Format Specifies the time format in 24H or 12H.
Time Zone
Specifies the time zone.
Set Date
Sets the date format. The default is mm/dd/yy.
Set Time
Sets the time.
Web Link Customization
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Purpose:
To configure the link used for ordering supplies.
Values:
Select Reorder URL Specifies the URL that Order Supplies at links to in the left frame.
Regular
http://accessories.us.dell.com/sna
Premier
http://premier.dell.com
Print Server Settings
Use the Print Server Settings menu to set the type of printer interface and necessary conditions for
communications.
The following tabbed pages are displayed in the top of the Right Frame.
Print Server Reports
The Print Server Reports tab includes Print Server Setup Page , NetWare Setup Page , and E-Mail
Alert Setup Page .
Print Server Setup Page
Purpose:
To verify the current settings of TCP/IP (Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol) protocol and
printing ports. On this page, you can only verify the settings of items. If you want to change the settings, go
to the pages in the Print Server Settings tab.
Values:
Ethernet *
Wireless
Settings *
3
TCP/IP
1
2,
Ethernet Settings
Displays the current settings of Ethernet transmission rate
and the duplex settings.
Current Ethernet Settings
Displays the current Ethernet settings.
MAC Address
Displays the printer's MAC (Media Access Control Address)
address.
SSID
Displays SSID (Service Set ID) that identifies the network.
Network Type
Displays the network type from either the Ad-Hoc or
Infrastructure mode.
MAC Address
Displays the MAC address of the wireless printer adapter.
Link Channel
Displays the channel number of the connection.
Link Quality
Displays the quality of the connection.
IP Mode
Displays the IP mode.
*
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Settings
Host Name
Displays the host name.
IPv4 IP Address Mode
Displays the IP address mode.
IP Address
Displays the IP address.
Subnet Mask
Displays the subnet mask.
Gateway Address
Displays the gateway address.
IPv6 Use Manual
Address
DNS *3
Displays whether to set the IP address manually.
Manual Address
Displays the IP address.
Stateless Address
1-3
Displays the stateless addresses.
Link Local Address
Displays the link local address.
Manual Gateway
Address
Displays the gateway address.
Auto Configure
Gateway Address
Displays the gateway address.
IPv4 Get DNS Server
Address from DHCP
Current DNS Server
Address
IPv6 Get DNS Server
Address from
DHCPv6-lite
Current DNS Server
Address
Displays whether to automatically get a DNS (Domain
Name System) server address from the DHCP (Dynamic
Host Configuration Protocol) server.
Displays the DNS server address.
Displays whether to automatically get a DNS server
address from the DHCPv6-lite server.
Displays the DNS server address.
DNS Dynamic Update
(IPv4)* 2
Displays the status of the DNS Dynamic Update feature.
DNS Dynamic Update
(IPv6)* 2
Displays the status of the DNS Dynamic Update feature.
Auto Generate Search List Displays whether to automatically generate a search list.
WINS *
3
Search Domain Name
Displays the search domain name.
Time-out
Displays the time-out period.
Priority to IPv6 DNS
Name Resolution
Displays whether to use the DNS Name Resolution feature.
WINS Mode
Displays the setting of how to get the WINS (Windows
Internet Name Service) server address.
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
LPD
Port9100
IPP *
3
WSD *
3
HTTP
FTP
SMB *
3
WINS Primary Server
Displays the primary WINS server address.
WINS Secondary Server
Displays the secondary WINS server address.
Port Status
Displays the port status.
Connection Time-Out
Displays the connection timeout period.
Port Status
Displays the port status.
Port Number
Displays the port number.
Connection Time-Out
Displays the connection timeout period.
Port Status
Displays the IPP (Internet Printing Protocol) port status.
Printer URI
Displays the printer URI (Uniform Resource Identifier).
Connection Time-Out
Displays the connection timeout period.
Port Number
Displays the IPP port number.
Maximum Sessions
Displays the maximum number of connections received
simultaneously by the client.
Port Status
Displays the WSD port status.
Port Number
Displays the WSD port number.
Receive Time-Out
Displays the receive timeout period.
Notification Time-Out
Displays the notification timeout period.
Maximum Number of TTL
Displays the maximum number of TTLs.
Maximum Number of
Notification
Displays the maximum number of notifications.
Port Status
Displays the HTTP (Hyper Text Transfer Protocol) port
status.
Port Number
Displays the HTTP port number.
Simultaneous
Connections
Displays the number of connections received
simultaneously by the client.
Connection Time-Out
Displays the connection timeout period.
Port Status
Displays the port status.
Connection Time-Out
Displays the connection timeout period.
Port Status
Displays the port status.
Host Name
Displays the host name.
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
AppleTalk *
Bonjour
(mDNS) *
3
Workgroup
Displays the workgroup name.
Maximum Sessions
Displays the maximum number of connections received
simultaneously by the client.
Unicode Support
Displays the status of the Unicode Support feature.
Auto Master Mode
Displays the status of the Auto Master Mode feature.
Encrypt Password
Displays the status of the Encrypt Password feature.
Job Time-Out
Displays the timeout period.
Connection Time-Out
Displays the connection timeout period.
Port Status
Displays the port status.
Printer
Displays the printer name used in AppleTalk.
AppleTalk Zone
Displays the AppleTalk zone name.
AppleTalk Type
Displays the AppleTalk type.
Delay Start Time
Specifies the print start time period in second.
Port Status
Displays the port status.
Host Name
Displays the host name.
Printer Name
Displays the printer name.
Port Status
Displays the port status.
Trap Notification 1-4
Displays the status of the Trap Notification feature and
IP address.
Authenticate Error Trap
Displays the status of the Authenticate Error Trap .
FTP Client
Scans data by using the FTP client.
SMB Client
Scans data by using the SMB client.
3
SNMP Agent
Scan to PC
IPsec Settings Protocol
Displays the protocol status.
IKE
Displays to use a preshared key for IKE authentication.
IKE SA Lifetime
Displays the lifetime for IKE SA.
IPsec SA Lifetime
Displays the lifetime for IPsec SA.
DH Group
Displays the DH group.
PFS
Displays the PFS status.
Remote peers IPv4
address
Displays the IP address to connect to.
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Remote peers IPv6
address
Displays the IP address to connect to.
Non IPsec communication Displays the status of the Non IPsec communication
policy
policy feature.
IP Filter
(IPv4) * 4
Access List
Displays the list of IP addresses that are permitted or
denied access to the multifunction printer.
* 1 The Ethernet settings are not displayed when the optional wireless printer adapter is installed.
* 2 An optional wireless printer adapter is required to display the item.
* 3 An optional multi-protocol card is required to display the items.
* 4 This item is only available for LPD or Port9100.
NetWare Setup Page
Purpose:
To verify the current settings of IPX/SPX (Internetwork Packet Exchange/Sequenced Packet Exchange) and
Netware. In this page, you can only verify the settings of items. If you want to change the settings, go to the
pages in the Print Server Settings tab.
Values:
IPX/SPX
Settings
NetWare
Frame Type
Displays the active frame type.
Current Frame
Type
Displays the current frame type.
Network
Address
Displays the IPX/SPX network address.
Port Status
Displays the port status. When NetWare is implemented, the status
of IPX/SPX and TCP/IP is also displayed.
Device Name
Displays the printer name.
Active Mode
Displays the current mode for Active Mode.
Tree Name
Displays the tree name.
Context Name
Displays the context name of the Print Server Object.
File Server
Name
Displays the file server name.
Polling Interval
Displays the time interval.
NCP Packet
Burst
Displays the status, and whether to use NCP (NetWare Core Protocol)
packet burst.
Status
Information
Displays messages according to the conditions of the multifunction
printer.
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
SLP
Active Discovery Displays whether active discovery is enabled.
NOTE: An optional multi-protocol card is required to display the NetWare Setup page.
E-Mail Alert Setup Page
Purpose:
To verify the current settings of SMTP/POP (Simple Mail Transfer Protocol/Post Office Protocol) used for the
e-mail feature and E-Mail Alerts feature. In this page, you can only verify the settings of items. If you want
to change the settings, go to the pages in the Print Server Settings tab.
Values:
E-Mail Server
Settings
E-Mail Alert
Settings
Port Status
Displays the port status.
Primary SMTP Gateway
Displays the primary SMTP (Simple Mail Transfer
Protocol) gateway.
SMTP Port Number
Displays the SMTP port number.
E-Mail Send Authentication
Displays the authentication method for outgoing email.
POP3 Server Address
Displays the POP3 (Post Office Protocol 3) server
address.
POP3 Port Number
Displays the POP3 port number.
Reply Address
Displays the IP address of servers connected with
SMTP protocol when data is incoming.
SMTP Server Connection
Displays the status of the SMTP server connection.
E-Mail List 1
Displays the acceptable e-mail addresses for the EMail Alert feature specified in E-mail List 1.
Select Alerts
for List 1
Supplies Alerts Displays the status, and whether to receive an E-Mail
Alert for consumables.
Paper
Handling
Alerts
Displays the status, and whether to receive an E-Mail
Alert for paper handling.
Service Call
Displays the status, and whether to receive an E-Mail
Alert for Service Calls.
E-Mail List 2
Select Alerts
for List 2
Displays the acceptable e-mail addresses for the EMail Alert feature specified in E-mail List 2.
Supplies Alerts Displays the status, and whether to receive an E-Mail
Alert for consumables.
Paper
Handling
Alerts
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Displays the status, and whether to receive an E-Mail
Alert for paper handling.
Service Call
Displays the status, and whether to receive an E-Mail
Alert for Service Calls.
Print Server Settings
The Print Server Settings tab includes Basic Information , Port Settings , Wireless LAN , TCP/IP ,
NetWare , SMB , AppleTalk , E-Mail Alert , Bonjour(mDNS) , and SNMP pages.
Basic Information
Purpose:
To configure the printer's basic information.
Values:
System
Settings
EWS
Settings
Printer Name
Specifies the name of the multifunction printer up to 31
alphanumeric characters.
Location
Specifies the location of the multifunction printer up to 63
alphanumeric characters.
Contact Person
Specifies the contact name, number, and other information of the
printer administrator and service center up to 63 alphanumeric
characters.
Administrator EMail Address
Specifies the contact address of the printer administrator and
service center up to 63 alphanumeric characters.
Asset Tag Number
Enter the asset tag number for the multifunction printer.
Auto Refresh
On
Refreshes the contents of the status display pages automatically.
Off
Does not refresh the status display pages automatically.
Auto Refresh
Interval
Sets the time interval for refreshing the contents of the status
display pages automatically from 15 to 600 seconds.
NOTE: The auto refresh feature is effective for the contents of the Top Frame, Printer Status page,
Job List page, and Completed Jobs page.
Port Settings
Purpose:
To specify whether to enable or disable printing ports and management protocol features.
Values:
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Ethernet
*1
Port
Status
Ethernet
Settings
Auto
Detects Ethernet transmission rate and the duplex settings
automatically.
10BASE-T
Half-Duplex
Selects 10Base-T Half-Duplex as the default value.
10BASE-T
Full-Duplex
Selects 10Base-T Full-Duplex as the default value.
100BASE-TX
Half-Duplex
Selects 100Base-T Half-Duplex as the default value.
100BASE-TX
Full-Duplex
Selects 100Base-T Full-Duplex as the default value.
Current Ethernet Settings
Displays the current settings of Ethernet.
MAC Address
Displays the printer's MAC address.
LPD
Select the check box to enable the LPD.
Port9100
Select the check box to enable the Port9100.
IPP *
2
Select the check box to enable the IPP port.
WSD
Select the check box to enable the WSD port.
FTP
Select the check box to enable the FTP port.
SMB *
2
NetWare *
Select the check box to enable the SMB.
You can also configure the transport protocol to be used.
TCP/IP and NetBEUI can be selected simultaneously as the
transport protocol.
2
AppleTalk *
Select the check box to enable the NetWare port. You can also
configure the transport protocol to be used. IPX/SPX and
TCP/IP can be selected simultaneously as the transport
protocol.
2
Select the check box to enable the AppleTalk port.
Bonjour (mDNS) * 2
Select the check box to enable the Bonjour(mDNS) feature.
E-Mail Alert
Select the check box to enable the E-Mail Alert feature.
SNMP Agent
Select the check box to enable the SNMP (Simple Network
Management Protocol).
You can also configure the transport protocol to be used. UDP
and IPX can be selected simultaneously as the transport
protocol.
IPX is only available when the multi-protocol card is installed.
* 1 The Ethernet settings are not displayed when the optional wireless printer adapter is installed.
* 2 An optional multi-protocol card is required to display the item.
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
NOTE: The settings in the Port Settings page will be valid only when the multifunction printer is
rebooted. When you change or configure the settings, click the Restart printer to apply new
settings button to apply new settings.
Wireless LAN
Purpose:
To configure the detailed setting for the wireless network.
Wireless
Settings
Security
Settings
SSID
Specifies the name that identifies the wireless network. Up to 32
alphanumeric characters.
Network
Type
Specifies the network type from either Ad-Hoc or Infrastructure .
MAC
Address
Displays the MAC address of the printer's wireless network adapter.
Link
Channel
Displays the channel number of the printer's wireless connection.
Link Quality
Displays the quality of the printer's wireless network connection.
Encryption
Select the security method from the list.
WEP Key 14
Specifies the WEP key set used through the wireless network only when
WEP 128bit or WEP 64bit is selected for Encryption .
Transmit
Key
Specifies the transmit key from the list.
Pass Phrase Specifies the pass phrase from 8 to 63 alphanumeric characters only when
WPA-PSK AES or WPA-PSK TKIP is selected for Encryption .
NOTE: To set WPA2-PSK, select WPA-PSK AES.
NOTE: An optional wireless printer adapter is required to display the Wireless page.
TCP/IP
Purpose:
To configure the IP address, subnet mask, and gateway address of the multifunction printer.
Values:
TCP/IP
Settings
IP Mode
Specifies the IP mode.
Host Name
Specifies the host name.
IPv4
Selects the IP address mode.
IP Address
Mode
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
IPv6
Manual IP
Address
Sets the IP address.
Manual Subnet
Mask
Sets the subnet mask.
Manual
Gateway
Address
Sets the gateway address.
Use Manual
Address
Select the check box to set the IP address manually.
Manual Address Sets the IP address.
Manual
Gateway
Address
DNS
DNS Domain Name*
IPv4
IPv6
Sets the gateway address.
1
Specifies the domain name of the domain name server. Up to
255 alphanumeric characters, periods, and hyphens can be
used. If you need to specify more than one domain name,
separate them using a comma or semicolon.
Get DNS Server
Address from
DHCP
Select the check box to get the DNS server address
automatically from the DHCP server.
Manual DNS
Server Address
Sets the DNS server address.
Get DNS Server
Address from
DHCPv6-lite
Select the check box to get the DNS server address
automatically from the DHCPv6-lite server.
Manual DNS
Server Address
Sets the DNS server address.
DNS Dynamic Update
(IPv4)* 1
Select the check box to enable dynamic updates to DNS.
DNS Dynamic Update
(IPv6)* 1
Select the check box to enable dynamic updates to DNS.
Auto Generate Search
List* 1
Select the check box to automatically generate the search list.
Search Domain Name*
1
Specifies the search domain name. Up to 255 alphanumeric
characters, periods, and hyphens can be used. If you need to
specify more than one domain name, separate them using a
comma or semicolon.
Time-out* 1
Specifies the time-out period between 1 and 60 seconds.
Priority to IPv6 DNS
Name Resolution
Select the check box to enable the DNS Name Resolution
feature.
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
WINS*
1
LPD
Port9100
IPP *
WSD
HTTP
1
WINS Mode
Select the check box to get the WINS server address
automatically from the DHCP server.
WINS Primary Server
Sets WINS server address in the nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn format.
Each section of nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn is a value between 0 and
254. Note that values 127 and 224-254 are not valid for the
first three-digits.
WINS Secondary Server
Sets a back up WINS server address in the nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn
format. Each section of nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn is a value between 0
and 254. Note that values 127 and 224-254 are not valid for
the first three-digits.
Connection Time-Out
Sets the connection timeout period from 1 to 1000 seconds.
IP Filter (IPv4)
To set the IP Filter settings, click IP Filter . The IP Filter
page is displayed.
Port
Number
Sets the port number from 9000 to 9999.
Connection Time-Out
Sets the connection timeout period between 1 and 1000
seconds.
IP Filter (IPv4)
To set the IP Filter settings, click IP Filter . The IP Filter
page is displayed.
Printer URI
Displays the printer URI.
Connection Time-Out
Sets the connection timeout period from 1 to 1000 seconds.
Port Number
Displays the port number for receiving requests from the
client.
Maximum Sessions
Displays the maximum number of connections received
simultaneously by the client.
Port Number
Sets the port number from 8000 to 9999.
Receive Time-Out
Sets the receive timeout period from 1 to 65535 seconds.
Notification Time-Out
Sets the notification timeout period from 1 to 60 seconds.
Maximum Number of TTL
Sets the maximum number of TTL from 1 to 10.
Maximum Number of
Notification
Sets the maximum number of notifications from 10 to 20.
Port Number
Sets the port number to 80 or from 8000 to 9999.
Simultaneous Connections Displays the maximum number of connections received
simultaneously by the client.
Connection Time-Out
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Sets the connection timeout period from 1 to 255 seconds.
FTP
IP Filter
(IPv4) * 2
Password
Sets whether to enable or disable the password. And also
specifies the password value up to 7 characters.
Connection Time-Out
Sets the connection timeout period from 1 to 1000 seconds.
Address
Sets the address in the address field. Enter a numeric value
between 0 and 255 in each field of "aaa.bbb.ccc.ddd."
However, 127 and 224-254 cannot be used to "aaa."
Address Mask
Sets the Subnet Mask in the Mask field. Enter a numeric value
between 0 and 255 in each field.
Active
Mode
Reject
Rejects printing from specified network address.
Permit
Permits printing from specified network address.
Disabled
Disables the IP Filter feature for the specified IP address.
* 1 An optional multi-protocol card is required to display the item.
* 2 This item is only available for LPD or Port9100.
NetWare
Purpose:
To configure detailed settings for IPX/SPX and NetWare.
Values:
IPX/SPX
Settings
NetWare
Frame
Type
Auto
Specifies the active frame type automatically.
Ethernet II
Selects Ethernet II frame type.
Ethernet
802.3
Selects IEEE802.3 frame type.
Ethernet
802.2
Selects IEEE802.2 frame type.
Ethernet
SNAP
Selects SNAP (Sub Network Access Protocol) frame type.
Current Frame Type
Displays the current frame type.
Network Address
Displays the IPX network address.
Device Name *1
Specifies the printer name up to 47 alphanumeric characters.
For PServer Mode, set the Print Server Name (Print Server Object
Name). The original setting remains valid if no input is made.
Active
Mode
Selects this option when using in Directory: PServer Mode .
Directory:
PServer
Mode
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Bindery:
PServer
Mode
SLP
Selects this option when using in Bindery: PServer Mode .
Tree Name *1
Specifies the tree name up to 32 alphanumeric characters.
Configure this item only when Directory: PServer Mode is
selected.
Context Name
Specifies the context name of the Print Server Object up to 255
alphanumeric characters. Configure this item only when
Directory: PServer Mode or Directory: RPrinter Mode is
selected.
File Server Name *1
Specifies the file server name up to 47 alphanumeric characters.
Configure this item only when Bindery: PServer Mode is
selected.
Polling Interval
Sets the time interval from when print data enters the print queue
until printing starts. The setting range is from 1 to 1000 seconds.
The original setting remains valid if no input is made. Configure
this item only when Bindery: PServer Mode or Directory:
PServer Mode is selected.
NCP
Packet
Burst
On
Uses NCP packet burst.
Off
Does not use NCP packet burst.
Password
Sets the print server password up to 32 alphanumeric characters.
Configure this item only when Binary: PServer Mode or
Directory: PServer Mode is selected.
Confirm Password
Enter the password again.
Status Information
Displays the status of NetWare.
Active Discovery
Select the check box to enable Active Discovery .
* 1 The following are illegal characters: semicolon (;), colon (:), asterisk (*), question mark (?), period (.),
comma (,), yen mark (¥), back slash (\), double quotation ("), comparison symbols (< >), brackets ([ ]),
operation symbols (+, =, or ~), pipe (|), slash (/), and space ( ).
NOTE: The settings in the NetWare page will be valid only when NetWare or the multifunction printer
is rebooted. Click the Restart printer to apply new settings button to apply new settings.
NOTE: An optional multi-protocol card is required to display the NetWare page.
SMB
Purpose:
To configure detailed settings for SMB.
Values:
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Host Name
Specifies the host name up to 15 alphanumeric characters. The original setting
will remain valid if no input is made.
Workgroup
Specifies the workgroup name up to 15 alphanumeric characters. The original
setting will remain valid if no input is made.
Administrator Name
Specifies the administrator name up to 20 alphanumeric characters. The original
setting will remain valid if no input is made. The default name is admin .
Administrator
Password
Specifies the administrator password up to 14 alphanumeric characters. The
original setting will remain valid if no input is made. The default password is
password .
Confirm Administrator Allows you to confirm the configured administrator password by re-entering the
Password
same password.
Maximum Sessions
Displays the maximum sessions.
Unicode Support
On
Notifies the host name and workgroup name in Unicode characters.
Off
Does not notify the host name and workgroup name in Unicode characters.
On
Enables the Auto Master Mode.
Off
Disables the Auto Master Mode.
On
Encrypts the password.
Off
Does not encrypt the password.
Auto Master
Mode
Encrypt
Password
Job Time-Out
Sets the timeout period from 60 to 3600 seconds.
Connection Time-Out
Sets the connection timeout period from 60 to 3600 seconds.
NOTE: The settings in the SMB page will be valid only when the multifunction printer is rebooted.
Click the Restart printer to apply new settings button to apply new settings.
NOTE: An optional multi-protocol card is required to display the SMB page.
AppleTalk
Purpose:
To configure the detailed settings for AppleTalk.
Values:
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
AppleTalk Printer
Specifies the printer name in the AppleTalk network up to 32 alphanumeric
characters and symbol sets.
AppleTalk
Zone
Specifies the AppleTalk zone name up to 32 alphanumeric characters and
symbol sets.
AppleTalk
Type
Displays the AppleTalk type.
Delay Start
Time
Specifies the delay start time between 1 and 255 seconds. A zero (0) value
specifies no delay.
NOTE: An optional multi-protocol card is required to display the AppleTalk page.
E-Mail Alert
Purpose:
To configure detailed settings for E-Mail Alert. This page can also be displayed by clicking E-Mail Alert in the
Left Frame.
Values:
E-Mail
Server
Settings
Primary SMTP Gateway
Sets the primary SMTP gateway.
SMTP Port Number
Specifies the SMTP port number. This must be 25 or between
5000 and 65535.
E-Mail Send
Authentication
Specifies the authentication method for outgoing
e-mail.
SMTP Login User
Specifies the SMTP login user. Up to 63 alphanumeric
characters, periods, hyphens, under bars, and at symbols (@)
can be used. If specifying more than one address, separate
them using commas.
SMTP Login Password
Specifies the SMTP account password up to 31 alphanumeric
characters.
POP3 Server Address*
POP3 Port Number*
POP User Name *
1
1
POP User Password*
1
Specifies the POP3 server address in IP address format of
"aaa.bbb.ccc.ddd" or as a DNS host name up to 63 characters.
Specifies the POP3 server port number. This must be 110 or
between 5000 and 65535.
Specifies the POP3 account user name.
Up to 63 alphanumeric characters, periods, hyphens, under
bars, and at symbols (@) can be used. If specifying more than
one address, separate them using commas.
1
Reply Address
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Specifies the POP3 account password up to 31 alphanumeric
characters.
Designates the reply e-mail address sent with each E-mail Alert.
SMTP Server
Connection
Displays the status of the SMTP server connection.
E-Mail Alert E-Mail List 1
Settings
Select
Alerts for
List 1
*
1
Sets acceptable e-mail addresses for the E-Mail Alert feature up
to 255 alphanumeric characters.
Supplies
Alerts
Select the check box to receive an E-Mail Alert for consumables.
Paper
Handling
Alerts
Select the check box to receive an E-Mail Alert for paper
handling.
Service Call
Select the check box to receive an E-Mail Alert for Service Calls.
E-Mail List 2
Sets acceptable e-mail addresses for the E-Mail Alert feature up
to 255 alphanumeric characters.
Select
Alerts for
List 2
Supplies
Alerts
Select the check box to receive an E-Mail Alert for consumables.
Paper
Handling
Alerts
Select the check box to receive an E-Mail Alert for paper
handling.
Service Call
Select the check box to receive an E-Mail Alert for Service Calls.
Available when POP before SMTP for E-Mail Send Authentication is selected.
Bonjour (mDNS)
Purpose:
To configure the detailed settings for Bonjour.
Values:
Bonjour
(mDNS)
Host
Name
Specifies the host name up to 63 alphanumeric characters and "-" (dash). The
original setting will remain valid if no input is made.
Printer
Name
Specifies the printer name up to 63 alphanumeric characters and symbol sets.
The original setting will remain valid if no input is made.
NOTE: An optional multi-protocol card is required to display the Bonjour (mDNS) page.
SNMP
Purpose:
To configure the detailed settings of SNMP.
Values:
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
SNMP
Agent
Community
Name (Read
only) * 1
Specifies the community name to access (read only) the data up to 31
alphanumeric characters.
The original setting will remain valid if no input is made. Characters entered
for community name in previous settings will not be displayed on the screen.
The default Read Community is public.
Community
Name
(Read/Write)
Specifies the community name to access (read and write) the data up to 31
alphanumeric characters.
The original setting will remain valid if no input is made. Characters entered
for community name in previous settings will not be displayed on the screen.
The default Read/Write Community is private.
*
1
Community
Name (Trap)
* 1
Specifies the community name used for trap up to 31 alphanumeric characters.
The original settings will remain valid if no input is made. Characters entered
for Community Name (Trap) in previous settings will not be displayed on the
screen. The default Trap Community is " " (NULL).
Trap
Select the check boxes to notify trap occurrence. In this case, specify the IP
Notification 1-4 address and IP socket in the following format:
·IPv4
Specify the IP address and IP socket in the nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn:mmmmm format.
Each section of "nnn" is a variable value between 0 and 255. Note that values
127 and 224-254 are not valid for the first three-digits only. IP socket
mmmmm is a variable value between 0 and 65535.
·IPv6
Specify the IP address and IP socket in the
xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:mmmmm format. Each section of
"xxxx" is a hexadecimal variable value between 0 and ffff. IP socket mmmmm
is a variable value between 0 and 65535.
·IPX
Specify the IPX address in the nnnnnnnn.mmmmmmmmmmmm.llll format. IP
network nnnnnnnn is a hexadecimal variable value between 0 and ffffffff, IPX
node mmmmmmmmmmmm is a hexadecimal value between 0 and ffffffffffff
and IPX socket llll is a hexadecimal variable value between 0 and ffff.
Authenticate
Error Trap
Select the check box to notify Authenticate Error Trap.
* 1 The default value of each items can be changed by using Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool.
* 2 An optional multi-protocol card is required to display the item.
Scan to PC
Purpose:
To specify the client when scanning data.
Values:
Scan to PC FTP Client
Scans data by using the FTP client.
SMB Client Scans data by using the SMB client.
IP Filter
Purpose:
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
To configure the detailed settings for the IP Filter used for LPD and Port9100.
Values:
Address
Sets the address in the address field. Enter a numeric value between 0 and 255 in
each field of "aaa.bbb.ccc.ddd." However, 127 and 224-254 cannot be used to
"aaa."
Address Mask
Sets the Subnet Mask in the mask field. Enter a numeric value between 0 and 255
in each field.
Active
Mode
Reject
Rejects printing from specified network address.
Permit
Permits printing from specified network address.
Disabled Disables the IP Filter feature for the specified IP address.
When you make the settings for the filter, enter the IP address of the IP Filter in the Address field and the
Subnet Mask in the Address Mask field. Enter a numeric value between 0 and 255 in each field. "* " is
appended to the current value.
Setup Procedure
You can set up to a maximum of five items and the first item takes priority. Enter the shortest address first
before proceeding to the next longer address when setting multiple filters.
The following section explains how the IP Filter operates.
1. IP Filter Procedure
a. Enabling Printing From a Specified User
The following describes the procedure to enable printing only from the "192.168.100.10 " IP address.
Procedures:
i. Click the first column of Access List row 1 .
ii. Enter "192.168.100.10 " in the Address field and "255.255.255.255 " in the Address Mask
field.
iii. Select Permit .
iv. Click Apply New Settings .
b. Disabling Printing From a Specified User
The following describes the procedure to disable printing only from the "192.168.100.10 " IP address.
Procedures:
i. Click the first column of Access List row 1 .
ii. Enter "192.168.100.10 " in the Address field and "255.255.255.255 " in the Address Mask
field.
iii. Select Reject .
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
iv. Click the first column of Access List row 2 .
v. Enter "0.0.0.0 " in the Address field and "0.0.0.0 " in the Address Mask field.
vi. Select Permit .
vii. Click Apply New Settings .
c. Enabling and Disabling Printing from Network Addresses
You can enable printing from the "192.168 " network address and disable printing from the "192.168.200 "
network address. However, the example below describes how to enable printing from the "192.168.200.10 "
IP address.
Procedures:
i. Click the first column of the Access List row 1 .
ii. Enter "192.168.200.10 " in the Address field and "255.255.255.255 " in the Address Mask
field.
iii. Select Permit .
iv. Click the first column of the Access List row 2 .
v. Enter "192.168.200.0 " in the Address field and "255.255.255.0 " in the Address Mask
field.
vi. Select Reject .
vii. Click the first column of the Access List row 3 .
viii. Enter "192.168.0.0 " in the Address field and "255.255.0.0 " in the Address Mask field.
ix. Select Permit .
x. Click Apply New Settings .
Other Features
The Other Features tab includes Set Password , Security , IPsec and Reset Print Server pages.
Set Password
Purpose:
To set or change the password that is required to access the printer setup parameters from the Dell Printer
Configuration Web Tool .
Set the password of the operator panel from Panel Settings in the Printer Settings . This page can also be
displayed by clicking Set Password in the Left Frame.
NOTE: To restore the password to default (NULL), initialize the non-volatile memory (NVM).
Values:
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Administrator Password
Sets the password up to 10 alphanumeric characters. The password will
appear as asterisks (*) in the field when it is entered.
Confirm Administrator
Password
Enter the password again to confirm it.
Security
Purpose:
To specify the settings for the SSL encryption communication to the multifunction printer.
Values:
HTTPS
Displays the port status.
Port Number
Specifies the port number, which is not identical with that of HTTP for TCP/IP.
This must be 443 or between 8000 and 9999.
Time Zone
Set the correct Time Zone to generate SSL authorization. The initial value, 0 or
-5 (hours)*1 , is set.
Generate Self-Signed
Certificate
Click to display Generate Self-Signed Certificate page and to create a
security certification from the page.
* 1 Initial values may vary for different countries.
NOTE: An optional multi-protocol card is required to display the Security page.
IPsec
Purpose:
To specify the Security Architecture settings for Internet Protocol (IPsec) for encrypted communication to the
printer.
Values:
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Protocol
Select the check box to enable the protocol.
IKE
Use a preshared key for IKE authentication.
Pre-Shared Key
Specifies a shared key.
Re-enter Pre-Shared Key
Enter the shared key again to confirm it.
IKE SA Lifetime
Sets the lifetime for IKE SA from 5 to 28800 minutes.
IPsec SA Lifetime
Sets the lifetime for IPsec SA from 5 to 2880 minutes.
DH Group
Selects the DH group.
PFS
Selects the check box to enable the PFS setting.
Remote peers IPv4 address
Specifies the IP address to connect to.
Remote peers IPv6 address
Specifies the IP address to connect to.
Non IPsec communication
policy
Selects whether or not to communicate with a device which does
not support IPsec.
NOTE: If IPsec is enabled with incorrect settings, you must disable it using the Reset IPsec menu on
the operator panel.
Reset Print Server
Purpose:
To initialize NVRAM (non-volatile RAM) for the network feature and reboot the multifunction printer. You can
also initialize the printer's NVRAM from Reset Defaults in the Printer Settings menu.
Values:
Initialize NIC NVRAM
Memory and restart printer
Click the Start button to initialize NVRAM. Network settings will revert to
the factory default settings and reboot the network capability.
Restart Printer
Click the Start button to reboot the multifunction printer.
Copy Printer Settings
The Copy Printer Settings menu includes the Copy Printer Settings and Copy Printer Settings Report
pages.
NOTE: You cannot copy the following printer settings:
Copy Defaults
Copy Color Balance
Copy Settings
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Scan Defaults
Fax Defaults
Fax Settings
Clock Settings
Address Book
Copy Printer Settings
Purpose:
To copy the printer settings to one or more of the same model of the multifunction printer.
To copy the settings to another printer, specify the IP address and password of the printer to which the
settings are copied in the IP Address text box and Password text box. Then, click the Copy the settings
to the Host in the above list button. Copying the settings is complete. The connection time-out period is
60 seconds. After that, you can check whether settings were copied to this page. And you need to check the
Copy the settings to the Host in the above list and reboot the machine menu of the Dell Printer
Configuration Web Tool in the destination printer to verify if settings were actually copied or not.
If the settings can be copied but printer configuration is different, the settings of only the same items are
copied. Printer settings are simultaneously copied to printers of up to 10 IP addresses.
Copy Printer Settings Report
Purpose:
To verify the histories of copying.
NOTE: The history is cleared by turning off the multifunction printer:
Address Book
The Address Book menu includes the E-Mail Address, Server Address, and Phone Book pages.
E-Mail Address
E-Mail Address
Registers a new user in E-Mail Address.
E-Mail Group
Registers a maximum of 10 users in the group.
Default Setup
Creates your own default settings for E-Mail Address.
Server Address Server Address Displays the Server Address list.
Phone Book
FAX Speed Dial Display the Phone Book list.
FAX Group
Displays fax groups.
E-Mail Address
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Purpose:
To organize E-Mail Address, E-Mail Group, and Default Setup.
Values:
E-Mail Address Registers a new user in E-Mail Address.
E-Mail Group
Registers a maximum of 10 users in the group.
Default Setup
Creates your own default settings for E-Mail Address.
E-Mail Address - Top Page
Purpose:
To view your own default settings for E-Mail Address.
Values:
ID : Name
Displays the e-mail addresses in the group.
Delete
Deletes the registered e-mail address.
Confirm / Change Edits the registered e-mail address.
Create
Creates the new e-mail addresses in the group.
E-Mail Address
Purpose:
To edit the registered users in E-Mail Group.
Values:
ID
Automatically specifies the registration number.
Name
Enter the name for the new e-mail address.
Address
Enter the new e-mail address.
E-Mail Address
Lists the e-mail addresses.
Delete
Press this button to delete the specified e-mail user.
Apply New Settings Press this button to apply the specified settings.
Restore Settings
Press this button to restore the previous settings.
Back
Press this button to return to the top page where the user belongs.
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
E-Mail Group -Top Page
Purpose:
To view your own default settings for E-Mail Address.
Values:
Group ID
Displays the group ID.
Name
Displays names registered in the group.
Create
Creates the new user in the group.
Delete
Deletes the registered user.
Confirm / Change Edits the registered user.
E-Mail Group
Purpose:
To register the user in E-Mail Group.
Values:
E-Mail Group
E-Mail
Address
ID
Automatically specifies the registration number.
Name
Enter the name for the new e-mail address.
Address List to
Displays buttons including up to 20 addresses.
ID
Displays the IDs registered in the group.
Name
Displays the names registered in the group.
Address
Enter the new e-mail address.
Apply New
Settings
Press this button to apply the specified settings.
Restore Settings
Press this button to restore the previous settings.
Back
Press this button to return to the top page where the user
belongs.
Default Setup
Purpose:
To create your own default settings for E-Mail Address.
Values:
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Default Subject
Enter the subject of e-mail.
Body Text
Enter the body text of e-mail.
Apply New Settings Press this button to apply the specified settings.
Restore Settings
Press this button to restore the previous settings.
Server Address - Top Page
Purpose:
To display the Server Address list.
Values:
Address List
to:
Displays buttons including 20 and 13 addresses. Click the button to list addresses
associated with the IDs on the button.
ID
Displays the ID including user names.
Name
Displays user names registered in each ID.
Server
Address
Displays the beginning characters of the server address.
Create
Creates the new user.
Delete
Deletes the registered user.
Confirm /
Change
Edits the registered user.
Server Address
Purpose:
To edit the Server Address list.
Values:
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
ID
Displays the ID including user names.
Name
Displays user names registered in each ID.
Server Type
FTP
Uses the FTP protocol to store the scanned image on the server.
SMB
Uses the SMB protocol to store the scanned image on the
computer.
Server Address
Displays the server address.
Server Port
Number
Displays the server port number. If this option is left black, the default is used.
Login Name
Displays the login name.
Login Password
Enable
Password
Share Name
Displays the shared name.
Server Path
Displays the server path.
Delete
Deletes the registered user.
Apply New
Settings
Press this button to apply the specified settings.
Restore Settings
Press this button to restore the previous settings.
Back
Press this button to return to the top page where the user belongs.
Check this option to use the password. The password is only
shown in asterisks.
Phone Book
FAX Speed Dial Displays the Phone Book list.
FAX Group
Displays fax groups.
Phone Book - Top Page
Purpose:
To display the Phone Book list.
Values:
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Speed Dial List
to:
Displays buttons including up to 20 dials. Click the button to list dials associated with
the IDs on the button.
ID
Displays the IDs registered in the group.
Name
Displays the user names registered in the group.
Number
Displays the beginning numbers of the dial.
Delete
Deletes the registered dial.
Confirm /
Change
Edits the registered dial.
Create
Creates the new dial.
FAX Speed Dial
Purpose:
To register the new dial.
Values:
ID
Automatically specifies the registration number.
Name
Enter the user name.
Phone Number
Enter the phone number.
ID
Displays the IDs registered in the group.
Name
Displays the user names registered in the group.
Delete
Press this button to delete the specified ID number.
Apply New Settings Press this button to apply the specified settings.
Restore Settings
Press this button to restore the previous settings.
Back
Press this button to return to the top page where the user belongs.
FAX Group - Top Page
Purpose:
To displays fax groups.
Values:
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
ID
Displays the IDs registered in the group.
Name
Displays the user names registered in the group.
Delete
Deletes the registered fax group.
Confirm / Change Edits the registered fax group.
Create
Creates the new user in the fax group.
FAX Group
Purpose:
To register the fax group.
Values:
FAX Group
FAX Speed
Dial
ID
Automatically specifies the registration number.
Name
Enter the group name.
Speed Dial List Displays buttons including up to 20 speed dials. Click the button to list
to:
dials associated with the IDs on the button.
ID
Automatically specifies the registration number.
Name
Displays names registered in each ID.
Phone Number Displays the phone numbers registered in each ID.
Apply New
Settings
Press this button to apply the specified settings.
Restore
Settings
Press this button to restore the previous settings.
Back
Press this button to return to the top page where the user belongs.
Print Volume
The Printer Volume menu includes the Print Volume and Dell ColorTrack pages.
Print Volume
Purpose:
To verify the number of printed pages. This page can also be displayed by clicking Print Volume in the Left
Frame.
Values:
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Printer Page
Count
Displays the total number of pages printed since the multifunction printer was shipped
from the factory.
Paper Used
Displays the number of pages for each paper size.
Dell ColorTrack
Purpose:
To specify which users have access to color printing and to limit print volume per user.
Values:
Print User
Limitation
Select the check box to restrict users from using the multifunction printer.
Permit printing
without specifying
user
Select the check box to use the multifunction printer without user limitations.
User Registration
Displayed when Print User Limitation is enabled. To register a user, click Edit
User Registration to open the Edit Print User Registration page, and then
specify User Registration No. and click Edit to open the Print User Settings
page.
Edit Print User Registration
Purpose:
To edit the user registration number.
Values:
User Registration No., Edit Type the user registration number to edit the print user settings.
Print User Settings
Purpose:
To specify the user settings for the printer.
Values:
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
User Registration No.
Displays the user registration number.
User Name
Edits the user name.
Password
Registers the password.
Color Mode Limitation
Selects the color mode.
Upper Limit for Color Print
Type the number of pages for color print.
Cumulative Color Page Count
Counts and displays the color pages cumulatively.
Upper Limit for Monochrome Print
Type the number of pages for mono chrome print.
Cumulative Monochrome Page Count Counts the black and white pages cumulatively.
Tray Settings
Use the Tray Settings menu to set the printer media types and sizes for trays respectively.
Values:
Tray 1 Paper Type
Sets the type of paper loaded in the standard 250-sheet tray.
Tray 1 Paper Size
Sets the size of paper loaded in the standard 250-sheet tray.
Tray 1 Custom Size - Y Sets the length of paper loaded in the standard 250-sheet tray.
Tray 1 Custom Size - X Sets the width of paper loaded in the standard 250-sheet tray.
Tray 2 Paper Type
Sets the type of paper loaded in the optional 550-sheet paper feeder.
Tray 2 Paper Size
Sets the size of paper loaded in the optional 550-sheet paper feeder.
Tray 2 Custom Size - Y Sets the length of paper loaded in the optional 550-sheet paper feeder.
Tray 2 Custom Size - X Sets the width of paper loaded in the optional 550-sheet paper feeder.
MPF Mode
Sets the paper size and type when paper is loaded in the multipurpose feeder.
Display Popup
Sets the paper size and type when paper is loaded in the multipurpose feeder.
MPF Paper Type
Sets the type of paper loaded in the multipurpose feeder.
MPF Paper Size
Sets the size of paper loaded in the multipurpose feeder.
MPF Custom Size - Y
Sets the length of paper loaded in the multipurpose feeder.
MPF Custom Size - X
Sets the width of paper loaded in the multipurpose feeder.
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
About Your Multifunction Printer
Automatic Document Feeder (ADF)
Operator Panel
Power Saver Mode2
The following illustrations show the standard Dell™ Multifunction Color Laser Printer 3115cn, with an optional
550-sheet paper feeder and duplex module.
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
1 Optional
duplexer
5 Optional 550-sheet paper feeder
NOTE: Your multifunction printer
allows for a maximum of three trays
(standard 250-sheet tray, optional
550-sheet paper feeder, and
multipurpose feeder).
2 Operator
panel
6 Multipurpose feeder
3 Front cover
7 Button (right side)
4 Standard
250-sheet
tray
8 Transfer belt unit
9 Automatic Document Feeder (ADF)
NOTE: When you use the multifunction printer with the multipurpose feeder opened, do not locate the
multifunction printer in direct sunlight. Doing so may cause a malfunction or unnatural screen image.
Leave enough room to open the printer trays, covers, and options. It is also important to allow space around
the multifunction printer for proper ventilation.
Automatic Document Feeder (ADF)
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
1 Cover
2 Document Guides
3 Document Feeder Tray
4 Document Feeder Glass
Operator Panel
For details on the operator panel, see "Operator Panel"
Power Saver Mode2
The scan lamp under the document feeder glass automatically turns off when it is not in actual use during a
preset period to reduce power consumption and extend the lamp life. The lamp automatically turns on and
the warm-up cycle begins whenever any key is pressed or the document cover is opened.
You can set the length of time for which the scan lamp waits after a scan job is completed before it switches
to the Power Saver Mode2.
1. Press
until >SETUP appears, and then press
2.
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
.
1.
2. Press
until >Admin Menu appears, and then press
3. Press
until System Settings appears, and then press
4. Press
until >Power Saver Mode2 appears, and then press
5. Press
to select On, and then press
6. Press
until >Power Saver Timer appears, and then press
7. Press
to select the desired time, and then press
.
.
.
8. To return to the standby mode, press Cancel.
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
.
.
.
Installing the Print Cartridges
Installing the Print Cartridges
CAUTION: Before performing any of the following procedures, read and follow the safety
instructions in your Owner's Manual or Product Information Guide.
NOTICE: To protect the drums of the print cartridges against bright light, close the front cover within
five minutes. If the front cover remains open for more than five minutes, print quality may
deteriorate.
NOTICE: Ensure nothing touches or scratches the surface (black-colored film) of the transfer belt
unit. Scratches, dirt, or oil from your hands on the film of the transfer belt unit may reduce print
quality.
Installing the Print Cartridges
1. Push the button (right side) and open the front cover.
2. Pull up the tag to remove the seal from the unit belt.
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
3. Remove the seals over the levers at both ends of the fuser unit, and then pull the tag to remove the
seal from the fuser unit.
NOTE: Ensure to lock both levers at ends of the fuser unit, after removing the seal.
4. Hold one print cartridge firmly and shake it five or six times to distribute the toner evenly.
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
5. Remove the print cartridge from its packaging.
NOTE: To protect the drum against bright light, do not remove the orange protective cover of the
print cartridge before the cartridge is inserted into its slot in the multifunction printer.
6. Completely remove the seal from the print cartridge by pulling the tab on the end of the print
cartridge.
NOTE: Pull the seal out straight. Pulling the seal diagonally may tear it.
7. Grasp both handles of the print cartridge with the label facing up and slide the cartridge into the same
color slot. Ensure the cartridge is fully inserted.
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
8. Repeat steps 4, 5, 6, and 7 to install the other print cartridges.
9. Remove the orange protective covers of the each of the installed print cartridges.
10. After installing all of the print cartridges, close the front cover.
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Connecting Your Multifunction Printer
Choosing the Right Cable
Connecting the Multifunction Printer Locally
Connecting the Multifunction Printer to the Network
Connecting the Telephone Line
Choosing the Right Cable
Your Dell™ Multifunction Color Laser Printer 3115cn interconnection cable must meet the following
requirements:
Connection type
Connection specifications
Parallel
IEEE (the Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers) 1284
USB
USB 2.0
Ethernet
10 Base-T/100 Base-TX
Wireless
IEEE802.11b/802.11g
Wall jack connector RJ11
Phone connector
RJ11
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
1 Wall jack connector
2 Phone connector
3 Ethernet port
4 Optional wireless printer adapter socket
5 Parallel port
6 USB port
Connecting the Multifunction Printer Locally
A local printer is a printer attached to your computer using a USB or parallel cable. If your multifunction
printer is attached to a network instead of your computer, skip this step and go on to "Connecting the
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Multifunction Printer to the Network."
Microsoft ® Windows ® 2000, Windows XP, Windows Server® 2003, Windows Server 2008, Windows XP 64-bit
Edition, Windows Server 2003 Enterprise x64 Edition, Windows Server 2008 Enterprise x64 Edition, Windows
Vista® and Mac® OS X or later operating systems support USB connections. Some UNIX® and Linux
computers also support USB connections. See your computer operating system documentation to see if your
system supports USB.
To attach the multifunction printer to a computer:
1. Ensure the multifunction printer, computer, and any other attached devices are turned off and
unplugged.
2. Connect the multifunction printer to the computer using a USB or parallel cable.
1 Parallel port
2 USB port
A USB/parallel port requires a USB/parallel cable. Be sure to match the USB/parallel symbol on the cable to
the USB/parallel symbol on the multifunction printer.
Plug the other end of the cable into a USB or parallel port on the back of the computer. For a USB cable, do
not plug it into the USB keyboard.
Turn On the Multifunction Printer
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Before turning on the multifunction printer, be sure to release the carriage lock of the scanner.
NOTE: If you use the optional duplexer, remove the protection film attached to the transfer belt unit
of the duplexer. For details, see "Installing a Duplexer".
NOTE: When you are moving the multifunction printer or do not intend to use it for a long period of
time, move the switch to the lock position.
1. Plug one end of the printer power cable into the socket at the back of the multifunction printer and the
other end into a properly grounded outlet.
CAUTION: Do not use extension cords or power strips.
CAUTION: The multifunction printer should not be plugged into a UPS system.
2. Turn on the computer and the multifunction printer.
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
2.
Connecting the Multifunction Printer to the Network
To attach the multifunction printer to a network:
1. Ensure the multifunction printer, computer, and any other attached devices are turned off and
unplugged.
2. Connect the multifunction printer to the network using an Ethernet cable or the wireless printer
adapter.
To use a wireless printer adapter, you must install the Multi-Protocol Card first. To install the card, see
"Installing the Dell Multi-Protocol Card".
1 Ethernet port
2 Optional wireless printer adapter socket
To connect the multifunction printer to the network, plug one end of an Ethernet cable into the Ethernet port
on the back of the multifunction printer, and the other end into a LAN drop or hub. For a wireless connection,
insert the wireless printer adapter into the wireless printer socket on the back of the multifunction printer.
Turn On the Multifunction Printer
1. Plug one end of the printer power cable into the socket at the back of the multifunction printer and the
other end into a properly grounded outlet.
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
CAUTION: Do not use extension cords or power strips.
CAUTION: The multifunction printer should not be plugged into a UPS system.
2. Turn on the computer and the multifunction printer.
Print and Check the System Settings Page
Print a system settings page to verify the network connection. This page also provides important information
that helps you configure for network printing.
NOTE: Depending on the network configuration, the multifunction printer may not be provided an IP
address immediately. If the System Settings page does not show an assigned IP address, wait five
minutes and try again.
1. Press
until >SETUP appears, and then press
2. Press
until >Reports appears, and then press
3. System Settings is displayed. Press
.
.
.
The system settings page is printed.
4. If the IP address shows anything other than 0.0.0.0 (the factory default) or 169.254.xx.xx, the
multifunction printer has an IP address assigned and stored. Go to "Verify the IP Settings."
Assign an IP Address
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
NOTE: When you assign an IP address manually in IPv6 Mode, use the Dell Printer Configuration
Web Tool. To open the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool, use the link local address. (To check
a link local address, see "Print and Check the System Settings Page".)
An IP address is a unique number that consists of four sections that are delimited by a period and can
include up to three digits in each section, for example, 111.222.33.44.
Assigning an IP address already in use can cause network performance issues.
NOTE: Assigning an IP address is considered as an advanced function and is normally done by a
system administrator.
For more information on using your operator panel, see "Operator Panel".
1. Turn on the multifunction printer.
>COPY appears.
2. Press
until >SETUP appears, and then press
.
3. Press
until >Admin Menu appears, and then press
4. Press
until >Wired Net or >Wireless Net appears, and then press
5. Press
until >TCP/IP appears, and then press
6. Press
until >IP Address appears, and then press
.
.
.
7. The cursor is located at the first digit of the IP address. Press
address.
8. Press
.
to enter the numbers for the IP
.
The cursor moves to the next digit.
9. Repeat steps 7 and 8 to enter all of the digits in the IP address, and then press
10. Press the Back button.
11. Press
until >Subnet Mask appears, and then press
.
12. Repeat steps 7 to 8 to set Subnet Mask, and then press
.
13. Press the Back button.
14. Press
until >Gateway Address appears, and then press
15.
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
.
.
13.
14.
15. Repeat steps 7 to 8 to set Gateway Address, and then press
.
16. Turn off the multifunction printer, and then turn it on again.
The IP address is assigned to your multifunction printer. To verify the setting, open the web browser on any
computer connected to the network and enter the IP address into the address bar on the browser. If the IP
address is set up correctly, the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool displays in your browser.
You can also assign the IP address to the multifunction printer when installing the printer drivers with
installer. When you use the Network Installation feature, and the Get IP Address is set to AutoIP on the
operator panel menu, you can set the IP address from 0.0.0.0 to the desired IP address on the printer
selection window.
Verify the IP Settings
1. Print another system settings page.
2. Look under the TCP/IP heading on the system settings page to ensure that the IP address, netmask,
and gateway are what you expected.
or
Ping the multifunction printer and verify that it responds. For example, at a command prompt on a
network computer, type ping followed by the new printer IP address (for example, 192.168.0.11):
ping 192.168.0.11
If the multifunction printer is active on the network, you will receive a reply.
Connecting the Telephone Line
NOTE: Do not connect your multifunction printer directly to a DSL (digital subscriber line). This may
damage the multifunction printer. To use a DSL, you will need to use an appropriate DSL filter.
Contact your service provider for the DSL filter.
1. Plug one end of a telephone line cord into the Wall Jack connector and the other end into an active wall
jack.
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
2. To connect a telephone and/or answering machine to your multifunction printer, plug the telephone or
answering machine line cord into the Phone connector (
).
If the phone communication is serial in your country (such as Germany, Sweden, Denmark, Austria, Belgium,
Italy, France and Switzerland), and that you are supplied with a terminator plug, insert the terminator plug
into the Phone connector (
).
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Enterprise Console Management Modules
The following enterprise console management modules and user's manuals are available on your Drivers and
Utilities CD:
IBM Tivoli® NetView®
CA Unicenter®
HP OpenView ®
To use the modules, go to the following directory on your CD and run each .exe file or .chm file.
IBM Tivoli: \Utilities\SnapIns\IBM Tivoli
CA Unicenter: \Utilities\SnapIns\CA Unicenter
HP OpenView: \Utilities\SnapIns\HP OpenView
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Installing Optional Modules
You can make the multifunction printer more functional by installing the options. This chapter describes how
to install the printer's options such as the duplexer and optional 550-sheet paper feeder.
Installing the Optional 550-Sheet Paper Feeder
Installing a Duplexer
Installing a Memory Card
Installing the Dell Multi-Protocol Card
Installing the Dell Wireless Printer Adapter 3310 USB
Installing the Optional 550-Sheet Paper Feeder
CAUTION: If you are adding an optional 550-sheet paper feeder after setting up the
multifunction printer, be sure to turn off the multifunction printer, unplug the power cable,
and disconnect all cables from the back of the multifunction printer before completing
these tasks.
CAUTION: Do not move the multifunction printer with the optional 550-sheet paper feeder
attached. You may be hurt if the optional 550-sheet paper feeder falls off. Be sure to
remove the optional 550-sheet paper feeder from the multifunction printer before you
move it.
1. Place the optional 550-sheet paper feeder in the location that the multifunction printer is located.
2. Ensure that the multifunction printer is turned off.
3. Attach the extensions to the optional 550-sheet paper feeder by aligning the hooks to the holes.
4.
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
4. Lift the multifunction printer and align the four guide pins of the 550-sheet paper feeder with the holes
at the bottom of the multifunction printer. Gently lower the multifunction printer onto the optional 550sheet paper feeder.
CAUTION: To lift the multifunction printer safely, lift it with two people facing the front and
back. Never try to lift the multifunction printer while facing its right and left sides.
NOTICE: Be careful not to pinch your fingers when lowering the multifunction printer onto the
optional 550-sheet paper feeder.
5. Pull the tray out of the multifunction printer until it stops. Hold the tray with both hands, lift the front
slightly, and remove it from the multifunction printer.
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
6. Join the optional 550-sheet paper feeder and the multifunction printer by tightening the two screws
provided with the feeder with a coin or similar object.
7. Insert the tray into the multifunction printer, and push until it stops.
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
8. Turn on the multifunction printer.
NOTE: The multifunction printer will automatically detect the attached tray but will not detect the
paper type.
9. Print a system settings page to verify that the optional 550-sheet paper feeder is installed correctly.
a. Press
until >SETUP appears, and then press
b. Press
until >Reports appears, and then press
c. System Settings is displayed. Press
.
.
.
The system settings page is printed.
d. Verify 550 Sheet Feeder is listed in the system settings under Printer Options .
If the tray module is not listed, turn off the multifunction printer, unplug the power cable, and
reinstall the optional 550-sheet paper feeder.
10. After loading paper in the installed tray, specify the paper type from the printer operator panel.
a. Press
until >SETUP appears, and then press
b. Press
until >Tray Settings appears, and then press
c.
d.
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
.
.
b.
c. Press
until the installed tray appears, and then press
.
d. Press
until >Paper Type appears, and then press
.
e. Press
until >Paper Size appears, and then press
.
f. Confirm that the selected paper type is marked with an asterisk(*), and then press Menu .
11. If you installed the optional 550-sheet paper feeder after installing the printer driver, update your
driver by following the instructions for each operating system. If the multifunction printer is on a
network, update the driver for each client.
When Using PCL Driver
Microsoft® Windows Vista®
1. Click Start
Control Panel
Hardware and Sound
Printers .
2. Right-click the multifunction printer and select Properties .
3. Click the Options tab, and then select Get Information from Printer .
4. Click Apply , and then click OK .
5. Close the Printers dialog box.
Windows® XP, Windows XP 64-bit Edition, Windows Server® 2003,
Windows Server 2003 Enterprise x64 Edition
1. Click Start
Printers and Faxes .
2. Right-click the multifunction printer and select Properties .
3. Click the Options tab, and then select Get Information from Printer .
4. Click Apply , and then click OK .
5. Close the Printers and Faxes dialog box.
Windows Server® 2008, Windows Server 2008 Enterprise x64 Edition
1. Click Start
Control Panel
Printers .
2. Right-click the mulfunction printer and select Properties .
3. Click the Options tab, and then select Get Information from Printer .
4. Click Apply , and then click OK .
5. Close the Printers dialog box.
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
4.
5.
Windows 2000/Windows NT® 4.0
1. Click Start
Settings
Printers .
2. Right-click the multifunction printer and select Properties .
3. Click the Options tab, and then select Get Information from Printer .
4. Click Apply , and then click OK .
5. Close the Printers dialog box.
If the printer information is not updated automatically after clicking Get Information from Printer , follow
these steps:
1. Click the Options tab, and then select 550 Sheet Feeder in the Items list box.
2. Select Available for the 550-sheet feeder setting.
3. Click Apply , and then click OK .
4. Close the Printers and Faxes (or Printers ) dialog box.
When Using PS Driver
Microsoft Windows Vista
1. Click Start
Control Panel
Hardware and Sound
Printers .
2. Right-click the multifunction printer that is using the PS driver, and then select Properties from the
displayed list.
3. Click the Device Settings tab, and then select 2-Tray Module for the Paper Tray Configuration
item under Installable Options .
4. Click Apply , and then click OK .
5. Close the Printers dialog box.
Windows XP, Windows XP 64-bit Edition, Windows Server 2003,
Windows Server 2003 Enterprise x64 Edition
1. Click Start
Printers and Faxes .
2. Right-click the multifunction printer that is using the PS driver, and then select Properties from the
displayed list.
3. Click the Device Settings tab, and then select 2-Tray Module for the Paper Tray Configuration
item under Installable Options .
4.
5.
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
3.
4. Click Apply , and then click OK .
5. Close the Printers and Faxes dialog box.
Windows Server® 2008, Windows Server 2008 Enterprise x64 Edition
1. Click Start
Control Panel
Printers .
2. Right-click the mulfunction printer that is using the PS driver, and then select Properties from the
displayed list.
3. Click the Device Settings tab, and then select 2-Tray Module for the Paper Tray Configuration
item under Installable Options .
4. Click Apply , and then click OK .
5. Close the Printers dialog box.
Windows 2000/Windows NT 4.0
1. Click Start
Settings
Printers .
2. Right-click the multifunction printer that is using the PS driver, and then select Properties from the
displayed list.
3. Click the Device Settings tab, and then select 2-Tray Module for the Paper Tray Configuration
item under Installable Options .
4. Click OK .
5. Close the Printers dialog box.
Mac OS X
1. Select the multifunction printer from the Printer List screen in Print Center (or Printer Setup
Utility ).
2. Click Printers on the Print Center (or Printer Setup Utility ) menu bar, and select Show Info .
3. Select Installable Options , and select the options that have been installed on the multifunction
printer, and then click Apply Changes .
Installing a Duplexer
NOTICE: To protect the drums of the print cartridges against bright light, close the front cover within
five minutes. If the front cover remains open for more than five minutes, print quality may
deteriorate.
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
NOTICE: Ensure nothing touches or scratches the surface (black-colored film) of the transfer belt
unit. Scratches, dirt, or oil from your hands on the film of the transfer belt unit may reduce print
quality.
1. Ensure that the multifunction printer is turned off.
2. Remove all packaging from duplex module.
3. Push the button (right side) and open the front cover.
4. Pull up on the belt release levers and rotate the transfer belt unit up as shown in the illustration.
5.
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
5. Remove the connector cap.
NOTE: The connector cap in your printer may look different from illustration.
6. With the connector of the duplexer toward the slot, push the duplexer into the slot.
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
6.
NOTE: Ensure that the duplexer is correctly connected to the multifunction printer with connectors
and cannot be moved easily.
7. Close the transfer belt unit by pulling it down.
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
8. Close the front cover.
9. Turn on the multifunction printer.
10. Print a system settings page to verify that the optional duplexer is installed correctly.
a. Press
until >SETUP appears, and then press
b.
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
.
a.
b. Press
until >Reports appears, and then press
c. System Settings is displayed. Press
.
.
The system settings page is printed.
d. Verify Duplexer is listed in the system settings under Printer Options .
If the duplexer is not listed, turn off the multifunction printer, unplug the power cable, and
reinstall the optional duplexer.
11. If you installed the optional duplexer after installing the printer driver, update your driver by following
the instructions for each operating system. If the multifunction printer is on a network, update the
driver for each client.
When Using PCL Driver
Microsoft® Windows Vista®
1. Click Start
Control Panel
Hardware and Sound
Printers .
2. Right-click the multifunction printer and select Properties .
3. Click the Options tab, and then select Get Information from Printer .
4. Click Apply , and then click OK .
5. Close the Printers dialog box.
Windows® XP, Windows XP 64-bit Edition, Windows Server® 2003,
Windows Server 2003 Enterprise x64 Edition
1. Click Start
Printers and Faxes .
2. Right-click the multifunction printer and select Properties .
3. Click the Options tab, and then select Get Information from Printer .
4. Click Apply , and then click OK .
5. Close the Printers and Faxes dialog box.
Windows Server® 2008, Windows Server 2008 Enterprise x64 Edition
1. Click Start
Control Panel
Printers .
2. Right-click the multifunction printer and select Properties .
3.
4.
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
2.
3. Click the Options tab, and then select Get Information from Printer .
4. Click Apply , and then click OK .
5. Close the Printers dialog box.
Windows 2000/Windows NT® 4.0
1. Click Start
Settings
Printers .
2. Right-click the multifunction printer and select Properties .
3. Click the Options tab, and then select Get Information from Printer .
4. Click Apply , and then click OK .
5. Close the Printers dialog box.
If the printer information is not updated automatically after clicking Get Information from Printer , follow
these steps:
1. Click the Options tab, and then select Duplexer in the Items list box.
2. Select Available for the duplexer setting.
3. Click Apply , and then click OK .
4. Close the Printers and Faxes (or Printers ) dialog box.
When Using PS Driver
Microsoft Windows Vista
1. Click Start
Control Panel
Hardware and Sound
Printers .
2. Right-click the multifunction printer that is using the PS driver, and then select Properties from the
displayed list.
3. Click the Device Settings tab, and then select Available for the Duplexer item under Installable
Options .
4. Click Apply , and then click OK .
5. Close the Printers dialog box.
Windows XP, Windows XP 64-bit Edition, Windows Server 2003,
Windows Server 2003 Enterprise x64 Edition
1. Click Start
Printers and Faxes .
2.
3.
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
1.
2. Right-click the multifunction printer that is using the PS driver, and then select Properties from the
displayed list.
3. Click the Device Settings tab, and then select Available for the Duplexer item under Installable
Options .
4. Click Apply , and then click OK .
5. Close the Printers and Faxes dialog box.
Windows Server® 2008, Windows Server 2008 Enterprise x64 Edition
1. Click Start
Control Panel
Printers .
2. Right-click the multifunction printer that is using the PS driver, and then select Properties from the
displayed list.
3. Click the Device Settings tab, and then select Available for the Duplexer item under Installable
Options .
4. Click Apply , and then click OK .
5. Close the Printers dialog box.
Windows 2000/Windows NT 4.0
1. Click Start
Settings
Printers .
2. Right-click the multifunction printer that is using the PS driver, and then select Properties from the
displayed list.
3. Click the Device Settings tab, and then select Available for the Duplexer item under Installable
Options .
4. Click OK .
5. Close the Printers dialog box.
Mac OS X
1. Select the multifunction printer from the Printer List screen in Print Center (or Printer Setup
Utility ).
2. Click Printers on the Print Center (or Printer Setup Utility ) menu bar, and select Show Info .
3. Select Installable Options , and select the options that have been installed on the multifunction
printer, and then click Apply Changes .
4. Click Apply , and then click OK .
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Installing a Memory Card
Your multifunction printer supports 256 MB, 512 MB, and 1024 MB additional memory cards.
1. Ensure that the multifunction printer is turned off.
2. Turn the screw on the control board cover in a counter-clockwise direction and open the cover.
3. With the connector of the memory card toward the slot, insert the memory card at an angle into the
slot.
4. Push the memory card into the slot firmly.
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
5. Pivot the memory card downward until it clicks into place.
NOTE: Ensure that the memory card is firmly fixed in the slot and cannot be moved easily.
6. Close the control board cover and turn the screw clockwise.
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
7. Turn on the multifunction printer.
8. Print a system settings page to verify that the additional print memory is installed correctly.
a. Press
until >SETUP appears, and then press
b. Press
until >Reports appears, and then press
c. System Settings is displayed. Press
.
.
.
The system settings page is printed.
d. Verify the capacity of the installed memory listed in the system settings under General .
If the memory capacity has not increased, turn off the multifunction printer, unplug the power
cable, and reinstall the memory card.
9. If you installed the additional print memory after installing the printer driver, update your driver by
following the instructions for the operating system you are using. If the multifunction printer is on a
network, update the driver for each client.
When Using PCL Driver
Microsoft® Windows Vista®
1. Click Start
Control Panel
Hardware and Sound
Printers .
2. Right-click the multifunction printer and select Properties .
3. Click the Options tab, and then select Get Information from Printer .
4. Click Apply , and then click OK .
5. Close the Printers dialog box
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
4.
5.
Windows® XP, Windows XP 64-bit Edition, Windows Server® 2003,
Windows Server 2003 Enterprise x64 Edition
1. Click Start
Printers and Faxes .
2. Right-click the multifunction printer and select Properties .
3. Click the Options tab, and then select Get Information from Printer .
4. Click Apply , and then click OK .
5. Close the Printers and Faxes dialog box.
Windows Server® 2008, Windows Server 2008 Enterprise x64 Edition
1. Click Start
Control Panel
Printers .
2. Right-click the multifunction printer and select Properties .
3. Click the Options tab, and then select Get Information from Printer .
4. Click Apply , and then click OK .
5. Close the Printers dialog box.
Windows 2000/Windows NT® 4.0
1. Click Start
Settings
Printers .
2. Right-click the multifunction printer and select Properties .
3. Click the Options tab, and then select Get Information from Printer .
4. Click Apply , and then click OK .
5. Close the Printers dialog box.
If the printer information is not updated automatically after clicking Get Information from Printer , follow
these steps:
1. Click the Options tab, and then select Memory Capacity on the Items list box.
2. Select the total amount of the installed print memory for the memory capacity setting.
3. Click Apply , and then click OK .
4. Close the Printers and Faxes (or Printers ) dialog box.
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
4.
When Using PS Driver
Microsoft Windows Vista
1. Click Start
Control Panel
Hardware and Sound
Printers .
2. Right-click the multifunction printer and select Properties .
3. Click the Options tab, and then select Get Information from Printer .
4. Click Apply , and then click OK .
5. Close the Printers dialog box.
Windows XP, Windows XP 64-bit Edition, Windows Server 2003,
Windows Server 2003 Enterprise x64 Edition
1. Click Start
Printers and Faxes .
2. Right-click the multifunction printer that is using the PS driver, and then select Properties from the
displayed list.
3. Click the Device Settings tab, and then select the total amount of the installed print memory for the
Memory Capacity item under Installable Options .
4. Click Apply , and then click OK .
5. Close the Printers dialog box.
Windows Server® 2008, Windows Server 2008 Enterprise x64 Edition
1. Click Start
Control Panel
Printers .
2. Right-click the multifunction printer that is using the PS driver, and then select Properties from the
displayed list.
3. Click the Device Settings tab, and then select the total amount of the installed print memory for the
Memory Capacity item under Installable Options .
4. Click Apply , and then click OK .
5. Close the Printers dialog box.
Windows 2000/Windows NT 4.0
1. Click Start
Settings
Printers .
2. Right-click the multifunction printer that is using the PS driver, and then select Properties from the
displayed list.
3. Click the Device Settings tab, and then select the total amount of the installed print memory for the
4.
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
3.
Memory Capacity item under Installable Options .
4. Click OK .
5. Close the Printers dialog box.
Mac OS X
1. Select the multifunction printer from the Printer List screen in Print Center (or Printer Setup
Utility ).
2. Click Printers on the Print Center (or Printer Setup Utility ) menu bar, and select Show Info .
3. Select Installable Options , and select the options that have been installed on the multifunction
printer, and then click Apply Changes .
4. Click Apply , and then click OK .
Installing the Dell Multi-Protocol Card
A multi-protocol card allows you to use the following network protocols.
Network
protocol
Supported operating systems
IPP
Windows Vista/XP/XP x64/Server 2003/Server
2003 x64/Server 2008/Server 2008 x64/2000/NT
4.0, Mac OS X 10.3.9/10.4.3
SMB
Windows Vista/XP/XP x64/Server 2003/Server
2003 x64/Server 2008/Server 2008 x64/2000/ NT
4.0
IPX/SPX
NetWare 3.12/3.2/4.1/4.11/4.2/5/6/6.5*
AppleTalk
Mac OS X 10.2.8/10.3.9/10.4.3
Bonjour
Mac OS X 10.2.8/10.3.9/10.4.3
IPv6
Windows Vista
*Only compatible with Support Pack 1.1 or later.
1. Ensure that the multifunction printer is turned off and unplug all cables including the power cord from
the rear of the multifunction printer.
2. Turn the screw on the control board cover in counter-clockwise direction and open the cover.
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
3. With the connector of the multi-protocol card aligned over the mating connector on the control board,
make connections together by pressing on the back of the MPC card nearest the connecter pins.
4. Press the printed circles with your fingers to secure the multi-protocol card to the connector.
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
NOTE: Avoid pressing down on the multi-protocol card's connector.
NOTE: Ensure that the multi-protocol card is firmly fixed in the connector and cannot be moved
easily.
5. Insert the two screws through the control board case and into the Multi-Protocol Card as shown, and
tighten the screws.
6. Close the control board cover and turn the screw clockwise.
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Confirming the Installation of the Multi-Protocol Card
1. Print a printer settings page to verify that the optional multi-protocol card is installed correctly.
a. Press
until >SETUP appears, and then press
b. Press
until >Reports appears, and then press
c. System Settings is displayed. Press
.
.
.
The system settings page is printed.
d. Verify Multi-Protocol Card is listed in the system settings under Printer Options .
If it is not listed, turn off the multifunction printer, unplug the power cable, and reinstall the
optional multi-protocol card.
Installing the Dell Wireless Printer Adapter 3310 USB
Connectivity Technology Wireless
Compliant Standards
802.11b/802.11g
Bandwidth
2.4GHz
Data Transfer Rate
11g mode: 54, 48, 36, 24, 18, 12, 9, 6 Mbps
11b mode: 11, 5.5, 2, 1 Mbps
Device Type
Wireless Printer Adapter
Security
64(40-bit key)/128(104-bit key) WEP Encryption/WPA/WAP2
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
NOTE: To use the wireless printer adapter, you must install the multi-protocol card first. To install the
card, see "Installing the Dell Multi-Protocol Card ".
1. Ensure that the multifunction printer is turned off and unplug all cables including the power cord from
the rear of the multifunction printer.
NOTE: Ensure that the multi-protocol card is installed.
2. Remove the single thumbscrew from the top of the plate covering the wireless printer adapter socket
and then remove the plate.
3. Insert the wireless printer adapter into the USB socket with the Dell logo of the adapter facing out.
4.
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
NOTE: Ensure that the adapter is firmly fixed in the socket and cannot be moved easily.
4. Attach the wireless printer adapter cap by inserting the cap with the mark facing out until it clicks into
place.
5. Turn on the multifunction printer and configure the wireless network settings.
Wireless Installation using USB connection
NOTE: The optional multi-protocol card with the Wireless LAN Adapter attached must be installed on
the multifunction printer. Read this manual or the installation manual found in the wireless network
adapter box to install the optional multi-protocol card and wireless network adapter for the Dell MFP
Laser 3115cn.
Case
1:
Setup the wireless connection in the Infrastructure mode through the USB cable, if you are using
Microsoft ® Windows ® XP, Windows 2000, Windows Server® 2003, Windows Server® 2008, or
Windows Vista®
Case
2:
Installation of the printer driver on an existing wirelessly connected Dell Multifunction Color Laser
Printer 3115cn
Case
3:
Construct new wireless network environment for both computer and multifunction printer (When
wireless setting needs to your computer)
Case 1. Setup the wireless connection in the Infrastructure mode
through the USB cable, if you are using Microsoft® Windows ® XP,
Windows 2000, Windows Server® 2003, Windows Server ® 2008, or
Windows Vista®
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
NOTE: The recommended wireless protocol setup requires a USB cable to be present during setup.
Ensure that it is available before you start the wireless setup. To purchase a USB cable, visit
www.dell.com .
NOTE: Ensure that your computer is already connected to your wireless access point, and that you
have the wireless protocol information (SSID, Security Settings, and Password) about your wireless
access point before you start the wireless setup. If in doubt, contact your wireless access point
distributor.
If you are using Windows XP, Windows Server 2003 (after SP1), Windows Server 2008, or Windows Vista,
you will need to turn off Windows Firewall before you proceed with the installation. To disable or enable your
built-in operating system firewall:
1. Click Start
Help and Support .
2. In the Search box, type firewall and then click the green arrow.
3. In the Pick a Task list, click Enable or disable Internet Connection Firewall and then follow the
instructions on the screen.
NOTE: Dell recommends that you enable your built-in operating system firewall after you install the
printer software. Enabling the built-in operating system firewall after you install the printer software
does not limit the use of your network printer.
1. Insert the Drivers and Utilities CD into the computer.
NOTE: If the CD does not automatically launch, click Start
the drive letter of your CD), and then click OK .
Run , type D:\Setup.exe (where D is
NOTE: For Windows Vista, click Continue when the User Account Control dialog box appears.
2. Select Network Installation .
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
3. Connect a USB cable from the Dell MFP Laser 3115cn to your computer.
NOTE: When the Found New Hardware Wizard dialog box appears, press Cancel to continue.
4. Select Configure Wireless Printer using a USB connection to setup the wireless protocol on the
printer.
5.
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
5. When this instruction screen appears, follow the instructions to reset the wireless settings on the
printer.
6. Click OK when you are done.
NOTE: When the Found New Hardware Wizard dialog box appears, press Cancel to continue.
7.
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
7. Click on the checkbox next to the printer you want to configure and click Next .
NOTE: If you are unable to see any printer listed, click on Update to search for the printer. If you are
still unable to see a printer listed in the Printer text box, check your USB connection, ensure that the
wireless adapter is seated correctly and restart the installation again.
8. Enter the SSID used in your wireless router.
9. Enter the Security used in your wireless router.
10. If you are using WEP or WPA-PSK security in your wireless router, enter the Index , Protocol , and
Password information.
NOTE: To set WPA2-PSK-AES as security, select WPA-PSK and AES.
11. Click Next when you are done.
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
12. You can change the Printer Name and driver setup according to your requirement. When you select the
Fixed IP option button for IP Address assignment , click Change... and enter the IP address and
subnet mask on the screen.
NOTE: When you enter a fixed IP address, avoid the "169.254.xxx.xxx" address used by AutoIP.
13. Click Next when you are done.
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
14. Select the different printer software to install.
15. Click Install when you are done.
16. When you see the Wireless configuration is now complete screen, you have successfully
configured the wireless setting on your printer.
17.
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
16.
17. Click Next to continue.
18. You should now see this screen with an IP Address detected for your wireless printer. If you do not see
an IP Address listed next to your printer, click Update .
19. Click Install to continue.
NOTE: If you are unable to locate an IP Address for your printer, check that you have disabled the
Windows Firewall on your computer, and that your computer is properly connected to your wireless
access point or wireless router, and that your USB cable is properly connected to your printer. Click
Cancel and restart the installation again.
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
20. If you select the I am setting up this printer on server check box on the Select Printer screen and
also select the PostScript Driver check box on the Enter Printer Settings screen, the Adobe
Systems Inc. License Agreement screen appears. Select the I accept the terms of the license
agreement option button, and then click Install .
21. You have now successfully setup the wireless settings on your printer and successfully installed the
printer software on the computer.
22. Disconnect the USB cable from your computer.
23. Click Print Test Page to test your printer software setup or FAX Initial Setup to setup the fax on
your printer or click Finish to exit the installation.
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Case 2. Installation of the printer driver on an existing wirelessly
connected Dell Multifunction Color Laser Printer 3115cn
NOTE: Ensure that your computer is already connected to your wireless router, and that you have the
wireless protocol information about your wireless router before you start the wireless setup. If in
doubt, contact your wireless router distributor.
NOTE: If you are using Windows XP, Windows Server 2003 (after SP1), Windows Server 2008, or
Windows Vista, you will need to turn off Windows Firewall before you proceed with the installation.
To disable or enable your built-in operating system firewall, perform the following steps:
1. Click Start
Help and Support .
2. In the Search box, type firewall and then click the green arrow.
3. In the Pick a Task list, click Enable or disable Internet Connection Firewall and then follow the
instructions on the screen.
NOTE: Dell recommends that you enable your built-in operating system firewall after you install the
printer software. Enabling the built-in operating system firewall after you install the printer software
does not limit the use of your network printer.
1. Insert the Drivers and Utilities CD into the computer.
NOTE: If the CD does not automatically launch, click Start
the drive letter of your CD), and then click OK .
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Run , type D:\Setup.exe (where D is
NOTE: For Windows Vista, click Continue when the User Account Control dialog box appears.
2. Select Personal Installation .
3. Select Configure New Wired Printer, or Install Driver and Software for existing network
printer to install the printer software on your computer.
4.
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
4. Click Local Installation-Install printer on this computer to install the printer software on your
computer.
5. Click on the checkbox next to the printer to select the printer that you want to connect to for this
installation.
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
6. Click Update if you do not see your printer listed or click Add Printer to manually add the IP address.
7. Click Next to continue.
8. You can change the Printer Name and driver setup according to your requirement.
9.
10.
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
9. Click Next when you are done.
10. Select the different printer software to install.
11. Click Install when you are done.
12. You have now successfully installed the printer software on the computer.
13. Click Print Test Page to test your printer software setup or FAX Initial Setup to setup the fax on
your printer or click Finish to exit the installation.
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Case 3. Construct new wireless network environment for both computer
and multifunction printer (When wireless setting needs to be set to your
computer)
1. Insert the Drivers and Utilities CD into your computer.
2. The Drivers and Utilities CD should launch the installation software automatically.
If the CD does not automatically launch, click Start
Run , type D:\Setup.exe (where D is the drive
letter of your CD), and then click OK .
NOTE: For Windows Vista, click Continue when the User Account Control dialog box appears.
3. Select the Network Installation option button, and then click Next .
4. Select the Configure Wireless Printer using a USB connection (Recommended) option button,
and then click Next .
5. Reset the wireless setting of the multifunction printer following the steps on the Reset Wireless
Setting screen.
6. In the list on the Select Printer screen, check the check box of the target printer that you are making
wireless setting for, and then click Next .
NOTE: When you enter a fixed IP address, avoid the "169.254.xxx.xxx " address used by AutoIP.
7. On the Enter Wireless Network Settings screen, set each wireless setting item, and then click Next
. When you select the Fixed IP option button for IP Address assignment , click Change... and enter
the IP address and subnet mask on the screen.
8.
9.
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
7.
8. Set each item on the Enter Printer Settings screen, and then click Next .
9. On the Printer Software screen, specify the software that you want to install and installation path,
and then click Next . At this point, the wireless setting specified on the Enter Wireless Network
Settings screen is sent to the multifunction printer.
10. On the Wireless configuration is now complete screen, create the wireless setting sent to the
multifunction printer on your computer following the steps below, and then click Next .
For Windows XP, Windows Server 2003:
a. Select Network Connections from Control Panel .
b. Right-click Wireless Network Connection and select Properties .
c. Select the Wireless Network tab.
d. Ensure that the check box for Use Windows to configure my wireless network settings is
checked.
e. Click Advanced .
f. Do either of the following:
When wireless ad-hoc mode is set to the multifunction printer:
Select Computer to Computer (ad hoc) networks only and close the Advanced dialog box.
When wireless infrastructure mode is set to the multifunction printer:
Select Access point (Infrastructure) networks only and close the Advanced dialog box.
g. Click Add to display Wireless network properties.
h. Enter the setting that you send to the multifunction printer and click OK .
i. Click Move up to move the setting to the top of the list.
j. Click OK to close the Property dialog box.
For Windows Vista:
a. Open Control Panel .
b. Select Network and Internet .
c. Select Network and Sharing Center.
d. Select Connect to a network .
e. Select the setting you send to the multifunction from the network items listed in Connect to a
f.
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
d.
e.
network .
f. Select Connect Anyway in the warning dialog box indication indicating you are entering an
unsecured area.
g. Click Close in the dialog box after confirming the connection is a success.
For Windows Server 2008:
a. Open Control Panel .
b. Select Network and Sharing Center .
c. Select Connect to a network .
d. Select the setting you send to the printer from the network items listed in Connect to a
network .
e. Select Connect Anyway in the warning dialog box indication indicating you are entering an
unsecured area.
f. Click Close in the dialog box after confirming the connection is a success.
11. On the Setting-Ready Printer screen, verify that the correct IP address is assigned to the
multifunction printer to which the wireless setting is set, and then click Install .
NOTE: If your system has any of the following operating systems:
- Windows XP x64
- Windows Server® 2003 x64
- Windows Server® 2008 x64
- Windows Vista x64
- Windows Vista x86
,skip step 12 and go to step 13.
12. If you select the I am setting up this printer on server check box on the Select Printer screen and
also select the PostScript Driver check box on the Enter Printer Settings screen, the Adobe
Systems Inc. License Agreement screen appears. Select the I accept the terms of the license
agreement option button, and then click Install .
13. On the Congratulations! screen, click Finish to complete the installation. A test page will be printed
with the installed printer by clicking the Print Test Page button.
Use the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool to monitor the status of your network printer without
leaving your desk. You can view and/or change the printer configuration settings, monitor toner level, and
when it is time to order replacement consumables, just click the Dell supplies link right from your Web
browser.
NOTE: The Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool is not available when the multifunction printer is
locally attached to a computer or a print server.
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Wireless Installation using wireless connection
Step 1. Install a multifunction printer to the already-operating wireless
network (When wireless setting is already set to your computer)
1. Insert the Drivers and Utilities CD into your computer to launch the installation software.
NOTE: If the CD does not automatically launch, click Start
(where D is the drive letter of your CD), and then click OK .
Run , and then type D:\setup.exe
NOTE: For Windows Vista, click Continue when the User Account Control dialog box appears.
2. Select the Network Installation option button, and then click Next .
3. Select the Configure Wireless Printer using a wireless connection (Advanced) option button,
and then click Next .
4. Reset the wireless setting of the multifunction printer following the steps on the Reset Wireless
Setting screen.
5. Create the wireless setting of your computer following the steps shown on the Enable
Communication with Printer screen, and then click Next .
The steps are as follows:
For Windows XP and Windows Server 2003:
a. Select Network Connections from Control Panel .
b. Right-click Wireless Network Connection and select Properties .
c. Select the Wireless Networks tab.
d. Ensure that the check box for Use Windows to configure my wireless network settings is
checked.
NOTE: Ensure that you write down the current wireless computer settings in steps d and f so
that you can restore them later.
e. Click the Advanced button.
f. Select Computer to Computer (ad hoc) networks only and close the Advanced dialog box.
g. Click the Add button to display Wireless network properties.
h. In the Association tab, enter the following information and click OK .
Network name (SSID): dell_device
Network Authentication: Open
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Data encryption: Disabled
Ad hoc network: checked
i. Click the Move up button to move the newly added SSID to the top of the list.
j. Click OK to close the Property dialog box.
For Windows Vista:
a. Open Control Panel .
b. Select Network and Internet .
c. Select Network and Sharing Center .
d. Select Connect to a network .
e. Select dell_device from the network items listed in Connect to a network .
f. Select Connect Anyway in the warning dialog box indication indicating you are entering an
unsecured area.
g. Click Close in the dialog box after confirming the connection is a success.
For Windows Server 2008:
a. Open Control Panel .
b. Select Network and Sharing Center.
c. Select Connect to a network .
6. On the Enter Wireless Network Settings screen, set each wireless setting item, and then click Next
.
7. When you select the Fixed IP option button for IP Address assignment , click Change... and enter the
IP address and subnet mask on the screen.
NOTE: When you enter a fixed IP address, avoid the "169.254.xxx.xxx " address used by AutoIP.
8. Set each item on the Enter Printer Settings screen, and then click Next .
9. On the Printer Software screen, specify the software that you want to install and installation path,
and then click Next . At this point, the wireless setting specified on the Enter Wireless Network
Settings screen is sent to the multifunction printer.
10. On the Wireless configuration is now complete screen, change the wireless setting of your
computer to the same as that sent to the multifunction printer, and then click Next .
a.
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
For Windows XP and Windows Server 2003:
a. Select Network Connections from Control Panel .
b. Right-click Wireless Network Connection and select Properties .
c. Select the Wireless Network tab.
d. Click Advanced .
e. Do either of the following:
When wireless ad-hoc mode is set to the multifunction printer:
Select Computer to Computer (ad hoc) networks only and close the Advanced dialog box.
When wireless infrastructure mode is set to the multifunction printer:
Select Access point (Infrastructure) networks only and close the Advanced dialog box.
f. Select the setting that you send to the multifunction printer in the list in Preferred Network
group.
g. Click Move up to move the setting to the top of the list.
h. Click OK to close the Property dialog box.
For Windows Vista:
a. Open Control Panel .
b. Select Network and Internet .
c. Select Network and Sharing Center .
d. Select Connect to a network .
e. Select the original setting from the network items listed in Connect to a network , and then
click Connect .
For Windows Server 2008:
a. Open Control Panel .
b. Select Network and Sharing Center.
c. Select Connect to a network .
d. Select the original setting from the network items listed in Connect to a network, and then
click Connect .
11.
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
d.
11. On the Setting-Ready Printer screen, verify that the correct IP address is assigned to the
multifunction printer to which the wireless setting is set, and then click Install .
NOTE: If your system has any of the following operating systems:
- Windows XP x64
- Windows Server® 2003 x64
- Windows Server® 2008x64
- Windows Vista x64
- Windows Vista x86
,skip step 12 and go to step 13.
12. If you select the I am setting up this printer on server check box on the Select Printer screen and
also select the PostScript Driver check box on the Enter Printer Settings screen, the Adobe
Systems Inc. License Agreement screen appears. Select the I accept the terms of the license
agreement option button, and then click Install .
13. On the Congratulations! screen, click Finish to complete the installation. A test page will be printed
with the installed printer by clicking the Print Test Page button.
Step 2. Construct new wireless network environment for both computer
and multifunction printer (When wireless setting needs to be set to your
computer)
1. Insert the Drivers and Utilities CD into your computer to launch the installation software.
NOTE: If the CD does not automatically launch, click Start
(where D is the drive letter of your CD), and then click OK .
Run , and then type D:\setup.exe
NOTE: For Windows Vista, click Continue when the User Account Control dialog box appears.
2. Select the Network Installation option button, and then click Next .
3. Select the Configure Wireless Printer using a wireless connection (Advanced) option button,
and then click Next .
4. Reset the wireless setting of the multifunction printer following the steps on the Reset Wireless
Setting screen.
5. Create the wireless setting of your computer following the steps shown on the Enable
Communication with Printer screen, and then click Next . The steps are as follows:
For Windows XP and Windows Server 2003:
a. Select Network Connections from Control Panel .
b. Right-click Wireless Network Connection and select Properties .
c. Select the Wireless Networks tab.
d.
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
b.
c.
d. Ensure that the check box for Use Windows to configure my wireless network settings is
checked.
NOTE: Ensure that you write down the current wireless computer settings in step d and step f
so that you can restore them later.
e. Click the Advanced button.
f. Select Computer to Computer (ad hoc) networks only and close the Advanced dialog box.
g. Click the Add button to display Wireless network properties .
h. In the Association tab, enter the following information and click OK .
Network name (SSID): dell_device
Network Authentication: Open
Data encryption: Disabled
Ad hoc network: checked
i. Click the Move up button to move the newly added SSID to the top of the list.
j. Click OK to close the Property dialog box.
For Windows Vista:
a. Open Control Panel .
b. Select Network and Internet .
c. Select Network and Sharing Center .
d. Select Connect to a network .
e. Select dell_device from the network items listed in Connect to a network .
f. Select Connect Anyway in the warning dialog box indication indicating you are entering an
unsecured area.
g. Click Close in the dialog box after confirming the connection is a success.
For Windows Server 2008:
a. Open Control Panel .
b. Select Network and Sharing Center.
c. Select Connect to a network .
d. Select dell_device from the network items listed in Connect to a network .
e.
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
d.
e. Select Connect Anyway in the warning dialog box indicating you are entering an unsecured
area.
f. Click Close in the dialog box after confirming the connection is a success.
6. On the Enter Wireless Network Settings screen, set each wireless setting item, and then click Next
.
7. When you select the Fixed IP option button for IP address assignment , click Change... and enter
the IP address and subnet mask on the screen.
NOTE: When you enter a fixed IP address, avoid the "169.254.xxx.xxx " address used by AutoIP.
8. Set each item on the Enter Printer Settings screen, and then click Next .
9. On the Printer Software screen, specify the software that you want to install and installation path,
and then click Next . At this point, the wireless setting specified on the Enter Wireless Network
Settings screen is sent to the multifunction printer.
10. On the Wireless configuration is now complete screen, create the wireless setting sent to the
multifunction printer on your computer following the steps below, and then click Next .
For Windows XP and Windows Server 2003:
a. Select Network Connections from Control Panel .
b. Right-click Wireless Network Connection and select Properties .
c. Select the Wireless Network tab.
d. Ensure that the check box for Use Windows to configure my wireless network settings is
checked.
e. Click Advanced .
f. Do either of the following:
When wireless ad-hoc mode is set to the multifunction printer:
Select Computer to Computer (ad hoc) networks only and close the Advanced dialog box.
When wireless infrastructure mode is set to the multifunction printer:
Select Access point (Infrastructure) networks only and close the Advanced dialog box.
g. Click Add to display Wireless network properties.
h. Enter the setting that you send to the multifunction printer and click OK .
i. Click Move up to move the setting to the top of the list.
j.
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
h.
i.
j. Click OK to close the Property dialog box.
For Windows Vista:
a. Open Control Panel .
b. Select Network and Internet .
c. Select Network and Sharing Center.
d. Select Connect to a network .
e. Select the setting you send to the multifunction from the network items listed in Connect to a
network .
f. Select Connect Anyway in the warning dialog box indication indicating you are entering an
unsecured area.
g. Click Close in the dialog box after confirming the connection is a success.
For Windows Server 2008:
a. Open Control Panel .
b. Select Network and Sharing Center .
c. Select Connect to a network .
d. Select the setting you send to the printer from the network items listed in Connect to a
network .
e. Select Connect Anyway in the warning dialog box indication indicating you are entering an
unsecured area.
f. Click Close in the dialog box after confirming the connection is a success.
11. On the Setting-Ready Printer screen, verify that the correct IP address is assigned to the
multifunction printer to which the wireless setting is set, and then click Install .
NOTE: If your system has any of the following operating systems:
- Windows XP x64
- Windows Server® 2003 x64
- Windows Server® 2008 x64
- Windows Vista x64
- Windows Vista x86
,skip step 12 and go to step 13.
12. If you select the I am setting up this printer on server check box on the Select Printer screen and
also select the PostScript Driver check box on the Enter Printer Settings screen, the Adobe
Systems Inc. License Agreement screen appears. Select the I accept the terms of the license
13.
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
12.
agreement option button, and then click Install .
13. On the Congratulations! screen, click Finish to complete the installation. A test page will be printed
with the installed printer by clicking the Print Test Page button.
Use the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool to monitor the status of your network printer without
leaving your desk. You can view and/or change the printer configuration settings, monitor toner level, and
when it is time to order replacement consumables, just click the Dell supplies link right from your Web
browser.
NOTE: The Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool is not available when the multifunction printer is
locally attached to a computer or a print server.
Wireless Installation using Dell Printer Configuration Web
Tool
Step 1. Install a multifunction printer to the already-operating wireless
network (When wireless setting is already set to your computer)
For Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol network:
1. Create wireless setting of your computer following the steps below:
For Windows XP and Windows Server 2003:
a. Select Network Connections from Control Panel .
b. Right-click Wireless Network Connection and select Properties .
c. Select the Wireless Networks tab.
d. Ensure that the check box for Use Windows to configure my wireless network settings is
checked.
NOTE: Ensure that you write down the current wireless computer settings in steps d and f so
that you can restore them later.
e. Click the Advanced button.
f. Select Computer to Computer (ad hoc) networks only and close the Advanced dialog box.
g. Click the Add button to display Wireless network properties .
h. In the Association tab, enter the following information and click OK .
Network name (SSID): dell_device
Network Authentication: Open
Data encryption: Disabled
i.
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Ad hoc network: checked
i. Click the Move up button to move the newly added SSID to the top of the list.
j. Click OK to close the Property dialog box.
NOTE: When your operating system is earlier than Windows 2000, create settings according to
the manual of the wireless setting tool provided by your wireless device manufacturer.
For Windows Vista:
a. Open Control Panel .
b. Select Network and Internet .
c. Select Network and Sharing Center .
d. Select Connect to a network .
e. Select dell_device from the network items listed in Connect to a network .
f. Select Connect Anyway in the warning dialog box indication indicating you are entering an
unsecured area.
g. Click Close in the dialog box after confirming the connection is a success.
For Windows Server 2008:
a. Open Control Panel .
b. Select Network and Sharing Center.
c. Select Connect to a network .
d. Select dell_device from the network items listed in Connect to a network .
e. Select Connect Anyway in the warning dialog box indicating you are entering an unsecured
area.
f. Click Close in the dialog box after confirming the connection is a success.
2. Check the IP address assigned by AutoIP on the multifunction printer.
For example, 168.254.1.1
3. Check that the IP address on your computer is assigned by DHCP.
4. Open Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool using the Web browser.
For example, http://168.254.1.1/
5.
6.
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
5. Change the wireless setting of the multifunction printer on Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool.
6. Reset the multifunction printer.
7. Restore the wireless setting on your computer.
For Windows XP and Windows Server 2003:
a. Select Network Connections from Control Panel .
b. Right-click Wireless Network Connection and select Properties .
c. Select Wireless Network tab.
d. Click Advanced .
e. Do either of the following:
When wireless ad-hoc mode is set to the multifunction printer:
Select Computer to Computer (ad hoc) networks only and close the Advanced dialog box.
When wireless infrastructure mode is set to the multifunction printer:
Select Access point (Infrastructure) networks only and close the Advanced dialog box.
f. Select the setting that you send to the multifunction printer in the list in Preferred Network
group.
g. Click Move up to move the setting to the top of the list.
h. Click OK to close the Property dialog box.
NOTE: When your operating system is earlier than Windows 2000, create settings according to
the manual of the wireless setting tool provided by your wireless device manufacturer.
For Windows Vista:
a. Open Control Panel .
b. Select Network and Internet .
c. Select Network and Sharing Center .
d. Select Connect to a network .
e. Select the original setting from the network items listed in Connect to a network , and then
click Connect .
For Windows Server 2008:
a.
b.
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
a. Open Control Panel .
b. Select Network and Sharing Center.
c. Select Connect to a network .
d. Select the original setting from the network items listed in Connect to a network, and then
click Connect .
For Fixed IP network:
1. Create wireless setting of your computer following the steps below:
For Windows XP and Windows Server 2003:
a. Select Network Connections from Control Panel .
b. Right-click Wireless Network Connection and select Properties .
c. Select the Wireless Networks tab.
d. Ensure that the check box for Use Windows to configure my wireless network settings is
checked.
NOTE: Ensure that you write down the current wireless computer settings in steps d and f so
that you can restore them later.
e. Click the Advanced button.
f. Select Computer to Computer (ad hoc) networks only and close the Advanced dialog box.
g. Click the Add button to display Wireless network properties .
h. In the Association tab, enter the following information and click OK .
Network name (SSID): dell_device
Network Authentication: Open
Data encryption: Disabled
Ad hoc network: checked
i. Click the Move up button to move the newly added SSID to the top of the list.
j. Click OK to close the Property dialog box.
NOTE: When your operating system is earlier than Windows 2000, create settings according to
the manual of the wireless setting tool provided by your wireless device manufacturer.
For Windows Vista:
a.
b.
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
a. Open Control Panel .
b. Select Network and Internet .
c. Select Network and Sharing Center .
d. Select Connect to a network .
e. Select dell_device from the network items listed in Connect to a network .
f. Select Connect Anyway in the warning dialog box indication indicating you are entering an
unsecured area.
g. Click Close in the dialog box after confirming the connection is a success.
For Windows Server 2008:
a. Open Control Panel .
b. Select Network and Sharing Center.
c. Select Connect to a network .
d. Select dell_device from the network items listed in Connect to a network .
e. Select Connect Anyway in the warning dialog box indicating you are entering an unsecured
area.
f. Click Close in the dialog box after confirming the connection is a success.
2. Check the IP address on your computer.
For example, 1.2.3.4
3. Set the IP address on the multifunction printer.
For example, 1.2.3.5
4. Open Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool using the Web browser.
For example, http://1.2.3.5/
5. Change the wireless setting of the multifunction printer on Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool.
6. Reset the multifunction printer.
7. Restore the wireless setting on your computer.
For Windows XP and Windows Server 2003:
a.
b.
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
a. Select Network Connections from Control Panel .
b. Right-click Wireless Network Connection and select Properties .
c. Select Wireless Network tab.
d. Click Advanced .
e. Do either of the following:
When wireless ad-hoc mode is set to the multifunction printer:
Select Computer to Computer (ad hoc) networks only and close the Advanced dialog box.
When wireless infrastructure mode is set to the multifunction printer:
Select Access point (Infrastructure) networks only and close the Advanced dialog box.
f. Select the setting that you send to the multifunction printer in the list in Preferred Network
group.
g. Click Move up to move the setting to the top of the list.
h. Click OK to close the Property dialog box.
NOTE: When your operating system is earlier than Windows 2000, create settings according to
the manual of the wireless setting tool provided by your wireless device manufacturer.
For Windows Vista:
a. Open Control Panel .
b. Select Network and Internet .
c. Select Network and Sharing Center .
d. Select Connect to a network .
e. Select the original setting from the network items listed in Connect to a network , and then
click Connect .
For Windows Server 2008:
a. Open Control Panel .
b. Select Network and Sharing Center.
c. Select Connect to a network .
d. Select the original setting from the network items listed in Connect to a network, and then
click Connect .
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
d.
Step 2. Construct new wireless network environment for both computer
and multifunction printer (When wireless setting needs to be set to your
computer)
For Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol network:
1. Create wireless setting of your computer following the steps below:
For Windows XP and Windows Server 2003:
a. Select Network Connections from Control Panel .
b. Right-click Wireless Network Connection and select Properties .
c. Select the Wireless Networks tab.
d. Ensure that the check box for Use Windows to configure my wireless network settings is
checked.
NOTE: Ensure that you write down the current wireless computer settings in steps e and g so
that you can restore them later.
e. Click the Advanced button.
f. Select Computer to Computer (ad hoc) networks only and close the Advanced dialog box.
g. Click the Add button to display Wireless network properties .
h. In the Association tab, enter the following information and click OK .
Network name (SSID): dell_device
Network Authentication: Open
Data encryption: Disabled
Ad hoc network: checked
i. Click the Move up button to move the newly added SSID to the top of the list.
j. Click OK to close the Property dialog box.
NOTE: When your operating system is earlier than Windows 2000, create settings according to
the manual of the wireless setting tool provided by your wireless device manufacturer.
For Windows Vista:
a. Open Control Panel .
b.
c.
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
a.
b. Select Network and Internet .
c. Select Network and Sharing Center .
d. Select Connect to a network .
e. Select dell_device from the network items listed in Connect to a network .
f. Select Connect Anyway in the warning dialog box indication indicating you are entering an
unsecured area.
g. Click Close in the dialog box after confirming the connection is a success.
For Windows Server 2008:
a. Open Control Panel .
b. Select Network and Sharing Center.
c. Select Connect to a network .
d. Select dell_device from the network items listed in Connect to a network .
e. Select Connect Anyway in the warning dialog box indicating you are entering an unsecured
area.
f. Click Close in the dialog box after confirming the connection is a success.
2. Check the IP address assigned by AutoIP on the multifunction printer.
For example, 168.254.1.1
3. Check that the IP address on your computer is assigned by DHCP.
4. Open Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool using the Web browser.
For example, http://168.254.1.1
5. See "Print Server Settings " in the "Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool " to create a wireless setting.
6. Reset the multifunction printer.
7. Restore the wireless setting on your computer.
For Windows XP and Windows Server 2003:
a. Select Network Connections from Control Panel .
b. Right-click Wireless Network Connection and select Properties .
c. Select Wireless Network tab.
d.
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
b.
c.
d. Ensure that the check box for Use Windows to configure my wireless network settings is
checked.
e. Click Advanced .
f. Do either of the following:
When wireless ad-hoc mode is set to the multifunction printer:
Select Computer to Computer (ad hoc) networks only and close the Advanced dialog box.
When wireless infrastructure mode is set to the multifunction printer:
Select Access point (Infrastructure) networks only and close the Advanced dialog box.
g. Click Add to display Wireless network properties .
h. Enter the setting that you send to the multifunction printer and click OK .
i. Click Move up to move the setting to the top of the list.
j. Click OK to close the Property dialog box.
NOTE: When your operating system is earlier than Windows 2000, create settings according to
the manual of the wireless setting tool provided by your wireless device manufacturer.
For Windows Vista:
a. Open Control Panel .
b. Select Network and Internet .
c. Select Network and Sharing Center.
d. Select Connect to a network .
e. Select the setting you send to the multifunction from the network items listed in Connect to a
network .
f. Select Connect Anyway in the warning dialog box indication indicating you are entering an
unsecured area.
g. Click Close in the dialog box after confirming the connection is a success.
For Windows Server 2008:
a. Open Control Panel .
b. Select Network and Sharing Center .
c. Select Connect to a network .
d.
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
b.
c.
d. Select the setting you send to the printer from the network items listed in Connect to a
network .
e. Select Connect Anyway in the warning dialog box indication indicating you are entering an
unsecured area.
f. Click Close in the dialog box after confirming the connection is a success.
For Fixed IP network:
1. Create wireless setting of your computer following the steps below:
For Windows XP and Windows Server 2003:
a. Select Network Connections from Control Panel .
b. Right-click Wireless Network Connection and select Properties .
c. Select the Wireless Networks tab.
d. Ensure that the check box for Use Windows to configure my wireless network settings is
checked.
NOTE: Ensure that you write down the current wireless computer settings in steps d and f so
that you can restore them later.
e. Click the Advanced button.
f. Select Computer to Computer (ad hoc) networks only and close the Advanced dialog box.
g. Click the Add button to display Wireless network properties .
h. In the Association tab, enter the following information and click OK .
Network name (SSID): dell_device
Network Authentication: Open
Data encryption: Disabled
Ad hoc network: checked
i. Click the Move up button to move the newly added SSID to the top of the list.
j. Click OK to close the Property dialog box.
NOTE: When your operating system is earlier than Windows 2000, create settings according to
the manual of the wireless setting tool provided by your wireless device manufacturer.
For Windows Vista:
a. Open Control Panel .
b.
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
a.
b. Select Network and Internet .
c. Select Network and Sharing Center .
d. Select Connect to a network .
e. Select dell_device from the network items listed in Connect to a network .
f. Select Connect Anyway in the warning dialog box indication indicating you are entering an
unsecured area.
g. Click Close in the dialog box after confirming the connection is a success.
For Windows Server 2008:
a. Open Control Panel .
b. Select Network and Sharing Center.
c. Select Connect to a network .
d. Select dell_device from the network items listed in Connect to a network .
e. Select Connect Anyway in the warning dialog box indicating you are entering an unsecured
area.
f. Click Close in the dialog box after confirming the connection is a success.
2. Check the IP address on your computer.
For example, 1.2.3.4
3. Set the IP address on the multifunction printer.
For example, 1.2.3.5
4. Open Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool using the Web browser.
For example, http://1.2.3.5
5. Change the wireless setting of the multifunction printer on Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool.
6. Reset the multifunction printer.
7. Restore the wireless setting on your computer.
For Windows XP and Windows Server 2003:
a. Select Network Connections from Control Panel .
b.
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
a.
b. Right-click Wireless Network Connection and select Properties .
c. Select Wireless Network tab.
d. Ensure that the check box for Use Windows to configure my wireless network settings is
checked.
e. Click Advanced .
f. Do either of the following:
When wireless ad-hoc mode is set to the multifunction printer:
Select Computer to Computer (ad hoc) networks only and close the Advanced dialog box.
When wireless infrastructure mode is set to the multifunction printer:
Select Access point (Infrastructure) networks only and close the Advanced dialog box.
g. Click Add to display Wireless network properties .
h. Enter the setting that you send to the multifunction printer and click OK .
i. Click Move up to move the setting to the top of the list.
j. Click OK to close the Property dialog box.
NOTE: When your operating system is earlier than Windows 2000, create settings according to
the manual of the wireless setting tool provided by your wireless device manufacturer.
For Windows Vista:
a. Open Control Panel .
b. Select Network and Internet .
c. Select Network and Sharing Center.
d. Select Connect to a network .
e. Select the setting you send to the multifunction from the network items listed in Connect to a
network .
f. Select Connect Anyway in the warning dialog box indication indicating you are entering an
unsecured area.
g. Click Close in the dialog box after confirming the connection is a success.
For Windows Server 2008:
a. Open Control Panel .
b.
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
a.
b. Select Network and Sharing Center .
c. Select Connect to a network .
d. Select the setting you send to the printer from the network items listed in Connect to a
network .
e. Select Connect Anyway in the warning dialog box indication indicating you are entering an
unsecured area.
f. Click Close in the dialog box after confirming the connection is a success.
Wireless Setting through Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool
- Advanced setup
Access point (Infrastructure, DHCP network)
1. Create new wireless settings for your computer.
For Windows XP and Windows Server 2003:
a. Select Network Connections from Control Panel .
b. Right-click Wireless Network Connection and select Properties .
c. Select the Wireless Networks tab.
d. Ensure that the check box for Use Windows to configure my wireless network settings is
checked.
NOTE: Ensure that you write down the current wireless computer settings in steps d and g so that you
can restore them later.
e. Click the Advanced button.
f. Select Computer to Computer (ad hoc) networks only and close the Advanced dialog box.
g. Click the Add button to display Wireless network properties.
h. In the Association tab, enter the following information and click OK .
Network name (SSID): dell_device
Network Authentication: Open
Data encryption: Disabled
Ad hoc network: checked
i. Click the Move up button to move the newly added SSID to the top of the list.
j.
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
i.
j. Click OK to close the Property dialog box.
NOTE: When your operating system is earlier than Windows 2000, create settings according to the
manual of the wireless setting tool provided by your wireless device manufacturer.
For Windows Vista:
a. Open Control Panel .
b. Select Network and Internet .
c. Select Network and Sharing Center .
d. Select Connect to a network .
e. Select dell_device from the network items listed in Connect to a network .
f. Select Connect Anyway in the warning dialog box indication indicating you are entering an
unsecured area.
g. Click Close in the dialog box after confirming the connection is a success.
For Windows Server 2008:
a. Open Control Panel .
b. Select Network and Sharing Center.
c. Select Connect to a network .
d. Select dell_device from the network items listed in Connect to a network .
e. Select Connect Anyway in the warning dialog box indicating you are entering an unsecured
area.
f. Click Close in the dialog box after confirming the connection is a success.
2. Set up the printer wireless adapter IP address.
a. Reset the settings for the wireless adapter to the default.
i. Press Menu on printer Control Panel .
ii. Scroll down and select Admin Menu .
iii. Scroll down and select Wireless net .
iv. Scroll down and select Reset MPC .
v. Restart the multifunction printer.
b. Retrieve the wireless adapter IP address on the multifunction printer.
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
b.
i. Press Menu on printer Control Panel .
ii. Scroll down and select Admin Menu .
iii. Scroll down and select Wireless net .
iv. Scroll down and select TCP/IP .
v. Scroll down and select IP Address .
(Default IP address range: 169.254. xxx .yyy , where "xxx " and "yyy " are variables ranging
from 0 to 255)
3. Access Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool on your computer browser.
a. Assign the TCP/IP address by DHCP mode (Change the TCP/IP properties to obtain the IP address
automatically).
b. Ensure that your computer has the same IP address range as the printer wireless adapter.
For example, 169.254. xxx.zzz , where "xxx " and "zzz " are variables ranging from 0 to 255
c. Access the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool using the Web browser, and then type printer
wireless adapter settings in the address field of the browser.
For example, http://169.254.xxx.yyy /, where "xxx " and "yyy " are variables ranging from 0 to
255 (Your wireless adapter IP address)
d. Change wireless settings (SSID/ communication mode) from Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool.
i. Click Print server setting on the left navigational bar.
ii. Click the Print server setting tab.
iii. Click the TCP/IP sub-tab.
iv. Select DHCP .
v. Click the Apply new setting button without restarting the multifunction printer (Ignore the
screen instructions to restart the multifunction printer).
vi. Click the Wireless LAN sub-tab.
vii. Change the SSID setting (according to your Access point SSID) and change Network type
to Infrastructure .
viii. Click the Restart printer to apply new settings button.
4. Once printer wireless adapter is properly configured, you may use the typical network printer
installation method to complete driver installation.
5. To communicate with the multifunction printer, you need to restore the previous wireless settings on
your computer.
6. Restore the previous wireless settings for your computer.
For Windows XP and Windows Server 2003:
a. Select Network Connections from Control Panel .
b.
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
a.
b. Right-click Wireless Network Connection and select Properties .
c. Select the Wireless Network tab.
d. Click the Advanced button.
e. Select Access point (Infrastructure) networks only and close the Advanced dialog box
(Applicable to the multifunction printer with the wireless infrastructure mode).
f. Select the setting that you send to the multifunction printer in the list in the Preferred Network
group
g. Click Move up to move the setting to the top of the list.
h. Click OK to close the Property dialog box.
NOTE: When your operating system is earlier than Windows 2000, create settings according to the
manual of the wireless setting tool provided by your wireless device manufacturer.
For Windows Vista:
a. Open Control Panel .
b. Select Network and Internet .
c. Select Network and Sharing Center.
d. Select Connect to a network .
e. Select the setting you send to the multifunction from the network items listed in Connect to a
network .
f. Select Connect Anyway in the warning dialog box indication indicating you are entering an
unsecured area.
g. Click Close in the dialog box after confirming the connection is a success.
For Windows Server 2008:
a. Open Control Panel .
b. Select Network and Sharing Center .
c. Select Connect to a network .
d. Select the setting you send to the printer from the network items listed in Connect to a
network .
e. Select Connect Anyway in the warning dialog box indication indicating you are entering an
unsecured area.
f. Click Close in the dialog box after confirming the connection is a success.
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
f.
Access point (Infrastructure, Fixed IP network)
1. Ensure that the addresses of your computer and access point is in the same IP range. Match the subnet
mask and gateway addresses of your computer to the access point settings.
2. Create new wireless settings of your computer by following the steps below:
For Windows XP and Windows Server 2003:
a. Select Network Connections from Control Panel .
b. Right-click Wireless Network Connection and select Properties .
c. Select the Wireless Networks tab.
d. Ensure that the check box for Use Windows to configure my wireless network settings is
checked.
NOTE: Ensure that you write down the current wireless computer settings in steps d and f so that you
can restore them later.
e. Click the Advanced button.
f. Select Computer to Computer (ad hoc) networks only and close the Advanced dialog box.
g. Click the Add button to display Wireless network properties.
h. In the Association tab, enter the following information and click OK .
Network name (SSID): dell_device
Network Authentication: Open
Data encryption: Disabled
Ad hoc network: Checked
i. Click the Move up button to move the newly added SSID to the top of the list.
j. Click OK to close the Property dialog box.
NOTE: When your operating system is earlier than Windows 2000, create settings according to the
manual of the wireless setting tool provided by your wireless device manufacturer.
For Windows Vista:
a. Open Control Panel .
b. Select Network and Internet .
c. Select Network and Sharing Center .
d.
e.
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
c.
d. Select Connect to a network .
e. Select dell_device from the network items listed in Connect to a network .
f. Select Connect Anyway in the warning dialog box indication indicating you are entering an
unsecured area.
g. Click Close in the dialog box after confirming the connection is a success.
For Windows Server 2008:
a. Open Control Panel .
b. Select Network and Sharing Center.
c. Select Connect to a network .
d. Select dell_device from the network items listed in Connect to a network .
e. Select Connect Anyway in the warning dialog box indicating you are entering an unsecured
area.
f. Click Close in the dialog box after confirming the connection is a success.
3. Check the IP, subnet mask, and gateway address on your computer.
For example, IP: 192.168.1.1
Subnet mask: 255.255.0.0
4. Set the IP address from the multifunction printer Control Panel to be in the same range as that of
your computer. Match the subnet mask and gateway addresses of the multifunction printer to your
computer settings.
a. Press the Menu button.
b. Scroll to the Admin menu.
c. Select Wireless Net .
d. Select TCP/IP .
e. Select Get IP Address .
f. Select Panel .
g. Scroll back to IP Address .
h. Manually enter the IP address using the directional buttons on the control panel and press enter
button.
For example, 192.168.1.2
i.
j.
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
i. Scroll back to Subnet Mask .
j. Manually enter the subnet mask address using the directional buttons on Control Panel and
press the <Enter> button.
k. Scroll back to Gateway Address .
l. Manually enter the gateway address using the directional buttons on Control Panel and press
the <Enter> button.
m. Restart the multifunction printer.
5. Open Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool using the Web browser.
For example, http://:192.168.1.2
6. Change wireless settings of the multifunction printer from Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool.
a. Click Print server setting on the left navigational bar.
b. Click Print server setting tab.
c. Click Wireless LAN sub-tab.
d. Change the SSID setting (according to your access point SSID) and change Network type to
Infrastructure .
e. Click the Restart printer to apply new settings button.
7. Restore the previous wireless settings for your computer.
For Windows XP and Windows Server 2003:
a. Select Network Connections from Control Panel .
b. Right-click Wireless Network Connection and select Properties .
c. Select Wireless Network tab.
d. Click Advanced .
e. Do either of the following:
When wireless ad-hoc mode is set to the multifunction printer:
Select Computer to Computer (ad hoc) networks only and close the Advanced dialog box.
When wireless infrastructure mode is set to the multifunction printer:
Select Access point (Infrastructure) networks only and close the Advanced dialog box.
f.
g.
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
f. Select the setting that you send to the multifunction printer in the list in Preferred Network
group.
g. Click Move up to move the setting to the top of the list.
For Windows Vista:
a. Open Control Panel .
b. Select Network and Internet .
c. Select Network and Sharing Center.
d. Select Connect to a network .
e. Select the setting you send to the multifunction from the network items listed in Connect to a
network .
f. Select Connect Anyway in the warning dialog box indication indicating you are entering an
unsecured area.
g. Click Close in the dialog box after confirming the connection is a success.
For Windows Server 2008:
a. Open Control Panel .
b. Select Network and Sharing Center .
c. Select Connect to a network .
d. Select the setting you send to the printer from the network items listed in Connect to a
network .
e. Select Connect Anyway in the warning dialog box indication indicating you are entering an
unsecured area.
f. Click Close in the dialog box after confirming the connection is a success.
8. Click OK to close the Property dialog box.
NOTE: When your operating system is earlier than Windows 2000, create settings according to the
manual of the wireless setting tool provided by your wireless device manufacturer.
Confirming the Installation of the Wireless Printer Adapter
Print a system settings page to verify that the optional wireless printer adaptor is installed correctly.
1. Press
until >SETUP appears, and then press
2.
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
.
1.
2. Press
until >Reports appears, and then press
3. System Settings is displayed. Press
.
.
The system settings page is printed.
4. Verify that the Wireless LAN Adapter is listed in the system settings under Printer Options .
If it is not listed, turn off the multifunction printer, unplug the power cable, and reinstall the optional
wireless printer adapter.
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Print Media Guidelines
Print media is paper, transparencies, labels, envelopes, coated paper among others. Your multifunction
printer provides high-quality printing on a variety of print media. Selecting the appropriate print media for
your multifunction printer helps avoid printing troubles. This section describes how to select print media,
how to care for print media, and how to load the print media in the standard 250-sheet tray or optional 550sheet paper feeder.
Paper
Transparencies
Envelopes
Labels
Storing Print Media
Identifying Print Media Sources and Specifications
Paper
For the best print quality in color, use 75 g/m2 (20 lb) xerographic, grain long paper. For the best print
quality in black and white, use 90 g/m2 (24 lb) xerographic, grain long paper. Before buying large quantities
of any print media, Dell recommends trying a sample first.
When loading paper, identify the recommended print side on the paper package, and load the paper
accordingly. See "Loading Print Media in Standard and Optional Trays" and "Loading the Multipurpose
Feeder" for detailed loading instructions.
Paper Characteristics
The following paper characteristics affect print quality and reliability. Dell recommends that you follow these
guidelines when evaluating new paper stock.
Weight
The tray automatically feeds paper weights from 60 to 216 g/m 2 (16 to 60 lb bond) grain long. The
multipurpose feeder automatically feeds paper weights from 60 to 216 g/m 2 (16 to 80 lb bond) grain long.
Paper lighter than 60 g/m2 (16 lb) might not be stiff enough to feed properly, and could cause paper jams.
For best performance, use 75 g/m2 (20 lb bond) grain long paper.
Curl
Curl is the tendency of print media to curve at its edges. Excessive curl can cause paper feeding problems.
Curl usually occurs after the paper passes through the multifunction printer, where it is exposed to high
temperatures. Storing paper unwrapped, even in the paper tray, can contribute to paper curling prior to
printing and cause feeding problems regardless of humidity. When printing on curled paper, straighten the
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
paper and then insert it into the multipurpose feeder.
Smoothness
The degree of paper smoothness directly affects print quality. If the paper is too rough, the toner does not
fuse to the paper properly, resulting in poor print quality. If the paper is too smooth, it can cause paper
feeding problems. Smoothness between 150 and 250 Sheffield points produces the best print quality.
Moisture Content
The amount of moisture in the paper affects both print quality and the ability of the multifunction printer to
feed the paper properly. Leave the paper in its original packaging until you are ready to use it. This limits the
exposure of the paper to moisture changes that can degrade its performance.
Grain Direction
Grain refers to the alignment of the paper fibers in a sheet of paper. Grain is either grain long, running the
length of the paper, or grain short, running the width of the paper. For 60 to 135 g/m2 (16 to 36 lb bond)
paper, grain long fibers are recommended. For papers heavier than 135 g/m2 (36 lb bond), grain short is
preferred.
Fiber Content
Most high-quality xerographic paper is made from 100% chemically pulped wood. Paper containing fibers
such as cotton possess characteristics that can result in degraded paper handling.
Recommended Paper
To ensure the best print quality and feed reliability, use 75 g/m2 (20 lb) xerographic paper. Business papers
designed for general business use also provide acceptable print quality. Only use paper able to withstand
high temperatures without discoloring, bleeding, or releasing hazardous emissions. The laser printing
process heats paper to high temperatures. Check with the manufacturer or vendor to determine whether the
paper you have chosen is acceptable for laser printers.
Always print several samples before buying large quantities of any type of print media. When choosing any
print media, you should consider the weight, fiber content, and color.
Unacceptable Paper
The following paper types are not recommended for use with the multifunction printer:
Chemically treated papers used to make copies without carbon paper, also known as carbonless
papers, carbonless copy paper (CCP), or no carbon required (NCR) paper
Preprinted papers with chemicals that may contaminate the multifunction printer
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Preprinted papers that can be affected by the temperature in the printer fuser unit
Preprinted papers that require a registration (the precise print location on the page) greater than
±0.09 in., such as optical character recognition (OCR) forms
In some cases, you can adjust registration with your software program to successfully print on these
forms.
Coated papers (erasable bond), synthetic papers, thermal papers
Rough-edged, rough or heavily textured surface papers or curled papers
Recycled papers containing more than 25% post-consumer waste that do not meet DIN 19 309
Multiple-part forms or documents
Print quality may deteriorate (blank spaces or blotches may appear in the text) when printing on talc
or acid paper.
Selecting Paper
Proper paper selection helps prevent jams and ensures trouble-free printing.
To help avoid jams or poor print quality:
Always use new, undamaged paper.
Before loading the paper, identify the recommended print side of the paper. This information is usually
indicated on the paper package.
Do not use paper that you have cut or trimmed yourself.
Do not mix print media sizes, weights, or types in the same source. This may result in a paper jam.
Do not remove trays while a job is printing or Printing is displayed on the operator panel.
Ensure the Paper Type setting is correct. (See "Tray Settings" for detailed information about these
settings.)
Ensure the paper is properly loaded in the tray.
Flex paper back and forth, and then fan them. Straighten the edges of the stack on a level surface.
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Selecting Preprinted Forms and Letterhead
When selecting preprinted forms and letterhead paper for the multifunction printer:
Use grain long papers for best results.
Use only forms and letterhead printed using an offset lithographic or engraved printing process.
Select papers that absorb ink, but do not bleed.
Avoid papers with rough or heavily textured surfaces.
Use papers printed with heat-resistant inks designed for use in xerographic copiers. The ink must
withstand temperatures of 225°C (437°F) without melting or releasing hazardous emissions.
Use inks that are not affected by the resin in toner or the silicone in the fuser unit. Inks that are
oxidation-set or oil-based should meet these requirements; latex inks might not. If you are in doubt,
contact your paper supplier.
Printing on Letterhead
Check with the manufacturer or vendor to determine whether the pre-printed letterhead you have selected is
acceptable for laser printers.
Page orientation is important when printing on letterhead. Use the following table for help when loading
letterhead in the print media sources.
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Print media source
Standard 250-sheet tray
Print side
Face up
Letterhead enters the multifunction
printer last
Face down
Letterhead enters the multifunction
printer first
Optional 550-sheet paper
feeder
Multipurpose feeder
Page orientation
Selecting Pre-punched Paper
Pre-punched paper brands can differ in the number and placement of holes and in manufacturing techniques.
However, it may not be possible to print on the paper to depending on the placement of holes on the paper.
To select and use pre-punched paper:
Test paper from several manufacturers before ordering and using large quantities of pre-punched
paper.
Paper should be punched at the paper manufacturer and not drilled into paper already packaged in a
ream. Drilled paper can cause jams when multiple sheets feed through the multifunction printer. This
may result in a paper jam.
Pre-punched paper can include more paper dust than standard paper. Your multifunction printer may
require more frequent cleaning and feed reliability may not be as good as standard paper.
Weight guidelines for pre-punched paper are the same as non-punched paper.
Transparencies
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
You can load up to 75 sheets of transparencies in the multipurpose feeder for a single print job. Before
buying large quantities of any print media, Dell recommends trying a sample first.
When printing on transparencies:
Set the paper type to Transparency from the printer driver to avoid damaging your multifunction
printer.
Use transparencies designed specifically for laser printers. Do not use regular transparencies.
Transparencies must be able to withstand temperatures of 205°C (401°F) without melting, discoloring,
offsetting or releasing hazardous emissions.
Avoid getting fingerprints on the transparencies. This may result in poor print quality.
Before loading transparencies, fan the stack to prevent sheets from sticking together.
Non-white transparencies are not supported with the multifunction printer.
Selecting Transparencies
The multifunction printer can print directly on transparencies designed for use in laser printers. Print quality
and durability depend on the transparency used. Before buying large quantities of any print media, Dell
recommends trying a sample first.
The paper type setting for the multipurpose feeder should be set to Transparency to help prevent jams.
(See "Tray Settings" for detailed information about this setting.) Check with the manufacturer or vendor to
determine whether your transparencies are compatible with laser printers that reach temperatures as high
as 205°C (401°F). Only use transparencies that are able to withstand these temperatures without melting,
discoloring, offsetting, or releasing hazardous emissions.
Envelopes
You can load a stack of envelopes up to 15 mm (0.59 in.) in height in the multipurpose feeder for a single
print job. Depending on the type of envelope and how they have been stored, loading a large quantity of
envelopes, within the maximum range, may not feed into the multifunction printer. If this happens, reduce
the number of envelopes in the stack. Depending on the choice of envelopes, it is possible to expect variable
levels of light wrinkling. Before buying large quantities of any print media, Dell recommends trying a sample
first. See "Loading the Multipurpose Feeder" for instructions on loading an envelope.
When printing on envelopes:
Use only high-quality envelopes that are designed for use in laser printers.
Set the print media source to the multipurpose feeder. Set the paper type to Envelope, and select the
correct size of envelope from the printer driver.
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
For best performance, use envelopes made from 75 g/m 2 (20 lb bond) paper. You can use up to 105
g/m 2 (28 lb bond) weight for the envelope feeder as long as the cotton content is 25% or less.
Envelopes with 100% cotton content must not exceed 90 g/m 2 (24 lb bond) weight.
Use only new, undamaged envelopes.
For best performance, do not use envelopes that:
Have excessive curl or twist
Are stuck together or damaged in any way
Contain windows, holes, perforations, cutouts, embossing
Use metal clasps, string ties, or metal folding bars
Have an interlocking design
Have postage stamps attached
Have any exposed adhesive when the flap is in the sealed or closed position
Have nicked edges or bent corners
Have rough, cockle, or laid finishes
Use envelopes that can withstand temperatures of 205°C (401°F) without sealing, excessive curling,
wrinkling, or releasing hazardous emissions. If you have any doubts about the envelopes you are
considering, check with the envelope supplier.
Adjust the guide to fit the width of the envelopes.
To load envelope in the multipurpose feeder, insert the envelopes with the flaps closed and the shortedge of the envelopes facing into the multifunction printer. The print side must be facing down.
See "Loading the Multipurpose Feeder" for instructions on loading an envelope.
Use one envelope size during a print job.
Ensure the humidity is low because high humidity (more than 60%) and the high printing temperatures
may seal the envelopes.
Labels
Your multifunction printer can print on many labels designed for use with laser printers. Label adhesives,
face sheet (printable stock), and topcoats must be able to withstand temperatures of 205°C (401°F) and
pressure of 25 pounds per square inch (psi). Before buying large quantities of any print media, Dell
recommends trying a sample first.
When printing on labels:
Set the paper type to Label in the Tray Settings. Set the paper type to Label from the printer
driver.
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Do not load labels together with paper or transparencies in the same tray. This may result in a jam.
Do not use label sheets with a slick backing material.
Do not print within 1 mm (0.04 in.) of the die cut.
Use full label sheets. Partial sheets may cause labels to peel off during printing, resulting in a jam.
Partial sheets also contaminate your multifunction printer and your cartridge with adhesive, and could
void your multifunction printer and cartridge warranties.
Use labels that can withstand temperatures of 205°C (401°F) without sealing, excessive curling,
wrinkling, or releasing hazardous emissions.
Do not print within 1 mm (0.04 in.) of the edge of the label, of the perforations, or between die-cuts of
the label.
Do not use label sheets that have adhesive to the edge of the sheet. Dell recommends zone coating of
the adhesive at least 1 mm (0.04 in.) away from edges. Adhesive material contaminates your
multifunction printer and could void your warranty.
If zone coating of the adhesive is not possible, a 3 mm (0.125 in.) strip should be removed on the
leading and driver edge, and a non-oozing adhesive should be used.
Remove a 3 mm (0.125 in.) strip from the leading edge to prevent labels from peeling inside the
multifunction printer.
Portrait orientation is preferred, especially when printing bar codes.
Do not use labels that have exposed adhesive.
Storing Print Media
For proper print media storage, the following guidelines help avoid media feeding problems and uneven print
quality.
For best results, store print media in an environment where the temperature is approximately 21°C
(70°F) and the relative humidity is 40%.
Store cartons of print media on a pallet or shelf, rather than directly on the floor.
If you store individual packages of print media out of the original carton, ensure that they rest on a flat
surface so that the edges do not buckle or curl.
Do not place anything on top of the print media packages.
Identifying Print Media Sources and Specifications
The following tables provide information on standard and optional print media sources.
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Print Media Sizes and Support
Multipurpose feeder
Standard 250-sheet
tray
Optional 550-sheet paper
feeder
Optional
duplexer
A4
Y
Y
Y
Y
A5
Y
Y
Y
Y
B5
Y
Y
Y
Y
Letter
Y
Y
Y
Y
Folio
(8.5 x 13 in.)
Y
Y
Y
Y
Legal
(8.5 x 14 in.)
Y
Y
Y
Y
Executive
Y
Y
Y
Y
COM-10 Envelope
Y
N
N
N
Monarch
Y
N
N
N
C5
Y
N
N
N
DL
Y
N
N
N
Y*1
Y*2
Y*2
Y*3
User-specified print
size
* 1 The tray supports user-specified print media that are 76.2 mm (3.00 in.) to 220 mm (8.66 in.) wide and
98.4 mm (3.87 in.) to 355.6 mm (14.00 in.) long.
* 2 The tray supports user-specified print media that are 148.5 mm (5.85 in.) to 215.9 mm (8.50 in.) wide
and 210 mm (8.27 in.) to 355.6 mm (14.00 in.) long.
* 3 The duplexer supports user-specified print media that are 148.5 mm (5.85 in.) to 215.9 mm (8.50 in.)
wide and 210 mm (8.27 in.) to 355.6 mm (14.00 in.) long.
Print Media Supported
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Multipurpose feeder
Standard 250sheet tray
Optional 550-sheet
paper feeder
Optional
duplexer
Plain Paper
(60–80 gsm)
Y
Y
Y
Y
Plain Paper - Side2 (60–80
gsm)
Y
N
N
N
Plain Thick Paper (81–105
gsm)
Y
Y
Y
Y
Plain Thick Paper -Side2
(81–105 gsm)
Y
N
N
N
Covers
(106–163 gsm)
Y
Y
Y
Y
Covers - Side2 (106–163
gsm)
Y
N
N
N
Covers Thick
(164–216 gsm)
Y
Y
Y
N
Covers Thick - Side2
(164–216 gsm)*1
Y
N
N
N
Transparency
Y
N
N
N
Label
Y
Y
Y
N
Coated
(106–163 gsm)
Y
Y
Y
Y
Coated - Side2
(106 –163 gsm)
Y
N
N
N
Coated Thick
(164–216 gsm)*1
Y
Y
Y
N
Coated Thick - Side2
(164 –216 gsm)
Y
N
N
N
Envelope
Y
N
N
N
* 1 When you load several sheets of this type of paper on the ADF, two or more sheets of paper may be fed
into the ADF at the same time. In this case, load fewer sheets of paper and ensure that the paper is not
curled.
Setup Paper Type
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Paper type
Plain Paper
Weight (gsm)
60-80
Remarks
-
Plain Thick Paper 81-105
-
Covers
106-163
-
Covers Thick
164-216
-
Coated
106-163
Inkjet Printer paper cannot be used.
Coated Thick
164-216
Inkjet Printer paper cannot be used.
Transparency
-
Inkjet Printer paper cannot be used.
Label
-
Inkjet Printer paper cannot be used.
Envelopes
-
-
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Loading Print Media
Loading print media properly helps prevent jams and ensures trouble-free printing.
Before loading print media, identify the recommended print side of the print media. This information is
usually on the print media package.
Loading Print Media in Standard and Optional Trays
Multipurpose Feeder
Loading the Multipurpose Feeder
Using the Multipurpose Feeder
Linking Trays
Using the Duplex Function
Using the Output Tray
Using the Output Tray Extension
NOTE: After loading paper in the tray, specify the same paper type on the operator panel.
Loading Print Media in Standard and Optional Trays
NOTE: To avoid paper jams, do not remove trays while a job prints.
NOTE: Use only laser print media. Do not use ink jet paper in the multifunction printer.
All trays are loaded the same way.
1. Pull the tray out of the multifunction printer until it stops. Hold the tray with both hands, lift the front
slightly, and remove it from the multifunction printer.
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
2. Slide the width guides to the edge of the tray. The width guides should be fully extended.
NOTE: For Letter paper, push the lever to the 8.5" position.
3. Slide the tray to the size of the paper to be loaded by using the length guide.
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
NOTE: When loading user-specified print media, fully extend the tray by squeezing the length guide at
the back of the tray.
4. Before loading the print media, flex the sheets back and forth, and then fan them. Straighten the
edges of the stack on a level surface.
5. Place the print media into the tray with the recommended print side face up.
NOTE: Do not exceed the maximum fill line in the tray. Overfilling the tray may cause paper jams.
6. Adjust the width guides until they rest lightly against the edges of the stack of paper.
NOTE: When loading user-specified print media, adjust the width guides and slide the extendable part
of the tray by squeezing the length guide and sliding it until it rests lightly against the edge of the
stack of paper.
7.
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
7. Insert the tray into the multifunction printer, and push until it stops.
8. Select the paper type from the operator panel if any print media other than plain print media is loaded.
If a user-specified print media is loaded, you must specify the paper size setting by using the operator
panel.
Loading Letterhead
The letterhead must be toward the top edge of the standard tray or the optional feeder with the print side
facing up. However, the letterhead must be inserted top edge first with the print side facing down when
loading paper into the multipurpose feeder.
Print media source
Standard 250-sheet tray
Print side
Face up
Letterhead enters the multifunction
printer last
Face down
Letterhead enters the multifunction
printer first
Optional 550-sheet paper
feeder
Multipurpose feeder
Page orientation
Multipurpose Feeder
Capacity
The multipurpose feeder can hold approximately:
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
150 sheets of the standard paper or 15 mm (0.59 in.) or less in height.
Print Media Dimensions
The multipurpose feeder accepts print media within the following dimensions:
Width - 76.2 mm (3.00 in.) to 220.0 mm (8.66 in.)
Length - 98.4 mm (3.87 in.) to 355.6 mm (14.00 in.)
Loading the Multipurpose Feeder
In addition to plain paper, the multipurpose feeder can use various other sizes and types of print media such
as envelopes, and transparencies.
1. Gently pull open the multipurpose feeder cover.
2. Slide the guides to the edge of the tray. The guides should be fully extended.
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
3. Insert all media face down and top edge first into the multipurpose feeder.
NOTE: Do not force the print media.
4. Slide both guides until they rest lightly against the edge of the print media stack.
NOTE: Be careful not to bend the print media.
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
5. Ensure the type setting for the multipurpose feeder is set to the correct value for the print media you
have loaded.
6. Select print media source, size, and type in your software program and select the print media size and
type on the printer operator panel.
Loading Envelopes
To load envelopes in the multipurpose feeder, insert the envelopes with the flaps closed and the short-edge
of the envelopes facing into the multifunction printer. Orientate the print side facing down and slide the
envelope into the entry slot. You can load envelopes up to the maximum fill line in the tray at one time.
NOTE: Ensure to set the envelopes with the flaps completely closed.
NOTICE: Never use envelopes with windows, coated linings, or self-stick adhesives. These lead to
paper jams and damage to the multifunction printer.
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Using the Multipurpose Feeder
Load only one size and type of print media during a single print job.
To achieve the best possible print quality, use only high-quality print media that is designed for use in
laser printers. For more guidelines on print media, see "Print Media Guidelines."
Do not add or remove print media when there is still print media in the multipurpose feeder or when
the multifunction printer is printing from the multipurpose feeder. This may result in a paper jam.
Print media should be loaded with the recommended print side down and the top of the print media
going into the multipurpose feeder first.
Do not place objects on the multipurpose feeder. Also, avoid pressing down or applying excessive force
on it.
Do not remove any tray while a job is printing from the multipurpose feeder or Printing is displayed
on the operator panel. This may result in a paper jam.
The icons on the multipurpose feeder identify how to load the multipurpose feeder with paper, and how to
turn an envelope for printing.
Linking Trays
Tray linking allows you to load the same size and type of print media in multiple sources. The multifunction
printer automatically links the source/trays and will use the first tray until it runs out, then switch to the
linked tray.
If you load the same size print media in each tray, ensure that the print media is the same type in order to
link the trays.
When the selected trays are loaded with the same size and type of print media, select the Paper Type
settings in the Tray Settings for each source.
To disable tray linking, set the Paper Type to a unique value in each one of the trays. If all trays do not have
the same type of print media when linked, you could mistakenly print a job on the wrong paper type.
Using the Duplex Function
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Duplex printing (or two-sided printing) allows you to print on both sides of a sheet of paper. For sizes that
are acceptable for duplex printing, see "Print Media Sizes and Support." Duplex printing is only available
when the optional duplexer is installed on the multifunction printer. For information on how to install the
duplexer, see "Installing a Duplexer."
Using Booklet Print
To use booklet print, you must select either Flip on Short Edge or Flip on Long Edge from the Duplex
menu in the printer properties dialog box and then select Booklet Creation in the Booklet/Poster/Mixed
Document dialog box displayed by clicking the Booklet/Poster/Mixed Document button. From the
Duplex menu, you can define the way 2-sided print pages are bound, and how the printing on the back of
the sheet (even-numbered pages) is oriented in relation to the printing on the front (odd-numbered pages).
Flip on
Long
Edge
Assumes binding along the long edge of the page (left edge for portrait orientation and top edge
for landscape orientation). The following illustration shows long-edge binding for portrait and
landscape pages:
Flip on
Short
Edge
Assumes binding along the short edge of the page (top edge for portrait orientation and left edge
for landscape orientation). The following illustration shows short-edge binding for portrait and
landscape pages:
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Using the Output Tray
The output tray holds up to:
250 sheets (20 lb (75 g/m2)) of plain paper
Using the Output Tray Extension
The output tray extension is designed to prevent print media from falling from the multifunction printer after
the print job is complete.
Before printing a document, ensure that the output tray extension is fully extended.
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Operator Panel
Using the Operator Panel Buttons
Printing a Panel Settings Page
Using the Operator Panel Buttons
The printer operator panel has a 4-line by 20-character liquid crystal display (LCD), control buttons, and
number pad, which allow you to control your multifunction printer.
1. LCD Panel
2.
(Back) button
Returns to the previous screen.
3.
buttons
In the Menu mode, selects submenus or sets values.
4.
(Menu) button
Enters the operation menu from the top menu, and returns to the top menu from any menu level.
5.
buttons
In the Menu mode, scrolls through menus or items.
To enter numbers or passwords, press these buttons.
6.
(Start) button
Starts copying, scanning, or faxing.
7.
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
7.
button
Choose the currently displayed menu or item.
8.
(Cancel) button
In the Menu mode, returns to the standby mode without saving any settings.
Cancels the current working job (copy/scan/fax/print) by choosing the available listed job.
9. Number pad
Enters the characters and numbers, for example, for the Phone Book, and passwords.
10.
(Pause) button
Enters a pause.
Printing a Panel Settings Page
The Panel Settings page shows current settings for the operator panel menus.
1. Press
until >SETUP appears, and then press
2. Press
until >Reports appears, and then press
.
.
3. Press
until Panel Settings appears, and then press
The panel settings page is printed.
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
.
System Settings
You can change most system settings from your software program or operator panel. If your multifunction
printer is attached to the network, you can change settings from the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool.
To launch the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool, type the printer IP address in your Web browser. Print
a printer settings page to find your printer's IP address (see "Printing a System Settings Page").
Settings from the software program update the default system settings for the multifunction printer. Settings
from the printer driver only apply to the job you are sending to the multifunction printer.
If you cannot change a setting from your software program, use the printer operator panel or the Dell
Printer Configuration Web Tool. Changing a system setting from the printer operator panel or from the
Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool makes that setting the user default.
Printing a System Settings Page
The system settings page lists all the options you purchased or installed. If a feature or an option is not
listed, you need to check your installation.
1. Press
until >SETUP appears, and then press
2. Press
until >Reports appears, and then press
3. System Settings is displayed. Press
.
.
.
The system settings page is printed.
4. Verify that the options you installed are correctly listed under Printer Options.
5. If an option you installed is not listed, turn off the multifunction printer, unplug the power cord, and
reinstall the option.
6. Verify the amount of memory installed is correctly listed under General.
Using the Operator Panel to Change System Settings
You can select menu items and corresponding values from the operator panel.
When you first enter the printer menus from the operator panel, you see an asterisk (*) next to a value in
the menus.
Factory defaults may vary for different countries.
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
This asterisk indicates the factory default menu setting. These settings are the original system settings.
NOTE: Factory defaults may vary for different countries.
When you select a new setting from the operator panel, an asterisk appears next to the setting to identify it
as the current user default menu setting.
These settings are active until new ones are selected or the factory defaults are restored.
To select a new value as a setting:
1. Press
until >SETUP appears, and then press
2. Press
or
3. Press
,
.
until the desired menu appears, and then press
,
, or
.
until the desired menu or menu item appears, and then press
.
If the selection is a menu, the menu is opened and the first system setting in the menu appears.
If the selection is a menu item, the default menu setting for the menu item appears. (The current
user default menu setting has an asterisk (*) beside it.)
Each menu item has a list of values for the menu item. A value can be:
A phrase or word to describe a setting
A numerical value that can be changed
An On or Off setting
4. Press
or
to scroll until the desired value appears.
5. Press Back to return to the previous menu.
To continue setting other items, select the desired menu. To quit setting new values, press Cancel.
Driver settings may override changes previously made and may require you to change the operator panel
defaults.
NOTE: To adjust the density to make the scanned copy lighter or darker than the original.
Using the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool to Change
System Settings
If your multifunction printer is connected to the network, you can change the operator panel settings from
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
your Web browser. If you are a network administrator, you can clone the system settings of one printer to
one or all printers on the network.
Type your network printer IP address in your Web browser. Choose System Settings from the topics list,
and then select the system settings you want to change.
To copy your system settings to another printer on the network, choose Copy Printer Settings from the
topics list, and then type the other printer's IP address.
If you do not know your printer IP address, see the system settings page. To print a system settings page:
1. Press
until >SETUP appears, and then press
2. Press
until >Reports appears, and then press
3. System Settings is displayed. Press
.
.
.
The system settings page is printed.
Resetting Defaults
After executing this function and rebooting the multifunction printer, all the menu parameters, except the
parameters for the network, are reset to their default values.
1. Press
until >SETUP appears, and then press
.
2. Press
until >Admin Menu appears, and then press
3. Press
until >Maintenance appears, and then press
4. Press
until >Initialize NVM appears, and then press
5. Press
to select >User Section or >System Section, and then press
.
.
.
6. The Are you sure? message appears on the operator panel. Press
.
.
7. The multifunction printer is turned off automatically to apply the settings.
Initializing NVRAM for Network Settings
You can initialize the IP address and network-related settings by initializing NVRAM for Network settings.
1. Press
until >SETUP appears, and then press
2. Press
until >Admin Menu appears, and then press
3.
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
.
.
1.
2.
3. Press
until >Wired Net or Wireless Net appears, and then press
4. Press
until >Reset LAN or >Reset MPC appears, and then press
5. The Are you sure? message appears on the operator panel. Press
.
.
.
6. Turn off the multifunction printer, and then on again to apply the settings.
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Understanding Menus
When your multifunction printer is configured as a network printer available to a number of users, the access
to the Admin Menu menus can be limited. This prevents other users from using the operator panel to
inadvertently change a printer user default that has been set by the administrator.
However, you can use your printer driver to override printer user defaults and select settings for individual
print jobs.
Using the Copy Menus
Using the Scan Menus
Using the Fax Menus
Using the Job Status Menus
Using the Setup Menus
Setting of Panel Lock
Using the Copy Menus
Use the Copy menus to configure a variety of copy features.
NOTE: Values marked by an asterisk (*) are the factory default menu settings.
Number of Copies
Purpose:
To select the number of copies from 1 to 99.
Color
Purpose:
To select color or black and white copying.
Values:
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Color*
Prints in the color mode.
Black&White Prints in the black and white mode.
Paper Tray
Purpose:
To specify the input tray.
Values:
Tray1*
The paper is fed from the standard 250-sheet tray.
Tray2*1
The paper is fed from the optional 550-sheet paper feeder.
MPF
The paper is fed from the multipurpose feeder.
* 1 Only displayed when an optional 550-sheet paper feeder is installed on the multifunction printer.
Reduce/Enlarge
Purpose:
To reduce or enlarge the size of a copied image.
Values:
100%*
Custom 100% (25-400%)
129% (in inch), 129% (in mm) 50%
154% (in inch), 141% (in mm) 70% (in inch), 64% (in mm)
200%
78% (in inch), 81% (in mm)
NOTE: You can set the value in a percent for Custom.
Original Type
Purpose:
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
To improve the image quality by selecting the document type.
Values:
Text&Photo* Uses for documents with both text and photo/gray tones.
Photo
Uses for documents with photo or gray tones.
Best
Uses for documents with fine text of high resolution.
Text
Uses for documents with text.
Lighter/Darker
Purpose:
To adjust the density, to make the copy lighter or darker than the original.
Values:
Normal* Works well with standard typed or printed documents.
Darker1
Works well with light print or faint pencil markings.
Darker2
Darker3
Lighter3 Works well with dark print.
Lighter2
Lighter1
Sharpness
Purpose:
To adjust the sharpness to make the copy sharper or softer than the original.
Values:
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Normal* Does not make the copy sharper or softer than the original.
Sharper
Makes the copy sharper than the original.
Softer
Makes the copy softer than the original.
Color Saturation
Purpose:
To adjust the amount of color to make the colors higher or lower than the original.
Values:
Normal* Does not adjust the amount of color to make the colors higher or lower than the original.
Higher
Adjusts the amount of color to make the colors higher than the original.
Lower
Adjusts the amount of color to make the colors lower than the original.
Auto Exposure
Purpose:
To adjust the overall brightness to make the copy overexposed than the original.
Values:
On* Adjusts the overall brightness to make the copy overexposed than the original.
Off
Does not adjust the overall brightness to make the copy overexposed than the original.
Auto Fit
Purpose:
To automatically reduce or enlarge the image to fit the paper that is currently loaded in the multifunction
printer.
Values:
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
On
Fits the image on the paper currently loaded.
Off* Does not fit the image on the paper currently loaded.
2Sided
Purpose:
To print a two-sided original document onto one sheet of paper.
Values:
1->1Sided*
Does not print a 2-sided original document onto one sheet of paper.
LongEdgeBinding
Uses for long-edge binding when you perform duplex printing.
ShortEdgeBinding Uses for short-edge binding when you perform duplex printing.
Multiple-Up
Purpose:
To print two original pages to fit onto one sheet of paper.
Values:
Off*
Does not perform multiple-up printing.
Auto
Automatically reduces the original pages to fit onto one sheet of paper.
ID Copy Prints the original pages onto one sheet of paper in the original size.
Manual
Prints the original pages onto the one sheet of paper in the size specified in Reduce/Enlarge.
Collated
Purpose:
To sort the copy job.
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Values:
Uncollated* Does not sort the copy job.
Collated
Sorts the copy job.
Poster
Purpose:
To print an image onto several sheets of paper.
Values:
Off*
Does not print an image onto several sheets of paper.
2 x 2 Prints an image onto 4 sheets of paper (2 by 2).
3 x 3 Prints an image onto 9 sheets of paper (3 by 3).
4 x 4 Prints an image onto 16 sheets of paper (4 by 4).
Image Repeat
Purpose:
To print multiple image copies from the original document on a single page.
Values:
Off* Does not print multiple image copies from the original document on a single page.
On
Prints multiple image copies from the original document on a single page.
Margin
Purpose:
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
To specify the margin of the copy.
Values:
Off* Does not specify the margin of the copy.
On
Margin Top/Bottom Specifies the size of the top and bottom margins.
Margin Left/Right
Specifies the size of the left and right margins.
Margin Middle
Specifies the size of the middle margin.
Copy Defaults
Purpose:
To use the Copy Defaults to modify the Copy menu defaults.
Using the Scan Menus
Use the Scan menus to configure a variety of scanner features.
NOTE: Values marked by an asterisk (*) are the factory default menu settings.
Scan to Email
Purpose:
To attach the scanned image to an e-mail.
Values:
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Enter E-Mail
Sends an e-mail by entering an e-mail address.
Address Book
Selects an e-mail to send from the Address Book.
Group E-Mail
Selects an e-mail to send from the group mail.
Search
Address
Allows you search for an e-mail address or group address and specify it as the e-mail
recipient.
From
Enters the sender from either of the following:
· Enter E-mail
· Address Book
Scan to Network
Purpose:
To store the scanned image in the network server or a computer.
Values:
Server
Stores the scanned image on the server by using the FTP protocol.
Search Address Allows you search for a server address and specify it as the transfer destination.
Computer
Stores the scanned image on the computer by using the SMB protocol.
Scan to Application
Purpose:
To store the scanned image in the application file.
Values:
TIFF
Scans an image in TIFF.
JPEG Scans an image in JPEG.
PDF
Scans an image in PDF.
BMP
Scans an image in BMP.
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
File Format
Purpose:
To specify the file format to save the scanned copy.
Values:
PDF*
MultiPageTIFF
TIFF
JPEG
MP TIFF NonComp TIFF NonComp
NOTE: The MP TIFF NonComp and TIFF NonComp menus are only displayed when 256 MB or more of
optional memory card is installed on the multifunction printer.
Color
Purpose:
To select color or black and white scanning.
Values:
Color*
Scans in the color mode.
Black&White Scans in the black and white mode.
Resolution
Purpose:
To specify the resolution of a scanned image.
Values:
300 400
600 150*
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Original Type
Purpose:
To improve the image quality by selecting the document type.
Values:
Text&Photo* Uses for documents with both text and photo/gray tones.
Photo
Uses for documents with photo or gray tones.
Text
Uses for documents with text.
Document Size
Purpose:
To specify the default paper size.
Values:
A4
Letter * 1
B5
A5
Executive
8.5"x13"
Legal
* 1 Denotes country-specific factory default values.
Lighter/Darker
Purpose:
To adjust the density to make the scanned copy lighter or darker than the original.
Values:
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Normal* Works well with standard typed or printed documents.
Darker1
Works well with light print or faint pencil markings.
Darker2
Darker3
Lighter3 Works well with dark print.
Lighter2
Lighter1
Sharpness
Purpose:
To adjust the sharpness to make the scanned copy sharper or softer than the original.
Values:
Normal* Does not make the scanned copy sharper or softer than the original.
Sharper
Makes the scanned copy sharper than the original.
Softer
Makes the scanned copy softer than the original.
Contrast
Purpose:
To adjust the amount of color in a specified hue to make the scanned copy higher or lower than the original.
Values:
Normal* Does not adjust the amount of color in a specified hue to make the scanned copy higher or
lower than the original.
Higher
Adjusts the amount of color in a specified hue to make the scanned copy higher than the
original.
Lower
Adjusts the amount of color in a specified hue to make the scanned copy lower than the
original.
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Auto Exposure
Purpose:
To adjust the overall brightness to make the scanned copy overexposed than the original.
Values:
On* Adjusts the overall brightness to make the scanned copy overexposed than the original.
Off
Does not adjust the overall brightness to make the scanned copy overexposed than the original.
Scan Defaults
To use the Scan Defaults to modify the Scan menu defaults.
Using the Fax Menus
Use the Fax menus to configure a variety of fax features.
NOTE: Values marked by an asterisk (*) are the factory default menu settings.
Phone Number
Purpose:
To enter the FAX number of the destination.
Speed Dial
Purpose:
To show up to 200 frequently dialed numbers in speed dial locations (001-200).
Phone Book
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Purpose:
To list all of the numbers currently stored in the printer's memory as speed dial numbers.
Add PhoneBook Entry
Purpose:
To enter numbers in the Phone Book list as speed dial and group dial numbers.
Group Dial
Purpose:
To list a group of destinations and set them under a one-digit (1-6) group dial location.
Resolution
Purpose:
To improve the output quality of the original or if scanning photographic materials.
Values:
Standard* For documents with normal sized characters.
Fine
For documents containing small characters or thin lines or documents printed using a dotmatrix printer.
SuperFine For documents containing extremely fine detail. The super fine mode is enabled only if the
remote printer also supports the Super Fine resolution. See the notes below.
NOTE: Faxes scanned in the SuperFine resolution transmits at the highest resolution supported by the
receiving device.
Original Type
Purpose:
To improve the image quality by selecting the document type.
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Values:
Text&Photo Uses for documents with both text and photo/gray tones.
Photo
Uses for documents with photo or gray tones.
Text*
Uses for documents with text.
Lighter/Darker
Purpose:
To adjust the density to make the copy lighter or darker than the original.
Values:
Normal* Works well with standard typed or printed documents.
Darker1
Works well with light print or faint pencil markings.
Darker2
Darker3
Lighter3 Works well with dark print.
Lighter2
Lighter1
OnHook
Purpose:
To send or receive a fax manually.
Values:
Off* Does not send or receive a fax manually.
On
Sends or receives a fax manually.
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Polling Receive
Purpose:
To receive faxes from the remote fax machine when you want to receive it.
Values:
Off* Does not receive faxes using Polling Receive.
On
Receives faxes using Polling Receive.
Delayed Start
Purpose:
To send a fax at a later time when you will not be present.
Values:
Off* Does not send a fax at a later time.
On
Sends a fax at a later time.
NOTE: A maximum of 19 delayed fax jobs can be stored in the Dell Multifunction Color Laser Printer
3115cn.
Fax Defaults
Purpose:
To use the Fax Defaults to modify the Fax menu defaults.
Using the Job Status Menus
Use the Job Status menus to print the stored files and completed fax numbers.
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Stored Print
This Stored Print menu provides applicable printing services such as Secure Print and Proof Print.
NOTE: The Stored Print menu is only displayed when 256 MB or more of optional memory card is
installed on the multifunction printer.
Secure Print
Purpose:
To print confidential jobs. The multifunction printer can hold the job in memory until you arrive at the
multifunction printer and type the password on the operator panel.
Values:
Del after Print
Print and Save
Delete
Prints the job, and then deletes it from print memory.
Prints the job, and then saves it in print memory.
Deletes the job from print memory.
Proof Print
Purpose:
To print only one copy and check the print result before printing all of the copies. This prevents a large
number of misprinted copies from being printed at one time.
Values:
Del after Print
Print and Save
Delete
Prints the job, and then deletes it from print memory.
Prints the job, and then saves it in print memory.
Deletes the job from print memory.
Secure Receive
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Purpose:
To list fax numbers received in the Secure Receive mode.
Completed Fax
Purpose:
To list completed fax numbers.
Pending Fax
Purpose:
To list pending fax numbers.
Using the Setup Menus
Defaults Settings
To use the Defaults Settings to modify the Copy, Scan, or Fax menu defaults.
Tray Settings
Use the Tray Settings menu to define the print media loaded in each tray.
NOTE: Values marked by an asterisk (*) are the factory default menu settings.
MPF
Purpose:
To specify the paper loaded in the multipurpose feeder.
Values:
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Paper Type
Plain*
Plain Thick
Transparency
Covers
Covers Thick
Label
Coated
Coated Thick
Envelope
Plain S2
Plain Thick S2
Covers S2
Covers Thick S2
Coated S2
Coated Thick S2
Paper Size
A4*
A5
B5
Driver Size
Letter
8.5x13"
Legal
Executive
Monarch
DL
C5
Envelope #10
Custom Size
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
MPF Mode Panel
Specified*
Display
Pop Up
Stop printing and show an error on the operation panel if the paper specified
from the printer driver does not match the paper configured for the MFP from
the operation panel.
Driver
Specified
Continue to print even if the paper specified from the printer driver does not
match the paper configured for the MFP from the operation panel.
On*
Specifies the size and type of paper loaded in the multipurpose feeder. This
item is available only when Panel Specified is selected for MFP Mode.
Off
Size and type of paper loaded in the multipurpose feeder is not specified. This
item is available only when Panel Specified is selected for MFP Mode.
NOTE: For the standard 250-sheet tray or optional 550-sheet paper feeder, setting paper size is not
required. These trays detect the paper size automatically. For more information on supported paper
size for the standard and optional trays, see "Print Media Sizes and Support."
Use this menu item to:
Optimize print quality for the specified paper.
Automatically switches trays. The multifunction printer automatically switches any trays containing the
same type and size of paper, if you have set the Paper Type to the correct values.
Tray 1
Purpose:
To specify the paper loaded in the 250-sheet tray.
Values:
Paper Type
Plain*
Plain Thick
Covers
Covers Thick
Label
Coated
Coated Thick
Paper Size
Auto*
Custom Size
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Tray 2
Purpose:
To specify the paper loaded in the optional 550-sheet paper feeder.
Values:
Paper Type
Plain*
Plain Thick
Covers
Covers Thick
Label
Coated
Coated Thick
Paper Size
Auto*
Custom Size
Reports
Use the Reports menu to print various types of reports and lists.
System Settings
Purpose:
To print a list of the current user default values, the installed options, the amount of installed print memory,
and the status of printer supplies.
Panel Settings
Purpose:
To print a detailed list of all the settings on the operator panel menus.
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
PCL Fonts List
Purpose:
To print a sample of the available PCL fonts.
See also:
"Understanding Fonts", "Printing a Font Sample List"
PS Fonts List
Purpose:
To print a sample of the available Adobe PostScript 3 fonts.
See also:
"Understanding Fonts", "Printing a Font Sample List"
Job History
Purpose:
To print a detailed list of the processed print jobs. This list contains the latest 20 print jobs.
Error History
Purpose:
To print a detailed list of paper jam and fatal errors.
Color Test Page
Purpose:
To print a page for testing colors.
Protocol Monitor
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Purpose:
To print a detailed list of monitored protocols.
PCL Macro List
Purpose:
To print the information on the downloaded PCL macro.
Stored Documents
Purpose:
To print a list of all files that are stored as Secure, Store, and Proof Print in the RAM disk.
NOTE: Stored Print is only displayed when 256 MB or more of optional memory card is installed on
the multifunction printer.
Admin Menu
Use the Admin Menu menu to configure a variety of printer features.
Phone Book
Use the Phone Book menu to configure the Speed Dial and Group Dial settings.
Speed Dial
Purpose:
To store up to 200 frequently dialed numbers in speed dial locations .
Group Dial
Purpose:
To create a group of these destinations and set them under a two-digit group dial location.
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Print Language
Purpose:
To specify the settings for PCL and PostScript.
PCL
Use the PCL menu to change printer settings that only affect jobs using the PCL emulation printer language.
NOTE: Values marked by an asterisk (*) are the factory default menu settings.
Paper Tray
Purpose:
To specify the input tray.
Values:
Auto*
Tray 1
Tray 2 *1
MPF
Automatically selects a tray according to the paper size and type settings of the printing job.
The paper is fed from the standard 250-sheet tray.
The paper is fed from the optional 550-sheet paper feeder.
The paper is fed from the multipurpose feeder.
* 1 Only displayed when an optional 550-sheet paper feeder is installed on the multifunction printer.
Paper Size
Purpose:
To specify the default paper size.
Values:
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
A4*1
C5
A5
Executive
B5
Monarch
Letter* 1
DL
8.5x13"
Envelope #10
Legal
Custom Size
*1
Denotes country-specific factory default values.
NOTE: Selecting a custom size for the paper size prompts you to enter a custom length and width.
Orientation
Purpose:
To specify how text and graphics are oriented on the page.
Values:
Portrait*
Landscape
Prints text and graphics parallel to the short edge of the paper.
Prints text and graphics parallel to the long edge of the paper.
2 Sided Print
Purpose:
To set duplexing as the default for all print jobs. (Select Duplex from the printer driver to duplex only
specific jobs.)
NOTE: Values marked by an asterisk (*) are the factory default menu settings.
NOTE: The 2 Sided Print menu is only available when the optional duplexer is installed on the
multifunction printer.
Values:
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Off*
On
Prints on one side of the paper.
Prints on both sides of the paper.
Binding Edge
To select binding along the long or short edge of the page. (Select Duplex from the printer driver to duplex
only specific jobs.)
NOTE: Values marked by an asterisk (*) are the factory default menu settings.
NOTE: The 2 Sided menu is only available when the optional duplexer is installed on the
multifunction printer.
Values:
Flip long
edge*
Flip short
edge
Assumes binding along the long edge of the page. (Left edge for portrait orientation and
top edge for landscape orientation)
Assumes binding along the short edge of the page. (Top edge for portrait orientation and
left edge for landscape orientation)
Font
Purpose:
To specify the default font from the registered fonts in the multifunction printer.
Values:
CG Times
CG Times It
CG Times Bd
CG Times BdIt
Univers Md
Univers MdIt
Univers Bd
Univers BdIt
Univers MdCd
Univers MdCdIt
Univers BdCd
Univers BdCdIt
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
AntiqueOlv
AntiqueOlv It
AntiqueOlv Bd
CG Omega
CG Omega It
CG Omega Bd
CG Omega BdIt
GaramondAntiqua Garamond Krsv
Garamond Hlb
GaramondKrsvHlb Courier*
Courier It
Courier Bd
Courier BdIt
LetterGothic
LetterGothic It
LetterGothic Bd
Albertus Md
Albertus XBd
Clarendon Cd
Coronet
Marigold
Arial
Arial It
Arial Bd
Arial BdIt
Times New
Times New It
Times New Bd
Times New BdIt
Symbol
Wingdings
Line Printer
Times Roman
Times It
Times Bd
Times BdIt
Helvetica
Helvetica Ob
Helvetica Bd
Helvetica BdOb
CourierPS
CourierPS Ob
CourierPS Bd
CourierPS BdOb
SymbolPS
Palatino Roman
Palatino It
Palatino Bd
Palatino BdIt
ITCBookman Lt
ITCBookman LtIt
ITCBookmanDm
ITCBookmanDm It HelveticaNr
HelveticaNr Ob
HelveticaNr Bd
N C Schbk Roman
HelveticaNrBdOb
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
N C Schbk It
N C Schbk Bd
N C Schbk BdIt
ITC A G Go Bk
ITC A G Go BkOb
ITC A G Go Dm
ITC A G Go DmOb
ZapfC MdIt
ZapfDingbats
Symbol Set
Purpose:
To specify a symbol set for a specified font.
Values:
ROMAN-8* ISO L1
ISO L2
ISO L5
ISO L6
PC-8
PC-8 DN
PC-775
PC-850
PC-852
PC-1004
PC-8 TK
WIN L1
WIN L2
WIN L5
DESKTOP
PS TEXT
MC TEXT
MS PUB
MATH-8
PS MATH
PI FONT
LEGAL
ISO-4
ISO-6
ISO-11
ISO-15
ISO-17
ISO-21
ISO-60
ISO-69
WIN 3.0
WINBALT
SYMBOL
WINGDINGS DNGBTSMS
Font Size
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Purpose:
To specify the font size for scalable typographic fonts.
Values:
4.00 - 50.00
The values are in units of 0.25.
12.00*
Font size refers to the height of the characters in the font. One point equals approximately 1/72 of an inch.
NOTE: The Font Size menu is only displayed for typographic fonts.
See also:
"Pitch and Point Size"
Font Pitch
Purpose:
To specify the font pitch for scalable monospaced fonts.
Values:
6.00 - 24.00
The values are in units of 0.01.
10.00*
Font pitch refers to the number of fixed-space characters in a horizontal inch of type. For nonscalable
monospaced fonts, the pitch is displayed, but cannot be changed.
NOTE: The Font Pitch menu is only displayed for fixed, or monospaced, fonts.
See also:
"Pitch and Point Size"
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Form Line
Purpose:
To set the number of lines in a page.
Values:
The values are in units of 1.
5 - 128
64* or 64*1
* 1 Denotes country-specific factory default values.
The multifunction printer sets the amount of space between each line (vertical line spacing) based on the
Form Line and Orientation menu items. Select the correct Form Line and Orientation before changing
Form Line.
See also:
"Orientation," "Use this menu item to:"
Quantity
Purpose:
To set the number of copies you want for the printer default value. (Set the number of copies required for a
specific job from the printer driver. Values selected from the printer driver always override values selected
from the operator panel.)
Values:
1-999
The values are in units of 1.
1*
Image Enhance
Purpose:
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
To specify whether to perform the image enhancement feature. Image enhancement is a feature that makes
the boundary line between black and white smoother to decrease jagged edges and enhance the visual
appearance.
Values:
On*
Off
Enables to perform the image enhancement feature.
Disables to perform the image enhancement feature.
Hex Dump
Purpose:
To help isolate the source of a print job problem. With Hex Dump selected, all data sent to the multifunction
printer is printed in hexadecimal and character representation. Control codes are not executed.
Values:
Disable*
Enable
Disables the Hex Dump feature.
Enables the Hex Dump feature.
Draft Mode
Purpose:
To save toner by printing in the draft mode. The print quality is reduced when printing in the draft mode.
Values:
Disable*
Enable
Does not print in the draft mode.
Prints in the draft mode.
LineTermination
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Purpose:
To add the line termination commands.
Values:
Off*
The line termination command is not added.
CR=CR, LF=LF, FF=FF
Add-LF
The LF command is added.
CR=CR-LF, LF=LF, FF=FF
The CR command is added.
Add-CR CR=CR, LF=CR-LF, FF=CR-FF
CR-XX
The CR and LF commands are added.
CR=CR-LF, LF=CR-LF, FF=CR-FF
Default Color
Purpose:
To specify the color mode to Color or Black. This setting is used when the color printing mode setting is not
specified for the print job that is sent to the multifunction printer.
Value:
Black*
Color
Prints in the black and white mode.
Prints in the color mode.
PostScript
Use the PostScript menu to change printer settings that only affect jobs using the PostScript emulation
printer language.
NOTE: Values marked by an asterisk (*) are the factory default menu settings.
PS Error Report
Purpose:
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
To specify whether the multifunction printer outputs error contents for a PostScript error. The change
becomes effective after the printer is turned off and then on again.
Values:
On*
Prints an error message before it discards the job.
Discards the print job without printing an error message.
Off
NOTE: This instructions from the PS driver override the settings specified on the operator panel.
PS Job Time-Out
Purpose:
To specify the execution time for one PostScript job. The change becomes effective after the multifunction
printer is turned off and then on again.
Values:
Off*
1-900min.
Job timeout does not occur.
A PostScript error occurs if processing is not completed after the specified time.
Paper Select Mode
Purpose:
To specify the way to select the tray for PostScript mode. The change becomes effective after the
multifunction printer is turned off and then on again.
Value:
Auto*
Select From Tray
The tray is selected as the same setting as in the PCL mode.
The tray is selected in a method compatible with regular Post Script printers.
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Wired Network
Use the Wired Network menu to change printer settings affecting jobs sent to the multifunction printer
through the wired network.
NOTE: Values marked by an asterisk (*) are the factory default menu settings.
Ethernet
Purpose:
To specify the communication speed and the duplex settings of Ethernet. The change becomes effective after
the multifunction printer is turned off and then on again.
Values:
Auto*
10 Base Half
10 Base Full
100 Base Half
100 Base Full
Detects the Ethernet settings automatically.
Uses 10base-T half-duplex.
Uses 10base-T full-duplex.
Uses 100base-TX half-duplex.
Uses 100base-TX full-duplex.
TCP/IP
Purpose:
To specify the TCP/IP settings for the wired network. The change becomes effective after the multifunction
printer is turned off and then on again.
Values:
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
IP Mode* 1
Uses both IPv4 and IPv6 to set the IP address.
Dual Stack
Uses IPv4 to set the IP address.
IPv4 Mode
Uses IPv6 to set the IP address.
IPv6 Mode*3
IPv4
Get IP Address
AutoIP*
BOOTP
RARP
DHCP
Panel
IP Address
Subnet Mask
Gateway Address
Reset IPsec*2
Automatically sets the IP address.
Uses BOOTP to set the IP address.
Uses RARP to set the IP address.
Uses DHCP to set the IP address.
Enables the IP address entered on the operator panel.
Sets the IP address allocated to the printer by using the
keys on the operator panel.
Sets the subnet mask.
Sets the gateway address.
Disables IPsec.
* 1 Only displayed when an optional multi-protocol card is installed on the printer.
* 2 Only displayed when IPsec is enabled.
* 3 This mode is available only when firmware version 200706291103 or later and network (MPC) firmware
version 16.03 or later are installed. Since you cannot set IPsec in Windows Vista in this mode, use the Dell
Printer Configuration Web Tool. The Get Information from Printer function on the Options tab of
the printer driver is not available when using this mode.
Protocol
Purpose:
To enable or disable each item. The change becomes effective after the printer is turned off and then on
again.
Values:
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
LPD
Enable*
Disable
Port9100
Enable*
Disable
IPP*1
Enable*
Disable
SMB TCP/IP*1
Enable*
Disable
SMB NetBEUI*1
Enable*
Disable
FTP
Enable*
Disable
NetWare IP
Enable*
Disable
NetWare IPX
Enable*
Disable
WSD
Enable*
Disable
SNMP UDP
Enable*
Disable
Enables the LPD port.
Disables the LPD port.
Enables the Port9100 port.
Disables the Port9100 port.
Enables the IPP port.
Disables the IPP port.
Uses TCP/IP for SMB.
Does not use TCP/IP for SSB.
Uses NetBEUI for SMB.
Does not use Net BEUI for SMB.
Enables the FTP port.
Disables the FTP port.
Enables the IP.
Disables the IP.
Enables the IPX.
Disables the IPX.
Enables the WSD port.
Disables the WSD port.
Enables the UDP.
Disables the UDP.
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
E-Mail Alert
Enable*
Disable
EWS
Apple Talk*1
Disables the E-Mail Alert feature.
Enable*
Enables an access to Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool
embedded in the printer.
Disable
Disables an access to Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool
embedded in the printer.
Enable*
Disable
Bonjour(mDNS)*1
Enables the E-Mail Alert feature.
Enable*
Disable
Enables the AppleTalk port.
Disables the AppleTalk port.
Enables the Bonjour(mDNS) port.
Disables the Bonjour(mDNS) port.
* 1 Only displayed when an optional multi-protocol card is installed on the printer and the optional wireless
printer adapter is not installed on the card.
IPX/SPX
Purpose:
To configure the IPX/SPX settings for the wired network. The change becomes effective after the printer is
turned off and then on again.
Values:
Auto*
Ethernet II
Ethernet 802.3
Ethernet 802.2
Ethernet SNAP
Automatically sets the frame type.
Uses the Ethernet II frame type.
Uses the IEEE802.3 frame type.
Uses the IEEE802.2 frame type.
Use the SNAP frame type.
NOTE: The IPX/SPX menu is only displayed when an optional multi-protocol card is installed on the
printer and the optional wireless printer adapter is not installed on the card.
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
IP Filter (IPv4)
Purpose:
To specify that data received from certain IP addresses through the wired network is blocked. You can set up
to five IP addresses. The change becomes effective after the printer is turned off and then on again.
Values:
Filter*1 No. n/Address (n is 1-5.)
Sets the IP address for Filter n.
Sets the mask for Filter n.
No. n/Mask (n is 1-5.)
No. n/Mode (n is 1-5.) Off*
Accept
Reject
Disable the IP Filter feature for Filter n.
Accepts an access from specified IP address.
Rejects an access from specified IP address.
* 1 This item is only available for LPD or Port9100.
Initialize NVM
Purpose:
To initialize wired network data stored in NVM. After executing this function and rebooting the printer, all
wired network settings are reset to their default values.
Adobe Protocol
Purpose:
To specify PostScript communication protocol for each interface. You can configure the Adobe Protocol
settings for the wired network. The change becomes effective after the printer is turned off and then on
again.
Values:
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Auto*
Standard
Used when auto-detecting the PostScript communication protocol.
Used when the communication protocol is in ASCII interface.
Used when the communication protocol is in binary format.
BCP
TBCP
Binary
Used when the communication protocol supports both ASCII and binary data to switch between
them according to the specified control code.
Used when no special processing is required for data.
Wireless Network
Use the Wireless Network menu to change print settings affecting jobs sent to the printer through a
wireless network.
NOTE: The Wireless Net menu is only displayed when an optional multi-protocol card is installed on
the printer and the optional wireless printer adapter is installed on the card.
NOTE: Values marked by an asterisk (*) are the factory default menu settings.
Wireless/Status
Purpose:
To display the information on the wireless signal strength. Any change cannot be made on the operator
panel to improve the status of the wireless connection.
Values:
Good
Acceptable
Low
No Reception
Indicates good signal strength.
Indicates marginal signal strength.
Indicates insufficient signal strength.
Indicates that no signal is received.
Wireless/Reset Wireless
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Purpose:
To initialize wireless network settings. After executing this function and rebooting the printer, all wireless
network settings are reset to their default values.
TCP/IP
Purpose:
To specify the TCP/IP settings for the wireless network. The change becomes effective after the printer is
turned off and then on again.
Values:
IP Mode*1
Uses both IPv4 and IPv6 to set the IP address.
Dual Stack
Uses IPv4 to set the IP address.
IPv4 Mode
Uses IPv6 to set the IP address.
IPv6 Mode*3
IPv4
Get IP Address
AutoIP*
BOOTP
RARP
DHCP
Panel
IP Address
Subnet Mask
Gateway Address
Reset IPsec*2
Automatically sets the IP address.
Uses BOOTP to set the IP address.
Uses RARP to set the IP address.
Uses DHCP to set the IP address.
Enables the IP address entered on the operator panel.
Sets the IP address allocated to the printer by using the
keys on the operator panel.
Sets the subnet mask.
Sets the gateway address.
Disables IPsec.
* 1 Only displayed when an optional multi-protocol card is installed on the printer.
* 2 Only displayed when IPsec is enabled.
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
* 3 This mode is available only when firmware version 200706291103 or later and network (MPC) firmware
version 16.03 or later are installed. Since you cannot set IPsec in Windows Vista in this mode, use the Dell
Printer Configuration Web Tool. The Get Information from Printer function on the Options tab of
the printer driver is not available when using this mode.
Protocol
Purpose:
To enable or disable each item. The change becomes effective after the multifunction printer is turned off
and then on again.
Values:
LPD
Enable*
Disable
Port9100
Enable*
Disable
IPP
Enable*
Disable
SMB TCP/IP
Enable*
Disable
SMB NetBEUI
Enable*
Disable
FTP
Enable*
Disable
NetWare IP
Enable*
Disable
Enables the LPD port.
Disables the LPD port.
Enables the Port9100 port.
Disables the Port9100 port.
Enables the IPP port.
Disables the IPP port.
Uses TCP/IP for SMB.
Does not use TCP/IP for SMB.
Uses NetBEUI for SMB.
Does not use Net BEUI for SMB.
Enables the FTP port.
Disables the FTP port.
Enables the IP.
Disables the IP.
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
NetWare IPX
Enable*
Disable
WSD
Enable*
Disable
SNMP UDP
Enable*
Disable
SNMP IPX
Enable*
Disable
E-Mail Alert
Enable*
Disable
EWS
Disables the IPX.
Enables the WSD port.
Disables the WSD port.
Enables the UDP.
Disables the UDP.
Enables the IPX.
Disables the IPX.
Enables the E-Mail Alert feature.
Disables the E-Mail Alert feature.
Enables an access to Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool embedded in
Enable* the multifunction printer.
Disable
Apple Talk
Enables the IPX.
Enable*
Disable
Bonjour(mDNS) Enable*
Disable
Disables an access to Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool embedded in
the multifunction printer.
Enables the AppleTalk port.
Disables the AppleTalk port.
Enables the Bonjour(mDNS) port.
Disables the Bonjour(mDNS) port.
IPX/SPX
Purpose:
To configure the IPX/SPX settings for the wireless network. The change becomes effective after the
multifunction printer is turned off and then on again.
Values:
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Automatically sets the frame type.
Auto*
Uses the Ethernet II frame type.
Ethernet II
Ethernet 802.3
Ethernet 802.2
Ethernet SNAP
Uses the IEEE802.3 frame type.
Uses the IEEE802.2 frame type.
Use the SNAP frame type.
IP Filter (IPv4)
Purpose:
To specify that data received from certain IP addresses through the wireless network is blocked. You can set
up to five IP addresses. The change becomes effective after the multifunction printer is turned off and then
on again.
Values:
IP Filter*1 No. n/Address (n is 1-5.)
Sets the IP address for Filter n.
Sets the mask for Filter n.
No. n/Mask (n is 1-5.)
No. n/Mode (n is 1-5.) Off*
Accept
Reject
Disable the IP Filter feature for Filter n.
Accepts an access from specified IP address.
Rejects an access from specified IP address.
* 1 This item is only available for LPD or Port9100.
Initialize NVM
Purpose:
To initialize wireless network data stored in NVRAM.
Adobe Protocol
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Purpose:
To specify PostScript communication protocol for each interface. You can configure Adobe Protocol settings
for the wireless network. The change becomes effective after the multifunction printer is turned off and then
on again.
Values:
Auto
Standard
Used when auto-detecting the PostScript communication protocol.
Used when the communication protocol is in ASCII interface.
Used when the communication protocol is in binary format.
BCP
TBCP*
Binary
Used when the communication protocol supports both ASCII and binary data to switch between
them according to the specified control code.
Used when no special processing is required.
Parallel Settings
The Parallel Settings menu can be adjusted to configure the parallel interface.
NOTE: Values marked by an asterisk (*) are the factory default menu settings.
ECP
Purpose:
To specify the ECP communication mode of the parallel interface. The change becomes effective after the
multifunction printer is turned off and then on again.
Values:
Enable*
Disable
The ECP communication mode is enabled.
The ECP communication mode is disabled.
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Adobe Protocol
Purpose:
To specify PostScript communication protocol for each interface. You can configure Adobe Protocol settings
for the wireless network. The change becomes effective after the multifunction printer is turned off and then
on again.
Values:
Auto
Standard
Used when auto-detecting the PostScript communication protocol.
Used when the communication protocol is in ASCII interface.
Used when the communication protocol is in binary format.
BCP
TBCP*
Binary
Used when the communication protocol supports both ASCII and binary data to switch between
them according to the specified control code.
Used when no special processing is required.
USB Settings
Use the USB Settings menu to change printer settings affecting a USB port.
NOTE: Values marked by an asterisk (*) are the factory default menu settings.
Fax Settings
Use the Fax Settings menu to configure the basic fax settings.
NOTE: Values marked by an asterisk (*) are the factory default menu settings.
Interval Timer
Purpose:
To specify the interval time (3-255 seconds) of the resend attempts.
Number of Redial
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Purpose:
To specify the number of redial attempts, 0-9. If you enter 0, the multifunction printer will not redial.
Int. of Redial
Purpose:
To automatically redial a remote fax machine if it was busy. Intervals from 1-15 minutes can be entered.
Ans Select
Purpose:
To select the default fax receiving mode.
Values:
TEL Mode
Automatic fax reception is turned off. You can receive a fax by picking up the handset of the
external phone and then pressing the remote receive code, or by setting OnHook to On (you
can hear voice or fax tones from the remote machine) and then pressing Start.
FAX
Mode*
A fax is automatically received.
TEL/FAX
Mode
When the multifunction printer receive an incoming a fax, the external telephone rings for the
time specified in Auto Ans. TEL/FAX, and then the multifunction printer automatically receive
a fax. If incoming data is not a fax, the multifunction printer beeps from the internal speaker.
Ans/FAX
Mode
The multifunction printer can share one telephone line with an answering machine. In this
mode, the multifunction printer will monitor the fax signal and pick up the line if there are fax
tones. If the phone communication in your country is serial, this mode is not available.
DRPD
Mode
Before using the Distinctive Ring Pattern Detection (DRPD) option, distinctive ring service
must be installed on your telephone line by the telephone company. After the telephone
company has provided a separate number for faxing with a distinctive ring pattern, configure
the fax setup to monitor for that specific ring pattern.
Auto Answer Fax
Purpose:
To answer an incoming call and automatically go into the receive mode. You can specify the time for
incoming call of the external phone in 0-255 seconds.
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Auto Ans. TEL/FAX
Purpose:
To share one telephone line with an external telephone. You can specify the time for incoming call of the
external phone in 0-255 seconds.
Auto Ans. Ans/FAX
Purpose:
To share one telephone line with an answering machine. You can specify the time for incoming call of the
external phone in 0-255 seconds.
Line Monitor
Purpose:
To specify the volume of the external phone (line monitor).
Values:
Off
Turns off the volume of the external phone.
Min
Selects the volume of the external phone.
Middle*
Max
Ring Tone Volume
Purpose:
To specify the volume for the incoming faxes.
Values:
None
Turns off the volume for the incoming faxes.
Min
Selects the volume for the incoming faxes.
Middle
Max*
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Line Type
Purpose:
To select the default line type.
Values:
PSTN* Uses PSTN.
PBX
Uses PBX.
Dialing Type
Purpose:
To select the dialing type.
Values:
PB*
Uses PB.
DP (10PPS) Uses DP (10PPS).
DP (20PPS) Uses DP (20PPS).
DM Prevention
Purpose:
To reject faxes sent from unwanted stations.
Values:
On
Only accepts faxes from numbers registered in the PhoneBook. Incoming faxes from numbers whose
G3ID is not registered correctly are not accepted even if the number is registered in the PhoneBook.
Off* Accepts faxes from numbers that are not registered in the PhoneBook.
Remote Receive
Purpose:
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
To receive a fax by pressing the remote receive code on the external telephone after picking up the handset
of the telephone.
Values:
On
Receives a fax by pressing the remote receive code on the external telephone.
Off* Does not receive a fax by pressing the remote receive code on the external telephone.
Remote Rcv Tone
Purpose:
To specify the tone in two digits to start Remote Receive.
Duplex Print
Purpose:
To use duplex printing when you receive a fax. This option is available only when the optional duplexer is
installed on your multifunction printer.
Values:
On
Uses duplex printing.
Off* Does not use duplex printing.
Send Header
Purpose:
To print the sender record at the head of the fax.
Values:
On* Prints the sender record at the head of the fax.
Off
Does not print the sender record at the head of the fax.
Send Header Name
Purpose:
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
To register the sender name to be recorded in the sender report.
G3ID
Purpose:
To contain your telephone number, which is printed at the top of each page sent from your multifunction
printer.
NOTE: Ensure to specify G3ID before using DM Prevention.
Local Name
Purpose:
To contain your name or company name, which is printed on the report sheet.
DRPD Pattern
Purpose:
To provide a separate number for faxing with a distinctive ring pattern.
Values:
Pattern15
DRPD is a service provided by some telephone companies. DRPD Patterns are specified by
your telephone company. The patterns provided with your multifunction printer are shown
below:
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Ask your telephone company which pattern you need to select to use this service.
Forward Settings
Purpose:
To set the multifunction printer to always forward all of the incoming faxes to the specified destination.
Values:
Trans. at Error Forwards the incoming faxes when an error occurs.
Trans. Always
Always forwards the incoming faxes.
Not Trans.*
Does not forward incoming faxes.
Fwd. Settings Num
Purpose:
To set the number of the multifunction printer to always forward all of the incoming faxes to the specified
destination.
Fwd. Set Print
Purpose:
To print all of the ongoing faxes when you can set the multifunction printer to always forward the faxes to
the specified destination.
Values:
On
Prints all of the ongoing faxes.
Off* Does not print all of the ongoing faxes.
Prefix Dial
Purpose:
To select whether or not to add the prefix number when you send a fax.
Values:
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
On
Adds the prefix number when you send a fax.
Off* Does not add the prefix number when you send a fax.
Prefix Dial Num
Purpose:
To set a prefix dial number up to five digits. This number dials before any auto dial number is started. It is
useful for accessing the PABX exchange.
Discard Size
Purpose:
To set the multifunction printer to discard any excess at the bottom of the page.
Values:
On
Discards any excess at the bottom of the page.
Off*
Prints any excess at the bottom of the page without discarding it.
Auto Reduction Automatically reduces the document to fit it onto the appropriate sized paper.
Color Fax
Purpose:
To set the multifunction printer to send and receive color faxes.
Values:
On
Allows color faxes to be sent and received (select color or black and white when sending a fax).
Off* Faxes are sent and received in black and white only.
Extel Hook Thresh
Purpose:
To set the threshold value for the external telephone.
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Values:
Lower
Sets Lower in the threshold value.
Normal* Sets Normal in the threshold value.
Higher
Sets Higher in the threshold value.
Country
Purpose:
To select the country where the multifunction printer is used.
Fwd. Error Print
Purpose:
To print the documents failed to transfer when Forward Set Print is set to Off.
Values:
On* Prints documents that failed to transfer when Forward Set Print is set to Off.
Off
Does not print documents that failed to transfer when Forward Set Print is set to Off.
System Settings
Use the System Settings menu to configure the basic printer settings.
NOTE: Values marked by an asterisk (*) are the factory default menu settings.
Power Saver Mode2
Purpose:
To enable Power Saver Mode2.
Values:
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Enable* Enables Power Saver Mode2.
Disable
Disables Power Saver Mode2.
Power Saver Timer
Purpose:
To specify the amount of time the multifunction printer waits after a job is submitted before it goes into the
power saver mode.
Values:
Mode1 5-60
min
Specifies the amount of time before the multifunction printer enters power saver mode
after it finishes a job.
5 min*
Mode2 1-6 min
6 min*
Enter 5 to put the multifunction printer in power saver mode five minutes after it finishes a job. This uses
much less energy, but requires more warm-up time for the multifunction printer. Enter 5 if your
multifunction printer shares an electrical circuit with room lighting and you notice lights flickering.
Select a high value if your multifunction printer is in constant use. Under most circumstances, this keeps the
multifunction printer ready to operate with minimum warm-up time. Select a value between 5 and 60
minutes for power save mode if you want a balance between energy consumption and a shorter warm-up
period.
The multifunction printer automatically returns to the standby mode from the power saver mode when it
receives data from the computer or remote fax machine. You can also return the multifunction printer to the
standby mode by pressing any button on the operator panel.
Auto Reset
Purpose:
To automatically reset the settings for COPY, SCAN, or FAX to the default and return to the standby mode
after you do not specify any settings for the specified time.
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Values:
45sec
1min
2min
3min
4min
Alert Tone
Purpose:
To sound an alert when an event associated each function occurs.
Values:
Panel Select
Tone
Soft
Sounds an alert when you press a button on the operator panel.
Normal
Loud
Panel Alert
Tone
Off*
Does not sound an alert when you press a button on the operator panel.
Soft
Sounds an alert when you press a wrong button.
Normal
Loud
Machine Ready
Tone
Off*
Does not sound an alert when you press a wrong button.
Soft
Sounds an alert when the multifunction printer is ready.
Normal*
Loud
Copy Job Tone
Off
Does not sound an alert when the multifunction printer is ready.
Soft
Sounds an alert when copying is completed.
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Normal*
Loud
Non-Copy Job
Tone
Off
Does not sound an alert when copying is completed.
Soft
Sounds an alert when any other job except copying is completed.
Normal*
Loud
Fault Tone
Off
Does not sound an alert when any other job except copying is completed.
Soft
Sounds an alert when a job is terminated by some faults.
Normal*
Loud
Alert Tone
Off
Does not sound an alert when a job is terminated by some faults.
Soft
Sounds an alert when a job is reserved by some reasons.
Normal*
Loud
Out of Paper
Off
Does not sound an alert when a job is reserved by some reasons.
Soft
Sounds an alert when the multifunction printer runs out of paper.
Normal*
Loud
Low Toner
Off
Does not sound an alert when the multifunction printer runs out of paper.
Soft
Sounds an alert when toner becomes low.
Normal*
Loud
Auto Clear
Alert
Off
Does not sound an alert when toner becomes low.
Soft
Sounds an alert before 5 seconds when an operator panel message is
cleared automatically.
Normal
Loud
Base Tone
Off*
Does not sound an alert before 5 seconds when an operator panel message
is cleared automatically
Soft
Sounds an alert when an operator panel display is returned to the default
setting by scrolling the loop menu.
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
setting by scrolling the loop menu.
Normal
Loud
All Tones
Off*
Does not sound an alert when an operator panel display is returned to the
default setting by scrolling the loop menu.
Soft
All tone settings can be changed at one time by this setting.
Normal*
Loud
Off
Time-Out
Purpose:
To specify the amount of time the multifunction printer waits to receive additional bytes of data from the
computer. When this timeout expires, the print job is canceled.
Values:
Off
5-300
sec
Disables the job timeout.
Specifies the amount of time the multifunction printer waits for additional data before it
cancels the job.
30 sec*
Clock Settings
Purpose:
To specify the date format.
Values:
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Set Date:yy/mm/dd
Set Time
Date Format
Time Format
Sets the date in the yy/mm/dd format depending on the settings for Date Format.
Sets the time.
Sets the date format.
12H
24H*
Time Zone
Sets the time in the 12H format.
Sets the time in the 24H format.
Sets the time zone.
mm/inch
Purpose:
Specifies the default measurement unit displayed after the numeric value on the operator panel.
Values:
Selects millimeter as the default measurement unit.
mm
Selects inch as the default measurement unit.
inch*
Auto Log Print
Purpose:
To automatically print the Job History report when the number of Job History items reaches the maximum.
Values:
Off*
On
Does not automatically print the Job History report.
Automatically print the Job History report when the number of Job History items reaches the
maximum.
Print logs can also be printed using the Report/List menu.
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
See also:
"USB Settings"
Print ID
Purpose:
To specify a location where the user ID is printed. This feature is available for the PCL driver and unavailable
for the PS driver.
Values:
Does not print the user ID.
Off*
Top Left
Top Right
Bottom Left
Bottom Right
Prints the user ID on the top left of the page.
Prints the user ID on the top right of the page.
Prints the user ID on the bottom left of the page.
Prints the user ID on the bottom right of the page.
NOTE: When printing on DL size paper, a part of the user ID may not be printed correctly.
Print Text
Purpose:
To specify whether the multifunction printer outputs PDL data, which is not supported by the multifunction
printer, as text when the multifunction printer receives it. Text data is printed on A4 or Letter size paper.
Values:
Off
On*
Does not print the received data.
Prints the received data as text data.
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Banner Sheet
Purpose:
To specify the position of banner sheet, and also specify the tray in which the banner sheet is loaded. This
feature is available for the PCL driver but is not available for the PS driver.
Values:
Insert Position
Off*
Front
Back
Front & Back
Specify Tray*1
Tray 1*
Tray 2*2
MPF
Does not print the banner sheet.
Prints on the beginning of document.
Prints on the end of document.
Prints on both beginning and end of document.
The banner sheet is loaded in the standard 250-sheet tray.
The banner sheet is loaded in tray 2.
The banner sheet is loaded in multipurpose feeder.
* 1 When you load paper in the multipurpose feeder to print banner sheets, specify MPF Mode as Panel
Specified and specify MPF PaperSize other than Driver Size from the operator panel.
* 2 Only displayed when an optional 550-sheet paper feeder is installed on the multifunction printer.
Fax Activity
Purpose:
To show information about the faxes you recently received or sent.
Values:
Auto Print*
No Auto
Print
Automatically prints information about the faxes when you received or sent 50 items of
faxes.
Does not automatically print information about the faxes when you received or sent 50
items of faxes.
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Fax Transmit
Purpose:
To specify the communication result for the fax transmission.
Values:
Not Print
Print at Error
Print Always*
Does not print the report.
Prints the report when a communication error is detected.
Always prints the report for the fax transmission.
Fax Broadcast
Purpose:
To specify the communication result for a fax to multiple locations.
Values:
Not Print
Print at Error
Print Always*
Does not print the report.
Prints the report when a communication error is detected.
Always prints the report for the fax transmission.
Protocol Monitor
Purpose:
To specify the protocol monitor report to detect the cause of the communication trouble.
Values:
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Does not print the report.
Not Print
Print at Error
Print Always*
Prints the report when a communication error is detected.
Always prints the report for the fax transmission.
RAM Disk
Purpose:
To allocate memory to the RAM disk file system for the Secure Print and Proof Print features. The change
becomes effective after the multifunction printer is turned off and then on again.
Values:
Disable
Enable*
Does not allocate memory to the RAM disk file system. Secure Print, Proof Print, and Copy
Collate jobs will abort and be recorded to the job log.
Allocates memory to the RAM disk file system automatically.
NOTE: The RAM Disk menu is only displayed when 256 MB or more of additional print memory is
installed on the multifunction printer.
NOTE: Restart your multifunction printer when you change the settings for the RAM Disk menu.
Substitute Tray
Purpose:
Specifies whether or not to use another size paper when the paper that is loaded in the specified tray does
not match the paper size settings for the current job.
Values:
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
No tray size substitute accepted.
Off*
Substitutes paper of next largest size. When there is no larger paper size, the multifunction
printer substitutes paper of nearest size.
Larger
Size
Nearest
Size
MPF Feed
Substitutes paper of nearest size.
Substitutes paper from the multipurpose feeder.
Maintenance
Use the Maintenance menu to initialize the NV (non-volatile) memory, configure the plain paper quality
adjustment settings, and configure the security settings.
NOTE: Values marked by an asterisk (*) are the factory default menu settings.
Paper Density
Purpose:
To specify the paper density.
Values:
Plain
Normal*
Light
Label Normal
Light*
Adjust BTR
NOTICE: The print quality changes depending on the setting values you select for this item.
Purpose:
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
To specify the reference voltage settings for the transfer roller.
Values:
Plain
-3 - +3
0*
Plain Thick
-3 - +3
0*
Transparency -3 - +3
0*
Covers
-3 - +3
0*
Covers Thick
-3 - +3
0*
Label
-3 - +3
0*
Coated
-3 - +3
0*
Coated Thick
-3 - +3
0*
Envelope
-3 - +3
0*
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Adjust Fuser
NOTICE: The print quality changes depending on the setting values you select for this item.
Purpose:
To specify the temperature settings value for the fuser unit.
Values:
Plain
-2 - +2
0
Plain Thick
-2 - +2
0
Transparency -2 - +2
0
Covers
-2 - +2
0
Covers Thick
-2 - +2
0
Label
-2 - +2
0
Coated
-2 - +2
0
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Coated Thick
-2 - +2
0
Envelope
-2 - +2
0
Auto Reg Adjust
Purpose:
To adjust the registration automatically.
Values:
On
Off*
Adjusts the registration automatically.
Does not adjust the registration automatically.
Color Reg Adjust
Purpose:
To print the color registration chart and to adjust the color registration by using the chart.
This function is required after the multifunction printer is set up or moved.
Values:
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Auto Correct
Color Reg
Chart
Enter Number
Adjusts color registration automatically.
Prints the color registration chart.
Y
-9-+9 Specifies the values that are found in the color registration chart for Yellow.
M -9-+9 Specifies the values that are found in the color registration chart for
Magenta.
C
-9-+9 Specifies the values that are found in the color registration chart for Cyan.
Initialize NVM
Purpose:
To initialize the NVM. After executing this function and rebooting the multifunction printer, all the default
settings are reset to their default values.
Values:
User Section
System Section
Initializes the user section.
Initializes the system section.
Init Print Meter
Purpose:
To initialize the data for the print meter. When initializing the data on the print meter, the value of the meter
resets to 0.
Clear Storage
Purpose:
To clear all files that are stored as Secure, Store, and Proof Print in the RAM disk.
NOTE: The Clear Storage menu is only displayed when 256 MB or more of additional print memory is
installed on the multifunction printer and then the RAM Disk menu is set to Enable.
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Non-DELL Toner
NOTICE: When Non-Dell toner is used, the multifunction printer may be severely damaged and may
not be covered by your warranty.
Purpose:
To specify whether to use the refilled print cartridge or not. When this setting is on, you can use print
cartridges provided by other companies.
Values:
On
Off*
Enables the use of refilled print cartridges.
Disables the use of refilled print cartridges.
Adjust Altitude
Purpose:
To adjust the height of the installation location of the multifunction printer.
0m*
Selects the value close to the height of the installation location of the multifunction printer.
1000m
2000m
3000m
Secure Settings
Use the Secure Settings menu to set a password to limit access to the menus. This prevents items from
being change accidentally.
NOTE: Values marked by an asterisk (*) are the factory default menu settings.
See also:
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
"Setting of Panel Lock"
Panel Lock/Panel Lock Set
Purpose:
To limit access to the Admin menu.
Values:
Disable*
Enable
Does not limit access to the Admin menu.
Limits access to the Admin menu.
Panel Lock/Change Password
Purpose:
To set a password to limit access to the Admin menu.
Values:
0000-9999
0000*
Copy/Scan/Fax Lock/Copy/Scan/Fax Set
NOTE: Before enabling COPY/Scan/Fax Lock, ensure that Panel Lock is enabled.
Purpose:
To limit access to the Copy, Scan, and Fax menus.
Values:
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Disable*
Enable
Does not limit access to the Copy, Scan, and Fax menus.
Limits access to the Copy, Scan, and Fax menus.
Copy/Scan/Fax Lock/Change Password
Purpose:
To set a password to limit access to the Copy, Scan, and Fax menus.
Values:
0000-9999
0000*
Secure Receive/Secure Receive Set
NOTE: Before enabling Secure Receive, ensure that Panel Lock is enabled.
Purpose:
To set a password when you print received fax documents.
Values:
Disable*
Enable
Does not limit when you print received fax documents.
Limits when you print received fax documents.
Secure Receive/Change Password
Purpose:
To set a password when you receive a fax.
Values:
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
0000-9999
0000*
Admin Reports
Use the Admin Reports menu to print various types of Admin Menu reports and lists.
Speed Dial
Purpose:
To print the Speed Dial report.
Protocol Monitor
Purpose:
To print Protocol Monitor report.
Address Book
Purpose:
To print Address Book report.
Server Address
Purpose:
To print server address report.
Fax Activity
Purpose:
To print fax activity report.
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Fax Pending
Purpose:
To print pending faxes report.
Print Meter
Purpose:
To print the reports for the total number of pages printed. When printed using either the printer control
panel or Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool, the report will be titled Print Volume Report.
Panel Language
Purpose:
To determine the language of the text on the operator panel screen.
Values:
English* French
Italian
German
Spanish
Danish
Dutch
Norwegian
Swedish
Setting of Panel Lock
This feature prevents unauthorized personnel from changing settings made by the printer administrator. For
regular printing, items can be selected from the menu and printer settings remain unchanged. For regular
printing, items can be configured using the printer driver.
1.
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
NOTE: Disabling the operator panel menus does not prevent access to the Stored Print and Tray
Settings menus.
1. Press
until >SETUP appears, and then press
2. Press
until >Admin Menu appears, and then press
3. Press
until >Secure Settings appears, and then press
4. Panel Lock is displayed. Press
5. Press
.
.
.
.
until Enable appears, and then press
.
6. Press Back to return to the previous menu.
7. Press
until >Change Password appears, and then press
.
8. Reenter the password to confirm the password that you entered, and then press
The password has been changed.
.
NOTE: If you forget your password, turn off the multifunction printer. Then, while holding Menu, turn
on the multifunction printer. Continue to hold Menu until the display indicates Ready to Init. This
will recover the factory default panel password.
Note that the password for Panel Lock, COPY/SCAN/FAX Lock, and Secure Lock is disabled. Also note
that the settings for AddressBook and FAX are cleared.
NOTE: If panel lock is Enable, the factory-default panel password is 0000.
See also:
"Panel Lock/Change Password"
Disabling Panel Lock
NOTE: Before disabling Panel Lock, ensure that Copy/Scan/Fax Lock and Secure Receive is
disabled.
1. Press
until >SETUP appears, and then press
2. Press
until >Admin Menu appears, and then press
3. Press
until >Secure Settings appears, and then press
4. Panel Lock is displayed. Press
.
5. Panel Lock Set is displayed. Press
6.
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
.
.
.
.
5.
6. Press
until Disable appears, and then press
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
.
Understanding Your Multifunction Printer
Software
Printer Settings Utility
Use the Drivers and Utilities CD that came with your multifunction printer to install a combination of software
programs, depending on your operating system.
The following software programs can only operate on Windows. They cannot operate on Macintosh, UNIX, or
Linux.
Printing Status Window
The Printing Status Window alerts you when an error or warning occurs, for example, when a paper jam
occurs or toner is running low.
You can select whether to display the Printing Status Window when printing. When an error occurs, the
error message appears on the Printing Status Window.
Status Window
On the Status Window, you can check how much toner and paper are remaining or the configuration of
options for the local printer.
Status Monitor Console
Use the Status Monitor Console to manage multiple Status Window.
Select a multifunction printer from the list view (or Printer Selection) by clicking its name to open a
Status Window or Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool for a particular printer.
The Status Monitor Console displays the Status Window for local connections, or the Dell Printer
Configuration Web Tool for network connections.
Dell Supplies Management System™
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
You can launch the Dell Supplies Management System dialog box from the Printing Status window, the
All Programs menu, or the desktop icon. You can also launch it from the Status Window when a toner
error occurs.
You can order consumables by phone or from the web.
1. Click Start All Programs
Management System.
Dell Printers Additional Color Laser Software Dell Supplies
The Dell Supplies Management System window appears.
2. Select your multifunction printer from the Select Printer Model list.
3. If ordering from the Web:
a. When you cannot get information from the multifunction printer automatically by two- way
communication, a window that prompts you to type the Service Tag number appears. Type your
Dell printer Service Tag number in the field provided.
Your Service Tag number is located inside the front door of your multifunction printer.
b. Select an URL from the Select Reorder URL list.
c. Click Visit Dell printer supplies ordering web site.
4. If ordering by phone, call the number that appears under the By Telephone heading.
User Setup Disk Creating Tool
The User Setup Disk Creating Tool program located in the MakeDisk folder of the Utilities folder on the
Drivers and Utilities CD and the printer drivers located on the Drivers and Utilities CD are used to create
driver installation packages that contain custom driver settings. A driver installation package can contain a
group of saved printer driver settings and other data for things such as:
Print orientation and Multiple Up (document settings)
Watermarks
Font references
If you want to install the printer driver with the same settings to multiple computers running the same
operating system, create a setup disk in a floppy disk or in a server on the network. Using the setup disk
that you have created will reduce the amount of work required when installing the printer driver.
Install in advance the Dell™ Multifunction Color Laser Printer 3115cn printer driver in the computer on
which the setup disk is to be created.
The setup disk can only be used on the operating system on which the disk was created or computers
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
running the same operating system. Create a separate setup disk for different types of operating
systems.
Software Update
The firmware and/or driver updates can be downloaded from http://support.dell.com.
Printer Settings Utility
Using the Dell MFP Laser 3115cn Launcher window, you can set up scan system data options, and create and
edit Address Book entries from your computer. You can also use Dell ScanCenter to organize, access,
share, and manage documents and image files on your computer.
When you install the Dell software, the Dell MFP Laser 3115cn Launcher is automatically installed.
For information about installing the software, see "Networking".
NOTE: The computer must be connected to the device by USB in order to be able to retrieve address
lists from the device.
To open the Dell MFP Laser 3115cn Launcher window:
1. Click Start Programs Dell Printers Dell MFP Color Laser Printer 3115cn Launcher.
The Dell MFP Laser 3115cn Launcher window opens.
2. The Dell MFP Laser 3115cn Launcher window provides three buttons; Address Book Editor, ScanButton
Manager, and Dell ScanCenter.
To exit, click the X button at the top-right of the window.
For details, click the Help button of each application.
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Address Book Editor
Click the Address Book Editor button to create and edit Address Book entries.
1 Read the Address Book entries from the multifunction printer to the Address Book Editor.
2 Allows you to edit a selected Address Book entry in the edit dialog box.
3 Deletes a selected Address Book entry.
4 Displays Address Book entries.
ScanButton Manager
Click the ScanButton Manager button to configure the scan destination list that appears on the operator
panel display when you press the Start button on the operator panel.
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Dell ScanCenter
Dell ScanCenter is a PaperPort application that enables you to scan items and send them directly to
PaperPort or other programs on your computer without first running PaperPort. For more information about
using Dell ScanCenter, refer to PaperPort's Help menu.
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Printing
This chapter covers tips for printing, how to print certain lists of information from your multifunction printer,
and how to cancel a job.
Tips for Successful Printing
Sending a Job to Print
Canceling a Print Job
Printing a Report Page
Using the Print and Hold Function
Tips for Successful Printing
Tips on Storing Print Media
Store your print media properly. For more information, see "Storing Print Media."
Avoiding Jams
NOTE: Dell recommends that you try a limited sample of any print media you are considering using
with the multifunction printer before purchasing large quantities.
By selecting appropriate print media and loading it properly, you are able to avoid most jams. See the
following for instructions on loading print media:
"Loading Print Media in Standard and Optional Trays" (which includes the standard 250-sheet tray and
the optional 550-sheet paper feeder)
"Loading the Multipurpose Feeder"
"Avoiding Jams"
If you experience a jam, see "Clearing Jams" for instructions.
Sending a Job to Print
To support all of the printer features, use the printer driver. When you choose Print from a software
program, a window representing the printer driver opens. Select the appropriate settings for the specific job
you are sending to print. Print settings selected from the driver override the default menu settings selected
from the printer operator panel.
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
You may need to click Properties or Setup from the initial Print box to see all of the available system
settings you can change. If you are not familiar with a feature in the printer driver window, open the online
Help for more information. Changing paper size or type that is different from type setting in the operator
panel will require a user to change the operator panel tray setting before the job will print.
To print a job from a typical Windows application:
1. Open the file you want to print.
2. From the File menu, select Print.
3. Verify that the correct printer is selected in the dialog box. Modify the system settings as appropriate
(such as the pages you want to print or the number of copies).
4. Click Properties or Setup to adjust system settings not available from the first screen, and then click
OK.
5. Click OK or Print to send the job to the selected printer.
Canceling a Print Job
There are several methods for canceling a print job.
Canceling From the Printer Operator Panel
To cancel a print job after it has started printing:
1. Press Cancel.
2. Press
or
until >Print appears in the Job List screen, and then press
.
Printing is canceled only for the current print job. All the following print jobs will continue to print.
Canceling a Job From the Computer Running Windows
Canceling a Job From the Taskbar
When you send a job to print, a small printer icon appears in the right corner of the taskbar.
1. Double-click the printer icon.
A list of print jobs appears in the printer window.
2. Select the job you want to cancel.
3. Press Delete on the keyboard.
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
3.
Canceling a Job From the Desktop
1. Minimize all programs to reveal the desktop.
2. Click Start Printers and Faxes.
Click Start Control Panel Hardware and Sound Printers (for Windows Vista).
A list of available printers appears.
3. Double-click the multifunction printer you selected when you sent the job.
A list of print jobs appears in the printer window.
4. Select the job you want to cancel.
5. Press Delete on the keyboard.
Printing a Report Page
By using the Report menu, you can print a various of settings for your multifunction printer including system
settings, panel setting, and font list. The following describes two examples of printing from the Report
menu.
Printing a System Settings Page
To verify detailed system settings, print a system settings page. A printed system settings page also allows
you to verify whether or not options have been installed properly.
See "Understanding Menus" to identify the display and operator panel buttons if you need help.
1. Press
until >SETUP appears, and then press
2. Press
until >Reports appears, and then press
3. System Settings is displayed. Press
.
.
.
The system settings page is printed.
The message System Settings Printing appears while the page prints. The multifunction printer returns to
the standby mode after the system settings page prints.
If any other message appears when you print this page, see "Understanding Multifunction Printer Messages"
for more information.
Printing a Font Sample List
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
To print samples of all the fonts currently available for your multifunction printer:
1. Press
until >SETUP appears, and then press
.
2. Press
until >Reports appears, and then press
3. Press
until either PCL Fonts List or PS Fonts List appears.
.
Select PCL Fonts List to print a listing of the fonts available to the PCL.
Select PS Fonts List to print a listing of the fonts available to the Adobe PostScript 3 ™.
4. Press
.
The message PCL Fonts List Printing or PS Fonts List Printing appears and remains on the operator
panel until the page prints. The multifunction printer returns to the standby mode after the font sample list
prints.
Using the Print and Hold Function
When you send a job to the multifunction printer, you can specify in the driver that you want the
multifunction printer to hold the job in memory. When you are ready to print the job, you must go to the
multifunction printer and use the operator panel menus to identify which job in the memory you want to
print. You can use this function to print a confidential job (Secure Print), or verify one copy before printing
additional copies (Proof Print).
NOTE: The multifunction printer holds the job until you delete it by using the operator panel or you
turn off the multifunction printer. The data on memory is cleared when the multifunction printer is
turned off.
NOTE: Print and Hold functions require a minimum of 384 MB available print memory. Also, you need
to configure the RAM disk settings on both the operator panel and the printer driver.
NOTE: Depending on the documents, its job may be too big for the available memory. In this case, an
error occurs.
NOTE: If a document name is not assigned to your print job in the print driver, the job's name will be
identified using the PC's time and date of submission to distinguish it from other jobs you have stored
under your name.
Printing and Deleting Held Jobs
Once held jobs are stored in print memory, you can use the printer operator panel to specify what you want
to do with one or more of the jobs. You can select either Secure Print and Proof Print from "Stored
Print". Then, you select your user name from a list. If you select Secure Print, you must type the password
you specified in the driver when you sent the job. See "Secure Print" for more information.
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
From either the Secure Print or Proof Print menu items, you have three choices:
Del after Print
Print and Save
Delete
NOTE: To send a job to print as Secure Printing or Proof Printing, select Secure Printing or Proof
Printing in Job Type in the Paper/Output tab of the Properties dialog box.
Printing Held and Proof Print Jobs
1. Press
until >SETUP appears, and then press
.
2. Press
until >Reports appears, and then press
3. Press
until >Stored Documents appears, and then press
.
.
Store Print
If you send a Store Print job, the multifunction printer does not print the job immediately, but stores the job
in memory so you can print the job later. See "Printing and Deleting Held Jobs" for more information.
NOTE: The multifunction printer holds the job until you delete it by using the operator panel or you
turn off the multifunction printer.
NOTE: When you select Del after Print, the held job is automatically deleted after printing.
Proof Print
If you send a Proof Print job, the multifunction printer prints one copy and holds the remaining copies you
requested from the driver in print memory. Use Proof Print function to examine the first copy to see if it is
satisfactory before printing the remaining copies.
See "Printing and Deleting Held Jobs" if you need help printing the additional copies stored in memory.
NOTE: The multifunction printer holds the job until you delete it by using the operator panel or you
turn off the multifunction printer. The data on memory is cleared when the multifunction printer is
turned off.
NOTE: When you select Del after Print, the held job is automatically deleted after printing.
Secure Print
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
When you send a job to the multifunction printer, you can specify a password from the driver. The password
must be between 1 and 12 digits using numbers 0-9. The job is then held in print memory until you enter
the same numeric password from the printer operator panel and choose to print or delete the job. This
function is called "Store Print". This ensures that the job does not print until you are there to retrieve it, and
no one else using the multifunction printer can print the job.
When you select Secure Print from Stored Print after selecting your user name, the following prompt is
displayed:
Use Ten Key
[XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX]
Use the buttons on the operator panel to enter the numeric password associated with your confidential job.
As you enter the password, the password you entered is displayed to ensure confidentiality.
If you enter an invalid password, the message Wrong Password appears. Wait three seconds, or Press
Cancel to return to the screen for user selection.
or
When you enter a valid password, you have access to all print jobs matching the user name and password
you entered. The print jobs matching the password you entered appear on the screen. You can then choose
to print or delete jobs matching the password you entered. (See "Printing and Deleting Held Jobs" for more
information.)
NOTE: The multifunction printer holds the job until you delete it by using the operator panel or you
turn off the multifunction printer. The data on memory is cleared when the multifunction printer is
turned off.
NOTE: When you select Del after Print, the held job is automatically deleted after printing.
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Copying
Loading Paper for Copying
Selecting Paper Tray
Preparing a Document
Making Copies From the Document Feeder Glass
Making Copies From the ADF
Setting Copy Options
Changing the Default Settings
Setting the Power Saver Timer Option
Loading Paper for Copying
The instructions for loading print materials are the same whether you are printing, faxing, or copying. For
further details, see "Print Media Guidelines".
Selecting Paper Tray
After loading the print media for copy output, you have to select the paper tray you will use for the copy job.
1. Press
until >COPY appears, and then press
2. Press
until Paper Tray appears.
.
3. Press
or
until the desired tray appears, and then press
.
You can select from Tray1, Tray2 (option) and Multipurpose Feeder.
Preparing a Document
You can use the document feeder glass or the Automatic Document Feeder (ADF) to load an original
document for copying, scanning and sending a fax. Using the ADF, you can load up to 50 sheets of 75 g/m2
(20 lb) documents for one job. Using the document feeder glass, you can load one sheet at a time.
NOTE: To get the best scan quality, especially for color or gray scale images, use the document
feeder glass instead of the ADF.
When you use the ADF:
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Do not load documents smaller than 5.59 by 5.83 in. (142 by 148 mm) or larger than 8.5 by 14 in.
(216 by 356 mm).
Do not attempt to feed the following types of documents:
Carbon-paper or carbon-backed paper
Coated paper
Onion skin or thin paper
Wrinkled or creased paper
Curled or rolled paper
Torn paper
Remove all staples and paper clips before loading documents.
Ensure any glue, ink or correction fluid on the paper is completely dry before loading documents.
Do not load documents containing different sizes or weights of paper.
Do not load booklets, pamphlets, transparencies or documents having other unusual characteristics.
Making Copies From the Document Feeder Glass
NOTE: A computer connection is not required for copying.
NOTE: Remove any documents from the ADF before copying from the document feeder glass.
NOTE: Contaminants on the document feeder glass may cause black spots on the printout. For best
results, clean the document feeder glass before use. See "Cleaning the scanner".
To make a copy from the document feeder glass:
1. Lift and open the document cover.
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
2. Place the document face down on the document feeder glass and align it with the registration guide on
the top left corner of the glass.
3. Close the document cover.
NOTE: Leaving the cover open while copying may affect the copy quality and toner consumption.
NOTE: If you are copying a page from a book or magazine, lift the cover until its hinges are caught by
the stopper and then close the cover. If the book or magazine is thicker than 30 mm, start copying
with the cover open.
4. Customize the copy settings including the number of copies, copy size, the contrast, and the image
quality. See "Setting Copy Options".
To clear the settings, use the Cancel button.
5. Press Start.
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
5.
NOTE: You can cancel the copy job at any time. Press
and then press
or
to select >COPY in the Job List screen,
.
Making Copies From the ADF
NOTICE: Do not load more than 50 sheets into the ADF or allow more than 50 sheets to be fed to the
ADF output tray. The ADF output tray should be emptied before it exceeds 50 sheets or your original
documents may be damaged.
NOTE: A computer connection is not required for copying.
1. Load up to 50 sheets of 75 g/m2 (20 lb) documents face up on the ADF with top edge of the
documents in first. Then adjust the document guides to the correct document size.
2. Customize the copy settings including the number of copies, copy size, contrast, and image quality.
See "Setting Copy Options".
To clear the settings, use Cancel.
3. Press Start.
Setting Copy Options
Set the following options for the current copy job before pressing Start to make copies.
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
NOTE: The copy options automatically return to their default status after copying.
Number of Copies
You can select the number of copies from 1 to 99.
1. Load the document(s) face up with top edge in first into the ADF.
OR
Place a single document face down on the document feeder glass.
For details about loading a document, see "Loading an Original Document".
2. Press
until >COPY appears, and then press
.
3. Press
until Number of Copies appears.
4. Press
to select the desired settings, and then press
.
5. Press Start to begin copying.
Color
You can select color or black and white copying.
1. Load the document to be copied on the document feeder glass, and close the cover.
2. Press
until >COPY appears, and then press
.
3. Press
until Color appears, and then press
.
4. Press
to select the desired settings, and then press
Color
.
Prints in the color mode.
Black&White Prints in the black and white mode.
5. Press Start to begin copying.
Reduce/Enlarge
You can reduce or enlarge the size of a copied image, from 25 percent to 400 percent when you copy
original documents from the document feeder glass or ADF.
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
NOTE: When you make a reduced copy, black lines may appear at the bottom of your copy.
To select from the predefined copy sizes:
1. Load the document to be copied on the document feeder glass, and close the cover.
2. Press
until >COPY appears, and then press
3. Press
until Reduce/Enlarge appears.
4. Press
to select the desired settings, and then press
100%*
.
.
Custom 100% (25-400%)
129% (in inch), 129% (in mm) 50%
154% (in inch), 141% (in mm) 70% (in inch), 64% (in mm)
200%
78% (in inch), 81% (in mm)
NOTE: You can set the value in a percent for Custom.
5. Press Start to begin copying.
Original Type
The Original Type setting is used to improve the image quality by selecting the document type for the
current copy job.
To select the image quality:
1. Load the document to be copied on the document feeder glass, and close the cover.
2. Press
until >COPY appears, and then press
.
3. Press
until Original Type appears.
4. Press
to select the desired settings, and then press
.
Text&Photo* Uses for documents with both text and photo/gray tones.
Photo
Uses for documents with photo or gray tones.
Best
Uses for documents with fine text of high resolution.
Text
Uses for documents with text.
5.
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
5. Press Start to begin copying.
Lighter/Darker
Adjust the contrast to make the copy lighter or darker than the original.
To adjust the contrast:
1. Load the document to be copied on the document feeder glass, and close the cover.
2. Press
until >COPY appears, and then press
.
3. Press
until Lighter/Darker appears.
4. Press
to select the desired settings, and then press
.
Normal* Works well with standard typed or printed documents.
Darker1
Works well with light print or faint pencil markings.
Darker2
Darker3
Lighter3 Works well with dark print.
Lighter2
Lighter1
5. Press Start to begin copying.
Sharpness
Adjust the sharpness to make the copy sharper or softer than the original.
To adjust the sharpness:
1. Load the document to be copied on the document feeder glass, and close the cover.
2. Press
until >COPY appears, and then press
3. Press
until Sharpness appears.
4. Press
to select the desired settings, and then press
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
.
.
3.
4.
Normal* Does not make the copy sharper or softer than the original.
Sharper
Makes the copy sharper than the original.
Softer
Makes the copy softer than the original.
5. Press Start to begin copying.
Color Saturation
Adjusts the amount of color to make the colors deeper or lighter than the original.
To adjust the sharpness:
1. Load the document to be copied on the document feeder glass, and close the cover.
2. Press
until >COPY appears, and then press
.
3. Press
until Color Saturation appears.
4. Press
to select the desired settings, and then press
.
Normal* Does not adjust the amount of color in a specified hue to make the colors deeper or
lighter than the original.
Higher
Adjusts the amount of color in a specified hue to make the colors deeper than the
original.
Lower
Adjusts the amount of color in a specified hue to make the colors lighter than the original.
5. Press Start to begin copying.
Auto Exposure
Adjust the overall brightness to make the copy overexposed than the original.
To make the Auto Exposure copying:
1. Load the document to be copied on the document feeder glass, and close the cover.
2. Press
until >COPY appears, and then press
3. Press
until Auto Exposure appears.
4. Press
to select On, and then press
5.
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
.
.
3.
4.
5. Press Start to begin copying.
Auto Fit
Automatically reduces or enlarges the original image to fit on the paper currently loaded in the multifunction
printer.
This special copy mode can be applied when you load a document using only the document feeder glass.
When this mode is On, a document loaded on the ADF cannot be copied. Set this mode to Off, if you want to
copy documents loaded on the ADF.
NOTE: You cannot adjust the copy size using the Reduce/Enlarge menu item while the Auto Fit
copying is enabled.
To make the Auto Fit copying:
1. Press
until >COPY appears, and then press
2. Press
until Auto Fit appears.
3. Press
to select On, and then press
.
.
4. If necessary, customize the copy settings including the number of copies, contrast, and image quality.
See "Setting Copy Options".
5. Press Start to begin copying.
2Sided
Print a two-sided original document onto one sheet of paper.
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
When you copy using this feature, the multifunction printer prints one side on the upper half of the paper
and the other side on the lower half without reducing the original.
If the original document is larger than the printable area, some portions may not be printed.
To make the 2Sided copying:
1. Load the document(s) face up with top edge in first into the ADF.
OR
Place a single document face down on the document feeder glass.
For details about loading a document, see "Loading an Original Document".
2. Press
until >COPY appears, and then press
.
3. Press
until 2Sided appears.
4. Press
to select the desired setting, and then press
.
1->1Sided*
Does not print a two-sided original document onto one sheet of paper.
LongEdgeBinding
Uses for long-edge binding when you perform duplex printing.
ShortEdgeBinding Uses for short-edge binding when you perform duplex printing.
5. If necessary, customize the copy settings including the number of copies, contrast, and image quality.
See "Setting Copy Options".
6. Press Start to begin copying.
For the document loaded on the document feeder glass, the display asks if you want to load another
page. Press
to select Yes or No, and then press
7. If you select Yes, press
.
to select Continue or Cancel, and then press
.
NOTE: If you press the Cancel button or if no buttons are pressed for about 60 seconds, the
multifunction printer proceeds the copy job and returns to the standby mode.
Multiple-Up
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Print two original images to fit onto one sheet of paper.
To make the Multiple-Up copying:
1. Load the document(s) face up with top edge in first into the ADF.
OR
Place a single document face down on the document feeder glass.
For details about loading a document, see "Loading an Original Document".
2. Press
until >COPY appears, and then press
3. Press
until Multiple-Up appears.
4. Press
to select the desired setting, and then press
5.
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
.
.
3.
4.
Off*
Does not perform multiple-up printing.
Auto
Automatically reduces the original pages to fit onto one sheet of paper.
ID Copy Prints the original pages onto one sheet of paper in the original size.
Manual
Prints the original pages onto the one sheet of paper in the size specified in
Reduce/Enlarge.
5. If necessary, customize the copy settings including the number of copies, contrast, and image quality.
See "Setting Copy Options".
6. Press Start to begin copying.
For the document loaded on the document feeder glass, the display asks if you want to load another
page. Press
to select Yes or No, and then press
.
Poster Copying
Print an image onto several sheets of paper. You can paste the printed pages together to make one postersize document.
This special copy mode can be applied when you load a document using only the document feeder glass.
NOTE: You cannot adjust the copy size using the Reduce/Enlarge option for making a poster.
To make the Poster copying:
1. Load the documents to be copied on the document feeder glass and close the cover.
2. Press
until >COPY appears, and then press
3.
4.
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
.
2.
3. Press
until Poster appears.
4. Press
to select the desired setting, and then press
Off*
.
Does not print an image onto several sheets of paper.
2 x 2 Prints an image onto 4 sheets of paper (2 by 2).
3 x 3 Prints an image onto 9 sheets of paper (3 by 3).
4 x 4 Prints an image onto 16 sheets of paper (4 by 4).
5. If necessary, customize the copy settings including the number of copies, contrast, and image quality.
See "Setting Copy Options".
6. Press Start to begin copying.
Your original document is divided into 9 portions. Each portion is scanned and printed one by one in
the following order:
Image Repeat
Print multiple image copies from the original document on a single page. The number of images is
automatically determined by the original image and paper size.
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
This special copy mode can be applied when you load a document using only the document feeder glass.
NOTE: You cannot adjust the copy size using the Reduce/Enlarge menu item while the Image Repeat
copying is enabled.
To make the Image Repeat copying:
1. Press
until >COPY appears, and then press
2. Press
until Image Repeat appears.
3. Press
to select On, and then press
.
.
4. If necessary, customize the copy settings including number of copies, contrast, and image quality. See
"Setting Copy Options".
5. Press Start to begin copying.
Margin
Specify the margin of the copy.
To make the Margin copying:
1. Load the document to be copied on the document feeder glass, and close the cover.
2. Press
until >COPY appears, and then press
3. Press
until Margin appears.
4. Press
to select On, and then press
.
.
5. Press Start to begin copying.
Collated
Sort the copy job. For example, if you make two copies of three page documents, one complete three page
document will print followed by the second complete document.
NOTE: Copy collate is only available when optional memory card is installed.
1.
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
1. Load the document(s) face up with top edge in first into the ADF.
OR
Place a single document face down on the document feeder glass.
For details about loading a document, see "Loading an Original Document".
2. Press
until >COPY appears, and then press
3. Press
until Collated appears.
4. Press
to select Collated, and then press
.
.
5. If necessary, customize the copy settings including the number of copies, contrast, and image quality.
See "Setting Copy Options".
6. Press Start to begin copying.
For the document loaded on the document feeder glass, the display asks if you want to load another
page. Press
to select Yes or No, and then press
7. If you select Yes, press
.
to select Continue or Cancel, and then press
.
Changing the Default Settings
The Copy menu options, including contrast, and image quality can be set to the most frequently used
modes. When you copy a document, the default settings are used unless they are changed by using the
corresponding buttons on the operator panel.
NOTE: While you set copy options, pressing Cancel cancels the changed settings and returns to the
default status.
To create your own default settings:
1. Press
until >COPY appears, and then press
2. Press
until >Copy Defaults appears, and then press
3. Press
until the desired menu item appears.
4. Press
to change the setting, and then press
5. Repeat steps 3 to 4, as needed.
6. To return to the standby mode, press Cancel.
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
.
.
.
6.
Setting the Power Saver Timer Option
You can set the power saver timer for the multifunction printer. The multifunction printer waits before it
restores the default copy settings, if you do not start copying after changing them on the operator panel.
1. Press
until >SETUP appears, and then press
.
2. Press
until >Admin Menu appears, and then press
3. Press
until >System Settings appears, and then press
4. Press
until >Power Saver Timer appears, and then press
5. Press
to select Mode1 or Mode2, and then press
.
.
.
.
You can select from 5-60 minutes in Mode1 or 1-6 minutes in Mode2. Selecting Disable in Power
Saver Mode2 means that the multifunction printer does not restore the default settings until you press
Start to begin copying, or Cancel to cancel.
6. To return to the standby mode, press Cancel.
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Scanning
Scanning Overview
Scanning From Operator Panel
Scanning Using the TWAIN Driver
Scanning Using the Windows Image Acquisition (WIA) Driver
Using a Scanner on the Network
Sending an E-Mail with the Scanned Image
Scanning Overview
Use your Dell™ Multifunction Color Laser Printer 3115cn to turn pictures and text into editable images on
your computer.
PaperPort is a program that you organize, find and share all your paper and digital documents, and is
supplied with your multifunction printer.
The resolution setting to use when you scan an item depends on the item type and how you plan to use the
image or document after you scan it in to your computer. For the best results, use these recommended
settings.
Type
Resolution
Documents
300 dpi black-and-white or 200 dpi grayscale or
color
Documents of poor quality or that contain small text 400 dpi black-and-white or 300 dpi grayscale
Photographs and pictures
100-200 dpi color or 200 dpi grayscale
Images for an inkjet printer
150-300 dpi
Images for a high-resolution printer
300-600 dpi
Scanning above these recommended resolutions may exceed the capabilities of the application. If you
require a resolution above those recommend in the above table, you should reduce the size of the image by
previewing (or pre-scan) and cropping before scanning the image.
NOTE: You can use PaperPort's built-in OCR software to copy text from scanned documents so that
you can use and edit the text in any text editing, word processing, or spreadsheet program. The OCR
process requires textual images scanned at 150-600 dpi and 300 dpi or 600 dpi is recommended for
graphics.
If you prefer to use another application, such as Adobe PhotoShop, you must assign the application to the
multifunction printer by selecting it from the list of available applications via the Select Software button each
time you start scanning. If you do not assign an application to the Select Software button, PaperPort is
automatically selected when you start scanning. Refer to "Printer Settings Utility".
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
NOTE: PaperPort application for Microsoft Windows Vista may not be available, for more information
see the Dell Support website at www.support.dell.com .
Dell ScanCenter is a PaperPort application that enables you to scan items and send them directly to
PaperPort or other programs on your computer without first running PaperPort. Dell ScanCenter runs as a
separate application from the Windows Start menu and displays the Dell ScanCenter bar. For more
information about using Dell ScanCenter, refer to the PaperPort's Help menu.
Icons on the Dell ScanCenter bar represent the programs that are limited to PaperPort and to Dell
ScanCenter. To scan and send an item to a program, click the program icon and then scan the item. Dell
ScanCenter automatically starts the selected program when the scan is complete.
Scanning From Operator Panel
NOTE: Ensure that the multifunction printer is connected to the computer by using the USB cable.
1. Load the document(s) face up with top edge in first into the ADF.
OR
Place a single document face down on the document feeder glass.
For details about loading a document, see "Loading an Original Document ".
2. Do either of the following:
Scanning from the document feeder glass
Select Document Glass from ScanButton Manager.
Scanning form the ADF
Select Document Feeder from ScanButton Manager.
3. Press
until >SCAN appears, and then press
.
4. Press
until >Scan to Application , and then press
5. Press
to select an application file to which you want to send the scanned image, and then press
.
6. Press Start . The selected application window opens. Adjust the scan settings and start scan. For
details, refer to the user's guide of the application.
NOTE: If the following dialog box appears on your PC, select 3115cn MFP Scan Button Manager ,
and then click OK .
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
.
Note that you must use ScanButton Manager on your computer to change the settings for scanning. For
details, see "Printer Settings Utility ".
Scanning Using the TWAIN Driver
Your multifunction printer supports the TWAIN driver for scanning images. TWAIN is one of the standard
components provided by Microsoft ® Windows ® 2000, Windows XP, Windows Server® 2003, Windows Server
2008, and Windows Vista® , and works with various scanners.
To scan an image from the drawing software:
1. Load the document(s) face up with top edge in first into the ADF.
OR
Place a single document face down on the document feeder glass.
For details about loading a document, see "Loading an Original Document ".
2. Start the drawing software, such as Imaging for Windows.
NOTE: When you use Windows XP, Windows Server 2003, or Windows Vista, use PaperPort
instead of Imaging .
3. Click File
Scan or Get Photo...
The Available Scanner dialog box appears.
NOTE: If the Available Scanner dialog box does not appear, click the Select... button in the
left pane of the Scan or Get Photo window.
4. In the Available Scanner dialog box, select Dell MFP Laser 3115cn Scanner , and then click OK .
5. In the left pane of the Scan or Get Photo window, select the Display scanner dialog box check box,
and then click Scan .
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
The Dell MFP Laser 3115cn Scanner window appears.
NOTE: The illustration may vary for different operating systems.
6. Select your scanning preferences and click Preview to display the preview image.
7. Select the desired properties from the Image Quality and Image Options tabs.
8. Click Scan to start scanning.
9. Enter a picture name, and select a file format and destination to save the picture.
10. Follow the on-screen instructions to edit the picture after it is copied to your computer.
Scanning Using the Windows Image Acquisition (WIA)
Driver
Your multifunction printer also supports the WIA driver for scanning images. WIA is one of the standard
components provided by Microsoft ® Windows Vista® , Windows® XP and works with digital cameras and
scanners. Unlike the TWAIN driver, the WIA driver allows you to scan an image and easily manipulate those
images without using additional software.
NOTE: WIA is not available for Windows 2000.
NOTE: Ensure that the multifunction printer is connected to the computer by using the USB cable.
To scan an image from the drawing software:
1.
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
1. Load the document(s) face up with top edge in first into the ADF.
OR
Place a single document face down on the document feeder glass.
For details about loading a document, see "Loading an Original Document ".
2. Start the drawing software, such as Microsoft Paint.
NOTE: When you use Windows Vista or Windows Server 2008, use Windows Photo Gallery
instead of Paint .
3. Click File
From Scanner or Camera .
The Scan using Dell MFP Laser 3115cn window appears.
NOTE: The illustration may vary for different operating systems.
4. Select your scanning preferences and click Adjust the quality of the scanned picture to display the
Advanced Properties dialog box.
5. Select the desired properties including brightness and contrast, and then click OK .
6. Click Scan to start scanning.
7. Enter a picture name, and select a file format and destination to save the picture.
8. Follow the on-screen instructions to edit the picture after it is copied to your computer.
To scan an image from Control Panel :
1. Load the document(s) face up with top edge in first into the ADF.
OR
Place a single document face down on the document feeder glass.
For details about loading a document, see "Loading an Original Document ".
2.
3.
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
2. Click Start
Control Panel
Printers and Other Hardware
Scanners and Cameras .
3. Double-click the printer icon. The Welcome to Scanners and Camera Wizard launches.
4. Click Next to display the Scanner and Camera Wizard .
NOTE: The illustration may vary for different operating systems.
5. Select your scanning preferences and click Next .
6. Enter a picture name, and select a file format and destination to save the picture.
7. Click Next to start scanning.
8. Follow the on-screen instructions to edit the picture after it is copied to your computer.
Using a Scanner on the Network
The Scan to Server/Computer feature allows you to scan a document from the Dell MFP 3115cn and store it
in a folder on your computer through File Transfer Protocol (FTP) or Server Message Block (SMB). To retrieve
the scanned document from the computer:
1. Create a shared folder in your computer for Scan to Computer. See "Sharing a Folder From Your
Computer " for more details.
2. Setup the address book through the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool . See "Setting Up the
Address Book " for more details.
3. Create a shared folder with sub-folder in your computer for Scan to Computer. See "Sharing a Folder
With Sub-folder From Your Computer " for more details.
4.
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
3.
4. Scan to Server/Computer through Wireless Setup (if you have the Optional Wireless Network Card).
See "Scan to Computer/Server Through Wireless Setup " for more details.
5. Start to send the scanned file on the network. See "Start to send the scanned file on the Network " for
more details.
Here are some additional instructions if you need to create a password for your user account or locate the IP
address of your computer.
Create a Password For Your User Login Account.
Locate the IP Address Of Your Computer.
Sharing a Folder From Your Computer
If you are using Microsoft® Windows ® XP or Windows 2000, you can share a folder with the following
instructions:
1. Create a folder in the desired directory on your computer (Example of folder name, MyShare ).
2. Right-click on the folder, and then select Properties .
3. The Properties dialog box appears, click on the Sharing tab, and then select Share this folder .
4. Enter a shared name in the Share name box.
NOTE: Write down this shared name because you will use this name in the next setting procedure.
5.
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
5. Click on Permissions to create a write permission for this folder.
6. Click Add .
7. Enter your user login name in the Enter the object names to select box (Example of user login
name, Myself ).
NOTE: User login account with empty password will be rejected in the Scan to Folder authentication.
Ensure that all user login accounts have a valid and non-empty password. See "Create a Password for
Your User Login Account " for details on how to assign a password for your user login account.
8. Click OK .
NOTE: Do not use Everyone as the user login name.
9.
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
9. Click on the user login name that you have just entered. Select Full Control check box. This will grant
you permission to send the document into this folder.
If you are using Windows Vista® or Windows Server 2008, you can share a folder with the following or
similar instructions:
1. Create a folder in the desired directory on your computer (Example of folder name, MyShare ).
2. Right-click on the folder, and then select Properties .
3. The Properties dialog box appears, click on the Sharing tab, and then select Advanced Sharing .
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
4. Select the Share this folder check box.
5. Enter a shared name in the Share name box.
NOTE: Note down the shared name as you need to use this name in the next setting procedure.
6. Click on Permissions to create a write permission for this folder.
7.
8.
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
7. Click Add .
8. Enter your user login name in the Enter the object names to select box (Example of user login
name, Myself ).
NOTE: User login account with empty password will be rejected in the Scan to Folder authentication.
Ensure that all user login accounts have a valid and non-empty password. See "Create a Password for
Your User Login Account " for details on how to assign a password for your user login account.
9. Click OK when you are done.
10. Click on the user login name that you have just entered. Select Full Control check box. This will grant
you permission to send the document into this folder.
NOTE: Do not use Everyone as the user login name.
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Setting Up the Address Book
To setup the Scan to Server/Computer address book through the network, you will first need to locate the IP
address of the Dell MFP Laser 3115cn. You can obtain this IP address from the System Settings report by
performing the following steps from the operator panel:
1. When the printer is Ready (Copy, Scan, Fax appears in the LCD), press
then press
2. Press
until SETUP is indicated,
.
until Reports appears, then press
.
3. When System Settings is indicated, then press
and a System Settings report will be printed.
Once you have obtained the IP address of the Dell MFP Laser 3115cn, you can setup the Address book by
performing the following steps from a web browser.
1. Open a web browser.
2. Type in the IP address of the printer and click Go . The printer's web page appears.
3. Click Address Book , then click the Server Address tab, then click the Create button. If a security
login dialog box appears, type in the correct User name and Password. If you access the Address Book
first time, enter the following defaults value:
User name: Enter "admin".
Password: Leave blank.
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
To fill in the fields, enter the information as follows:
Name:
Enter a friendly name that you want it to appear on the address book.
Server Type: Select SMB if you storing the document in a shared folder from your Microsoft
Windows operating system. Select FTP if you have a FTP server.
NOTE: FTP Server depends on Microsoft Internet Information Services (IIS) and may
not be installed on your computer. Please refer to Microsoft document for detailed
instructions on how to setup FTP server.
Server
Address:
Enter the IP address of the computer or the FTP server that you have shared out.
(Refer to "Locate the IP Address of Your Computer " for more information)
Server Port
Number:
Enter the Server Port Number. If you are unsure, you can enter the default value of
139 for SMB and 21 for FTP.
Login Name:
Enter the user account name that has access to the shared folder on your computer
or FTP server.
Login
Password:
Check on Enable Password and enter the password corresponding to the above
login name.
NOTE: Empty password is not valid in the Scan to Computer feature. Please ensure
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
that you have a valid password for the user login account. (Refer to "Create a
Password for Your User Login Account " for details on how to add a password in your
user login account).
Share Name: Enter the name of the shared folder on the recipient computer. For SMB only.
Server Path:
Enter the path where you want the scanned document to be stored. Ensure that the
path is already created in the shared folder or FTP server.
4. Click the Apply New Settings button.
Example of an entry for Scan to Computer, SMB.
Example of an entry for Scan to Server, FTP.
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
NOTE: Ensure that you enter an IP address in the Server Address box correctly.
Scan to Computer/Server Through Wireless Setup
NOTE: This step can be performed only if you have the Wireless Network Card (Sold separately).
If you are intending to perform Scan to Computer/Server through your wireless network connection, you will
need to configure the scan network path as follows:
1. Open a web browser.
2. Type in the IP address of the printer and click Go . The printer's web page appears.
3. Click Printer Settings , then click the Printer Settings tab, then click the Scan Defaults button. If a
security login dialog box appears, type in the correct User name and Password.
4. Change from Wired to Wireless in the Network Port entry.
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Sharing a Folder With Sub-folder From Your Computer
To create and share a folder, follow the steps found in "Sharing a Folder From Your Computer ". To add subfolder, you will need to create a sub-folder from your share folder.
1. Create a folder in the desired directory on your computer (Example of folder name, MyShare ).
2. From the folder, create your desired sub-folder. (Example of sub-folder name, MyPic\John . You
should now see MyShare\MyPic\John in your directory)
After you have created a folder and sub-folder, you will now need to setup the Address
Book. See "Setting Up the Address Book " for the details.
Example of an entry for Scan to Computer with sub-folder, SMB.
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
NOTE: Ensure that you enter an IP address in the Server Address box correctly.
Start to send the scanned file on the Network
1. From the operator panel, press
until >SCAN appears, and then press
2. Press
until Scan to Network appears.
3. Press
or
.
to select the option you selected in "Setting Up the Address Book ", and then press
Server: Stores the scanned image on the server by using the FTP protocol.
Computer: Stores the scanned image on the computer by using the SMB protocol.
Search Address: Select the server address registered in Address Book.
NOTE: Users need to be registered before you can select Server/Computer on the operator panel.
4. Press Start to send the scanned files.
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
.
4.
Setting Problems
SMB/FTP Error · Ensure the server address is correct.
016-781 Scan · If the server address is correct, then change the settings for the firewall.
Press
Login Error
016-782 Scan
· Ensure the shared name or password is correct.
Press
SMB/FTP Error · Ensure the specified server path name and access right to the folder are correct.
016-783 Scan · Ensure the server path is set correctly.
Press
SMB/FTP Error · Change the access rights for the shared folder.
016-784 Scan
Press
Create a Password for Your User Login Account
The Scan to Computer/Server feature requires a user login account with a valid and non-empty password for
authentication. If you do not use a password for your user login, you can create a password on your User
Login Account with the following instructions.
For Microsoft Windows XP and Windows 2000:
1. Click Start
Control Panel
User Accounts .
2. Click Change an account .
3. Click Create a password and add in a password for your user login account.
For Windows Vista:
1. Click Start
Control Panel .
2. Click User Accounts and Family Safety .
3. Click User Accounts .
4. Click Create a password for your account and add in a password for your user login account.
For Windows Server 2008:
1. Click Start
Control Panel .
2. Double-click User Accounts .
3. Click Create a password for your account and add in a password for your user login account.
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
3.
Locate the IP Address of Your Computer
You can locate the IP address of your computer with the following instructions.
1. For Windows 2000/Windows Server 2003/Windows Server 2008: Click Start
For Windows Vista: Click Start
All Programs
Accessories
Run .
Run .
2. Type cmd in the text field and click OK . A command prompt window will open.
3. Type ipconfig and press Enter .
4. Locate IP Address and note down the IP Address XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX
Sending an E-Mail with the Scanned Image
To send an e-mail attached with the scanned image from your multifunction printer, follow the steps below:
Set E-Mail Alert
Register a user
Start to send e-mail with the scanned file
Setting E-Mail Alert
1. Form the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool, click E-Mail Alert .
The E-mail Server Alert Settings page appears.
2. Specify the settings for E-Mail Alert as follows:
Primary SMTP gateway: Enter the IP address of the e-mail server.
E-Mail Send Authentication: Specify Invalid to enable the e-mail server.
NOTE: If the error message including 016-506 or 016-764 is displayed, contact your server
administrator for the settings for E-Mail Send Authentication.
3.
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
3. Click the Apply New Settings button.
Registering a New User
1. Form the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool, click Address Book , and then click the E-Mail Address
tab.
2. Click the Create button.
The E-mail Server Settings page for registering a new user appears.
3. Enter the following:
Name
Address
4. Click the Apply New Settings button.
Start to send e-mail with the scanned file
1. From the operator panel, press
until >SCAN appears, and then press
2. Press
until Scan to E-Mail appears, and then press
3. Press
or
.
.
to select the setting listed below, and then press
.
Enter E-Mail: Type the e-mail address directly.
Address Book: Select the e-mail address registered in the Address Book .
NOTE: Users need to be registered before you can select Address Book on the operator panel.
4. Press
to select <TO> or <BCC> .
5. Press Start to send e-mail.
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
4.
5.
Setting Problems
Mail Size Limits · Change the file format and resolution.
016-985 Scan
Press
SMTP Error
016-764 Scan
· Ensure the SMTP server address is correct.
Press
Address Error
016-767 Scan
· Ensure the e-mail address is correct.
Press
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Faxing
FAX Languages Setting Procedure
Setting the Machine ID
Using the Number Keypad to Enter Characters
Setting the Time and Date
Changing the Clock Mode
Setting Sounds
Sending a Delayed Fax
Specifying the Fax Settings
Sending a Fax
Sending a Fax from the driver (Direct Fax)
Receiving a Fax
Color Fax
Automatic Dialing
Other Ways to Fax
FAX Languages Setting Procedure
1. Using Fax Initial Setup in Windows Installer is recommended. Please follow to the procedure of the
display.
2. When you are not using Windows OS, set directly from the operator panel. Please follow to the
procedure bellow.
a. Press
until >Country appears from Fax Settings , and then press
.
b. Select the country you use. (Factory default value: United States )
Initialization is required after you set the country. When the restart verification of system is displayed,
please select YES . After restart, the printer returns to the main screen.
c. Press
until >Clock Settings appears from System Settings , and then press
.
d. Specify the date using the number keypad.
e. Specify the time using the number keypad.
f. Specify the TimeZone using
or
. (Factory default value: -5:00)
NOTE: In case of either one, when you configure the languages setting, the information, which is
registered to the device, is initialized.
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Setting the Machine ID
In most countries, you are required by law to indicate your fax number on any fax you send. The Machine ID,
containing your telephone number and name or company name, will be printed at the top of each page sent
from your multifunction printer.
1. Press
until >SETUP appears, and then press
.
2. Press
until >Admin Menu appears, and then press
3. Press
until >Fax Settings appears, and then press
4. Press
until >G3ID appears, and then press
.
.
.
5. Enter your fax number using the number keypad.
NOTE: If you make a mistake while entering numbers, press
6. Press
when the number on the display is correct.
7. Press
until >Send Header Name appears, and then press
to delete the last digit.
.
8. Enter your name or company name using the number keypad.
You can enter alphanumeric characters using the number keypad, including special symbols by
pressing the 0 button.
For details on how to use the number keypad to enter alphanumeric characters, see "Using the Number
Keypad to Enter Characters ".
9. Press
when the name on the display is correct.
10. Press Cancel to return to the standby mode.
Using the Number Keypad to Enter Characters
As you perform various tasks, you may need to enter names and numbers. For example, when you set up
your multifunction printer, you enter your name or your company's name and telephone number. When you
store speed dial or group dial numbers, you may also need to enter the corresponding names.
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
When prompted to enter a letter, press the appropriate button until the correct letter appears on the
display.
For example, to enter the letter O, press 6.
Each time you press 6, the display shows a different letter, M, N, O and finally 6.
To enter additional letters, repeat the first step.
Press
when you are finished.
Keypad Letters and Numbers
Key Assigned numbers, letters or characters
1
@:./1
2
abcABC2
3
defDEF3
4
ghIGHI4
5
jklJKL5
6
mnoMNO6
7
pqrsPQRS7
8
tuvTUV8t
9
wxyzWXYZ9w
0
0
*
-_~
#
@ . \ _ ! " # $ % & ' ~ ^ | ` ; : ? (space) + - * / = ( ) [ ] { } < >
Changing Numbers or Names
If you make a mistake while entering a number or name, press
enter the correct number or character.
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
to delete the last digit or character. Then
Inserting a Pause
For some telephone systems, it is necessary to dial an access code and listen for a second dial tone. A pause
must be entered in order for the access code to function. For example, enter the access code 9 and then
press Pause before entering the telephone number. "-" appears on the display to indicate when a pause is
entered.
Setting the Time and Date
NOTE: It may be necessary to reset the correct time and date if loss of power to the multifunction
printer occurs.
To set the time and date:
1. Press
until >SETUP appears, and then press
.
2. Press
until >Admin Menu appears, and then press
3. Press
until >System Settings appears, and then press
4. Press
until >Clock Settings appears, and then press
5. Press
until >Set Date appears, and then press
.
.
.
.
6. Enter the correct date using the number keypad.
NOTE: If you make a mistake while entering numbers, press
7. Press
when the date on the display is correct.
8. Press
until >Set Time appears, and then press
to reenter the digit.
.
9. Enter the correct time using the number keypad.
10. Press
when the time on the display is correct.
11. Press Cancel to return to the standby mode.
NOTE: The multifunction printer beeps and does not allow you to proceed to the next step if a wrong
number is entered.
Changing the Clock Mode
1.
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
You can set the current time using either the 12-hour or the 24-hour format.
1. Press
until >SETUP appears, and then press
.
2. Press
until >Admin Menu appears, and then press
3. Press
until >System Settings appears, and then press
4. Press
until >Clock Settings appears, and then press
5. Press
until >Time Format appears, and then press
6. Press
until the desired format appears, and then press
.
.
.
.
.
7. Press Cancel to return to the standby mode.
Setting Sounds
Speaker, Ringer, Key Sounds and Alarm Sounds
1. Press
until >SETUP appears, and then press
.
2. Press
until >Admin Menu appears, and then press
3. Press
until >System Settings appears, and then press
4. Press
until >Alert Tone appears, and then press
5. Press
until the desired tone appears, and then press
.
.
.
.
6. Press
until the desired volume appears, and then press
.
The multifunction printer works normally even if the ringer is turned off.
7. Press Cancel to return to the standby mode.
Speaker Volume
NOTE: You can turn on/off the speaker only when the telephone line is connected.
1. Press
until >FAX appears, and then press
2. Press
until >OnHook appears.
3.
4.
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
.
2.
3. Press
to select On , and then press
.
4. Press Cancel to return to the standby mode.
Sending a Delayed Fax
The Delayed Start mode can be used to save scanned documents for transmission at a specified time in
order to take advantage of lower long distance rates.
1. Load the document(s) face up with top edge in first into the ADF.
OR
Place a single document face down on the document feeder glass.
For details about loading a document, see "Loading an Original Document ".
2. Press
until >FAX appears, and then press
.
3. Adjust the document resolution to suit your fax needs (see "Adjusting the Document Resolution ").
If you need to change the contrast, see "Lighter/Darker ".
4. Press
until >Delayed Start appears.
5. Press
to select On , and then press
.
6. Enter the start time using the number keypad.
7. Enter the number of the remote machine using the number keypad, and then press
.
To enter the number, you can use speed dial or group dial numbers. For details, see "Automatic Dialing
".
Press Start to scan data.
Once Delayed Start mode is activated, your multifunction printer stores all of the documents to be faxed into
its memory and sends them at the programmed time. After faxing in the Delayed Start mode is complete,
the data in the memory is cleared.
Specifying the Fax Settings
Changing the Fax Settings Options
1. Press
until >SETUP appears, and then press
2. Press
until >Admin Menu appears, and then press
3. Press
until >Fax Settings appears, and then press
4. Press
until the desired menu item appears, and then press
5.
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
.
.
.
.
4.
5. Use
to find the status or use the number keypad to enter the value for the option you have
selected.
6. Press
to save the selection.
7. Press Back to return to the previous screen.
8. If necessary, repeat steps 4 through 7.
9. To return to the standby mode, press Cancel .
Available Fax Settings Options
You can use the following settings options for configuring the fax system:
Option
Description
Interval
Timer
You can specify the interval time (3-255 minutes) of the resend attempts.
Number of
Redial
You can specify the number of redial attempts, 0-9. If you enter 0, the multifunction printer
will not redial.
Int. of
Redial
Your multifunction printer can automatically redial a remote fax machine if it was busy.
Intervals from 1-15 minutes can be entered.
Ans Select
You can select the default fax receiving mode.
· TEL Mode (manual receive mode): Automatic fax reception is turned off. You can receive a
fax by picking up the handset of the external telephone and then pressing the remote
receive code, or by setting OnHook to On (you can hear voice or fax tones from the remote
machine) and then pressing Start .
· FAX Mode (automatic receive mode)
· TEL/FAX Mode: When the multifunction printer receive an incoming a fax, the external
telephone rings for the time specified in Auto Ans. TEL/FAX, and then the multifunction
printer automatically receive a fax. If incoming data is not a fax, the multifunction printer
beeps from the internal speaker.
· Ans/FAX Mode: The multifunction printer can share one telephone line with an answering
machine. In this mode, the multifunction printer will monitor the fax signal and pick up
the line if there are fax tones. If the phone communication in your country is serial, this
mode is not available.
· DRPD Mode: Before using the Distinctive Ring Pattern Detection (DRPD) option, distinctive
ring service must be installed on your telephone line by the telephone company. After the
telephone company has provided a separate number for faxing with a distinctive ring
pattern, configure the fax setup to monitor for that specific ring pattern.
Auto
The multifunction printer answers an incoming call and automatically goes into the receive
Answer Fax mode. The number of rings before the multifunction printer answers can be set in the Auto
Answer Fax option. If the user memory is full, the multifunction printer is changed to the Tel
mode.
Auto Ans.
TEL/FAX
The multifunction printer can share one telephone line with an external telephone. In this
mode, the multifunction printer will monitor the fax signal and pick up the line if there are
fax tones. If the phone communication in your country is serial, this mode is not available.
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Auto Ans.
Ans/FAX
The multifunction printer can share one telephone line with an answering machine. In this
mode, the multifunction printer will monitor the fax signal and pick up the line if there are
fax tones. If the phone communication in your country is serial, this mode is not available.
Line
Monitor
You can specify the volume of the internal speaker.
Ring Tone
Volume
You can specify the volume for the incoming faxes.
Line Type
You can select the default line type.
· PSTN
· PBX
Dialing
Type
You can select the dialing type.
· PB
· DP (10PPS)
· DP (20PPS)
DM
Prevention
Using the DM Prevention feature, the system only accepts faxes from the remote stations
registered in the speed dial. This feature is useful for blocking any unwanted faxes.
Select Off to turn the feature off. Anybody can send you a fax.
Select On to turn the feature on.
Remote
Receive
You can receive a fax by pressing the remote receive code on the external telephone after
picking up the handset of the telephone.
Remote Rcv You can specify the tone when Remote Receive is set to On .
Tone
Duplex
Print
You can use duplex printing when you receive a fax. This option is available only when the
optional duplexer is installed on your multifunction printer.
Send
Header
Prints the sender record at the head of the fax.
Select Off to turn this feature off.
Select On to turn this feature on.
Send
Header
Name
Specifies the sender name in the sender report.
G3ID
Contains your telephone number, which is printed at the top of each page sent from your
multifunction printer. This feature is available when you set Send Header to On .
Local Name Contains your name or company name, which is printed on the report sheet.
DRPD
Pattern
Before using the Distinctive Ring Pattern Detection (DRPD) option, distinctive ring service
must be installed on your telephone line by the telephone company. After the telephone
company has provided a separate number for faxing with a distinctive ring pattern,
configure the fax setup to monitor for that specific ring pattern.
Forward
Settings
You can set your multifunction printer to forward incoming faxes to another fax number
during a specified time period. When a fax arrives at your multifunction printer, it is stored
in the memory. Then, the multifunction printer dials the fax number that you have specified
and sends the fax.
Select Trans. at Error to forward the incoming faxes when an error occurs.
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Select Trans. Always to always forward the incoming faxes.
Select Not Trans. not to forward incoming faxes. You can set the fax number to which
faxes are forwarded. Then, you can enter the start time and/or the end time. The Print Local
Copy option allows you to set the multifunction printer to print the fax, if fax forwarding is
completed with no error.
Fwd.
Settings
Num
You can set the number of the multifunction printer to always forward all of the incoming
faxes to the specified destination.
Fwd. Set
Print
Prints all of the ongoing faxes when you can set the multifunction printer to always forward
the faxes to the specified destination.
Prefix Dial
You can select whether or not to add the prefix number when you send a fax.
Prefix Dial
Num
You can set a prefix dial number up to five digits. This number dials before any auto dial
number is started. It is useful for accessing the PABX exchange.
Discard
Size
When receiving a document as long as or longer than the paper installed in your
multifunction printer, you can set the multifunction printer to discard any excess at the
bottom of the page. If the received page is outside the margin you set, it will print on two
sheets of paper at the actual size. When the document is within the margin and the Auto
Reduction feature is turned on, the multifunction printer reduces the document to fit it onto
the appropriate sized paper and discard does not occur. If the Auto Reduction feature is
turned off or fails, the data within the margin will be discarded.
Color Fax
Set whether the multifunction printer sends and receives color faxes.
Extel Hook
Thresh
You can set the threshold value for the OnHook mode.
Country
You can select the country where the multifunction printer is used.
Fwd. Error
Print
Prints the document failed to transfer when Forward Set Print is set to Off .
NOTE: Prefix Dial only supports the environment where you send a fax to send a fax to the external
line number. To use Prefix Dial, you must do the following from the operator panel.
1. Use
press
2. Use
press
and
to select SETUP
Admin Menu
Fax Settings
Line Type . Select PBX , and then
to select SETUP
Admin Menu
Fax Settings
Prefix Dial . Select On , and then
.
and
.
3. Use
and
to select SETUP
Admin Menu
Fax Settings
maximum of five-digit prefix number from 0-9, *, and #.
Prefix Dial Num . Enter a
Advanced Fax Settings
NOTE: The advanced fax settings are only meant for advanced users. Incorrect settings on the Dell
3115cn may damage the device.
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
If you are experiencing fax send or receive errors, there is an advanced fax settings menu which you can
access and change the settings accordingly.
To enter the Diagnostic Menu (Customer Mode), follow the instructions.
1. Turn off the Dell MFP Laser 3115cn.
2. Disconnect all network, phone line, USB and Parallel cables from the device.
3. Turn on the Dell MFP Laser 3115cn while holding down the
menu appears.
and
button. The Customer Mode
4. After all the advanced fax settings have been made, you will need to turn off and on the Dell MFP Laser
3115cn for the new settings to be effective.
Error Correction Mode (ECM)
Some of the legacy fax devices do not support the Error Correction Mode. You may experience fax send or
receive errors due to this feature. You can disable the ECM with the following instructions.
1. When the printer is in Customer Mode , select Fax/Scanner Diag and press
2. Press the
button until Parameter appears, then press the
3. Press the
button until FAX Parameter appears, then press the
button.
4. Press the
button until Capability ECM appears, then press the
button.
5. Press the
button until Disable appears, then press the
button.
button.
button to disable ECM.
Modem Speed
Some of the legacy fax devices do not support the V.34 modem speed of 33,600 bits per second (bps). You
may experience fax send or receive errors due to the higher modem speed. You can disable the V.34 with
the following instructions.
1. When the printer is in Customer Mode , select Fax/Scanner Diag and press
2. Press the
button until Parameter appears, then press the
3. Press the
button until FAX Parameter appears, then press the
4. Press the
button until Capability V34 appears, then press the
5. Press the
button until Disable appears, then press the
button.
button.
button.
button.
button to disable V.34.
You can also reduce the modem speed if you continue to experience fax communication problem.
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
14,400bps (V.17)
9,600bps (V.29) or
4,800bps (V.27ter).
You can change the modem transmission speed with the following instructions.
1. When the printer is in Customer Mode , select Fax/Scanner Diag and press
2. Press the
button until Parameter appears, then press the
3. Press the
button until FAX Parameter appears, then press the
4. Press the
button until G3M TX Modem Speed appears, then press the
button.
button.
button.
button.
5. Press the
button until V17 appears, then press
button to enable V.17 (14,400bps), select V29 to
enable V.29 (9,600bps), or select V27ter to enable V.27ter (4,800bps).
You can change the modem receive speed with the following instructions.
1. When the printer is in Customer Mode , select Fax/Scanner Diag and press
2. Press the
button until Parameter appears, then press the
3. Press the
button until FAX Parameter appears, then press the
4. Press the
button until G3M RX Modem Speed appears, then press the
button.
button.
button.
button.
5. Press the
button until V27ter+V29+V33+V17 appears, then press the
button to enable V.17
(14,400bps), select V27ter+V29 to enable V.29 (9,600bps), or select V27ter to enable V.27ter
(4,800bps).
Fax Data Encoding Method
Some of the legacy fax devices do not support the JBIG data encoding method. You may experience fax send
or receive errors due to this data encoding method. You can disable the JBIG and select the MH, MR or MMR
encoding with the following instructions.
You can change the modem transmission encoding with the following instructions.
1. When the printer is in Customer Mode , select Fax/Scanner Diag and press
2. Press the
button until Parameter appears, then press the
3. Press the
button until FAX Parameter appears, then press the
4.
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
button.
button.
button.
3.
4. Press the
button until G3M TX Coding appears, then press the
button.
5. Press the
button until MMR appears, then press the
button to enable MMR encoding, select MR
to enable MR encoding, or select MH to enable MH encoding.
You can change the modem receive encoding with the following instructions.
1. When the printer is in Customer Mode , select Fax/Scanner Diag and press
2. Press the
button until Parameter appears, then press the
3. Press the
button until FAX Parameter appears, then press the
button.
4. Press the
button until G3M RX Coding appears, then press the
button.
button.
button.
5. Press the
button until MMR appears, then press the
button to enable MMR encoding, select MR
to enable MR encoding, or select MH to enable MH encoding.
Sending a Fax
You can fax data from you multifunction printer. Also you can directly fax data transferred from the
computer running Windows.
Loading an Original Document
You can use the ADF or the document feeder glass to load an original document for faxing. Using the ADF,
you can load up to 50 sheets of 75 g/m2 (20 lb) paper at a time. Using the document feeder glass, you can
load one sheet at a time.
NOTE: Ensure that no document is in the ADF. If any document is detected in the ADF, it has priority
over the document on the document feeder glass.
NOTE: To get the best scan quality, especially for gray scale images, use the document feeder glass
instead of the ADF.
To fax a document using the Automatic Document Feeder (ADF):
1. Place the document(s) face up on the ADF with the top edge of the documents in first. Then adjust the
document guides to the correct document size.
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
2. Adjust the document resolution, referring to "Adjusting the Document Resolution ".
To fax a document from the document feeder glass:
1. Open the document cover.
2. Place the document face down on the document feeder glass and align it with the registration guide on
the top left corner of the glass.
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
3. Adjust the document resolution, referring to "Adjusting the Document Resolution ".
4. Close the document cover.
NOTE: If you are faxing a page from a book or magazine, lift the cover until its hinges are caught by
the stopper and then close the cover. If the book or magazine is thicker than 30 mm, start faxing with
the cover open.
Adjusting the Document Resolution
Use the Document Resolution setting to improve the output quality of the original or if scanning
photographic materials.
1. Press
until >FAX appears, and then press
.
2. Press
until >Resolution appears.
3. Press
to select the desired setting, and then press
.
Standard
Uses for documents with normal sized characters.
Fine
Uses for documents containing small characters or thin lines or documents printed using
a dot-matrix printer.
Super
Fine
Uses for documents containing extremely fine detail. The super fine mode is enabled
only if the remote printer also supports the Super Fine resolution. See the note below.
NOTE: Faxes scanned in the Super Fine resolution transmits at the highest resolution supported by
the receiving device.
Original Type
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
The Original Type setting is used to improve the image quality by selecting the document type for the
current fax job.
To select the image quality:
1. Load the document to be faxed on the document feeder glass, and close the cover.
2. Press
until >FAX appears, and then press
.
3. Press
until >Original Type appears.
4. Press
to select the desired setting, and then press
.
Text&Photo Uses for documents with both text and photo/gray tones.
Photo
Uses for documents with photo or gray tones.
Text*
Uses for documents with text.
5. Press Start to begin faxing.
Lighter/Darker
Adjust the contrast to make the fax lighter or darker than the original.
To adjust the contrast:
1. Load the document to be faxed on the document feeder glass, and close the cover.
2. Press
until >FAX appears, and then press
.
3. Press
until >Lighter/Darker appears.
4. Press
to select the desired setting, and then press
.
Normal* Works well with standard typed or printed documents.
Darker1
Works well with light print or faint pencil markings.
Darker2
Darker3
Lighter3 Works well with dark print.
Lighter2
Lighter1
5. Press Start to begin faxing.
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
5.
Sending a Fax Automatically
1. Load the document(s) face up with top edge in first into the ADF.
OR
Place a single document face down on the document feeder glass.
For details about loading a document, see "Loading an Original Document ".
2. Press
until >FAX appears, and then press
.
3. Adjust the document resolution to suit your fax needs (see "Adjusting the Document Resolution ").
If you need to change the contrast, see "Lighter/Darker ".
4. Press
until >Phone Book appears, and then press
.
You can use speed or group dial numbers. For details, see "Automatic Dialing ".
5. Press
until the desired number appears.
6. Press Start .
For the document loaded on the document feeder glass, the display asks if you want to load another
page. Press
to select Yes or No , and then press
.
After all of the pages are scanned, select No when the display shows "Another Page? "
7. The number is dialed and then the multifunction printer begins sending the fax when the remote fax
machine is ready.
NOTE: Press Cancel to cancel the fax job at any time while sending the fax.
Sending a Fax Manually
1. Load the document(s) face up with top edge in first into the ADF.
OR
Place a single document face down on the document feeder glass.
For details about loading a document, see "Loading an Original Document ".
2. Press
until >FAX appears, and then press
.
3. Adjust the document resolution to suit your fax needs (see "Adjusting the Document Resolution ").
If you need to change the contrast, see "Lighter/Darker ".
4. Press
until >Phone Number appears.
5. Enter the remote fax machine's fax number using the number keypad.
6. When you hear a high-pitched fax tones from the remote fax machine:
If the document is loaded on the ADF, press Start.
If the document is not loaded on the ADF, press
press
.
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
until the desired setting appears, and then
NOTE: Press Cancel and
to cancel the fax job at any time while sending the fax.
Confirming Transmissions
When the last page of your document has been sent successfully, the multifunction printer beeps and returns
to the standby mode.
If something goes wrong while sending your fax, an error message appears on the display. For a listing of
error messages and their meanings, see "Understanding Multifunction Printer Messages ".
If you receive an error message, press Cancel to clear the message and try to send the document again.
You can set your multifunction printer to print a confirmation report automatically after each fax
transmission. For further details, see "Printing a Report ".
Automatic Redialing
If the number you have dialed is busy or there is no answer when you send a fax, the multifunction printer
will automatically redial the number every minute based on the number set in the redial settings.
To change the time interval between redials and the number of redial attempts, see "Available Fax Settings
Options ".
Sending a Fax from the driver (Direct Fax)
You can send a fax directly from your computer by using the driver.
NOTE: Only black and white faxes can be sent using Direct Fax.
Example
Procedure
NOTE: The names of the dialog boxes and the buttons may be different from those given in the
following procedure depending on the application you are using.
1.
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
1. Open the file you want to send by fax.
2. Open the print dialog box from the application, and then select Dell MFP Laser 3115cn Fax .
3. Click Preferences .
4. The Printing Preferences dialog box opens. You can use the FAX Settings to set the following settings.
NOTE: The settings done here are only applied to a single fax job.
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
a. Transmission image quality
Purpose:
To set the output quality.
Values:
Standard
For documents with normal sized characters.
High Quality*
For documents containing small characters or thin lines or documents printed using a
dot-matrix printer.
Super-high
image quality
For documents containing extremely fine detail. The super fine mode is enabled only if
the remote printer also supports Super Fine resolution. See the notes below.
NOTE: Faxes printed in the Super-high image quality by Direct Fax driver transmits at the highest
resolution supported by the receiving device.
b. Transmission Report
Purpose:
To specify the communication result for the fax transmission.
Values:
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Output regularly
Always prints the report for the fax transmission.
Output for non-transmission* Prints the report when a communication error is detected.
Do not output
Does not print the report.
c. Record of senders
Prints the sender record at the head of the fax. Select Off to turn this feature off. Select On to turn this
feature on.
5. Click OK to close the Printing Preferences dialog box.
6. Click Print . The Set/Check Fax Transmission: dialog box opens.
7. Enter the destination for the recipient. The following procedure is for entering the destination. For
details on how to enter the destination, please refer to the Help file for the driver.
a. Enter the name and phone number directly.
b. Specify a destination that is saved to the Phone Book on the PC.
c. Specify a destination that is saved to the Address Book on the Dell Multifunction Color Laser
Printer 3115cn.*
* This can only be used if the PC and the Dell Multifunction Color Laser Printer 3115cn are
connected with a USB cable.
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
NOTE: Enter the password in the Password field in the Authorization area before sending a fax from
the Dell MFP Laser 3115cn Fax if the Scan/Fax Set (Setup
Admin menu
Secure Settings )
settings on the Dell Multifunction Color Laser Printer 3115cn have been set. If you do not enter the
correct password, the fax will not be sent. You can check whether or not the fax was correctly sent on
the Job History Report (Setup
Reports
Job History ).
Receiving a Fax
About Receiving Modes
NOTE: To use the TEL/FAX or Ans/Fax mode, attach an answering machine to the Phone connector (
) on the back of your multifunction printer.
When the memory is full, the fax is received in the TEL mode.
Loading Paper for Receiving Faxes
The instructions for loading paper in the paper tray are the same whether you are printing, faxing, or
copying, except that faxes can only be printed on Letter-, A4-, or Legal-sized paper. For details about
loading paper, see "Loading Print Media ". For details about setting the paper type and size in the tray, see
"Print Media Guidelines ".
Receiving Automatically in the Fax Mode
Your multifunction printer is preset to the fax mode at the factory.
When you receive a fax, the multifunction printer answers the call on a specified number of rings and
automatically receives the fax.
To change the number of rings, see "Available Fax Settings Options ".
If you want to adjust the ringer volume, see "Setting Sounds ".
Receiving Manually in the Tel Mode
You can receive a fax by picking up the handset of the external telephone and then pressing the remote
receive code (see "Available Fax Settings Options "), or by setting OnHook to On (you can hear voice or fax
tones from the remote machine) and then pressing Start .
The multifunction printer begins receiving a fax and returns to the standby mode when the reception is
completed.
Receiving Automatically in the TEL/FAX or Ans/FAX Mode
To use the TEL/FAX or Ans/Fax mode, you must attach an answering machine to the Phone connector (
on the back of your multifunction printer.
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
)
If the caller leaves a message, the answering machine stores the message as it would normally. If your
multifunction printer hears a fax tone on the line, it automatically starts to receive fax.
NOTE: If you have set your multifunction printer to the Ans/FAX mode and your answering machine is
switched off, or no answering machine is connected to your multifunction printer, your multifunction
printer will automatically go into the Fax mode after a predefined number of rings.
Receiving Manually Using an External Telephone
This feature works best when you are using an external telephone connected to the Phone connector (
)
on the back of your multifunction printer. You can receive a fax from someone you are talking to on the
external telephone without having to go to the fax machine.
When you receive a call on the external telephone and hear fax tones, press the two-digit keys on the
external telephone.
The multifunction printer receives the document.
Press the buttons slowly in sequence. If you still hear the fax tone from the remote machine, try pressing the
two-digit keys once again.
The remote receive code is set to Off at the factory. The first and the last asterisks are fixed, but you can
change the middle number to whatever you choose. For details on changing the code, see "Available Fax
Settings Options ".
Receiving Faxes Using the DRPD Mode
The DRPD mode is a telephone company service which enables a user to use a single telephone line to
answer several different telephone numbers. The particular number someone uses to call you on is identified
by different ringing patterns, which consist of various combinations of long and short ringing sounds.
Before using the Distinctive Ring Pattern Detection option, Distinctive Ring service must be installed on your
telephone line by the telephone company. To set up Distinctive Ring Pattern Detection, you will need another
telephone line at your location, or someone available to dial your FAX number from outside.
To set up the DRPD mode:
1. Press
until >SETUP appears, and then press
2. Press
until >Admin Menu appears, and then press
3. Press
until >Fax Settings appears, and then press
4. Press
until >DRPD Pattern appears.
5. Use
.
to select the desired setting, and then press
.
.
.
6. To return to the standby mode, press Cancel .
To receive faxes in the DRPD mode, you need to set the menu to DRPD; see "Available Fax Settings Options
".
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Your multifunction printer provides five DRPD patterns. If this service is available from your telephone
company, ask your telephone company which pattern you need to select to use this service.
Receiving Faxes in the Memory
Since your multifunction printer is a multi-tasking device, it can receive faxes while you are making copies or
printing. If you receive a fax while you are copying, printing, or run out of paper or toner, your multifunction
printer stores incoming faxes in the memory. Then, as soon as you finish copying, printing, or re-supply the
consumables, the multifunction printer automatically prints the fax.
Polling Receive
You can receive faxes from the remote fax machine when you want to receive it.
1. Press
until >FAX appears, and then press
2. Press
until >Polling Receive appears.
3. Press
to select On , and then press
.
.
Color Fax
You can use the color fax function on your multifunction printer.
Conditions faxing in color
To send and receive color faxes you need to check the following conditions.
Check that the sending or receiving party's fax is set for color faxes.
You can only send one page if you send a fax using the document feeder glass.
If the sender or the receiver is not a Dell Multifunction Color Laser Printer 3115cn, the color fax
function may not operate well. If this is the case, send the fax as black and white.
Color faxes cannnot be sent while a fax is being sent or received.
Automatic redial is not done if a transmission error occurs while a color fax is being transmitted.
Color faxes are not forwarded even if the Forward Settings are set.
Color faxes cannot be sent using direct fax.
Color faxes cannot send document to multiple destinations at the same time.
Setting the Color Fax Function
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
To use the color fax function, turn on the color fax function. The factory default setting is off.
How to set the color fax function:
1. Press
until >Setup appears, and then press
.
2. Press
until >Admin menu appears, and then press
3. Press
until >Fax Settings appears, and then press
4. Press
until >Color Fax appears, and then press
5. Press
to select On , and then press
.
.
.
.
Changes in the menu for color fax settings
The fax menu on the operator panel changes when Color Fax is turned on or off.
When color fax is off
When color fax is on
When "Black & White" is selected in the Fax When "Color" is selected in the Fax
menu
menu
Checking whether or not a fax was sent in color
Even if you send a color fax, if the receiver does not have a color fax function or if their color fax function is
turned off, the fax is sent in black and white. The following procedure explains how to check if a fax was sent
in color or black and white.
Check on the panel:
Color or Black & White is displayed on the operator panel while a fax is sending.
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
While a fax is sending in color, Color appears on the fourth line of the LCD panel.
While a fax is sending in black and white, Black & White appears on the fourth line of the LCD panel.
Check on the activity report:
You can check the Mode field on the activity report.
If the fax was sent in color, "Color" is output on the report.
If the fax was sent in black and white, G3, SG3 or ECM is output on the report.
If a fax sent as color is changed to black and white, *G3, *SG3, or *ECM is output on the report.
Check on the monitor report:
You can check in the mode field on the monitor report if a monitor report is set to be output by Fax Transmit
(Setup
Admin menu
System Settings ).
Not Print
Does not print the report.
Print at Error* Prints the report when a communication error is detected.
Print Always
Always prints the report for the fax transmission.
If the fax was sent in color, "Color" is output on the report.
If the fax was sent in black and white, G3, SG3 or ECM is output on the report.
If a fax sent as color is changed to black and white because the receiver could not accept a color fax,
*G3, *SG3, or *ECM is output on the report.
Automatic Dialing
Speed Dialing
You can store up to 200 frequently dialed numbers in speed dial locations (001-200).
When the speed dial job specified in the delayed fax or redial exists and you change the speed dial number
from the operator panel or Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool, the destination of the fax may be changed.
Storing a Number for Speed Dialing
1. Press
until >FAX appears, and then press
2. Press
until >Add PhoneBook Entry appears, and then press
3.
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
.
.
1.
2.
3. Press
until >Speed Dial appears, and then press
.
4. Enter the three-digit speed dial number between 001 and 200, using the number keypad, and then
press
.
5. Enter the settings for Name, Phone Number, and Delete Dial by using
,
and number keys.
If a number is already stored in the location you chose, the display shows the number to allow you to
change it. To start over with another speed-dial number, press Back .
6. Enter the number you want to store using the number keypad, and then press
To insert a pause between numbers, press Pause . "-" appears on the display.
.
7. To assign a name to the number, enter the name. For details about how to enter names, see "Using
the Number Keypad to Enter Characters ".
If you do not want to assign a name, skip this step.
8. Press Back when the name appears correctly or without entering a name.
9. To store more fax numbers, repeat steps 4 through 6.
To return to the standby mode, press Cancel .
Sending a Fax Using a Speed Dial
1. Load the document(s) face up with top edge in first into the ADF.
OR
Place a single document face down on the document feeder glass.
For details about loading a document, see "Loading an Original Document ".
2. To enter the speed dial number do either of the following:
a. Press
until >FAX appears, and then press
b. Press
until >Speed Dial appears.
.
c. Use the Keypad buttons to enter the three-digit speed dial number between 001 and 200, using
the number keypad, and then press
.
The corresponding entry's name briefly displays. To confirm the name again, press
.
3. Adjust the document resolution to suit your fax needs (see "Adjusting the Document Resolution ").
If you need to change the contrast, see "Lighter/Darker ".
4. The document scans into the memory.
When the document is loaded on the document feeder glass, the LCD display asks if you want to send
another page. Press
to select Yes to add more documents or to select No to begin sending the fax
immediately, and then press
.
5. The fax number stored in the speed dial location is automatically dialed. The document is sent when
the remote fax machine answers.
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
5.
NOTE: Using the asterisk (*) in the first digit, you can send a document to multiple locations. For
example, if you enter 00*, you can send a document to the locations registered between 001 and 009.
Group Dialing
If you frequently send the same document to several destinations, you can create a group of these
destinations and set them under a two-digit group dial location. This enables you to use a group dial number
setting to send the same document to all the destinations in the group.
NOTE: You cannot include one group dial number within another group dial number.
Setting Group Dial
1. Press
until >FAX appears, and then press
.
2. Press
until >Add PhoneBook Entry appears, and then press
3. Press
until >Group Dial appears, and then press
.
.
4. Enter the one-digit speed dial number between 1 and 6, using the number keypad, and then press
.
If a number is already stored in the location you chose, the display shows the number to allow you to
change it. To start over with another speed-dial number, press Back .
5. Enter the number you want to store using the number keypad, and then press
To insert a pause between numbers, press Pause . "-" appears on the display.
.
6. To assign a name to the number, enter the name. For details about how to enter names, see "Using
the Number Keypad to Enter Characters ".
If you do not want to assign a name, skip this step.
7. Press Back when the name appears correctly or without entering a name.
8. To store more fax numbers, repeat steps 4 through 6.
To return to the standby mode, press Cancel .
Editing Group Dial Numbers
You can delete a specific speed dial number from a selected group or add a new number to the selected
group.
1. Press
until >FAX appears, and then press
.
2. Press
until >Add PhoneBook Entry appears, and then press
3. Press
until >Group Dial appears, and then press
.
.
4. Enter the one-digit speed dial number between 1 and 6, using the number keypad, and then press
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
.
3.
4.
NOTE: When you delete the last speed dial in a group, the group itself is not deleted.
5. Press Back .
6. If you want to edit another group, repeat from step 4.
To return to the standby mode, press Cancel .
Sending a Fax Using Group Dialing (Multi-address
Transmission)
You can use group dialing for Broadcasting or Delayed transmissions.
Follow the procedure of the desired operation (For Delayed transmission, see "Sending a Delayed Fax ").
You can use one or more group numbers in one operation. Then continue the procedure to complete the
desired operation.
Your multifunction printer automatically scans the document loaded in the Automatic Document Feeder or on
the document feeder glass into the memory. The multifunction printer dials each of the numbers included in
the group.
Printing a Speed Dial List
You can check your automatic dial setting by printing a Speed Dial list.
1. Press
until >SETUP appears, and then press
.
2. Press
until >Admin Menu appears, and then press
3. Press
until >Admin Reports appears, and then press
4. Press
until >Speed Dial appears, and then press
A list showing your speed dial entries prints out.
.
.
.
Other Ways to Fax
Using the Secure Receiving Mode
You may need to prevent your received faxes from being accessed by unauthorized people. You can turn on
the secure fax mode using the Secure Receive option to restrict printing out all of the received faxes when
the multifunction printer is unattended. In the secure fax mode, all incoming faxes will go in memory. When
the mode turns off, any faxes stored will be printed.
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
NOTE: Before operation, ensure Panel Lock is enabled.
To turn the secure receiving mode on:
1. Press
until >SETUP appears, and then press
.
2. Press
until >Admin Menu appears, and then press
3. Press
until >Secure Settings appears, and then press
4. Press
until >Secure Receive appears, and then press
5. Press
until >Secure Receive Set appears, and then press
6. Press
to select Enable , and then press
7. Press
to select Change Password , and then press
.
.
.
.
.
.
8. Enter a four-digit passcode you want to use, using the number keypad and press
.
NOTE: When you set Secure Receive Set to Enable , 0000 is set by default.
9. To return to the standby mode, press Cancel .
When a fax is received in the secure receiving mode, your multifunction printer stores it into memory
and the JOB STATUS screen displays "Secure Receive " to let you know that there is a fax stored.
To print received documents:
1. Press
until >JOB STATUS appears, and then press
.
2. Press
until >Secure Receive appears, and then press
.
3. Enter the password, and then press
.
The faxes stored in memory are printed.
To turn the secure receiving mode off:
1. Access the Secure Receive menu by following steps 1 to 5 in "To turn the secure receiving mode
on:".
2. Press
to select Disable , and then press
3. To return to the standby mode, press Cancel .
Printing Reports
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
.
The following reports are available:
Speed Dial
This list shows all of the numbers currently stored in the printer's memory as speed dial numbers.
You can print this Speed Dial list from the operator panel; see "Printing a Speed Dial List ".
Address Book
This list shows all of the numbers currently stored in the printer's memory as Address Book information.
Server Address
This list shows all of the numbers currently stored in the printer's memory as Server Address information.
Fax Activity
This report shows information about the faxes you recently received or sent.
Fax Pending
This list shows the status of pending faxes. You may print this list to confirm your changes after changing
any settings.
Printing a Report
1. Press
until >SETUP appears, and then press
.
2. Press
until >Admin Menu appears, and then press
3. Press
until >Admin Reports appears, and then press
4. Press
to select the report or list you want to print.
A list showing your speed dial entries prints out.
Speed Dial: Speed Dial list
Address Book: Address Book list
Server Address: Server Address list
Fax Activity: Fax activity information
Fax Pending: Pending faxes
Print Meter: Print volume report
5. Press
.
The selected information prints out.
Changing Setting Options
1.
2.
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
.
.
1. Press
until >FAX appears, and then press
.
2. Press
until >Fax Defaults appears, and then press
3. Press
to select the desired menu item, and then press
4. When the option you want appears on the display, press
desired value using the number keypad.
5. Press
.
.
to select the desired status or enter the
to save the selection.
6. You can exit from the setup mode at any time by pressing Cancel .
Using an Answering Machine
You can connect a telephone answering device (TAD) directly to the back of your multifunction printer as
shown above.
Set your multifunction printer to the Ans/FAX mode and set Auto Ans. Ans/FAX to specify the time for
the TAD.
When the TAD picks up the call, the multifunction printer monitors and takes the line if fax tones are
received and then starts receiving the fax.
If the answering device is off, the multifunction printer automatically goes into the Fax mode after a
predefined number of rings.
If you answer the call and hear fax tones, the multifunction printer will answer the fax call if you
Set OnHook to On (you can hear voice or fax tones from the remote machine), and then press Start
and hang up the receiver.
OR
Press the two-digit remote receive code and hang up the receiver.
Using a Computer Modem
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
If you want to use your computer modem for faxing or for a dial-up internet connection, connect the
computer modem directly to the back of your multifunction printer with the TAD as shown above.
Set your multifunction printer to the Ans/FAX mode and set Auto Ans. Ans/FAX to specify the time for
the TAD.
Turn off the computer modem's fax-receive feature.
Do not use the computer modem if your multifunction printer is sending or receiving a fax.
Follow the instructions provided with your computer modem and fax application to fax via the
computer modem.
If you want to capture images using your multifunction printer and Dell ScanDirect™, send images
using your fax application with the computer modem.
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Networking
About Sharing the Multifunction Printer on a Network
Setting Up the Locally Shared Printer
Point and Print
Peer-to-Peer
Setting Up a Network-connected Printer
Printing a Network Configuration Page
Setting Network Protocols
Static Addressing
Dynamic Addressing (BOOTP/DHCP)
Restoring the Network Configuration
Resetting the Network Interface Card
About Sharing the Multifunction Printer on a Network
Locally-shared Printer
You can connect the multifunction printer directly to a selected computer, which is called the "host
computer" on the network. The multifunction printer can then be shared by other users on the network
through a Windows® 98, Windows Me, Windows 2000, Windows XP, Windows Vista®, Windows Server®
2003, Windows Server 2008, or Windows NT 4.0 network printer connection.
Wired Network-connected Printer
Your multifunction printer has a built-in network interface. For details, see "Connecting the Multifunction
Printer to the Network".
Printing Across a Network
Whether the multifunction printer is locally connected or network-connected, you need to install the Dell™
Multifunction Color Laser Printer 3115cn software on each computer that prints documents using the
multifunction printer.
Setting Up the Locally Shared Printer
You can share your new printer on the network using the Drivers and Utilities CD that shipped with your
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
multifunction printer, or using Microsoft's point and print or peer-to-peer method. However, if you use one of
the Microsoft methods, you will not have all of the features, such as the status monitor and other printer
utilities, that are installed with the Drivers and Utilities CD.
To share a locally-attached printer on the network, you need to share the multifunction printer, and then
install the shared printer on network clients:
1. Click Start Settings Printers and Faxes (Printers for Windows 2000).
2. Right-click this printer icon and select Properties.
3. From the Sharing tab, check the Shared this printer (Shared for Windows 2000) check box, and
then type a name in the Shared name (Share as for Windows 2000) text box.
4. Click Additional Drivers and select the operating systems of all network clients printing to this
multifunction printer.
5. Click OK.
If you are missing files, you are prompted to insert the server operating system CD.
For Windows Vista:
1. Click Start
Control Panel
Hardware and Sound
Printers.
2. Right-click the printer's icon and select Sharing.
3. Click the Change sharing options button.
4. The dialog box displaying "Windows needs your permission to continue" appears.
5. Click the Continue button.
6. Check the Share this printer check box, and then type a name in the Share name text box.
7. Click Additional Drivers and select the operating systems of all network clients printing to this
printer.
8. Click OK.
For Windows Server 2008:
1. Click Start
Control Panel
Printers.
2. Right-click the printer icon and select Sharing.
3. Check the Share this printer check box, and then type a name in the Share name text box.
4. Click Additional Drivers and select the operating systems of all network clients printing to this
printer.
5. Click OK.
1.
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
The PCL driver supports an Additional Driver for Windows Vista (not including Itanium). To register the
Additional Driver, follow the instructions below.
1. Click Start
Control Panel
Hardware and Sound
Printers.
2. Right-click the printer's icon and select Sharing.
3. Click the Change sharing options button.
4. Click the Continue button.
5. Click Additional Drivers and select the processors of all the network clients printing with this printer.
6. Click OK.
7. Click the Browse button and locate the driver in the Drivers and Utilities CD
To check that the multifunction printer was successfully shared:
Ensure the printer object in the Printers and Faxes (Printers for Windows 2000) folder shows it is
shared. For example, in Windows 2000, a hand is shown underneath the printer icon.
Browse My Network Places (Network Neighborhood for Windows 2000). Find the host name of
the server and look for the shared name you assigned to the multifunction printer.
Now that the multifunction printer is shared, you can install the multifunction printer on network clients
using the point and print method or the peer-to-peer method.
Point and Print
This method is usually the best use of system resources. The server handles driver modifications and print
job processing. This lets network clients return to their programs much faster.
If you use the point and print method, a subset of driver information is copied from the server to the client
computer. This is just enough information to send a print job to the multifunction printer.
1. On the Windows desktop of the client computer, double-click My Network Places (Network
Neighborhood for Windows 2000).
2. Locate the host name of the server computer, and then double-click the host name.
3. Right-click the shared printer name, and then click Install.
Wait for the driver information to copy from the server computer to the client computer, and for a new
printer object to be added to the Printers and Faxes (Printers for Windows 2000) folder. The
time this takes varies, based on network traffic and other factors.
Close My Network Places (Network Neighborhood for Windows 2000).
4. Print a test page to verify print installation.
5. Click Start Settings Printers and Faxes (Printers for Windows 2000).
6.
7.
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
4.
5.
6. Select the multifunction printer you just created.
7. Click File
Properties.
8. From the General tab, click Print Test Page (Print a Test Page for Windows 2000).
When a test page prints successfully, printer installation is complete.
For Windows Vista and Windows Server 2008:
1. On the Windows desktop of the client computer, click Start
Network.
2. Locate the host name of the server computer, and then double-click the host name.
3. Right-click the shared printer name, and then click Connect.
4. Click Install driver.
5. Click Continue in the User Account Control dialog box (You can skip this step in Windows Server
2008).
6. Wait for the driver information to copy from the server computer to the client computer, and for a new
printer object to be added to the Printers dialog box. The time this takes varies, based on network
traffic and other factors.
7. Print a test page to verify printer driver installation.
8. Click Start Control Panel
for Windows Server 2008).
Hardware and Sound
Printers (Start
Control Panel
Printers
9. Right-click the printer you just created and select Properties.
10. From the General tab, click Print Test Page.
If the test page prints successfully, the printer driver installation is complete.
Peer-to-Peer
If you use the peer-to-peer method, the printer driver is fully installed on each client computer. Network
clients retain control of driver modifications. The client computer handles the print job processing.
1. Click Start Settings Printers and Faxes (Printers for Windows 2000).
2. Click Add Printer to launch the Add Printer wizard.
3. Click Next (Network Print Server for Windows 2000).
4. Select A network printer or a printer attached to another computer, and then click Next (For
Windows 2000, select the network printer from the Shared printers list). If the multifunction printer
is not listed, type in the path of the multifunction printer in the text box.
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
4.
For example: \\<server host name>\<shared printer name>
The server host name is the name of the server computer that identifies it to the network. The shared
printer name is the name assigned during the server installation process.
5. Click Browse for a printer, and then click Yes (For Windows 2000, click OK).
If this is a new printer, you may be prompted to install a printer driver. If no system driver is available,
then you will need to provide a path to available drivers.
6. Select whether you want this multifunction printer to be the default printer for the client, click Next,
and then click Finish (For Windows 2000, click Finish).
7. Print a test page to verify printer installation:
a. Click Start Settings Printers and Faxes (Printers for Windows 2000).
b. Select the multifunction printer you just created.
c. Click File
Properties.
d. From the General tab, click Print Test Page (Print a Test Page for Windows 2000).
When a test page prints successfully, printer installation is complete.
For Windows Vista and Window Server 2008
1. Click Start Control Panel
for Windows Server 2008).
Hardware and Sound
Printers (Start
Control Panel
Printers
2. Click Add a printer to launch the Add Printer wizard.
3. Select Add a network, wireless or Bluetooth printer, and then click Next. If the printer is listed,
select the printer and click Next, or select The printer that I want isn't listed and type in the path
of the printer in the Select a shared printer by name text box and click Next.
For example: \\<server host name>\<shared printer name>
The server host name is the name of the server computer that identifies it to the network. The shared
printer name is the name assigned to the printer during the server installation process.
4. If this is a new printer, you may be prompted to install a printer driver. If no system driver is available,
then you will need to provide a path to available drivers.
5. Select whether you want this printer to be the default printer for the client, click Next.
6. If you want to the verify printer driver installation then click Print a test page.
7. Click Finish.
Setting Up a Network-connected Printer
You must set up the network protocols on the multifunction printer to use it as your network printer. Setting
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
protocols can be accomplished by using the supplied network program.
You can configure the basic network parameters through the multifunction printer's operator panel. Use the
printer operator panel to do the following:
Print a Network Configuration Page
Configure TCP/IP
Configuring Network Parameters on the Operator Panel
Item
Requirements
Network Interface
10/100 Base-TX
Network Operating System
Windows 98/Me, NT 4.0/2000/XP/Vista/Server 2003/Server 2008
Network Protocols
· TCP/IP on Windows
· Port9100 on Windows 2000//XP/Vista/Server 2003/Server 2008
Dynamic Addressing Server · DHCP
· BOOTP
Printing a Network Configuration Page
The Network Configuration page shows how the network interface card on your multifunction printer is
configured. The default settings are suitable for most applications.
1. Press
until >SETUP appears, and then press
.
2. Press
until >Admin Menu appears, and then press
3. Press
until >Admin Reports appears, and then press
4. Press
until >Server Address appears, and then press
.
.
.
The Network Configuration page prints out.
Setting Network Protocols
When you first install the multifunction printer, all supported network protocols are enabled when you power
the multifunction printer on. If a network protocol is enabled, the multifunction printer may actively transmit
1.
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
on the network even when the protocol is not in use. This may slightly increase network traffic. To eliminate
unnecessary traffic, you can disable unused protocols.
1. Press
until >SETUP appears, and then press
.
2. Press
until >Admin Menu appears, and then press
3. Press
until >Wired Net or >Wireless Net appears, and then press
4. Press
until >Protocol appears, and then press
5. Press
to select the desired settings, and then press
.
.
.
.
Port9100
FTP
SNMP UDP
E-Mail Alert
EWS
Configuring TCP/IP
Static Addressing: TCP/IP address is assigned manually by the system administrator.
Dynamic Addressing BOOTP/DHCP(default): TCP/IP address is assigned automatically by a DHCP or
BOOTP server on your network.
Static Addressing
To enter the TCP/IP address from your multifunction printer's operator panel, take the following steps:
1. Press
until >SETUP appears, and then press
2. Press
until >Admin Menu appears, and then press
3. Press
until >Wired Net or >Wireless Net appears, and then press
4. Press
until >TCP/IP appears, and then press
5. Press
until >IP Address appears, and then press
An IP address consists of 4 bytes.
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
.
.
.
.
.
IP Address
* 0. 0. 0. 0.
Enter a number between 0 and 255 for each octet.
6. Enter the numbers from the keypad, and then press
to move between octets and press
.
7. Repeat 5 to complete the address from the 1st byte to the 4th byte.
8. Repeat 5 through step 8 to configure the other TCP/IP parameters.
Dynamic Addressing (BOOTP/DHCP)
To assign the TCP/IP address automatically using a DHCP or BOOTP server on your network, take the
following steps:
1. Press
until >SETUP appears, and then press
.
2. Press
until >Admin Menu appears, and then press
3. Press
until >Wired Net or >Wireless Net appears, and then press
4. Press
until >TCP/IP appears, and then press
5. Press
until >DHCP or >BOOTP appears, and then press
.
.
.
.
Restoring the Network Configuration
You can return the network configuration to its default settings.
1. Press
until >SETUP appears, and then press
2. Press
until >Admin Menu appears, and then press
3. Press
until >Wired Net or >Wireless Net appears, and then press
4. Press
until >Initialize NVM appears, and then press
5. Press
to select Yes, and then press
The network configuration is restored.
6.
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
.
.
.
.
.
6. Power the multifunction printer off and back on or reset the network interface card.
Resetting the Network Interface Card
You can reset the network interface card when a network problems occurs.
1. Press
until >SETUP appears, and then press
2. Press
until >Admin Menu appears, and then press
3. Press
until >Wired Net appears, and then press
4. Press
until >Initialize NVM appears, and then press
5. Press
to select Yes, and then press
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
.
.
.
.
.
Understanding Fonts
Typefaces and fonts
Bitmapped and Scalable Fonts
Resident Fonts
Symbol Sets
Typefaces and fonts
A font is a set of characters and symbols created with a distinct design. The distinct design is called a
typeface. The typefaces you select add personality to a document. Well-chosen typefaces make a document
easier to read.
The multifunction printer has numerous resident fonts in PCL 5/PCL 6 and Adobe PostScript 3. See "Resident
Fonts" for a listing of all resident fonts.
Weight and style
Typefaces are often available in different weights and styles. These variations modify the original typeface so
you can, for example, emphasize important words in text or highlight book titles. The different weights and
styles are designed to complement the original typeface.
Weight refers to the thickness of the lines that form the characters. Thicker lines result in darker characters.
Some words commonly used to describe the weight of a typeface are bold, medium, light, black, and heavy.
Style refers to other typeface modifications, such as tilt or character width. Italic and oblique are styles
where the characters are tilted. Narrow, condensed, and extended are three common styles that modify the
character widths.
Some fonts combine several weight and style modifications; for example, Helvetica Narrow Bold Oblique. A
group of several weight and style variations of a single typeface is called a typeface family. Most typeface
families have four variations: regular, italic (oblique), bold, and bold italic (bold oblique). Some families have
more variations, as the following illustration for the Helvetica typeface family shows:
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Pitch and Point Size
The size of a font is specified as either a pitch or point size, depending on whether the font is fixed space or
proportional.
In fixed space fonts, each character has the same width. Pitch is used to specify the size of fixed space fonts.
It is a measure of the number of characters that will print in one horizontal inch of type. For example, all 10pitch fonts print 10 characters per inch (cpi) and all 12-pitch fonts print 12 cpi:
In proportional (or typographic) fonts, every character can have a different width. Since proportional fonts
have characters with different widths, the font size is specified in point size, not pitch. Point size refers to the
height of the characters in the font. A point is defined as 1/72 inch. The characters in a font printed at 24
point will be twice as large as the characters in the same font printed at 12 point.
The following illustration shows samples of a font printed in different point sizes:
The point size of a font is defined as the distance from the top of the tallest character in the font to the
bottom of the lowest character in the font. Due to the definition of point size, different fonts printed at the
same point size may appear quite different in size. This is because there are other font parameters that
affect how the font looks. However, the point size of a font is an excellent specification of the relative size of
a font. The following examples illustrate two very different proportional fonts at 14 point:
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Bitmapped and Scalable Fonts
The multifunction printer uses both bitmapped and scalable fonts.
Bitmapped fonts are stored in print memory as predefined patterns of bits that represent a typeface at a
specific size, style, and resolution. The following illustration shows an example of a character from a
bitmapped font.
Bitmapped fonts are available in different type styles and point sizes as downloadable fonts.
Scalable fonts (also called outline fonts) are stored as computer programs that define the outlines of the
characters in the font. Each time you print characters from a scalable font, the multifunction printer creates a
bitmap of the characters at the point size you choose and saves it temporarily in print memory.
These temporary bitmapped fonts are deleted when you turn off or reset the multifunction printer. Scalable
fonts provide the flexibility of printing in many different point sizes.
Your multifunction printer uses different scalable font formats for downloading fonts to the multifunction
printer. PCL 5/PCL 6 uses Intellifont and TrueType scalable fonts. Adobe PostScript 3 uses Type 1 and
TrueType scalable fonts. There are thousands of different scalable fonts available in these different font
formats from numerous font suppliers.
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
If you plan to use many downloadable bitmapped or scalable fonts or if you plan to use many different sizes
of scalable fonts, you may need to purchase additional memory for your multifunction printer.
Resident Fonts
Your multifunction printer is equipped with resident fonts stored permanently in print memory. Different
fonts are available in PCL 5/PCL 6 and Adobe PostScript 3. Some of the most popular typefaces, like Courier
and TimesNew (PCL 5/PCL 6)/Times New Roman (Adobe PostScript 3), are available for all printer languages.
The following table lists all the fonts resident in your multifunction printer. See "Printing a Font Sample List"
for instructions on how to print samples of the fonts. You can select the resident fonts from your software
program. You can also select the fonts from the operator panel if you are using PCL 5.
Resident scalable fonts
PCL 5/PCL 6
PostScript 3
CG Times
Albertus
CG Times It
Albertus Italic
CG Times Bd
Albertus Light
CG Times BdIt
Antique Olive Roman
Univers Md
Antique Olive Italic
Univers MdIt
Antique Olive Bold
Univers Bd
Antique Olive Compact
Univers BdIt
Apple Chancery
Univers MdCd
Arial
Univers MdCdIt
Arial Italic
Univers BdCd
Arial Bold
Univers BdCdIt
Arial Bold Italic
ITC Avant Garde Gothic Book
AntiqueOlv
ITC Avant Garde Gothic Book Oblique
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
AntiqueOlv It
ITC Avant Garde Gothic Demi
AntiqueOlv Bd
ITC AvantGarde Gothic Demi Oblique
Bodoni Roman
CG Omega
Bodoni Italic
CG Omega It
Bodoni Bold
CG Omega Bd
Bodoni Bold Italic
CG Omega BdIt
Bodoni Poster
Bodoni Poster Compressed
Garamond Antiqua ITC Bookman Light
Garamond Krsv
ITC Bookman Light Italic
Garamond Hlb
ITC Bookman Demi
Garamond KrsvHlb ITC Bookman Demi Italic
Carta
Courier
Chicago
Courier It
Clarendon Roman
Courier Bd
Clarendon Bold
Courier BdIt
Clarendon Light
Cooper Black
LetterGothic
Cooper Black Italic
LetterGothic It
Cooper Gothic 32BC
LetterGothic Bd
Cooper Gothic 33BC
Coronet
Albertus Md
Courier
Albertus XBd
Courier Oblique
Courier Bold
Clarendon Cd
Courier Bold Oblique
Eurostile Medium
Coronet
Eurostile Bold
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Eurostile Extended No. 2
Marigold
Eurostile Bold Extended No. 2
Geneva
Arial
Gill Sans
Arial It
Gill Sans Italic
Arial Bd
Gill Sans Bold
Arial BdIt
Gill Sans Bold Italic
Gill Sans Light
TimesNew
Gill Sans Light Italic
TimesNew It
Gill Sans Extra Bold
TimesNew Bd
Gill Sans Condensed
TimesNew BdIt
Gill Sans Condensed Bold
Goudy Oldstyle
Symbol
Goudy Oldstyle Italic
Goudy Bold
Wingdings
Goudy Bold Italic
Goudy Extra Bold
Line Printer
Helvetica
Helvetica Oblique
Times Roman
Helvetica Bold
Times It
Helvetica Bold Oblique
Times Bd
Helvetica Narrow
Times BdIt
Helvetica Narrow Oblique
Helvetica Narrow Bold
Helvetica
Helvetica Narrow Bold Oblique
Helvetica Ob
Helvetica Condensed
Helvetica Bd
Helvetica Condensed Oblique
Helvetica BdOb
Helvetica Condensed Bold
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Helvetica Condensed Bold Oblique
CourierPS
Hoefler Text
CourierPS Ob
Hoefler Text Italic
CourierPS Bd
Hoefler Text Black
CourierPS BdOb
Hoefler Text Black Italic
Hoefler Ornaments
SymbolPS
Joanna
Joanna Italic
Palatino Roman
Joanna Bold
Palatino It
Joanna Bold Italic
Palatino Bd
Letter Gothic
Palatino BdIt
Letter Gothic Slanted
Letter Gothic Bold
ITCBookman Lt
Letter Gothic Bold Slanted
ITCBookman LtIt
ITC Lubalin Graph Book
ITCBookmanDm
ITC Lubalin Graph Book Oblique
ITCBookmanDm It ITC Lubalin Graph Demi
ITC Lubalin Graph Demi Oblique
HelveticaNr
Marigold
HelveticaNr Ob
Monaco
HelveticaNr Bd
ITC Mona Lisa Recut
HelveticaNr BdOb
New Century Schoolbook Roman
New Century Schoolbook Italic
N C Schbk Roman
New Century Schoolbook Bold
N C Schbk It
New Century Schoolbook Bold Italic
N C Schbk Bd
NewYork
N C Schbk BdIt
Optima Roman
Optima Italic
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
ITC A G Go Bk
Optima Bold
ITC A G Go BkOb
Optima Bold Italic
ITC A G Go Dm
Oxford
ITC A G Go DmOb
Palatino Roman
Palatino Italic
ZapfC MdIt
Palatino Bold
Palatino Bold Italic
ZapfDingbats
Stempel Garamond Roman
Stempel Garamond Italic
Stempel Garamond Bold
Stempel Garamond Bold Italic
Symbol
Tekton Regular
Times Roman
Times Italic
Times Bold
Times Bold Italic
Times New Roman
Times New Roman Italic
Times New Roman Bold
Times New Roman Bold Italic
Univers 45 Light
Univers 45 Light Oblique
Univers 55
Univers 55 Oblique
Univers 65 Bold
Univers 65 Bold Oblique
Univers 57 Condensed
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Univers 57 Condensed Oblique
Univers 67 Condensed Bold
Univers 67 Condensed Bold Oblique
Univers 53 Extended
Univers 53 Extended Oblique
Univers 63 Extended Bold
Univers 63 Extended Bold Oblique
Wingdings
ITC Zapf Chancery Medium Italic
ITC Zapf Dingbats
Symbol Sets
A symbol set is the collection of alphabetic and numeric characters, punctuation, and special characters
available in the font you select. Symbol sets support the requirements for different languages or specific
applications, such as math symbols used for scientific text.
In PCL 5/PCL 6, a symbol set also defines which character will print for each key on the keyboard (or more
specifically, for each code point). Some applications require different characters at some code points. To
support multiple applications and languages, your multifunction printer has 36 symbol sets for the resident
PCL 5/PCL 6 fonts.
Symbol Sets for PCL 5/PCL 6
Not all font names support all of the symbol sets listed.
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Roman 8 (Default)
ISO 8859-1 Latin 1
ISO 8859-2 Latin 2
ISO 8859-9 Latin 5
ISO 8859-10 Latin 6
PC-8
PC-8 DN
PC-775 Baltic
PC-850 Multilingual
PC-852 Latin 2
PC-1004 OS/2
PC Turkish
Windows 3.1 Latin 1 Windows 3.1 Latin 2
Windows 3.1 Latin 5
DeskTop
PS Text
MC Text
Microsoft Publishing
Math 8
PS Math
Pi Font
Legal
ISO 4 United Kingdom
ISO 6 ASCII
ISO 11 Swedish:names ISO 15 Italian
ISO 17 Spanish
ISO 21 German
ISO 60 Norwegian v1
ISO 69 French
Windows 3.0 Latin 1
Windows Baltic
Symbol
Wingdings
ITC ZapfDingbats MS
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Understanding Multifunction Printer Messages
The printer operator panel displays messages describing the current state of the multifunction printer and
indicates possible printer problems you must resolve. This topic provides a list of all printer messages,
explains what they mean, and tells you how to clear the messages.
1 LCD Panel
6
2
7
(Start) button
(Back) button
3
buttons
4
8
(Cancel) button
9
(Menu) button
5
buttons
Message
button
10
Number pad
(Pause) button
What this message means
NOTE: The first
and second lines
are displayed
together. The
third and forth
lines blink every
second.
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
What you can do
NNN-NNN
Restart Printer
Contact Support
IfMessageReturns
Error NNN-NNN relates to
printer problems.
Turn off the multifunction printer, and then on.
If this does not solve the problem, contact Dell.
NNN-NNN
Restart Printer
Reseat Fuser
Contact Support
The outer levers on both sides
of the fuser unit are not
securely locked.
Confirm that the outer levers on both sides of
the fuser unit are securely locked. If this does
not solve the problem, contact Dell.
Error NNN-NNN relates to
printer problems.
See "Contacting Dell" in the Owner's Manual or
in this manual.
016-316
Restart Printer
Reseat Memory
Contact Support
The multifunction printer
detected an unsupported
additional memory module in
the memory slot.
Remove the additional memory module. If this
does not solve the problem, contact Dell.
016-318
Restart Printer
Reseat Memory
Contact Support
The additional memory module
Remove the additional memory module from
is not fully inserted into the slot. the slot, and then reattach it firmly. If this does
not solve the problem, contact Dell.
016-340
Restart Printer
Contact Support
IfMessageReturns
A communication error occurred
in the control card.
016-330
Restart Printer
Reseat MPC
Contact Support
A communication card error
occurred between the network
interface card and control card.
See "Contacting Dell" in the Owner's Manual or
in this manual.
See "Contacting Dell" in the Owner's Manual or
in this manual.
See "Contacting Dell" in the Owner's Manual or
in this manual.
Turn the multifunction printer off and then on.
If this does not solve the problem, contact Dell.
See "Contacting Dell" in the Owner's Manual or
in this manual.
Turn off the multifunction printer to re-install
the multi-protocol card, and then turn the
multifunction printer back on again. If this does
not solve the problem, contact Dell.
See "Contacting Dell" in the Owner's Manual or
in this manual.
016-338
Restart Printer
Reseat Wireless
Contact Support
An error occurred in the wireless Turn the multifunction printer off and then on.
printer adapter.
Ensure the following:
· The wireless printer adapter is securely
inserted into the slot on the controller card.
· Unauthorized USB devices are not used.
If this does not solve the problem, contact Dell.
See "Contacting Dell" in the Owner's Manual or
in this manual.
NNN-NNN
Restart Printer
Reseat XXX
Contact Support
XXX is not fully inserted.
Paper Jam
077-901
Open Front Cover
Remove Paper
The multifunction printer detects Clear the paper path.
a paper jam.
When "Reg Cover" appears in XXX, the
XXX and YYY indicates a position procedure to remove print media is different
depending on whether the duplexer is attached
that you open.
or not.
Error NNN-NNN relates to
See "Clearing Jams".
printer problems.
Error NNN-NNN relates to
printer problems.
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Confirm that the unit is securely inserted. If
this does not solve the problem, contact Dell.
See "Contacting Dell" in the Owner's Manual or
in this manual.
Paper Jam
077-907
Open Front Cover &
Belt Unit
Remove Paper
Error NNN-NNN relates to
printer problems.
or not.
See "Clearing Jams".
Paper Jam
NNN-NNN
Open XXX
Open YYY
Paper Jam
077-903
Remove Paper
Open & close Front
Cover
The multifunction printer detects Pull out the specified tray and clear the paper
a paper jam. N indicates the
path.
tray number.
See "Clearing Jams".
Insert PrintCart
NNN-NNN
Insert
XXX Cartridge
The specified print cartridge is
either missing or not fully
inserted into the multifunction
printer.
Reinsert the specified print cartridge.
See "Replacing Print Cartridges".
XXX is one of the following:
· Black
· Cyan
· Yellow
· Magenta
Error NNN-NNN relates to
printer problems.
Replace Cart.
NNN-NNN
Replace
XXX Cartridge
Error XXX Cart.
093-NNN
Check XXX Cart.
Contact Support
Close FrontCover
077-300
Front Cover
Is Open
The print cartridge is low on
toner.
XXX is one of the following:
· Black
· Cyan
· Yellow
· Magenta
Remove the specified print cartridge and install
a new one.
NOTE: If you do not replace the print
cartridge, print quality problems may
occur. Order a new print cartridge at the
website (www.dell.com/supplies or
www.euro.dell.com/supplies).
Error NNN-NNN relates to
printer problems.
See "Replacing Print Cartridges".
The density of the print
cartridge is not enough.
Confirm that the toner seal is removed from the
specified print cartridge and the cartridge is
installed correctly. If this does not solve the
problem, contact Dell.
XXX is one of the following:
· Yellow Print
· Cyan Print
· Magenta Print
· Black Print
Printer cover is open.
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
See "Replacing Print Cartridges".
See "Contacting Dell" in the Owner's Manual or
in this manual.
Close the specified cover.
Load XXX
NNN-NNN
YYY
yyy
Incorrect paper size is loaded in
the specified tray.
Load the specified paper in the specified trays.
See "Loading Print Media in Standard and
XXX indicates the number of the Optional Trays".
tray or multipurpose feeder.
YYY indicates a paper size.
yyy indicates paper quality.
Error NNN-NNN relates to
printer problems.
Error relating to PDL emulation
problems occurs.
· Press
to clear the message, cancel the
current print job, and conduct the next print
job, if any.
· Press Cancel to cancel the print job.
When the configuration of the
multifunction printer on the
printer driver does not conform
to the multifunction printer you
are using, this message
appears.
· Press Cancel to cancel the print job.
Over Heat
042-700
Cooling down
Please Wait...
Since it is abnormally hot inside
the multifunction printer,
printing is paused.
Wait for a while with the multifunction printer
on until the error disappears.
Memory Full
017-970
FaxJob Failure
The fax memory is full and
cannot continue processing the
current fax job.
· Press
to clear the message.
· The fax memory is full and fax job is
terminated. Print the received images, or
wait for a while until sending images is
completed.
The fax memory is full and
cannot continue processing the
current fax job.
· Press
to clear the message.
· The fax memory is full. Remove the received
images, or wait for a while until sending
images is completed.
PDL Request
016-720
Data Violation
Press
Invalid Job
016-799
Data Violation
Press
Press
Memory Full
033-788
Fax Job Failure
Press
Accumulation Limit
Not Stored
For Last Sheet
Press
No Answer
035-701
Fax Job Failure
Exceeds the maximum sheets of · Press
to clear the message.
paper at a time when you send
· The maximum sheets of paper at a time are
a fax.
loaded.
· Load up to 50 sheets of paper at a time.
No answer is received from the
remote machine.
(T1 timeout on sending data)
Press
Communication
035-702
Fax Job Failure
· Press
to clear the message, cancel the
current print job, and conduct the next print
job, if any.
· Ensure that the printer configuration on the
printer driver conforms to the multifunction
printer you are using.
The communication was shut by
the remote machine.
(Received DCN)
Press
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
· Press
to clear the message.
· No answer is received from the remote
machine. Check the status of the remote
machine.
· Press
to clear the message.
· The communication was shut by the remote
machine. Check the status of the remote
machine.
No Answer
035-718
Fax Job Failure
No answer is received from the
remote machine.
(T1 timeout on receiving data)
Press
· Press
to clear the message.
· No answer is received from the remote
machine. Check the status of the remote
machine.
The remote machine cannot
receive data.
· Press
to clear the message.
· The remote machine cannot receive data.
Check the features of the remote machine.
Cannot detect a dial tone before
dialing the number.
· Press
to clear the message.
· A dial tone cannot be detected. Check the
communication line.
The busy tone was detected
after dialing the number.
· Press
The remote machine does not
respond after dialing the
number.
· Press
to clear the message.
· The remote machine does not respond. Check
the status of the remote machine.
The fax memory is full and the
communication was
disconnected.
· Press
to clear the message.
· The fax memory is full and the communication
was disconnected. Print the received images,
or wait for a while until sending images is
completed.
Paper Jam
005-121
Open ADF Cover and
Clear Jam
Paper jam is detected in the
ADF.
Remove the jammed paper.
Paper Jam
005-110
Open ADF Cover and
Clear Jam
Paper jam is detected in the
ADF.
Remove the jammed paper.
Cover Open
005-301
Close ADF Cover
The cover of the ADF is open.
Close the cover of the ADF.
Memory Full
033-503
Fax Job Failure
The fax memory is full.
· Press
to clear the message.
· The fax memory is full. Print the received
images, or wait for a while until sending
images is completed.
Communication
035-720
Fax Job Failure
Press
No Dial Tone
035-746
Fax Job Failure
Press
Busy
035-781
Fax Job Failure
to clear the message.
· The busy tone was detected. Wait for a while
and redial the number.
Press
No Dial Tone
035-749
Fax Job Failure
Press
Communication
033-513
Fax Job Failure
Press
Press
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
SMB/FTP Error
016-781
Scan
Cannot connect the server to
which you transfer files.
· Press
to clear the message.
· Ensure settings for the server address are
correct. If the server address is correct,
contact your network administrator for the
network and server environments.
An error occurred when you
connect the SMTP server.
· Press
The MPC firmware of this
version does not support Scan
To EMail and SMB/FTP.
· Press
to clear the message.
· Upgrade the MPC firmware.
Cannot log in the server to
which you transfer files.
· Press
to clear the message.
· Ensure the server name, login user name, and
password are correct.
Press
SMTP Error
016-764
Scan
Press
Network Error
016-770
Scan
to clear the message.
· Ensure the settings for the SMTP server are
correct. If the settings are correct, contact
your SMTP server administrator.
Press
Login Error
016-782
Scan
Press
SMB/FTP Error
016-783
Scan
Cannot find the specified path of · Press
to clear the message.
the server to which you transfer
· Ensure the specified server path name and
files.
access right to the folder are correct.
Press
SMB/FTP Error
016-787
Scan
Cannot create a directory.
· Press
to clear the message.
· Check you have the right to create a
directory.
An error occurred when you
transfer data to the server.
· Press
to clear the message.
· Ensure the directory in the server is not full or
you have the access right to the directory.
Cannot transfer the file.
· Press
to clear the message.
· Ensure you have the right to rename/delete
files.
· Ensure SP1 is already installed in the Windows
Server 2003. If it is not installed, install SP1.
Files of the same name exist.
· Press
Press
SMB/FTP Error
016-784
Scan
Press
SMB/FTP Error
016-789
Scan
Press
SMB/FTP Error
016-788
Scan
Press
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
to clear the message.
016-788
Scan
Press
Network Error
016-786
Scan
NOTE: This incident
occurs when you scan
data in the format of pdf
and YYMMDDHHMMSS
from the remote machine
and 10000 numbers of
files
(img-YYMMDDHHMMSS,
img-YYMMDDHHMMSS0001.pdf, ... imgYYMMDDHHMMSS9999.pdf) exist on the
server. This also occurs
when you create other
multiple page files.
A time-out error occurred when
you send or receive scanned
data.
· Press
to clear the message.
· Ensure the network cable is not disconnected.
If the network cable is connected correctly,
contact your server administrator.
Cannot transfer files because
the hard disk on the FTP/SMB
server is full.
· Press
to clear the message.
· Delete unnecessary data in the hard disk to
ensure a free space.
The SMTP server is full.
· Press
to clear the message.
· Contact your SMTP server administrator.
The e-mail address of the
destination is not correct.
· Press
to clear the message.
· Check the e-mail address, and then scan data
again.
The e-mail address of the
sender is not correct.
· Press
to clear the message.
· Check the e-mail address, and then scan data
again.
Cannot log in the SMTP server
to which you send e-mail.
· Press
to clear the message.
· Ensure the user name and password used in
the SMTP server are correct.
There are unspecified settings.
· Press
to clear the message.
· Ensure the SMTP server or POP3 server is
already specified from the Dell Printer
Configuration Web Tool.
Press
Server Full
016-785
Scan
· If files of the same name already exist,
overwrite existing files, or save them as new
names.
· Delete existing files of the same name.
Press
SMTP Server Full
016-765
Scan
Press
Address Error
016-767
Scan
Press
From Address Error
016-768
Scan
Press
SMTP Login Error
016-507
Scan
Press
SMTP Login Error
016-506
Scan
Press
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Press
Cannot log in the POP3 server to · Press
to clear the message.
which you send e-mail.
· Ensure the settings for the SMTP server or
POP3 server are correct from the Dell Printer
Configuration Web Tool.
SMTP Error
016-503
Scan
Cannot resolve the name of the
SMTP server to which you send
e-mail.
· Press
to clear the message.
· Ensure the settings for the SMTP server are
correct from the Dell Printer Configuration
Web Tool.
· Ensure the settings for the DNS server are
correct.
Cannot resolve the name of the
POP3 server to which you send
e-mail.
· Press
to clear the message.
· Ensure that the settings for the POP3 server
are correct from the Dell Printer
Configuration Web Tool.
· Ensure the settings for the DNS server are
correct.
An error occurred in the SMTP
server.
· Press
to clear the message.
· Contact your SMTP server administrator.
The settings for the network
environment required for
scanning are not prepared.
· Press
to clear the message.
· Ensure the network cable is not disconnected.
If the network cable is connected correctly,
retry to log in the network.
After you convert data to the
specified format, the size of
data exceeds the maximum
specified in each format.
· Press
to clear the message.
· Reduce the image quality, for example,
change the scan resolution, or change the file
format to reduce the file size.
The size of e-mail specified in
Menu exceeds the maximum.
· Press
to clear the message.
· Reduce the image quality, for example,
change the scan resolution, or change the file
format to reduce the file size.
The connection to the host
computer is timed out and Scan
To Application cannot start.
· Press
to clear the message.
· Ensure your computer starts up and the USB
cable is connected securely.
· Ensure the required software is installed. For
details, see "Scanning".
POP login Error
016-505
Scan
Press
POP Error
016-504
Scan
Press
SMTP Error
016-766
Scan
Press
Network Not Ready
016-790
Scan
Press
File size limits
016-986
Scan
Press
Mail Size Limits
016-985
Scan
Press
PCScan Time Out
017-988
Scan Job Failure
Press
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Clearing Jams
Careful selection of appropriate print media and proper loading allow you to avoid most jams. See "Print
Media Guidelines" for more information.
Avoiding Jams
Identifying the Location of Paper Jams
Removing Print Jams from the ADF
Removing Print Jams From the Multipurpose Feeder
Removing Print Jams From the Standard Tray
Removing Print Jams From the Fuser Unit
Removing Print Jams From the Optional Duplexer
Removing Print Jams From the Optional Feeder
NOTE: Before buying large quantities of any print media, Dell recommends trying a sample first.
Avoiding Jams
Use only recommended print media. See "Print Media Guidelines" for more information.
See "Loading Print Media in Standard and Optional Trays" and "Loading the Multipurpose Feeder" to
load printer media properly.
Do not overload the print media sources. Ensure the stack print media height does not exceed the
maximum height indicated by the load line labels in the trays.
Do not load wrinkled, creased, damp, or curled print media.
Flex, fan, and straighten print media before you load it. If a jam occurs with print media, try feeding
one sheet at a time through the multipurpose feeder.
Do not use print media that you have cut or trimmed yourself.
Do not mix print media sizes, weights, or types in the same print media source.
Ensure the recommended print side is face up when you insert the print media. However, the
recommended print side should be face down when using the multipurpose feeder.
Keep print media stored in an acceptable environment. For more information, see "Storing Print
Media".
Do not remove the feeding tray during a print job.
Push all trays in firmly after loading them.
Ensure all cables that connect to the multifunction printer are correctly attached.
Overtightening the guides may cause jams.
Wipe the feeder rollers in the trays or multipurpose feeder with a cloth that is slightly dampened with
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
water if jams caused by misfeeding paper occur frequently.
Identifying the Location of Paper Jams
The following illustration shows where paper jams may occur along the print media path.
CAUTION: Do not attempt to clear any jams using tools or instruments. This may
permanently damage the multifunction printer.
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
1 Front cover
2 Fuser unit
3 Standard 250-sheet tray
4 Multipurpose feeder
5 Optional 550-sheet paper feeder
6 Optional duplexer
7 Automatic Document Feeder (ADF)
Removing Print Jams from the ADF
When a document jams while it passes through the Automatic Document Feeder (ADF), remove jams in the
following procedure.
NOTE: To prevent document jams, use the document feeder glass for thick, thin or mixed documents.
1. Remove the remaining documents from the ADF.
If the document is jammed in the paper feed area:
a. Open the ADF cover.
b. Remove the document by gently pulling it straight up.
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
If you find it difficult to pull the document, turn the dial behind the cover.
a. Close the ADF cover. Then reload the document into the ADF.
If the document is jammed in the paper exit area:
a. Open the document cover and turn the dial to remove the misfed documents from the ADF
output tray.
b. Close the document cover. Then load the documents back into the ADF.
2. If you cannot see the paper or the paper does not move when you pulled, open the document cover.
3. Remove the document from the roller or the feed area by carefully pulling it gently to the right.
4. Close the document cover. Then load the documents back into the ADF.
Removing Print Jams From the Multipurpose Feeder
NOTICE: To protect the drums of the print cartridges against bright light, close the front cover within
five minutes. If the front cover remains open for more than five minutes, print quality may
deteriorate.
1.
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
NOTE: To resolve the error displayed on the operator panel, you must clear all print media from the
print media path.
1. Pull the jammed paper out of the multipurpose feeder. If no jammed paper can be found or it is hard to
remove the paper, close the multipurpose feeder and go to the next step to remove the jammed paper
from the inside of the multifunction printer.
2. Remove the 250-sheet tray from the multifunction printer, and then pull out the jammed paper
remaining inside the multifunction printer. If no jammed paper can be found or it is hard to remove the
paper, go to the next step to remove the jammed paper from the inside of the multifunction printer.
3.
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
3. Open the front cover by pushing the button (right side) and remove the jammed paper. Then, confirm
that there are no scraps of paper remaining inside the multifunction printer.
4. Insert the tray back into the multifunction printer, and push until it stops.
5. Open and close the front cover.
Removing Print Jams From the Standard Tray
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
NOTICE: To protect the drums of the print cartridges against bright light, close the front cover within
five minutes. If the front cover remains open for more than five minutes, print quality may
deteriorate.
NOTE: To resolve the error displayed on the operator panel, you must clear all print media from the
print media path.
1. Pull the tray out of the multifunction printer until it stops. Hold the tray with both hands, lift the front
slightly, and remove it from the multifunction printer.
2. Remove all the jammed and/or creased paper from the tray.
3. Pull the jammed paper out carefully to avoid tearing it. If it is still hard to remove the paper, go to the
next step to remove the jammed paper from the inside of the multifunction printer.
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
4. Open the front cover by pushing the button (right side) and remove the jammed paper. Then, confirm
that there are no scraps of paper remaining inside the multifunction printer.
5. Close the front cover.
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
6. Insert the tray into the multifunction printer, and push until it stops.
CAUTION: Do not use excessive force on the tray. Doing so could damage the tray or the
inside of the multifunction printer.
Removing Print Jams From the Fuser Unit
NOTICE: Ensure nothing touches or scratches the surface (black-colored film) of the transfer belt
unit. Scratches, dirt, or oil from your hands on the film of the transfer belt unit may reduce print
quality.
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
NOTICE: To protect the drums of the print cartridges against bright light, close the front cover within
five minutes. If the front cover remains open for more than five minutes, print quality may
deteriorate.
NOTE: To resolve the error displayed on the operator panel, you must clear all print media from the
print media path.
1. Turn off the multifunction printer and wait for 30 minutes.
2. Push the button (right side) and open the front cover.
3. Lift the levers at both ends of the fuser unit, and remove the jammed paper. If any jammed paper
cannot be found, go to the next step.
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
CAUTION: The fuser unit is hot. Do not touch it, doing so may cause burns.
4. Open the cover of the fuser unit and remove the jammed paper.
5. Close the cover of the fuser unit and press down the levers at both ends of the fuser unit.
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
6. Confirm that there are no scraps of paper remaining inside the multifunction printer, and then close the
front cover.
Removing Print Jams From the Optional Duplexer
NOTICE: Ensure nothing touches or scratches the surface (black-colored film) of the transfer belt
unit. Scratches, dirt, or oil from your hands on the film of the transfer belt unit may reduce print
quality.
NOTICE: To protect the drums of the print cartridges against bright light, close the front cover within
five minutes. If the front cover remains open for more than five minutes, print quality may
deteriorate.
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
NOTE: To resolve the error displayed on the operator panel, you must clear all print media from the
print media path.
1. Push the button (right side) and open the front cover.
2. Pull out the jammed paper from the duplexer. If jammed paper cannot be found, go to the next step.
3. Pull up on the belt release levers and rotate the transfer belt unit up as shown in the illustration.
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
4. Remove the jammed paper and close the transfer belt unit.
5. Close the front cover.
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Removing Print Jams From the Optional Feeder
NOTICE: To protect the drums of the print cartridges against bright light, close the front cover within
five minutes. If the front cover remains open for more than five minutes, print quality may
deteriorate.
NOTE: To resolve the error displayed on the operator panel, you must clear all print media from the
print media path.
1. Pull the tray out of the multifunction printer until it stops. Hold the tray with both hands, lift the front
slightly, and remove it from the multifunction printer.
NOTE: Paper in the optional 550-sheet paper feeder feeds to the multifunction printer from the front
of the 250-sheet tray, therefore paper jammed in the 250-sheet tray can block the optional tray
module in the multifunction printer, preventing you from opening them. Look for the jammed paper
sequentially, starting with the optional 550-sheet paper feeder.
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
2. Remove all jammed and/or creased paper from the tray.
3. Pull the jammed paper out carefully to avoid tearing it. If it is still hard to remove the paper, go to the
next step to remove the jammed paper from the inside of the multifunction printer.
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
4. Open the front cover by pushing the button (right side) and remove the jammed paper. Then, confirm
that there are no scraps of paper remaining inside the multifunction printer.
5. Close the front cover.
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
NOTE: If the paper jam message is not cleared after closing the front cover, pull out the 250-sheet
tray from the multifunction printer and remove the jammed paper.
6. Insert the tray back into the multifunction printer, and push until it stops.
CAUTION: Do not use excessive force on the tray. Doing so could damage the tray or the
inside of the multifunction printer.
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting Guide
This section consists of the following instructions:
1. Configuration of your printer instructions:
A. User Settings
Setup Menus
Setup printing Letter Plain from Multipurpose Feeder
Setup printing Letter Plain from Tray1
Setup printing Letter Plain from Tray2
Setup printing Letter Transparency from Multipurpose Feeder
Setup printing Envelope from Multipurpose Feeder
Setup Paper Size
Setup Paper Type
B. Configuration
Parallel Printing
USB Printing
Setup Network
Setup Security
2. Troubleshooting Instructions:
Diagnostic Menu Map (Customer Mode)
Testing "Print Quality"
Testing "TonerPalletCheck" or "ContaminationChk"
3. Other Problems:
How to replace Print cartridges
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
How to replace the Fuser Unit
How to replace Rollers
Removing the Used Transfer Belt Unit
The section will help you solve problems with the multifunction printer, options, or print quality.
Troubleshooting Guide
Basic Printer Problems
Display Problems
Printing Problems
Print Quality Problems
Copy Problems
Fax Problems
Scanning Problems
Option Problems
Other Problems
Contacting Service
Troubleshooting Guide
Installing Printer Drivers
Basic Printer Problems
Some printer problems can be easy to resolve. If a problem occurs with your multifunction printer, check
each the following:
If a message displays on the operator panel, see "Understanding Multifunction Printer Messages."
The printer power cable is plugged into the multifunction printer and a properly grounded electrical
outlet.
The printer power is on.
The electrical outlet is not turned off at any switch or breaker.
Other electrical equipment plugged into the outlet is working.
All options are properly installed.
If you have checked all of the above and still have a problem, turn off the multifunction printer, wait
for 10 seconds, and then turn on the multifunction printer. This often fixes the problem.
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
NOTICE: If an error message appears, see "Understanding Multifunction Printer Messages."
Display Problems
Problem
Action
Operator panel displays only
diamonds or is blank.
· Turn off the multifunction printer, wait for 10 seconds, and turn on
the multifunction printer.
· Self Test Message appears on the operator panel. When the test is
completed, Print is displayed.
Menu settings changed from the
operator panel have no effect.
Settings in the software program, the printer driver, or the printer
utilities are overriding the settings made on the operator panel.
· Change the menu settings from the printer driver, the printer
utilities, or the software program instead of the operator panel.
Printing Problems
Problem
Action
Job did not print or incorrect
characters printed.
Ensure Print appears on the operator panel before you send a job to
print. Press Menu to return to Print.
Ensure print media is loaded in the multifunction printer. Press Menu to
return to Print.
Verify the multifunction printer is using the correct page description
language (PDL).
Verify that you are using the correct printer driver.
Ensure you are using the correct Ethernet, USB, IEEE cable, or wireless
printer adapter and that it is securely connected to the multifunction
printer.
Verify that the correct print media size is selected.
If using a print spooler, verify that the spooler has not stalled.
Check the printer interface from the Admin Menu menu.
Determine the host interface you are using. Print a Panel Settings page
to verify that the current interface settings are correct.
Print media misfeeds
or multiple feeds occur.
Ensure the print media you are using meets the specifications for your
multifunction printer. See "Print Media Supported" for more information.
Flex print media before loading it in any of the sources.
Ensure the print media is loaded correctly.
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Ensure the width and length guides on the print media sources are
adjusted correctly.
Do not overfill the print media sources.
Do not force print media into the multipurpose feeder when you load it;
otherwise, it may skew or buckle.
Remove any curled print media from sources.
Load the recommended print side correctly for the type of print media
you are using. See "Loading Print Media in Standard and Optional Trays"
for more information.
Turn the print media over or around and try printing again to see if
feeding improves.
Do not mix print media types.
Do not mix reams of print media.
Remove the top and bottom sheets of a ream before loading the print
media.
Load a print media source only when it is empty.
Wipe the feeder rollers in the trays or multipurpose feeder with a cloth
that slightly dampened with water.
Envelope misfeeds or multiple
feeds occur.
Reduce the number of envelopes in the stack.
Page breaks in unexpected
places.
Check the Time-Out in the System Settings menu. Increase the setting.
Job prints from the wrong
source or on the wrong print
media.
Check the Paper Type in the Tray Settings menu on the printer operator
panel and in the printer driver.
Print media does not stack
neatly in the output bin.
Turn the print media stack over in the tray or multipurpose feeder.
Multifunction printer does not
duplex pages.
Ensure 2 Sided is selected in both the PCL (Printer Control Language)
menu on the printer operator panel and in the printer driver.
Ensure you have enough print memory installed.
Print Quality Problems
Problem
Action
Print is too light.
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Print is too light.
· The print cartridges may be low or need to be replaced. Confirm the amount of
toner in each print cartridge and replace it with a new one if necessary.
· Set the Toner Saving Mode check box to off in the Advanced tab in the
printer driver.
· If you are printing on an uneven print surface, change the Paper Type settings
in the Tray Settings menu. See "System Settings."
· Verify that the correct print media is being used.
Toner smears or print
comes off page.
· If you are printing on an uneven print surface, change the Paper Type settings
in the Tray Settings menu. See "System Settings".
· Verify that the print media is within the printer specifications.
· The fuser unit is old or damaged. Replace the fuser unit. See "Replacing the
Fuser Unit".
Toner spots appear on
the page/printing is
blurred.
· Check the print cartridges to ensure that they are installed correctly.
· Change the print cartridges. See "Replacing Print Cartridges".
Entire page is white.
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Entire page is white.
· Ensure the packaging material is removed from the print cartridges.
· Check the print cartridges to ensure that they are installed correctly.
· The print cartridges may be low or need to be replaced. Confirm the amount of
toner in each print cartridge and replace it with a new one if necessary. See
"Replacing Print Cartridges".
Streaks appear on the
page.
· The print cartridges may be low or need to be replaced. Confirm the amount of
toner in each print cartridge and replace it with a new one if necessary. See
"Replacing Print Cartridges".
· If you are using preprinted forms, ensure that the media can withstand a
temperature of 190 °C (374 °F).
Characters have jagged
or uneven edges.
· Select On for Bitmap Text Smoothing in the Advanced tab in the printer
properties dialog box.
· If you are using downloaded fonts, verify that the fonts are supported by the
multifunction printer, the host computer, and the software program.
Part or all of the page
prints in black.
· Check the print cartridges to ensure that they are installed correctly.
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
The job prints, but the
top and side margins are
incorrect.
· Ensure the margins are set correctly in your software program.
Printing on both ends of
the transparencies is
faded.
· This occurs when the multifunction printer is operating in a location where
relative humidity reaches 85% or more. Adjust the humidity or relocate the
multifunction printer to an appropriate environment.
Color registration is out
of alignment.
· Print the color registration chart and adjust the color registration from the
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
of alignment.
Colored dots are printed
at regular intervals.
operator panel by using the chart. See "Color Reg Adjust" for more details.
· Replace the print cartridge that prints the dots with a new one.
Partial blanks, creased
· Condensation inside the multifunction printer causes partial blanks or creased
paper or blotted printing.
paper. Keep the multifunction printer turned on and leave it more than one
hour to get rid of the condensation. In winter, keep the multifunction printer
turned on to prevent condensation from forming. In this case, you can reduce
power consumption by using the energy-saving mode. If the problems still
occur, contact Dell. See "Contacting Dell" in the Owner's Manual or in this
manual.
· This occurs when you print on talc paper or acid paper. Use neutralized paper.
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Vertical blanks
· A print cartridge is damaged. Replace the print cartridge with a new one.
Copy Problems
Problem
Action
A document loaded in the Automatic Document Feeder (ADF)
cannot be copied.
· Set the Auto Fit mode to Off on the
operator panel.
Fax Problems
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Problem
Action
The multifunction printer is not
working, there is no display and the
buttons are not working.
· Unplug the power cord and plug it in again.
· Ensure that there is power to the electrical receptacle.
No dial tone sounds.
· Check that the phone line is connected properly. See
"Connecting the Telephone Line".
· Check that the phone socket in the wall is working by plugging in
another phone.
The numbers stored in the memory do
not dial correctly.
· Ensure that the numbers are stored in the memory correctly.
· Print a Phone Book list.
The document does not feed into the
multifunction printer.
· Ensure that the document is not wrinkled and you are putting it
in correctly. Check that the document is the right size, not too
thick or thin.
· Ensure that the Automatic Document Feeder (ADF) cover is
firmly closed.
Faxes are not received automatically.
· The FAX mode should be selected.
· Ensure that there is paper in the paper tray.
· Check to see if the display shows "Memory Full".
The multifunction printer does not
send.
· Ensure that the document is loaded in the ADF or on the
document feeder glass.
· "Sending" should show up on the display.
· Check the other fax machine you are sending to, to see if it can
receive your fax.
The incoming fax has blank spaces or
is received in poor-quality.
·
·
·
·
Some of the words on an incoming fax
are stretched.
The fax machine sending you the fax had a temporary document
jam.
There are lines on the documents you
send.
Check your scan glass for marks and clean it. See "Cleaning the
scanner".
The multifunction printer dials a
number, but the connection with
another fax machine fails.
The other fax machine may be turned off, out of paper, or cannot
answer incoming calls. Speak with the other machine operator and
ask her/him to sort out the problem.
Documents are not stored in the
memory.
There may not be enough memory to store the document. If the
display shows a "Memory Full" message, delete any documents
you no longer need from the memory and then restore the
document.
Blank areas appear at the bottom of
each page or on other pages, with a
small strip of text at the top.
You may have chosen the wrong paper settings in the user option
setting. See "Print Media Guidelines".
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
The fax machine sending you the fax may be faulty.
A noisy phone line can cause line errors.
Check your multifunction printer by making a copy.
The print cartridge may be empty. Replace the print cartridge,
referring to "Replacing a Print Cartridge".
Scanning Problems
Problem
Action
The scanner does not work.
· Ensure that you place the document to be scanned face down
from the document feeder glass, or face up in the ADF.
· There may not be enough available memory to hold the
document you want to scan. Try the Prescan function to see if
that works. Try lowering the scan resolution rate.
· Check that the USB cable is connected properly.
· Ensure that the USB cable is not defective. Switch the cable
with a known good cable. If necessary, replace the cable.
· Check that the scanner is configured correctly. Check the
application you want to use to make certain that the scanner
job is being sent to the correct port.
The unit scans very slowly.
· Check if the multifunction printer is printing received data.
Scan the document after the current job is completed.
· Graphics are scanned more slowly than text.
· Communication speed becomes slow in scan mode because of
the large amount of memory required to analyze and
reproduce the scanned image.
Message appears on your computer
screen:
· "Device can't be set to the H/W
mode you want."
· "Port is being used by another
program."
· "Port is Disabled."
· "Scanner is busy receiving or
printing data. When the current
job is completed, try again."
· "Invalid handle."
· "Scanning has failed."
· There may be a copying or printing job in progress. When the
current job is complete, try the job again.
· The Selected port is currently being used. Restart your
computer and try again.
· The printer cable may be improperly connected or the power
may be off.
· The scanner driver is not installed or an operating environment
is not set up properly.
· Ensure that the port is properly connected and the power is
turned on. Then restart your computer.
· Check that the USB cable is properly connected.
Cannot scan using WIA on a Windows
Server 2003 computer.
Enable WIA on the computer.
To enable WIA:
1. Click Start, point to Administrative Tools, and then click
Services.
2. Right-click Windows Image Acquisition (WIA), and
then click Start.
Cannot scan using TWAIN or WIA on a
Windows Server 2008 computer.
Install the Desktop Experience feature on the computer.
To install Desktop Experience:
1. Click Start, point to Administrative Tools, and then click
Server Manager.
2. Under Features Summary, click Add Features.
3. Select the Desktop Experience check box, click Next,
and then click Install.
4. Restart the computer.
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
3.
4.
Option Problems
If an option does not operate correctly following installation or stops working:
Turn off the multifunction printer, wait for 10 seconds, and then turn on the multifunction printer. If
this does not fix the problem, unplug the multifunction printer, and check the connection between the
option and the multifunction printer.
Print the system settings page to see if the option is listed in the Installed Options list. If the option is
not listed, reinstall it. See "Printing a System Settings Page".
Ensure the option is selected in the printer driver you are using.
The following table lists printer options and corrective actions for related problems. If the suggested
corrective action does not correct the problem, call customer service.
Problem
Action
Optional tray
· Ensure the optional 550-sheet paper feeder is correctly connected to the multifunction
printer. Reinstall the feeder. See "Removing the Optional 550-Sheet Paper Feeder" and
"Installing the Optional 550-Sheet Paper Feeder".
· Ensure the print media is loaded correctly. See "Loading Print Media in Standard and
Optional Trays" for more information.
Duplexer
· Ensure the duplexer is correctly installed. Reinstall the duplexer. See "Removing the
Optional Duplexer" and "Installing a Duplexer".
Memory card
· Ensure the memory card is securely connected to the printer system board.
Multi-protocol
card
· Ensure the card is securely inserted to the correct slot.
· Ensure you are using the correct card.
Wireless
printer
adapter
· Ensure that the wireless printer adapter is securely connected to the multi-protocol card.
Other Problems
Problem
Action
Condensation has
occurred inside the
multifunction printer.
· This usually occurs within several hours after you heat the room in winter. This
also occurs when the multifunction printer is operating in a location where
relative humidity reaches 85% or more. Adjust the humidity or relocate the
multifunction printer to an appropriate environment.
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Contacting Service
When you call for printer service, be prepared to describe the problem you are experiencing or the error
message on the display.
You need to know your printer model type and serial number. See the label on the back of the multifunction
printer near the controller card for this information.
Troubleshooting Guide
Configuration of your printer instructions
User Settings
Setup Menus
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
* Only displayed when an optional 550-sheet paper feeder is installed on the multifunction printer.
Setup printing Letter Plain from Multipurpose Feeder
1. On the printer operator menu, press
until >SETUP appears, and then press
2. Press
until >Tray Settings appears, and then press
3. Press
until >MPF appears, and then press
4.
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
.
.
.
2.
3.
4. Press
until >Paper Type appears, and then press
5. Press
or
until Plain appears, and then press
.
.
6. Now we have the MPF Type set to Plain.
7. Press Back to return to the previous menu.
8. Press
until >Paper Size appears, and then press
.
9. Press
or
.
until Letter appears, and then press
10. Now we have the MPF Size set to Letter.
11. Now insert the Letter-sized stack of paper into the MPF.
12. On the screen MPF/Letter will appear.
13. Press
to save this setting.
14. Now on the screen MPF/Plain will appear.
15. Press
to save this setting.
16. We now have all the hardware settings on the multifunction printer correct
Now, all software settings screen shots are from WORD, this was done in Word 2003. However if in any
application, you go File Print and then click the Properties button, you will get this same driver properties
window.
17. Open up Word and create a new document.
18. Go to File
Print.
19. Select the Dell MFP Laser 3115cn from the printers list.
20. Click the Preferences button.
21. This brings up Printing Preferences.
22. Click the Paper/Output tab.
23. Select Paper Size to Letter.
24. Select Paper Source to MPF.
25. Select MPF Paper Type to Plain.
26. Click OK.
27. Now the printer driver is setup correctly.
28. Click Pint.
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
27.
28.
Setup printing Letter Plain from Tray1
1. On the printer operator menu, press
until >SETUP appears, and then press
2. Press
until >Tray Settings appears, and then press
3. Press
until >Tray 1 appears, and then press
4. Press
until >Paper Type appears, and then press
5. Press
or
.
.
.
.
until Plain appears, and then press
.
6. Now we have the Tray1 Type set to Plain.
7. Press Back to return to the previous menu.
8. Press
until >Paper Size appears, and then press
9. Press
or
until Auto appears, and then press
.
.
10. Now we have the Tray1 Size set to Letter.
11. Now insert the Letter-sized stack of paper into the Tray 1.
12. On the screen Tray 1/Letter will appear.
13. Press
to save this setting.
14. Now on the screen Tray 1/Plain will appear.
15. Press
to save this setting.
16. We now have all the hardware settings on the multifunction printer correct.
Now, all software settings screen shots are from WORD, this was done in Word 2003. However if in any
application, you go File Print and then click the Properties button, you will get this same driver properties
window.
17. Open up Word and create a new document.
18. Go to File
Print.
19. Select the Dell MFP Laser 3115cn from the printers list.
20. Click the Preferences button.
21. This brings up Printing Preferences.
22. Click the Paper/Output tab.
23.
24.
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
22.
23. Select Paper Size to Letter.
24. Select Paper Source to Tray 1.
25. Click OK.
26. Now the printer driver is setup correctly.
27. Click Pint.
Setup printing Letter Plain from Tray2
1. On the printer operator menu, press
until >SETUP appears, and then press
2. Press
until >Tray Settings appears, and then press
3. Press
until >Tray 2 appears, and then press
4. Press
until >Paper Type appears, and then press
5. Press
or
.
.
.
.
until Plain appears, and then press
.
6. Now we have the Tray2 Type set to Plain.
7. Press Back to return to the previous menu.
8. Press
until >Paper Size appears, and then press
9. Press
or
until Auto appears, and then press
.
.
10. Now we have the Tray2 Size set to Letter.
11. Now insert the Letter-sized stack of paper into the Tray 2.
12. On the screen Tray 2/Letter will appear.
13. Press
to save this setting.
14. Now on the screen Tray 2/Plain will appear.
15. Press
to save this setting.
16. We now have all the hardware settings on the multifunction printer correct
Now, all software settings screen shots are from WORD, this was done in Word 2003. However if in any
application, you go File Print and then click the Properties button, you will get this same driver properties
window.
17. Open up Word and create a new document.
18. Go to File
Print.
19.
20.
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
17.
18.
19. Select the Dell MFP Laser 3115cn from the printers list.
20. Click the Preferences button.
21. This brings up Printing Preferences.
22. Click the Paper/Output tab.
23. Select Paper Size to Letter.
24. Select Paper Source to Tray 2.
25. Click OK.
26. Now the printer driver is setup correctly.
27. Click Pint.
Setup printing Letter Transparency from Multipurpose Feeder
1. On the printer operator menu, press
until >SETUP appears, and then press
2. Press
until >Tray Settings appears, and then press
3. Press
until >MPF appears, and then press
4. Press
until >Paper Type appears, and then press
5. Press
or
.
.
.
until Transparency appears, and then press
.
6. Now we have the MPF Type set to Transparency.
7. Press Back to return to the previous menu.
8. Press
until >Paper Size appears, and then press
.
9. Press
or
.
until Letter appears, and then press
10. Now we have the MPF Size set to Letter.
11. Now insert the Letter-sized stack of paper into the MPF.
12. On the screen MPF/Letter will appear.
13. Press
to save this setting.
14. Now on the screen MPF/Transparency will appear.
15. Press
to save this setting.
16. We now have all the hardware settings on the multifunction printer correct
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
.
16.
Now, all software settings screen shots are from WORD, this was done in Word 2003. However if in any
application, you go File Print and then click the Properties button, you will get this same driver properties
window.
17. Open up Word and create a new document.
18. Go to File
Print.
19. Select the Dell MFP Laser 3115cn from the printers list.
20. Click the Preferences button.
21. This brings up Printing Preferences.
22. Click the Paper/Output tab.
23. Select Paper Size to Letter.
24. Select Paper Source to MPF.
25. Select MPF Paper Type to Transparency.
26. Click OK.
27. Now the printer driver is setup correctly.
28. Click Pint.
Setup printing Envelope from Multipurpose Feeder
1. On the printer operator menu, press
until >SETUP appears, and then press
2. Press
until >Tray Settings appears, and then press
3. Press
until >MPF appears, and then press
4. Press
until >Paper Type appears, and then press
5. Press
or
.
.
.
until Envelope appears, and then press
.
6. Now we have the MPF Type set to Envelope.
7. Press Back to return to the previous menu.
8. Press
until >Paper Size appears, and then press
9. Press
or
until Envelope appears, and then press
.
.
10. Now we have the MPF Size set to Envelope.
11. Now insert the Envelope-sized stack of paper into the MPF.
12. On the screen MPF/Envelope will appear.
13.
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
.
11.
12.
13. Press
to save this setting.
14. Now on the screen MPF/Envelope will appear.
15. Press
to save this setting.
16. We now have all the hardware settings on the multifunction printer correct
Now, all software settings screen shots are from WORD, this was done in Word 2003. However if in any
application, you go File Print and then click the Properties button, you will get this same driver properties
window.
17. Open up Word and create a new document.
18. Go to File
Print.
19. Select the Dell MFP Laser 3115cn from the printers list.
20. Click the Preferences button.
21. This brings up Printing Preferences.
22. Click the Paper/Output tab.
23. Select MPF Paper Type to Envelope.
24. Select Paper Source to MPF.
25. Select Paper Size to Envelope.
26. Click OK.
27. Now the printer driver is setup correctly.
28. Click Pint.
Setup Paper Size
1. On the printer operator menu, press
until >SETUP appears, and then press
2. Press
until >Tray Settings appears, and then press
3. Press
until the appropriate paper source (MPF) appears, and then press
4. Press
until >Paper Type appears, and then press
5. Press
or
.
.
.
.
until the appropriate paper type (Plain) appears, and then press
6. Now we have the MPF Type set to Plain.
7. Press Back to return to the previous menu.
8.
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
.
6.
7.
8. Press
until >Paper Size appears, and then press
9. Press
or
.
until the appropriate paper size (Letter) appears, and then press
.
10. Now we have the MPF Size set to Letter.
11. Now insert the Letter-sized stack of paper into the MPF.
12. On the screen MPF/Letter will appear.
13. Press
to save this setting.
14. Now on the screen MPF/Plain will appear.
15. Press
to save this setting.
16. We now have all the hardware settings on the multifunction printer correct.
Now, all software settings screen shots are from WORD, this was done in Word 2003. However if in any
application, you go File Print and then click the Properties button, you will get this same driver properties
window.
17. Open up Word and create a new document.
18. Go to File
Print.
19. Select the Dell MFP Laser 3115cn from the printers list.
20. Click the Preferences button.
21. This brings up Printing Preferences.
22. Click the Paper/Output tab.
23. Select Paper Size to Letter.
24. Select Paper Source to MPF.
25. Select Paper Type to Plain.
26. Click OK.
Setup Paper Type
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Paper type
Weight (gsm)
Remarks
Plain
60-80
-
Plain Thick
81-105
-
Covers
106-163
-
Covers Thick
164-216
-
Coated
106-163
Inkjet Printer paper cannot be used.
Coated Thick
164-216
Inkjet Printer paper cannot be used.
Transparency -
Inkjet Printer paper cannot be used.
Label
-
Inkjet Printer paper cannot be used.
Envelopes
-
-
Configuration
Parallel Printing
A local printer is a printer attached to your computer or a print server using a USB or parallel cable. If your
multifunction printer is attached to a network and not your computer, see "Setup Network".
Installing Printer Drivers
When you install the printer driver, also install the fax driver.
After the printer driver has been installed, you need to specify the Installable Options settings in the printer
properties dialog box according to the options you have installed.
Microsoft® Windows Vista®
1. Insert the Drivers and Utilities CD into your computer.
NOTE: Click Continue when the User Account Control dialog box appears.
2. Click Personal Installation.
3. Connect your printer to your computer.
At this point, Plug and Play is activate automatically and installs the printer. If the Plug and Play is not
activate, click Install.
4.
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
When the Plug and Play is complete, the Installation goes to the next step automatically.
4. Select either the Typical Installation or Custom Installation radio button, and then click Next. If
you select Custom Installation, you can select the specific software you want to install.
5. When the Congratulations! screen appears, click Print Test Page if necessary. Click Finish.
Windows® XP, Windows XP 64-bit Edition, Windows Server ®
2003, Windows Server 2003 64-bit Edition, Windows Server ®
2008, Windows Server 2008 64-bit Edition, and Windows
2000
1. Connect the multifunction printer to your computer with a USB cable or a parallel cable. Then, turn on
the multifunction printer.
2. When the Found New Hardware Wizard dialog box appears, click Cancel.
3. Insert the Drivers and Utilities CD into your computer to launch the installation software.
NOTE: If the CD does not automatically launch, click Start Run, and then type D:\setup.exe (where
D is the drive letter of your CD), and then click OK.
4. Select Personal Installation, and then click Next.
5. Click Install.
6. When the Found New Hardware Wizard dialog box appears, follow the on-screen instructions to
install the printer driver on your computer.
7. When the Completing the Found New Hardware Wizard dialog box appears, click Finish.
8. Select either Typical Installation or Custom Installation from the installation wizard, and then click
Install. If you select Custom Installation, you can select the specific software you want to install.
9. Click Finish to exit the wizard when the Congratulations! screen appears. If necessary, click Print Test
Page to print a test page.
Windows NT ® 4.0
1. Connect the multifunction printer to your computer with a parallel cable. Then, turn on the
multifunction printer.
2. Insert the Drivers and Utilities CD into your computer.
3. Select Personal Installation, and then click Next.
4. On the Add Printer screen, select the port name from the Port Name combo box, and then set the
printer's options under Printer Configuration. Then, click Next.
5.
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
4.
5. Select either Typical Installation or Custom Installation from the installation wizard, and then click
Install. If you select Custom Installation, you can select the specific software you want to install.
6. The Adobe License Agreement appears, click to accept the agreement and then click Install.
7. Click Finish to exit the wizard when the Congratulations! screen appears.
USB Printing
A local printer is a printer attached to your computer or a print server using a USB or parallel cable. If your
multifunction printer is attached to a network and not your computer, see "Setup Network".
Setup Network
NOTE: To use this multifunction printer in a UNIX or Linux environment, you need to install a UX Filter
or Linux Driver. For more information on how to install and use these, refer to your User's Guide.
NOTE: When using a CD drive in a Linux environment, you need to mount the CD according to your
system environment. The command strings are mount/media/cdrom.
Disable Microsoft ® Windows® XP, Windows Vista®, Windows
Server® 2003 (after SP1) , or Windows Server ® 2008 Firewall
Before Printer Software Installation
NOTE: This step may not be necessary if you have Windows XP Service Pack 2 installed.
If your multifunction printer is connected directly to a network and the built-in operating system firewall is
enabled, you cannot view your networked printer(s) when you run the Dell™ printer installation software. To
prevent this situation, disable the built-in operating system firewall before you install the Dell printer
software. To disable or enable your built-in operating system firewall, perform the following steps:
NOTICE: Dell recommends that you enable your built-in operating system firewall after you install
the printer software. Enabling the built-in operating system firewall after you install the printer
software does not limit the use of your network printer.
1. Click the Start button and click Help and Support.
2. In the Search box, type firewall and then click the green arrow.
3. In the Pick a Task list, click Enable or disable Internet Connection Firewall and then follow the
instructions on the screen.
Print and Check the System Settings Page
1. Print the System Settings page.
a.
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
1.
a. Press
until >SETUP appears, and then press
b. Press
until >Reports appears, and then press
c. System Settings is displayed. Press
.
.
.
The system settings page is printed.
2. Under the TCP/IP heading, verify the IP address.
If the IP address is 0.0.0.0, wait for a few minutes to resolve the IP address automatically, and then
print the System Settings page again.
Printer Setup
NOTE: When you use IPv6 Mode for network printing, you cannot install the printer driver from the
Drivers and Utilities CD. Use the Add Printer wizard in Windows Vista. For details, see "Printing With
Web Services for Devices (WSD)" in the User's Guide.
1. Insert the Drivers and Utilities CD into your computer to launch the installation software.
NOTE: If the CD does not automatically launch, click Start Run, and then type D:\setup.exe (where
D is the drive letter of your CD), and then click OK.
NOTE: For Windows Vista, click Continue when the User Account Control dialog box appears.
2. Select Network Installation, and then click Next.
3. Select Configure New Wired Printer, or Install Driver and Software for existing network
printer, and then click Next.
4. For local installation, select Local Installation, and then click Next.
For remote installation:
a. Select Remote Installation, and then click Next.
NOTE: Remote installation between Windows NT and the following operating systems is not
supported.
- Windows XP Professional x64 Edition
- Windows Server 2003 x64 Edition
- Windows Server 2008 x64 Edition
- Windows Vista
- Windows Vista x64
NOTE: Installation on Windows XP Home Edition, Windows Vista Home Basic, Windows Vista Home
Premium, Windows Vista x64 Home Basic, and Windows Vista x64 Home Premium is not supported.
b.
c.
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
b. Enter the computer name, user ID, and password. Then, click Add.
c. Click Next.
5. Select the multifunction printer you want to install from the printer list, and then click Next. If the
target printer is not displayed on the list, click Update to refresh the list or click Add Printer to add a
multifunction printer to the list manually. You may specify the IP address and port name at this point.
If you have installed this multifunction printer on the server computer, select the I am setting up this
printer on a server check box.
NOTE: When using AutoIP, 0.0.0.0 is displayed in the installer. Before you can continue, you must
enter a valid IP address.
6. Specify the printer settings, and then click Next.
a. Enter the printer name.
b. If you want other users on the network to access this multifunction printer, select Share this
printer with other computers on the network, and then enter a share name that users will
easily identify.
c. If you want to set a multifunction printer as the default, select the Set this printer as default
check box.
d. If you want to restrict color printing, select the appropriate Dell ColorTrack option. Enter the
password when Color-Password Enabled is selected for Dell ColorTrack.
e. If the postscript driver is available and you want to install it, select the PostScript Driver check
box.
7. Select the software and documentation you want to install, and then click Next. You can specify
folders in which to install the Dell software and documentation. To change the folders, click Browser.
8. If the Adobe license agreement screen appears, click to accept the agreement and then click Install.
9. Click Finish to exit the wizard when the Congratulations! screen appears. If necessary, click Print
Test Page to print a test page.
Use the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool to monitor the status of your network printer without leaving
your desk. You can view and/or change the printer configuration settings, monitor toner level, and when it is
time to order replacement consumables, just click the Dell supplies link right from your Web browser.
NOTE: The Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool is not available when the multifunction printer is
locally attached to a computer or a print server.
To launch the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool, type the network printer IP address in your Web browser,
and the printer configuration appears on the screen. Refer to your User's Guide for more information.
You can set up the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool to send you an email when the multifunction printer
needs supplies or intervention.
1.
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
To set up e-mail alerts:
1. Launch the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool.
2. Click E-Mail Alert link.
3. Under Setup E-Mail Lists and Alerts, enter the Primary SMTP Gateway, the Reply Address, and enter
your email address or the key operator's email address in the email list box.
4. Click Apply New Settings.
NOTE: The SMTP server will display Connection in Progress until an error occurs.
Determining the Wireless Network Settings
You need to know the settings for the wireless network to set up the wireless printer. For details of the
settings, contact your network administrator.
Wireless
Settings
Security
Settings
SSID
Specifies the name that identifies the wireless network. Up to 32
alphanumeric characters.
Network
Type
Specifies the network type from Ad-hoc or Infrastructure.
Security
Selects the security method from No security, WEP, WPA-PSK TKIP and WPAPSK AES.
Transmit
Key
Specifies the transmit key from the list.
WEP Key
Specified the WEP key set used through the wireless network only when WEP
is selected for Security.
Pass
Phrase
Specifies the pass phrase of alphanumeric characters from 8 to 63 bytes
long only when WPA-PSK is selected for Encryption.
NOTE: To set WPA2-PSK as security, select WPA-PSK AES.
Wireless Installation using USB connection
NOTE: The optional multi-protocol card with the Wireless LAN Adapter attached must be installed on
the multifunction printer.
Step 1. Install a multifunction printer to the already-operating wireless
network (When wireless setting is already set to your computer)
1. Insert the Drivers and Utilities CD into your computer.
2. The Drivers and Utilities CD should launch the installation software automatically.
If the CD does not automatically launch, click Start Run, type D:\Setup.exe (where D is the drive
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
2.
letter of your CD), and then click OK.
NOTE: For Windows Vista, click Continue when the User Account Control dialog box appears.
3. Select the Network Installation option button, and then click Next.
4. Select the Configure Wireless Printer using a USB connection (Recommended) option button,
and then click Next.
5. Reset the wireless setting of the multifunction printer following the steps on the Reset Wireless
Setting screen.
6. In the list displayed on the Select Printer screen, check the check box of the target printer that you
are making wireless setting for, and then click Next. On the Enter Wireless Network Settings
screen, set each wireless setting item, and then click Next. When you select the Fixed IP option
button for IP Address assignment, click Change... and enter the IP address and subnet mask on the
screen.
NOTE: When you enter a fixed IP address, avoid the "169.254.xxx.xxx" address used by AutoIP.
7. Set each item on the Enter Printer Settings screen, and then click Next.
8. On the Printer Software screen, specify the software that you want to install and installation path,
and then click Next. At this point, the wireless setting specified on the Enter Wireless Network
Settings screen is sent to the multifunction printer.
9. On the Wireless configuration is now complete screen, click Next. Since the wireless setting is
already made to your computer, no operation is necessary on this screen.
10. On the Setting-Ready Printer screen, verify that the correct IP address is assigned to the
multifunction printer to which the wireless setting is set, and then click Install.
NOTE: If your system has any of the following operating systems:
- Windows XP x64
- Windows Server® 2003 x64
- Windows Server® 2008 x64
- Windows Vista x64
- Windows Vista x86
,skip step 11 and go to step 12.
11. If you select the I am setting up this printer on a server check box on the Select Printer screen
and also select the PostScript Driver check box on the Enter Printer Settings screen, the Adobe
Systems Inc. License Agreement screen appears. Select the I accept the terms of the license
agreement option button, and then click Install.
12. On the Congratulations! screen, click Finish to complete the installation. A test page will be printed
with the installed printer by clicking the Print Test Page button.
Step 2. Construct new wireless network environment for both computer
and multifunction printer (When wireless setting needs to be set to your
computer)
1.
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
1. Insert the Drivers and Utilities CD into your computer.
2. The Drivers and Utilities CD should launch the installation software automatically.
If the CD does not automatically launch, click Start Run, type D:\Setup.exe (where D is the drive
letter of your CD), and then click OK.
NOTE: For Windows Vista, click Continue when the User Account Control dialog box appears.
3. Select the Network Installation option button, and then click Next.
4. Select the Configure Wireless Printer using a USB connection (Recommended) option button,
and then click Next.
5. Reset the wireless setting of the multifunction printer following the steps on the Reset Wireless
Setting screen.
6. In the list on the Select Printer screen, check the check box of the target printer that you are making
wireless setting for, and then click Next.
NOTE: When you enter a fixed IP address, avoid the "169.254.xxx.xxx" address used by AutoIP.
7. On the Enter Wireless Network Settings screen, set each wireless setting item, and then click
Next. When you select the Fixed IP option button for IP Address assignment, click Change... and
enter the IP address and subnet mask on the screen.
8. Set each item on the Enter Printer Settings screen, and then click Next.
9. On the Printer Software screen, specify the software that you want to install and installation path,
and then click Next. At this point, the wireless setting specified on the Enter Wireless Network
Settings screen is sent to the multifunction printer.
10. On the Wireless configuration is now complete screen, create the wireless setting sent to the
multifunction printer on your computer following the steps below, and then click Next.
For Windows XP and Windows Server 2003:
a. Select Network Connections from Control Panel.
b. Right-click Wireless Network Connection and select Properties.
c. Select the Wireless Network tab.
d. Ensure that the check box for Use Windows to configure my wireless network settings is
checked.
e. Click Advanced.
f. Do either of the following:
When wireless ad-hoc mode is set to the multifunction printer:
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Select Computer to Computer (ad hoc) networks only and close the Advanced dialog box.
When wireless infrastructure mode is set to the multifunction printer:
Select Access point (Infrastructure) networks only and close the Advanced dialog box.
g. Click Add to display Wireless network properties.
h. Enter the setting that you send to the multifunction printer and click OK.
i. Click Move up to move the setting to the top of the list.
j. Click OK to close the Property dialog box.
For Windows Vista:
a. Open Control Panel.
b. Select Network and Internet.
c. Select Network and Sharing Center.
d. Select Connect to a network.
e. Select the setting you send to the multifunction from the network items listed in
Connect to a network.
f. Select Connect Anyway in the warning dialog box indication indicating you are entering an
unsecured area.
g. Click Close in the dialog box after confirming the connection is a success.
For Windows Server 2008:
a. Open Control Panel.
b. Select Network and Sharing Center.
c. Select Connect to a network.
d. Select the setting you send to the printer from the network items listed in Connect to a
network.
e. Select Connect Anyway in the warning dialog box indication indicating you are entering an
unsecured area.
f. Click Close in the dialog box after confirming the connection is a success.
11. On the Setting-Ready Printer screen, verify that the correct IP address is assigned to the
multifunction printer to which the wireless setting is set, and then click Install.
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
11.
NOTE: If your system has any of the following operating systems:
- Windows XP x64
- Windows Server® 2003 x64
- Windows Server® 2008 x64
- Windows Vista x64
- Windows Vista x86
,skip step 12 and go to step 13.
12. If you select the I am setting up this printer on a server check box on the Select Printer screen
and also select the PostScript Driver check box on the Enter Printer Settings screen, the Adobe
Systems Inc. License Agreement screen appears. Select the I accept the terms of the license
agreement option button, and then click Install.
13. On the Congratulations! screen, click Finish to complete the installation. A test page will be printed
with the installed printer by clicking the Print Test Page button.
Use the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool to monitor the status of your network printer without
leaving your desk. You can view and/or change the printer configuration settings, monitor toner level, and
when it is time to order replacement consumables, just click the Dell supplies link right from your Web
browser.
NOTE: The Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool is not available when the multifunction printer is
locally attached to a computer or a print server.
Wireless Installation using wireless connection
Step 1. Install a multifunction printer to the already-operating wireless
network (When wireless setting is already set to your computer)
1. Insert the Drivers and Utilities CD into your computer to launch the installation software.
NOTE: If the CD does not automatically launch, click Start Run, and then type D:\setup.exe
(where D is the drive letter of your CD), and then click OK.
NOTE: For Windows Vista, click Continue when the User Account Control dialog box appears.
2. Select the Network Installation option button, and then click Next.
3. Select the Configure Wireless Printer using a wireless connection (Advanced) option button,
and then click Next.
4. Reset the wireless setting of the multifunction printer following the steps on the Reset Wireless
Setting screen.
5. Create the wireless setting of your computer following the steps shown on the Enable
Communication with Printer screen, and then click Next.
The steps are as follows:
a.
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
For Windows XP and Windows Server 2003:
a. Select Network Connections from Control Panel.
b. Right-click Wireless Network Connection and select Properties.
c. Select the Wireless Networks tab.
d. Ensure that the check box for Use Windows to configure my wireless network settings is
checked.
NOTE: Ensure that you write down the current wireless computer settings in steps d and f so
that you can restore them later.
e. Click the Advanced button.
f. Select Computer to Computer (ad hoc) networks only and close the Advanced dialog box.
g. Click the Add button to display Wireless network properties.
h. In the Association tab, enter the following information and click OK.
Network name (SSID): dell_device
Network Authentication: Open
Data encryption: Disabled
Ad hoc network: checked
i. Click the Move up button to move the newly added SSID to the top of the list.
j. Click OK to close the Property dialog box.
For Windows Vista:
a. Open Control Panel.
b. Select Network and Internet.
c. Select Network and Sharing Center.
d. Select Connect to a network.
e. Select dell_device from the network items listed in Connect to a network.
f. Select Connect Anyway in the warning dialog box indication indicating you are entering an
unsecured area.
g. Click Close in the dialog box after confirming the connection is a success.
For Windows Server 2008:
a.
b.
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
a. Open Control Panel.
b. Select Network and Sharing Center.
c. Select Connect to a network.
d. Select dell_device from the network items listed in Connect to a network.
e. Select Connect Anyway in the warning dialog box indicating you are entering an unsecured
area.
f. Click Close in the dialog box after confirming the connection is a success.
6. On the Enter Wireless Network Settings screen, set each wireless setting item, and then click
Next.
7. When you select the Fixed IP option button for IP Address assignment, click Change... and enter
the IP address and subnet mask on the screen.
NOTE: When you enter a fixed IP address, avoid the "169.254.xxx.xxx" address used by AutoIP.
8. Set each item on the Enter Printer Settings screen, and then click Next.
9. On the Printer Software screen, specify the software that you want to install and installation path,
and then click Next. At this point, the wireless setting specified on the Enter Wireless Network
Settings screen is sent to the multifunction printer.
10. On the Wireless configuration is now complete screen, change the wireless setting of your
computer to the same as that sent to the multifunction printer, and then click Next.
For Windows XP and Windows Server 2003:
a. Select Network Connections from Control Panel.
b. Right-click Wireless Network Connection and select Properties.
c. Select the Wireless Network tab.
d. Click Advanced.
e. Do either of the following:
When wireless ad-hoc mode is set to the multifunction printer:
Select Computer to Computer (ad hoc) networks only and close the Advanced dialog box.
When wireless infrastructure mode is set to the multifunction printer:
Select Access point (Infrastructure) networks only and close the Advanced dialog box.
f.
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
f. Select the setting that you send to the multifunction printer in the list in Preferred Network
group.
g. Click Move up to move the setting to the top of the list.
h. Click OK to close the Property dialog box.
For Windows Vista:
a. Open Control Panel.
b. Select Network and Internet.
c. Select Network and Sharing Center.
d. Select Connect to a network.
e. Select the original setting from the network items listed in Connect to a network, and then
click Connect.
For Windows Server 2008:
a. Open Control Panel.
b. Select Network and Sharing Center.
c. Select Connect to a network.
d. Select the original setting from the network items listed in Connect to a network, and then
click Connect.
11. On the Setting-Ready Printer screen, verify that the correct IP address is assigned to the
multifunction printer to which the wireless setting is set, and then click Install.
NOTE: If your system has any of the following operating systems:
- Windows XP x64
- Windows Server® 2003 x64
- Windows Server® 2008 x64
- Windows Vista x64
- Windows Vista x86
,skip step 12 and go to step 13.
12. If you select the I am setting up this printer on a server check box on the Select Printer screen
and also select the PostScript Driver check box on the Enter Printer Settings screen, the Adobe
Systems Inc. License Agreement screen appears. Select the I accept the terms of the license
agreement option button, and then click Install.
13. On the Congratulations! screen, click Finish to complete the installation. A test page will be printed
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
13.
with the installed printer by clicking the Print Test Page button.
Step 2. Construct new wireless network environment for both computer
and multifunction printer (When wireless setting needs to be set to your
computer)
1. Insert the Drivers and Utilities CD into your computer to launch the installation software.
NOTE: If the CD does not automatically launch, click Start Run, and then type D:\setup.exe
(where D is the drive letter of your CD), and then click OK.
NOTE: For Windows Vista, click Continue when the User Account Control dialog box appears.
2. Select the Network Installation option button, and then click Next.
3. Select the Configure Wireless Printer using a wireless connection (Advanced) option button,
and then click Next.
4. Reset the wireless setting of the multifunction printer following the steps on the Reset Wireless
Setting screen.
5. Create the wireless setting of your computer following the steps shown on the Enable
Communication with Printer screen, and then click Next. The steps are as follows:
For Windows XP and Windows Server 2003:
a. Select Network Connections from Control Panel.
b. Right-click Wireless Network Connection and select Properties.
c. Select the Wireless Networks tab.
d. Ensure that the check box for Use Windows to configure my wireless network settings is
checked.
NOTE: Ensure that you write down the current wireless computer settings in step d and step f
so that you can restore them later.
e. Click the Advanced button.
f. Select Computer to Computer (ad hoc) networks only and close the Advanced dialog box.
g. Click the Add button to display Wireless network properties.
h. In the Association tab, enter the following information and click OK.
Network name (SSID): dell_device
Network Authentication: Open
Data encryption: Disabled
i.
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Ad hoc network: checked
i. Click the Move up button to move the newly added SSID to the top of the list.
j. Click OK to close the Property dialog box.
For Windows Vista:
a. Open Control Panel.
b. Select Network and Internet.
c. Select Network and Sharing Center.
d. Select Connect to a network.
e. Select dell_device from the network items listed in Connect to a network.
f. Select Connect Anyway in the warning dialog box indication indicating you are entering an
unsecured area.
g. Click Close in the dialog box after confirming the connection is a success.
For Windows Server 2008:
a. Open Control Panel.
b. Select Network and Sharing Center.
c. Select Connect to a network.
d. Select dell_device from the network items listed in Connect to a network.
e. Select Connect Anyway in the warning dialog box indicating you are entering an unsecured
area.
f. Click Close in the dialog box after confirming the connection is a success.
6. On the Enter Wireless Network Settings screen, set each wireless setting item, and then click
Next.
7. When you select the Fixed IP option button for IP Address assignment, click Change... and enter
the IP address and subnet mask on the screen.
NOTE: When you enter a fixed IP address, avoid the "169.254.xxx.xxx" address used by AutoIP.
8. Set each item on the Enter Printer Settings screen, and then click Next.
9. On the Printer Software screen, specify the software that you want to install and installation path,
and then click Next. At this point, the wireless setting specified on the Enter Wireless Network
10.
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
9.
Settings screen is sent to the multifunction printer.
10. On the Wireless configuration is now complete screen, create the wireless setting sent to the
multifunction printer on your computer following the steps below, and then click Next.
For Windows XP and Windows Server 2003:
a. Select Network Connections from Control Panel.
b. Right-click Wireless Network Connection and select Properties.
c. Select the Wireless Network tab.
d. Ensure that the check box for Use Windows to configure my wireless network settings is
checked.
e. Click Advanced.
f. Do either of the following:
When wireless ad-hoc mode is set to the multifunction printer:
Select Computer to Computer (ad hoc) networks only and close the Advanced dialog box.
When wireless infrastructure mode is set to the multifunction printer:
Select Access point (Infrastructure) networks only and close the Advanced dialog box.
g. Click Add to display Wireless network properties.
h. Enter the setting that you send to the multifunction printer and click OK.
i. Click Move up to move the setting to the top of the list.
j. Click OK to close the Property dialog box.
For Windows Vista:
a. Open Control Panel.
b. Select Network and Internet.
c. Select Network and Sharing Center.
d. Select Connect to a network.
e. Select the setting you send to the multifunction from the network items listed in Connect to a
network.
f. Select Connect Anyway in the warning dialog box indication indicating you are entering an
unsecured area.
g.
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
f.
g. Click Close in the dialog box after confirming the connection is a success.
For Windows Server 2008:
a. Open Control Panel.
b. Select Network and Sharing Center.
c. Select Connect to a network.
d. Select the setting you send to the printer from the network items listed in Connect to a
network.
e. Select Connect Anyway in the warning dialog box indication indicating you are entering an
unsecured area.
f. Click Close in the dialog box after confirming the connection is a success.
11. On the Setting-Ready Printer screen, verify that the correct IP address is assigned to the
multifunction printer to which the wireless setting is set, and then click Install.
NOTE: If your system has any of the following operating systems:
- Windows XP x64
- Windows Server® 2003 x64
- Windows Server® 2008 x64
- Windows Vista x64
- Windows Vista x86
,skip step 12 and go to step 13.
12. If you select the I am setting up this printer on a server check box on the Select Printer screen
and also select the PostScript Driver check box on the Enter Printer Settings screen, the Adobe
Systems Inc. License Agreement screen appears. Select the I accept the terms of the license
agreement option button, and then click Install.
13. On the Congratulations! screen, click Finish to complete the installation. A test page will be printed
with the installed printer by clicking the Print Test Page button.
Use the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool to monitor the status of your network printer without
leaving your desk. You can view and/or change the printer configuration settings, monitor toner level, and
when it is time to order replacement consumables, just click the Dell supplies link right from your Web
browser.
NOTE: The Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool is not available when the multifunction printer is
locally attached to a computer or a print server.
Wireless Installation using Dell Printer Configuration Web
Tool
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Step 1. Install a multifunction printer to the already-operating wireless
network (When wireless setting is already set to your computer)
For Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol network:
1. Create wireless setting of your computer following the steps below:
For Windows XP and Windows Server 2003:
a. Select Network Connections from Control Panel.
b. Right-click Wireless Network Connection and select Properties.
c. Select the Wireless Networks tab.
d. Ensure that the check box for Use Windows to configure my wireless network settings is
checked.
NOTE: Ensure that you write down the current wireless computer settings in steps d and f so
that you can restore them later.
e. Click the Advanced button.
f. Select Computer to Computer (ad hoc) networks only and close the Advanced dialog box.
g. Click the Add button to display Wireless network properties.
h. In the Association tab, enter the following information and click OK.
Network name (SSID): dell_device
Network Authentication: Open
Data encryption: Disabled
Ad hoc network: checked
i. Click the Move up button to move the newly added SSID to the top of the list.
j. Click OK to close the Property dialog box.
NOTE: When your operating system is earlier than Windows 2000, create settings according to
the manual of the wireless setting tool provided by your wireless device manufacturer.
For Windows Vista:
a. Open Control Panel.
b. Select Network and Internet.
c. Select Network and Sharing Center.
d.
e.
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
b.
c.
d. Select Connect to a network.
e. Select dell_device from the network items listed in Connect to a network.
f. Select Connect Anyway in the warning dialog box indication indicating you are entering an
unsecured area.
g. Click Close in the dialog box after confirming the connection is a success.
For Windows Server 2008:
a. Open Control Panel.
b. Select Network and Sharing Center.
c. Select Connect to a network.
d. Select dell_device from the network items listed in Connect to a network.
e. Select Connect Anyway in the warning dialog box indicating you are entering an unsecured
area.
f. Click Close in the dialog box after confirming the connection is a success.
2. Check the IP address assigned by AutoIP on the multifunction printer.
For example, 168.254.1.1
3. Check that the IP address on your computer is assigned by DHCP.
4. Open Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool using the Web browser.
For example, http://168.254.1.1/
5. Change the wireless setting of the multifunction printer on Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool.
6. Reset the multifunction printer.
7. Restore the wireless setting on your computer.
For Windows XP and Windows Server 2003:
a. Select Network Connections from Control Panel.
b. Right-click Wireless Network Connection and select Properties.
c. Select Wireless Network tab.
d. Click Advanced.
e.
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
c.
d.
e. Do either of the following:
When wireless ad-hoc mode is set to the multifunction printer:
Select Computer to Computer (ad hoc) networks only and close the Advanced dialog box.
When wireless infrastructure mode is set to the multifunction printer:
Select Access point (Infrastructure) networks only and close the Advanced dialog box.
f. Select the setting that you send to the multifunction printer in the list in Preferred Network
group.
g. Click Move up to move the setting to the top of the list.
h. Click OK to close the Property dialog box.
NOTE: When your operating system is earlier than Windows 2000, create settings according to
the manual of the wireless setting tool provided by your wireless device manufacturer.
For Windows Vista:
a. Open Control Panel.
b. Select Network and Internet.
c. Select Network and Sharing Center.
d. Select Connect to a network.
e. Select the original setting from the network items listed in Connect to a network, and then
click Connect.
For Windows Server 2008:
a. Open Control Panel.
b. Select Network and Sharing Center.
c. Select Connect to a network.
d. Select the original setting from the network items listed in Connect to a network, and then
click Connect.
For Fixed IP network:
1. Create wireless setting of your computer following the steps below:
a.
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
1.
For Windows XP and Windows Server 2003:
a. Select Network Connections from Control Panel.
b. Right-click Wireless Network Connection and select Properties.
c. Select the Wireless Networks tab.
d. Ensure that the check box for Use Windows to configure my wireless network settings is
checked.
NOTE: Ensure that you write down the current wireless computer settings in steps d and f so
that you can restore them later.
e. Click the Advanced button.
f. Select Computer to Computer (ad hoc) networks only and close the Advanced dialog box.
g. Click the Add button to display Wireless network properties.
h. In the Association tab, enter the following information and click OK.
Network name (SSID): dell_device
Network Authentication: Open
Data encryption: Disabled
Ad hoc network: checked
i. Click the Move up button to move the newly added SSID to the top of the list.
j. Click OK to close the Property dialog box.
NOTE: When your operating system is earlier than Windows 2000, create settings according to
the manual of the wireless setting tool provided by your wireless device manufacturer.
For Windows Vista:
a. Open Control Panel.
b. Select Network and Internet.
c. Select Network and Sharing Center.
d. Select Connect to a network.
e. Select dell_device from the network items listed in Connect to a network.
f. Select Connect Anyway in the warning dialog box indication indicating you are entering an
unsecured area.
g. Click Close in the dialog box after confirming the connection is a success.
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
g.
For Windows Server 2008:
a. Open Control Panel.
b. Select Network and Sharing Center.
c. Select Connect to a network.
d. Select dell_device from the network items listed in Connect to a network.
e. Select Connect Anyway in the warning dialog box indicating you are entering an unsecured
area.
f. Click Close in the dialog box after confirming the connection is a success.
2. Check the IP address on your computer.
For example, 1.2.3.4
3. Set the IP address on the multifunction printer.
For example, 1.2.3.5
4. Open Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool using the Web browser.
For example, http://1.2.3.5/
5. Change the wireless setting of the multifunction printer on Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool.
6. Reset the multifunction printer.
7. Restore the wireless setting on your computer.
For Windows XP and Windows Server 2003:
a. Select Network Connections from Control Panel.
b. Right-click Wireless Network Connection and select Properties.
c. Select Wireless Network tab.
d. Click Advanced.
e. Do either of the following:
When wireless ad-hoc mode is set to the multifunction printer:
Select Computer to Computer (ad hoc) networks only and close the Advanced dialog box.
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
When wireless infrastructure mode is set to the multifunction printer:
Select Access point (Infrastructure) networks only and close the Advanced dialog box.
f. Select the setting that you send to the multifunction printer in the list in Preferred Network
group.
g. Click Move up to move the setting to the top of the list.
h. Click OK to close the Property dialog box.
NOTE: When your operating system is earlier than Windows 2000, create settings according to
the manual of the wireless setting tool provided by your wireless device manufacturer.
For Windows Vista:
a. Open Control Panel.
b. Select Network and Internet.
c. Select Network and Sharing Center.
d. Select Connect to a network.
e. Select the original setting from the network items listed in Connect to a network, and then
click Connect.
For Windows Server 2008:
a. Open Control Panel.
b. Select Network and Sharing Center.
c. Select Connect to a network.
d. Select the original setting from the network items listed in Connect to a network, and then
click Connect.
Step 2. Construct new wireless network environment for both computer
and multifunction printer (When wireless setting needs to be set to your
computer)
For Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol network:
1. Create wireless setting of your computer following the steps below:
For Windows XP and Windows Server 2003:
a.
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
a. Select Network Connections from Control Panel.
b. Right-click Wireless Network Connection and select Properties.
c. Select the Wireless Networks tab.
d. Ensure that the check box for Use Windows to configure my wireless network settings is
checked.
NOTE: Ensure that you write down the current wireless computer settings in steps e and g so
that you can restore them later.
e. Click the Advanced button.
f. Select Computer to Computer (ad hoc) networks only and close the Advanced dialog box.
g. Click the Add button to display Wireless network properties.
h. In the Association tab, enter the following information and click OK.
Network name (SSID): dell_device
Network Authentication: Open
Data encryption: Disabled
Ad hoc network: checked
i. Click the Move up button to move the newly added SSID to the top of the list.
j. Click OK to close the Property dialog box.
NOTE: When your operating system is earlier than Windows 2000, create settings according to
the manual of the wireless setting tool provided by your wireless device manufacturer.
For Windows Vista:
a. Open Control Panel.
b. Select Network and Internet.
c. Select Network and Sharing Center.
d. Select Connect to a network.
e. Select dell_device from the network items listed in Connect to a network.
f. Select Connect Anyway in the warning dialog box indication indicating you are entering an
unsecured area.
g. Click Close in the dialog box after confirming the connection is a success.
a.
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
g.
For Windows Server 2008:
a. Open Control Panel.
b. Select Network and Sharing Center.
c. Select Connect to a network.
d. Select dell_device from the network items listed in Connect to a network.
e. Select Connect Anyway in the warning dialog box indicating you are entering an unsecured
area.
f. Click Close in the dialog box after confirming the connection is a success.
2. Check the IP address assigned by AutoIP on the multifunction printer.
For example, 168.254.1.1
3. Check that the IP address on your computer is assigned by DHCP.
4. Open Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool using the Web browser.
For example, http://168.254.1.1
5. See "Print Server Settings" in the "Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool" to create a wireless setting.
6. Reset the multifunction printer.
7. Restore the wireless setting on your computer.
For Windows XP and Windows Server 2003:
a. Select Network Connections from Control Panel.
b. Right-click Wireless Network Connection and select Properties.
c. Select Wireless Network tab.
d. Ensure that the check box for Use Windows to configure my wireless network settings is
checked.
e. Click Advanced.
f. Do either of the following:
When wireless ad-hoc mode is set to the multifunction printer:
Select Computer to Computer (ad hoc) networks only and close the Advanced dialog box.
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
When wireless infrastructure mode is set to the multifunction printer:
Select Access point (Infrastructure) networks only and close the Advanced dialog box.
g. Click Add to display Wireless network properties.
h. Enter the setting that you send to the multifunction printer and click OK.
i. Click Move up to move the setting to the top of the list.
j. Click OK to close the Property dialog box.
NOTE: When your operating system is earlier than Windows 2000, create settings according to
the manual of the wireless setting tool provided by your wireless device manufacturer.
For Windows Vista:
a. Open Control Panel.
b. Select Network and Internet.
c. Select Network and Sharing Center.
d. Select Connect to a network.
e. Select the setting you send to the multifunction from the network items listed in Connect to a
network.
f. Select Connect Anyway in the warning dialog box indication indicating you are entering an
unsecured area.
g. Click Close in the dialog box after confirming the connection is a success.
For Windows Server 2008:
a. Open Control Panel.
b. Select Network and Sharing Center.
c. Select Connect to a network.
d. Select the setting you send to the printer from the network items listed in Connect to a
network.
e. Select Connect Anyway in the warning dialog box indication indicating you are entering an
unsecured area.
f. Click Close in the dialog box after confirming the connection is a success.
For Fixed IP network:
1.
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
1. Create wireless setting of your computer following the steps below:
For Windows XP and Windows Server 2003:
a. Select Network Connections from Control Panel.
b. Right-click Wireless Network Connection and select Properties.
c. Select the Wireless Networks tab.
d. Ensure that the check box for Use Windows to configure my wireless network settings is
checked.
NOTE: Ensure that you write down the current wireless computer settings in steps d and f so
that you can restore them later.
e. Click the Advanced button.
f. Select Computer to Computer (ad hoc) networks only and close the Advanced dialog box.
g. Click the Add button to display Wireless network properties.
h. In the Association tab, enter the following information and click OK.
Network name (SSID): dell_device
Network Authentication: Open
Data encryption: Disabled
Ad hoc network: checked
i. Click the Move up button to move the newly added SSID to the top of the list.
j. Click OK to close the Property dialog box.
NOTE: When your operating system is earlier than Windows 2000, create settings according to
the manual of the wireless setting tool provided by your wireless device manufacturer.
For Windows Vista:
a. Open Control Panel.
b. Select Network and Internet.
c. Select Network and Sharing Center.
d. Select Connect to a network.
e. Select dell_device from the network items listed in Connect to a network.
f. Select Connect Anyway in the warning dialog box indication indicating you are entering an
unsecured area.
g.
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
f.
g. Click Close in the dialog box after confirming the connection is a success.
For Windows Server 2008:
a. Open Control Panel.
b. Select Network and Sharing Center.
c. Select Connect to a network.
d. Select dell_device from the network items listed in Connect to a network.
e. Select Connect Anyway in the warning dialog box indicating you are entering an unsecured
area.
f. Click Close in the dialog box after confirming the connection is a success.
2. Check the IP address on your computer.
For example, 1.2.3.4
3. Set the IP address on the multifunction printer.
For example, 1.2.3.5
4. Open Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool using the Web browser.
For example, http://1.2.3.5
5. Change the wireless setting of the multifunction printer on Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool.
6. Reset the multifunction printer.
7. Restore the wireless setting on your computer.
For Windows XP and Windows Server 2003:
a. Select Network Connections from Control Panel.
b. Right-click Wireless Network Connection and select Properties.
c. Select Wireless Network tab.
d. Ensure that the check box for Use Windows to configure my wireless network settings is
checked.
e. Click Advanced.
f.
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
e.
f. Do either of the following:
When wireless ad-hoc mode is set to the multifunction printer:
Select Computer to Computer (ad hoc) networks only and close the Advanced dialog box.
When wireless infrastructure mode is set to the multifunction printer:
Select Access point (Infrastructure) networks only and close the Advanced dialog box.
g. Click Add to display Wireless network properties.
h. Enter the setting that you send to the multifunction printer and click OK.
i. Click Move up to move the setting to the top of the list.
j. Click OK to close the Property dialog box.
NOTE: When your operating system is earlier than Windows 2000, create settings according to
the manual of the wireless setting tool provided by your wireless device manufacturer.
For Windows Vista:
a. Open Control Panel.
b. Select Network and Internet.
c. Select Network and Sharing Center.
d. Select Connect to a network.
e. Select the setting you send to the multifunction from the network items listed in Connect to a
network.
f. Select Connect Anyway in the warning dialog box indication indicating you are entering an
unsecured area.
g. Click Close in the dialog box after confirming the connection is a success.
For Windows Server 2008:
a. Open Control Panel.
b. Select Network and Sharing Center.
c. Select Connect to a network.
d. Select the setting you send to the printer from the network items listed in Connect to a
network.
e. Select Connect Anyway in the warning dialog box indication indicating you are entering an
f.
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
e.
unsecured area.
f. Click Close in the dialog box after confirming the connection is a success.
Wireless Setting through Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool
- Advanced setup
Access point (Infrastructure, DHCP network)
1. Create new wireless settings for your computer.
For Windows XP and Windows Server 2003:
a. Select Network Connections from Control Panel.
b. Right-click Wireless Network Connection and select Properties.
c. Select the Wireless Networks tab.
d. Ensure that the check box for Use Windows to configure my wireless network settings is
checked.
NOTE: Ensure that you write down the current wireless computer settings in steps d and g so that you
can restore them later.
e. Click the Advanced button.
f. Select Computer to Computer (ad hoc) networks only and close the Advanced dialog box.
g. Click the Add button to display Wireless network properties.
h. In the Association tab, enter the following information and click OK.
Network name (SSID): dell_device
Network Authentication: Open
Data encryption: Disabled
Ad hoc network: checked
i. Click the Move up button to move the newly added SSID to the top of the list.
j. Click OK to close the Property dialog box.
NOTE: When your operating system is earlier than Windows 2000, create settings according to the
manual of the wireless setting tool provided by your wireless device manufacturer.
For Windows Vista:
a.
b.
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
a. Open Control Panel.
b. Select Network and Internet.
c. Select Network and Sharing Center.
d. Select Connect to a network.
e. Select dell_device from the network items listed in Connect to a network.
f. Select Connect Anyway in the warning dialog box indication indicating you are entering an
unsecured area.
g. Click Close in the dialog box after confirming the connection is a success.
For Windows Server 2008:
a. Open Control Panel.
b. Select Network and Sharing Center.
c. Select Connect to a network.
d. Select dell_device from the network items listed in Connect to a network.
e. Select Connect Anyway in the warning dialog box indicating you are entering an unsecured
area.
f. Click Close in the dialog box after confirming the connection is a success.
2. Set up the printer wireless adapter IP address.
a. Reset the settings for the wireless adapter to the default.
i. Press Menu on printer Control Panel.
ii. Scroll down and select Admin Menu.
iii. Scroll down and select Wireless net.
iv. Scroll down and select Reset MPC.
v. Restart the multifunction printer.
b. Retrieve the wireless adapter IP address on the multifunction printer.
i. Press Menu on printer Control Panel.
ii. Scroll down and select Admin Menu.
iii. Scroll down and select Wireless net.
iv. Scroll down and select TCP/IP.
v. Scroll down and select IP Address.
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
(Default IP address range: 169.254. xxx.yyy, where "xxx" and "yyy" are variables ranging from
0 to 255)
3. Access Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool on your computer browser.
a. Assign the TCP/IP address by DHCP mode (Change the TCP/IP properties to obtain the IP address
automatically).
b. Ensure that your computer has the same IP address range as the printer wireless adapter.
For example, 169.254. xxx.zzz, where "xxx" and "zzz" are variables ranging from 0 to 255
c. Access the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool using the Web browser, and then type printer
wireless adapter settings in the address field of the browser.
For example, http://169.254.xxx.yyy/, where "xxx" and "yyy" are variables ranging from 0 to
255 (Your wireless adapter IP address)
d. Change wireless settings (SSID/ communication mode) from Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool.
i. Click Print server setting on the left navigational bar.
ii. Click the Print server setting tab.
iii. Click the TCP/IP sub-tab.
iv. Select DHCP.
v. Click the Apply new setting button without restarting the multifunction printer (Ignore the
screen instructions to restart the multifunction printer).
vi. Click the Wireless LAN sub-tab.
vii. Change the SSID setting (according to your Access point SSID) and change Network type
to Infrastructure.
viii. Click the Restart printer to apply new settings button.
4. Once printer wireless adapter is properly configured, you may use the typical network printer
installation method to complete driver installation.
5. To communicate with the multifunction printer, you need to restore the previous wireless settings on
your computer.
6. Restore the previous wireless settings for your computer.
For Windows XP and Windows Server 2003:
a. Select Network Connections from Control Panel.
b. Right-click Wireless Network Connection and select Properties.
c. Select the Wireless Network tab.
d. Click the Advanced button.
e.
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
d.
e. Select Access point (Infrastructure) networks only and close the Advanced dialog box
(Applicable to the multifunction printer with the wireless infrastructure mode).
f. Select the setting that you send to the multifunction printer in the list in the Preferred Network
group
g. Click Move up to move the setting to the top of the list.
h. Click OK to close the Property dialog box.
NOTE: When your operating system is earlier than Windows 2000, create settings according to the
manual of the wireless setting tool provided by your wireless device manufacturer.
For Windows Vista:
a. Open Control Panel.
b. Select Network and Internet.
c. Select Network and Sharing Center.
d. Select Connect to a network.
e. Select the setting you send to the multifunction from the network items listed in Connect to a
network.
f. Select Connect Anyway in the warning dialog box indication indicating you are entering an
unsecured area.
g. Click Close in the dialog box after confirming the connection is a success.
For Windows Server 2008:
a. Open Control Panel.
b. Select Network and Sharing Center.
c. Select Connect to a network.
d. Select the setting you send to the printer from the network items listed in Connect to a
network.
e. Select Connect Anyway in the warning dialog box indication indicating you are entering an
unsecured area.
f. Click Close in the dialog box after confirming the connection is a success.
Access point (Infrastructure, Fixed IP network)
1. Ensure that the addresses of your computer and access point is in the same IP range. Match the subnet
mask and gateway addresses of your computer to the access point settings.
2.
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
1.
2. Create new wireless settings of your computer by following the steps below:
For Windows XP and Windows Server 2003:
a. Select Network Connections from Control Panel.
b. Right-click Wireless Network Connection and select Properties.
c. Select the Wireless Networks tab.
d. Ensure that the check box for Use Windows to configure my wireless network settings is
checked.
NOTE: Ensure that you write down the current wireless computer settings in steps d and f so that you
can restore them later.
e. Click the Advanced button.
f. Select Computer to Computer (ad hoc) networks only and close the Advanced dialog box.
g. Click the Add button to display Wireless network properties.
h. In the Association tab, enter the following information and click OK.
Network name (SSID): dell_device
Network Authentication: Open
Data encryption: Disabled
Ad hoc network: Checked
i. Click the Move up button to move the newly added SSID to the top of the list.
j. Click OK to close the Property dialog box.
NOTE: When your operating system is earlier than Windows 2000, create settings according to the
manual of the wireless setting tool provided by your wireless device manufacturer.
For Windows Vista:
a. Open Control Panel.
b. Select Network and Internet.
c. Select Network and Sharing Center.
d. Select Connect to a network.
e. Select dell_device from the network items listed in Connect to a network.
f. Select Connect Anyway in the warning dialog box indication indicating you are entering an
unsecured area.
g.
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
f.
g. Click Close in the dialog box after confirming the connection is a success.
For Windows Server 2008:
a. Open Control Panel.
b. Select Network and Sharing Center.
c. Select Connect to a network.
d. Select dell_device from the network items listed in Connect to a network.
e. Select Connect Anyway in the warning dialog box indicating you are entering an unsecured
area.
f. Click Close in the dialog box after confirming the connection is a success.
3. Check the IP, subnet mask, and gateway address on your computer.
For example, IP: 192.168.1.1
Subnet mask: 255.255.0.0
4. Set the IP address from the multifunction printer Control Panel to be in the same range as that of
your computer. Match the subnet mask and gateway addresses of the multifunction printer to your
computer settings.
a. Press the Menu button.
b. Scroll to the Admin menu.
c. Select Wireless Net.
d. Select TCP/IP.
e. Select Get IP Address.
f. Select Panel.
g. Scroll back to IP Address.
h. Manually enter the IP address using the directional buttons on the control panel and press enter
button.
For example, 192.168.1.2
i. Scroll back to Subnet Mask.
j. Manually enter the subnet mask address using the directional buttons on Control Panel and
press the <Enter> button.
k.
l.
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
j.
k. Scroll back to Gateway Address.
l. Manually enter the gateway address using the directional buttons on Control Panel and press
the <Enter> button.
m. Restart the multifunction printer.
5. Open Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool using the Web browser.
For example, http://:192.168.1.2
6. Change wireless settings of the multifunction printer from Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool.
a. Click Print server setting on the left navigational bar.
b. Click Print server setting tab.
c. Click Wireless LAN sub-tab.
d. Change the SSID setting (according to your access point SSID) and change Network type to
Infrastructure.
e. Click the Restart printer to apply new settings button.
7. Restore the previous wireless settings for your computer.
For Windows XP and Windows Server 2003:
a. Select Network Connections from Control Panel.
b. Right-click Wireless Network Connection and select Properties.
c. Select Wireless Network tab.
d. Click Advanced.
e. Do either of the following:
When wireless ad-hoc mode is set to the multifunction printer:
Select Computer to Computer (ad hoc) networks only and close the Advanced dialog box.
When wireless infrastructure mode is set to the multifunction printer:
Select Access point (Infrastructure) networks only and close the Advanced dialog box.
f. Select the setting that you send to the multifunction printer in the list in Preferred Network
group.
g. Click Move up to move the setting to the top of the list.
a.
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
g.
For Windows Vista:
a. Open Control Panel.
b. Select Network and Internet.
c. Select Network and Sharing Center.
d. Select Connect to a network.
e. Select the setting you send to the multifunction from the network items listed in Connect to a
network.
f. Select Connect Anyway in the warning dialog box indication indicating you are entering an
unsecured area.
g. Click Close in the dialog box after confirming the connection is a success.
For Windows Server 2008:
a. Open Control Panel.
b. Select Network and Sharing Center.
c. Select Connect to a network.
d. Select the setting you send to the printer from the network items listed in Connect to a
network.
e. Select Connect Anyway in the warning dialog box indication indicating you are entering an
unsecured area.
f. Click Close in the dialog box after confirming the connection is a success.
8. Click OK to close the Property dialog box.
NOTE: When your operating system is earlier than Windows 2000, create settings according to the
manual of the wireless setting tool provided by your wireless device manufacturer.
Setup Security
1. Press
until >SETUP appears, and then press
2. Press
until >Admin Menu appears, and then press
.
3. Press
until >Secure Settings is displayed. Press
.
4. Press
until the desired setting is displayed. Press
.
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
.
3.
4.
To set or change the password to limit access to the menus from the operator panel.
Set the password of the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool from Set Password in Print Server
Settings.
Values:
Panel Lock Set
Sets a password to limit access to Admin Menu.
Copy/Scan/Fax Lock Sets a password to limit access to the copy, scanner, and fax.
Secure Receive
Sets a password when you receive a fax.
NOTE: This menu sets a password to lock the operator panel. When changing the password for the
Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool, click Set Password on the left frame and set the password.
Troubleshooting Instructions
Use the Customer Mode to locate the unit in the multifunction printer that causes a problem.
Diagnostic Menu Map (Customer Mode)
1. Turn off the multifunction printer.
2. Turn on the multifunction printer while holding down
The Customer Mode menu appears.
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
and
.
Testing "Print Quality"
"Print Quality" is used to diagnose print quality defects.
1. On the Customer Mode menu, go down to Cyan20%, Magenta20%, Yellow20%, or Black20% and press
.
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Cyan 20%
Outputs cyan toner at 20% density on the whole area of the paper.
Magenta20% Outputs magenta toner at 20% density on the whole area of the paper.
Yellow20%
Outputs yellow toner at 20% density on the whole area of the paper.
Black20%
Outputs black toner at 20% density on the whole area of the paper.
After you output the test results, contact Dell.
Testing "TonerPalletCheck" or "ContaminationChk"
"Toner Pallet Check" and "ContaminationChk" are used to diagnose machine problems.
1. On the Customer Mode menu, go down to TonerPalletCheck or ContaminationChk, and press
TonerPalletCheck Allows you to identify the problem with the toner when print quality problems occur
while printing pictures or photos.
ContaminationChk Allows you to check for any regular lines or spots when printing if print quality
problems are occurring.
After you output the test results, contact Dell.
Change the ECM Mode
You can enable or disable the ECM mode.
On the Customer Mode menu, go down to Fax/Scanner Dialog
Parameter
Capability ECM, and then press
Parameter
.
Enable* Enables the ECM mode.
Disable Disables the ECM mode.
Clear NVRAM
You can restore the original factory default menu settings by initializing NVRAM.
1. Press
until >SETUP appears, and then press
2. Press
until >Admin Menu appears, and then press
3. Press
until >Maintenance appears, and then press
4.
5.
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
.
.
.
Fax
.
3.
4. Press
until >Init NVRAM appears, and then press
.
5. The Are you sure? message appears on the operator panel. Press
.
Turn off the multifunction printer, and then on again.
Others
How to replace Print cartridges
CAUTION: Before performing any of the following procedures, read and follow the safety
instructions in your Owner's Manual or Product Information Guide.
NOTICE: To protect the drums of the print cartridges against bright light, close the front cover within
five minutes. If the front cover remains open for more than five minutes, print quality may
deteriorate.
Dell print cartridges are available only through Dell. You can order more cartridges online at
http://www.dell.com/supplies or by phone. To order by phone, see "Contacting Dell" in the Owner's
Manual or in this manual.
Dell recommends Dell print cartridges for your multifunction printer. Dell does not provide warranty
coverage for problems caused by using accessories, parts, or components not supplied by Dell.
CAUTION: Never throw used print cartridges into a fire. The residual toner could explode
resulting in burns and injuries.
CAUTION: Since the used print cartridge may spill some toner, do not shake it.
Removing the Used Print Cartridge
1. Push the button (right side) and open the front cover.
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
2. Grasp the handles at both ends of the print cartridge that you want to replace and pull it out.
CAUTION: Since the used print cartridge may spill some toner, do not shake it.
Installing a New Print Cartridge
1. Select the new print cartridge which color matches the color of the handles on the printer cartridge to
be replaced and shake it five or six times to distribute the toner evenly.
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
2. Remove the print cartridge from its packaging.
NOTE: To protect the drum against bright light, do not remove the orange protective cover of the
print cartridge before the cartridge is inserted into its slot in the multifunction printer.
3. Completely remove the seal from the print cartridge by pulling the tab on the end of the print
cartridge.
NOTE: Pull the seal out straight. Pulling the seal diagonally may tear it.
4. Grasp both handles of the print cartridge with the label facing up and slide the cartridge into the same
color slot. Ensure that the cartridge is fully inserted.
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
5. Remove the orange protective cover of the installed print cartridge and discard.
6. Close the front cover.
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
How to replace the Fuser Unit
CAUTION: To prevent electric shock, always turn off the multifunction printer and
disconnect the power cable from the grounded outlet before performing maintenance.
CAUTION: Before performing any of the following procedures, read and follow the safety
instructions in your Owner's Manual or Product Information Guide.
NOTICE: To protect the drums of the print cartridges against bright light, close the front cover within
five minutes. If the front cover remains open for more than five minutes, print quality may
deteriorate.
NOTE: Remove any print jobs from the output tray, and close the multipurpose feeder before opening
the front cover.
Dell fuser unit is available only through Dell. To order by phone, see "Contacting Dell" in the Owner's Manual
or in this manual.
Dell recommends Dell fuser unit for your multifunction printer. Dell does not provide warranty coverage for
problems caused by using accessories, parts, or components not supplied by Dell.
Removing the Used Fuser Unit
CAUTION: To avoid burns, do not replace the fuser unit immediately after printing, as the
fuser unit gets very hot during this process.
1. Turn off the multifunction printer and wait for 30 minutes for the fuser unit to cool down before
removal.
2. Push the button (right side) and open the front cover.
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
3. Lift the chute gate to its upright position.
4. Release the levers at both ends of the fuser unit.
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
5. Hold both sides of the installed fuser unit, pull it towards the front of the multifunction printer to
release the connection on the right side, then lift upward to remove.
Installing a New Fuser Unit
1. Unpack a new fuser unit and hold both sides of the fuser unit with both hands.
2.
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
1.
2. With the connector of the fuser unit toward the slot, push the connector into the slot firmly.
NOTE: Ensure that the fuser connector is firmly seated.
3. Lock both levers at the ends of the fuser unit.
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
4. Lower the chute gate to its horizontal position.
5. Close the front cover.
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
5.
How to replace Rollers
There are three separator rollers in the multifunction printer which need to be replaced periodically. One is in
the tray and the others are inside the multifunction printer. Basically, all the separator rollers are replaced in
the same way as described in this section.
CAUTION: To prevent electric shock, always turn off the multifunction printer and
disconnect the power cable from the grounded outlet before performing maintenance.
CAUTION: Before performing any of the following procedures, read and follow the safety
instructions in your Owner's Manual or Product Information Guide.
Dell separator rollers are available only through Dell. To order by phone, see "Contacting Dell" in the Owner's
Manual or in this manual.
Dell recommends Dell separator rollers for your multifunction printer. Dell does not provide warranty
coverage for problems caused by using accessories, parts, or components not supplied by Dell.
Removing the Used Separator Roller in Tray
NOTE: Remove any print jobs from the tray before pulling the tray out of the multifunction printer.
1. Pull the tray out of the multifunction printer until it stops. Hold the tray with both hands, lift the front
slightly, and remove it from the multifunction printer.
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
NOTE: Remove all paper from the tray before opening the separator roller cover.
2. Push back the handles on each side of the separator roller cover as shown in the following illustration
and open the cover.
3. Turn the separator roller until the roller hook can be seen.
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
4. Pull the separator roller hook out of the groove in the axle, and then slide the separator roller to the
right.
Installing the New Separator Roller in the Tray
1. Align the hole of the new separator roller with the axle.
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
2. Slide the separator roller along the axle so the protrusions fit completely into the slots and the roller
hook reseats into the groove on the axle.
3. Close the separator roller cover until both sides click into place.
4. Load paper into the tray and replace it into the multifunction printer.
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
4.
Removing the Used Separator Roller Inside the Multifunction
Printer
1. Pull the tray out of the multifunction printer until it stops. Hold the tray with both hands, lift the front
slightly, and remove it from the multifunction printer.
2. Turn the separator roller until the roller hook can be seen.
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
2.
NOTE: The roller is located approximately 165 mm (6.5 in.) inside the machine as measured from the
face of the paper tray opening.
3. Pull the separator roller hook out of the groove on the axle, and then slide the separator roller to the
left.
4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 to remove the other separator roller from the inside of the multifunction printer.
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Installing the New Separator Roller Inside the Multifunction
Printer
1. Align the hole of the new separator roller with the axle.
2. Slide the separator roller along the axle so the protrusions fit completely into the slots and the roller
hook re-seats into the groove on the axle.
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
3. Replace the tray into the multifunction printer.
Replacing the Transfer Belt Unit
CAUTION: Before performing any of the following procedures, read and follow the safety
instructions in your Owner's Manual or Product Information Guide.
NOTICE: Ensure nothing touches or scratches the surface (black-colored film) of the transfer belt
unit. Scratches, dirt, or oil from your hands on the film of the transfer belt unit may reduce print
quality.
NOTICE: To protect the drums of the print cartridges against bright light, close the front cover within
five minutes. If the front cover remains open for more than five minutes, print quality may
deteriorate.
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Dell transfer belt units are available only through Dell. To order by phone, see "Contacting Dell" in the
Owner's Manual or in this manual. Dell recommends Dell transfer belt units for your multifunction printer.
Dell does not provide warranty coverage for problems caused by using accessories, parts, or components not
supplied by Dell.
Removing the Used Transfer Belt Unit
NOTE: Remove any print jobs from the output tray, and close the multipurpose feeder cover before
opening the front cover.
1. Ensure that the multifunction printer is turned off.
2. Push the side button and open the front cover.
3. Pull up on the belt release levers and rotate the transfer belt unit up as shown in the illustration.
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
CAUTION: Do not touch the inside of the multifunction printer. Some parts may be hot.
Allow time for the multifunction printer to cool before attempting to remove parts in this
area.
4. Hold both sides of the transfer belt unit with both hands and pull up the left side of the unit until the
peg on the left side comes out of the groove. Then, shift the transfer belt unit to the right and remove
the unit from the multifunction printer.
Installing a New Transfer Belt Unit
1.
2.
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
1. Unpack a new transfer belt unit.
2. Insert the left peg into the corresponding left side belt unit hole, then align the right peg with the
groove, and then push down on the right side of the transfer belt unit to seat into place.
3. Close the transfer belt unit by pulling it down until it clicks.
4.
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
4. Remove the film cover from the installed transfer belt unit and discard.
5. Close the front cover.
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Printing With Web Services for Devices (WSD)
This section provides information for network printing with WSD, Microsoft's new Windows Vista protocol.
Printer Setup
Printer Setup
You can install your new printer on the network using the Drivers and Utilities CD that shipped with your
printer, or using Microsoft's Windows Add Printer wizard.
However, when you use IPv6 Mode, you cannot install the printer driver from the Drivers and Utilities CD.
Use the Add Printer wizard.
Installing a Printer Driver Using the Add Printer Wizard
1. Click Start
Control Panel
Hardware and Sound
Printers.
2. Click Add a printer to launch the Add Printer wizard.
3. Select Add a network, wireless or Bluetooth printer.
4. In the list of available printers, select the one you want to use, and then click Next. If your computer
is connected to a network, only printers listed in Active Directory for your domain are displayed in
the list.
5. If prompted, install the printer driver on your computer. If you are prompted for an administrator
password or confirmation, type the password or provide confirmation.
6. Complete the additional steps in the wizard, and then click Finish.
7. Print a test page to verify print installation.
8. Click Start
Control Panel
Hardware and Sound
Printers.
9. Right-click the printer you just created, and then click Properties.
10. On the General tab, click Print Test Page. When a test page prints successfully, printer installation is
complete.
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Maintaining Your Multifunction Printer
Periodically, your printer requires you to complete certain tasks to maintain optimum print quality. If several
people are using the multifunction printer, you may want to designate a key operator to maintain your
multifunction printer. Refer printing problems and maintenance tasks to this key operator.
Determining the Status of Supplies
Conserving Supplies
Ordering Supplies
Storing Print Media
Storing Consumables
Replacing Print Cartridges
Replacing the Fuser Unit
Replacing Separator Rollers
Replacing the Transfer Belt Unit
Adjusting Color Registration
Cleaning the scanner
Cleaning the Roller in the ADF
Determining the Status of Supplies
If your multifunction printer is connected to the network, the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool can
provide instant feedback on remaining toner levels. Type the printer IP address in your Web browser to view
this information. To use the E-Mail Alert Setup feature that notifies you when the multifunction printer
requires new supplies, type your name or the name of the key operator in the e-mail list box.
On the operator panel, you can also confirm the following:
Any supply or maintenance items that require attention replacing (However, the multifunction printer
can only display information about one item at a time.)
Amount of toner remaining in each print cartridge
Conserving Supplies
You can change several settings in your software program or on the operator panel to conserve print
cartridge and paper.
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Setting
Function
Print
cartridge
Draft Mode
in the
Advanced
This check box allows the users to select a print mode that uses
less toner. When this feature is used, the image quality will be
lower than when it is not used.
Print
media
Multiple Up
The multifunction printer prints two or more pages on one side of
a sheet. Values for Multiple Up are 2 Up, 4 Up, 8 Up, 16 Up, or
32 Up. Combined with the duplex setting, Multiple Up allows you
to print up to 64 pages on one sheet of paper. (32 images on the
front and 32 on the back)
Duplex
This allows you to print on both sides of a sheet of paper. Duplex
printing is only available when the optional duplexer is installed
on the multifunction printer.
Supply
For more
information
Ordering Supplies
You can order consumables from Dell on the Internet when using a networked printer. Type the IP address of
your multifunction printer in your Web browser, launch the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool, and click
the Order Supplies at: to order toner for your multifunction printer.
You can also order print cartridges by the following method.
1. Click Start All Programs
Management System.
Dell Printers Additional Color Laser Software Dell Supplies
The Dell Supplies Management System window appears.
2. Select your multifunction printer from the Select Printer Model list.
3. If ordering from the Web:
a. When you cannot get information from the multifunction printer automatically by two- way
communication, a window that prompts you to type the Service Tag number appears. Type your
Dell printer Service Tag number in the field provided.
Your Service Tag number is located inside the front door of your multifunction printer.
b. Select an URL from the Select Reorder URL list.
c. Click Visit Dell printer supplies ordering web site.
4. If ordering by phone, call the number that appears under the By Telephone heading.
Storing Print Media
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
To avoid potential paper feeding problems and uneven print quality, there are several things you can do.
To achieve the best possible print quality, store print media in an environment where the temperature
is approximately 21°C (70°F) and the relative humidity is 40%.
Store cartons of print media on a pallet or shelf, rather than directly on the floor.
If you store individual packages of print media out of the original carton, ensure that they rest on a flat
surface so the edges do not buckle or curl.
Do not place anything on top of the print media packages.
Storing Consumables
Store consumables in their original packaging until you need to use them. Do not store consumables in:
Temperatures greater than 40°C (104°F).
An environment with extreme changes in humidity or temperature.
Direct sunlight.
Dusty places.
A car for a long period of time.
An environment where corrosive gases are present.
An environment with salty air.
Replacing Print Cartridges
CAUTION: Before performing any of the following procedures, read and follow the safety
instructions in your Owner's Manual or Product Information Guide.
NOTICE: To protect the drums of the print cartridges against bright light, close the front cover within
five minutes. If the front cover remains open for more than five minutes, print quality may
deteriorate.
Dell print cartridges are available only through Dell. You can order more cartridges online at
http://www.dell.com/supplies or by phone. To order by phone, see "Contacting Dell" in the Owner's
Manual or in this manual.
Dell recommends that you use Dell print cartridges for your multifunction printer. Dell does not provide
warranty coverage for problems caused by using accessories, parts, or components not supplied by Dell.
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
CAUTION: Never throw used print cartridges into a fire. The residual toner could explode
resulting in burns and injuries.
CAUTION: Since the used print cartridge may spill some toner, do not shake it.
Removing the Used Print Cartridge
1. Push the button (right side) and open the front cover.
2. Grasp the handles at both ends of the print cartridge that you want to replace and pull it out.
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
CAUTION: Since the used print cartridge may spill some toner, do not shake it.
Installing a New Print Cartridge
1. Select the new print cartridge which color matches the color of the handles on the printer cartridge to
be replaced and shake it five or six times to distribute the toner evenly.
2. Remove the print cartridge from its packaging.
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
NOTE: To protect the drum against bright light, do not remove the orange protective cover of the
print cartridge before the cartridge is inserted into its slot in the multifunction printer.
3. Completely remove the seal from the print cartridge by pulling the tab on the end of the print
cartridge.
NOTE: Pull the seal out straight. Pulling the seal diagonally may tear it.
4. Grasp both handles of the print cartridge with the label facing up and slide the cartridge into the same
color slot. Ensure the cartridge is fully inserted.
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
5. Remove the orange protective cover of the installed print cartridge and discard.
6. Close the front cover.
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Replacing the Fuser Unit
CAUTION: To prevent electric shock, always turn off the multifunction printer and
disconnect the power cable from the grounded outlet before performing maintenance.
CAUTION: Before performing any of the following procedures, read and follow the safety
instructions in your Owner's Manual or Product Information Guide.
NOTICE: To protect the drums of the print cartridges against bright light, close the front cover within
five minutes. If the front cover remains open for more than five minutes, print quality may
deteriorate.
NOTE: Remove any print jobs from the output tray, and close the multipurpose feeder before opening
the front cover.
Dell fuser unit is available only through Dell. To order by phone, see "Contacting Dell" in the Owner's Manual
or in this manual.
Dell recommends Dell fuser unit for your multifunction printer. Dell does not provide warranty coverage for
problems caused by using accessories, parts, or components not supplied by Dell.
Removing the Used Fuser Unit
CAUTION: To avoid burns, do not replace the fuser unit immediately after printing, as the
fuser unit gets very hot during this process.
1. Turn off the multifunction printer and wait for 30 minutes for the fuser unit to cool down before
removal.
2. Push the button (right side) and open the front cover.
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
2.
3. Lift the chute gate to its upright position.
4. Release the levers at both ends of the fuser unit.
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
5. Hold both sides of the installed fuser unit, pull it towards the front of the multifunction printer to
release the connection on the right side, then lift upward to remove.
Installing a New Fuser Unit
1. Unpack a new fuser unit and hold both sides of the fuser unit with both hands.
2.
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
1.
2. With the connector of the fuser unit toward the slot, push the connector into the slot firmly.
NOTE: Ensure that the fuser connector is firmly seated.
3. Lock both levers at the ends of the fuser unit.
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
4. Lower the chute gate to its horizontal position.
5. Close the front cover.
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
5.
Replacing Separator Rollers
There are three separator rollers in the multifunction printer which need to be replaced periodically. One is in
the tray and the others are inside the multifunction printer. Basically, all the separator rollers are replaced in
the same way as described in this section.
CAUTION: To prevent electric shock, always turn off the multifunction printer and
disconnect the power cable from the grounded outlet before performing maintenance.
CAUTION: Before performing any of the following procedures, read and follow the safety
instructions in your Owner's Manual or Product Information Guide.
Dell separator rollers are available only through Dell. To order by phone, see "Contacting Dell" in the Owner's
Manual or in this manual.
Dell recommends Dell separator rollers for your multifunction printer. Dell does not provide warranty
coverage for problems caused by using accessories, parts, or components not supplied by Dell.
Removing the Used Separator Roller in Tray
NOTE: Remove any print jobs from the tray before pulling the tray out of the multifunction printer.
1. Pull the tray out of the multifunction printer until it stops. Hold the tray with both hands, lift the front
slightly, and remove it from the multifunction printer.
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
NOTE: Remove all paper from the tray before opening the separator roller cover.
2. Push back the handles on each side of the separator roller cover as shown in the following illustration
and open the cover.
3. Turn the separator roller until the roller hook can be seen.
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
4. Pull the separator roller hook out of the groove in the axle, and then slide the separator roller to the
right.
Installing the New Separator Roller in the Tray
1. Align the hole of the new separator roller with the axle.
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
2. Slide the separator roller along the axle so the protrusions fit completely into the slots and the roller
hook reseats into the groove on the axle.
3. Close the separator roller cover until both sides click into place.
4. Load paper into the tray and replace it into the multifunction printer.
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
4.
Removing the Used Separator Roller Inside the Multifunction
Printer
1. Pull the tray out of the multifunction printer until it stops. Hold the tray with both hands, lift the front
slightly, and remove it from the multifunction printer.
2. Turn the separator roller until the roller hook can be seen.
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
2.
NOTE: The roller is located approximately 165 mm (6.5 in.) inside the machine as measured from the
face of the paper tray opening.
3. Pull the separator roller hook out of the groove on the axle, and then slide the separator roller to the
left.
4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 to remove the other separator roller from the inside of the multifunction printer.
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Installing the New Separator Roller Inside the Multifunction
Printer
1. Align the hole of the new separator roller with the axle.
2. Slide the separator roller along the axle so the protrusions fit completely into the slots and the roller
hook re-seats into the groove on the axle.
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
3. Replace the tray into the multifunction printer.
Replacing the Transfer Belt Unit
CAUTION: Before performing any of the following procedures, read and follow the safety
instructions in your Owner's Manual or Product Information Guide.
NOTICE: Ensure nothing touches or scratches the surface (black-colored film) of the transfer belt
unit. Scratches, dirt, or oil from your hands on the film of the transfer belt unit may reduce print
quality.
NOTICE: To protect the drums of the print cartridges against bright light, close the front cover within
five minutes. If the front cover remains open for more than five minutes, print quality may
deteriorate.
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Dell transfer belt units are available only through Dell. To order by phone, see "Contacting Dell" in the
Owner's Manual or in this manual. Dell recommends Dell transfer belt units for your multifunction printer.
Dell does not provide warranty coverage for problems caused by using accessories, parts, or components not
supplied by Dell.
Removing the Used Transfer Belt Unit
NOTE: Remove any print jobs from the output tray, and close the multipurpose feeder cover before
opening the front cover.
1. Ensure that the multifunction printer is turned off.
2. Push the button (right side) and open the front cover.
3. Pull up on the belt release levers and rotate the transfer belt unit up as shown in the illustration.
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
CAUTION: Do not touch the inside of the multifunction printer. Some parts may be hot.
Allow time for the multifunction printer to cool before attempting to remove parts in this
area.
4. Hold both sides of the transfer belt unit with both hands and pull up the left side of the unit until the
peg on the left side comes out of the groove. Then, shift the transfer belt unit to the right and remove
the unit from the multifunction printer.
Installing a New Transfer Belt Unit
1.
2.
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
1. Unpack a new transfer belt unit.
2. Insert the left peg into the corresponding left side belt unit hole, then align the right peg with the
groove, and then push down on the right side of the transfer belt unit to seat into place.
3. Close the transfer belt unit by pulling it down until it clicks.
4.
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
4. Remove the film cover from the installed transfer belt unit and discard.
5. Close the front cover.
Adjusting Color Registration
To adjust the color registration when you first install the multifunction printer or after moving it to a new
location, follow the procedure below. See "Operator Panel" and "Color Reg Adjust" for information about the
operator panel.
Printing the Color Registration Chart
Use the operator panel to print the color registration chart.
1.
2.
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
1. Press
until >SETUP appears, and then press
.
2. Press
until >Admin Menu appears, and then press
3. Press
until >Maintenance appears, and then press
4. Press
until >Color Reg Adjust appears, and then press
5. Press
until >ColorRegi Chart appears, and then press
.
.
.
.
The color registration chart is printed.
Determining Values
From the lines to the right of the Y (Yellow), M (Magenta), and C (Cyan) pattern, find the values of the
straightest lines.
NOTE: You can also use the densest colors of the lattice pattern to find the straightest lines. The
colors printed at the highest density are those next to the straightest lines. When 0 is the value
nearest the straightest line, you do not need to adjust the color registration. When the value is not 0,
follow the procedure outlined in "Entering Values".
Entering Values
Using the operator panel, enter the values that you found in the color registration chart to make
adjustments.
1.
2.
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
1. Press
until >SETUP appears, and then press
.
2. Press
until >Admin Menu appears, and then press
3. Press
until >Maintenance appears, and then press
4. Press
until >Color Reg Adjust appears, and then press
5. Press
until >Enter Number appears, and then press
.
.
.
.
The cursor is located at the first digit of the Enter Number.
6. Press
or
until you reach the value (for example, +3) displayed on the chart.
7. Press
once and move the cursor to the next value.
8. Repeat steps 6 and 7 to enter all of the digits of the Enter Number, and then press
9. Press
until >ColorRegi Chart appears, and then press
The color registration chart is printed with the new values.
.
.
10. Color registration adjustment is complete when the straightest Y (Yellow), M (Magenta), and C (Cyan)
lines are next to the 0 line.
CAUTION: After printing the color registration chart, do not turn off the multifunction
printer until the printer motor has stopped running.
NOTE: If 0 is not next to the straightest lines, determine the values and adjust the multifunction
printer again.
Cleaning the scanner
Keeping the scanner clean helps ensure the best possible copies. Dell recommends cleaning the scanner at
the start of each day and during the day, as needed.
1. Slightly dampen a soft lint-free cloth or paper towel with water.
2. Open the document cover.
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
3. Wipe the surface of the document feeder glass and ADF glass until it is clean and dry.
1 White Sheet
NOTE: Handle with care.
2 Document Cover
3 ADF Glass
4 Document Feeder Glass
4. Wipe the underside of the white document cover and white sheet until it is clean and dry.
5. Close the document cover.
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
5.
Cleaning the Roller in the ADF
Keeping the two rollers in the ADF clean helps ensure the best possible copies. Dell recommends cleaning
the rollers at regular intervals.
1. Open the cover of the ADF.
2. Wipe the roller with a dry soft lint-free cloth or paper towel until it is clean.
If the rollers get soiled with ink stains, paper from the ADF may also be soiled. In this case, slightly
dampen a soft lint-free cloth or paper towel with a neutral detergent or water, and then remove the
contamination from the roller until it is clean and dry.
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Removing Options
If the printer location needs to change or the multifunction printer and print media handling options need to
be shipped to a new location, all print media handling options must be removed from the multifunction
printer. For shipping, pack the multifunction printer and print media handling options securely to avoid
damage.
Removing the Optional 550-Sheet Paper Feeder
Removing the Optional Duplexer
Removing the Optional Memory Card
Removing the Optional Multi-Protocol Card
Removing the Wireless Printer Adapter
Removing the Optional 550-Sheet Paper Feeder
NOTE: If you are removing the optional 550-sheet paper feeder, be sure to turn off the multifunction
printer, unplug the power cable, and disconnect all cables from the back of the multifunction printer
before completing these tasks.
1. Turn off the multifunction printer and unplug the printer power cable.
2. Pull the tray out of the multifunction printer until it stops. Hold the tray with both hands, lift the front
slightly, and remove it from the multifunction printer.
3. Remove the two screws joining the multifunction printer and the optional 550-sheet paper feeder by
unscrewing them with a coin or similar object.
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
3.
4. Gently lift the multifunction printer off the tray module, and place it on a level surface.
CAUTION: To lift the multifunction printer safely, remove the print cartridges and lift it with
two people facing the front and back. Never try to lift the multifunction printer while facing
its right and left sides.
5. Insert the tray into the multifunction printer, and push until it stops.
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Removing the Optional Duplexer
NOTICE: Ensure nothing touches or scratches the surface (black-colored film) of the transfer belt
unit. Scratches, dirt, or oil from your hands on the film of the transfer belt unit may reduce print
quality.
NOTICE: To protect the drums of the print cartridges against bright light, close the front cover within
five minutes. If the front cover remains open for more than five minutes, print quality may
deteriorate.
1. Ensure that the multifunction printer is turned off and unplug the power cord from the rear of the
multifunction printer.
2. Push the button (right side) and open the front cover.
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
3. Pull up on the belt release levers and rotate the transfer belt unit up as shown in the illustration.
4. Hold the latch of the duplexer as shown in the following illustration and pull out the duplexer from the
multifunction printer.
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
5. Close the transfer belt unit by pulling it down.
6. Close the front cover.
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Removing the Optional Memory Card
1. Ensure that the multifunction printer is turned off and unplug all cables including the power cord from
the rear of the multifunction printer.
2. Turn the screw on the control board cover gently in a counter-clockwise direction and open the cover.
3. Pull the latches on both edges of the socket outward at the same time to raise the memory card up.
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
4. Hold the memory card and pull it out.
5. Close the control board cover and turn the screw clockwise.
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Removing the Optional Multi-Protocol Card
NOTE: If the optional wireless printer adapter is also installed, it must be removed first.
1. Ensure that the multifunction printer is turned off and unplug all cables including the power cord from
the rear of the multifunction printer.
2. Turn the screw on the control board cover gently in counter-clockwise direction and open the cover.
3. Remove the two screws from the multipurpose card on the back side of the control board.
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
4. Hold the multi-protocol card and remove it from the control board.
5. Close the control board cover and turn the screw clockwise.
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Removing the Wireless Printer Adapter
1. Ensure that the multifunction printer is turned off.
2. Turn the screw on the control board cover gently in a counter-clockwise direction and open the cover.
3. Remove the wireless printer adapter cap from the control board by releasing the cap's hooks.
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
4. Remove the wireless printer adapter from the multifunction printer.
5. Attach the plate by tightening the screw on the back side of the multifunction printer to cover the
wireless printer adapter socket.
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
6. Close the control board cover and turn the screw clockwise.
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Printer Specifications
OS Compatibility
Power Supply
Dimensions
Memory
Page Description Language (PDL)/Emulation, Operating System, and Interface
Environmental
Cables
Copier Specification
Scanner Specification
Facsimile Specifications
OS Compatibility
Your Dell™ Multifunction Color Laser Printer 3115cn is compatible with Windows® (Windows Vista®,
Windows ® XP, Windows XP 64-bit Edition, Windows Server® 2003, Windows Server 2003 Enterprise x64
Edition, Windows Server®2008, Windows Server 2008 Enterprise x64 Edition, Windows 2000, Windows NT®
4.0); Mac OS X3 (10.2.8/10.3.9/10.4.x); Novell®3 (3.X, 4.X, 5.X, 6, 6.5) but not supported1; Linux3 (RedHat
ES 3/4 (English), SuSE 9.2/9.3 (English), TurboLinux 10 Desktop (English)) but not supported2; UNIX3
(RedHat AS 2.1, HP-UX 11.i, Solaris 9/10) (English).
1
Your Dell Multifunction Color Laser Printer 3115cn is compatible with Microsoft, Novell and Linux operating
systems, but Dell technical phone support only supports factory-installed operating systems (Microsoft) for
the first 30 days for free. See http://www1.us.dell.com/content/products/compare.aspx/laser?
c=us&cs=555&l=en&s=biz for more details. The customer will have to purchase technical support from
the manufacturer of the operating system in order to get technical assistance beyond 30 days.
2
If the customer has other operating systems, such as Novell or Linux, and has purchased Gold Technical
Support (for more information on Gold Technical Support, see
http://www1.us.dell.com/content/topics/global.aspx/services/en/gts?
c=us&cs=555&l=en&s=biz), the telephone support will be a "best effort" attempt to resolve the operating
system issue. If the manufacturer needs to be contacted, the customer must pay an additional fee for that
support. The only time that Dell pays for the third party support is when Dell is responsible for the issue. In
the case of getting the multifunction printer installed and working, this is configuration and the customer
would be responsible for paying.
3
Mac OS X, Novell, Linux, and UNIX support network scanning and printing only.
Power Supply
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Rated Voltage
Frequency
Current
220-240 VAC 110-127 VAC
50/60 Hz
50/60 Hz
5A
11 A
Dimensions
Height: 730 mm (28.74 in.) Width: 460 mm (18.11 in.) Depth: 520 mm (20.47 in.)
Weight (not including cartridge): 35 kg (77.2 lb)
Memory
Base memory
128 MB
Maximum memory 1152 MB (128+1024 MB)
Connector
200 pin DDR2 SO-DIMM
DIMM Size
256 MB, 512 MB, 1024 MB
Speed
PC2-3200, PC2-4200, PC2-5300
Page Description Language (PDL)/Emulation, Operating
System, and Interface
PDL/Emulations Adobe PostScript 3, PCL 6, PCL5c
OSes
Microsoft Windows Vista, Windows XP, Windows XP 64-bit Edition, Windows Server 2003,
Windows Server 2003 Enterprise x64 Edition, Windows Server 2008, Windows Server
2008 Enterprise x64 Edition, Windows 2000, Windows NT 4.0, UNIX (Solaris 9/10, HP-UX
11.i), Linux (Red Hat ES 3/4, SuSE 9.2/9.3, TurboLinux 10 Desktop), Mac OS X (10.2.8,
10.3.9, 10.4.x)
Interfaces
Standard local:
USB, IEEE 1284
Standard network:
10Base-T/100Base-TX Ethernet
Optional network:
IEEE802.11b/802.11g (Wireless)
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
MIB Compatibility
A Management Information Base (MIB) is a database containing information about network devices (such as
adapters, bridges, routers, or computers). This information helps network administrators manage the
network (analyze performance, traffic, errors, and so on). Dell Multifunction Color Laser Printer 3115cn
complies with standard industry MIB specifications, allowing the multifunction printer to be recognized and
managed by various printer and network management software systems, such as IBM Tivoli, HewlettPackard OpenView, CA Unicenter, Hewlett-Packard Web JetAdmin, and so on.
Environmental
Operation
Temperature
5-32°C
Relative humidity 15-85% RH (no condensation)
Print Quality Guarantee
Temperature
10-28°C
Relative humidity 15-85% RH (no condensation)
(Temperature should be 28°C or below at 85% RH.)
Storage
Temperature range
-20-40°C (0-104 °F)
Storage humidity range 5-95% RH (no condensation)
Altitude
Operating Up to 3,100 m (10,000 feet)
Storage
70.9275 Kpa
Chemical Emission
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Concentration of ozone 0.019 mg/m3
Cables
Your interconnection cable must meet the following requirements:
Connection type
Connection specifications and symbols
1 Wall jack connector
2 Phone connector
3 USB
USB2.0
4 Parallel
IEEE 1284
5 Wireless
IEEE802.11b/802.11g
6 Ethernet
10 Base-T/100 Base-TX
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Copier Specification
Item
Description
Copy Resolution
Optical: 600 x 600 dpi
Copy Speed
Color 17 cpm, Black&White 30 cpm (In case when scanned from document feeder
glass, and feed paper from standard tray)
Paper Size
A5, A4, B5, Executive, Letter, Legal 13", Legal 14
Zoom Rate
Document feeder glass: 25% - 400%, ADF: 25% - 400%
Multiple copies
1 - 99 pages
Copy mode
(=Original Type)
Text, Text&Photo, Photo, Best
Scanning method
Charge coupled device (CCD) module
Scanner Specification
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Item
Description
Compatibility
TWAIN, WIA (Windows Image Acquisition)
NOTE: WIA is not available for Windows 2000.
Scan Resolution
Optical: 600 x 600 dpi
Enhanced: 9,600 x 9,600 dpi (Gray and Color only in TWAIN)
Color bit depth
24 bit (WIA, TWAIN), 48 bit (TWAIN)
Mono bit depth
1 bit for Line art 8 bit for Gray scale
Effective scanning length Document feeder glass: 297 mm. ADF: 355.6 mm
Effective scanning width
215.9 mm
Scan speed (Text mode)
Monochrome: 469.8 µs/line (300 dpi), 423 µs/line (600 dpi)
Color: 939.8 µs/line (8 bit), 1879.6 µs/line (16 bit)
Facsimile Specifications
Compatibility
ITU-T Group 3
Applicable line
Public Switched Telephone Network (PSTN) or behind PABX
Data coding
MH/MR/MMR/JBIG
Modem speed
33.6 Kbps
Transmission
speed
Approx. 3 seconds/page *Transmission time applies to memory transmission of text
data with ECM compression using only ITU-T No.1 Chart.
Scanning speed
Document glass: approx. 3 seconds/A4 (at standard fax resolution mode) ADF:
approx. 5 seconds/Letter (at standard fax resolution mode), 7.5 seconds/Letter (at
fine fax resolution mode)
Maximum
document length
Document glass: 297 mm ADF: 356 mm
Paper size
Letter, A4, Legal
Resolution
Standard: 203 x 98 dpi, Fine: 203 x 196 dpi, Super Fine: 406 x 392 dpi
User Memory
4 MB (320 pages)
Halftone
256 levels
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Printing With UNIX Filter (UNIX/Linux)
Overview
Installing the UNIX Filter
Uninstalling the UNIX Filter
Printing and Using the Utilities
Precautions and Limitations
Overview
The UNIX Filter
This section describes the features of the UNIX filter and its operating environment.
Features
The UNIX Filter is a utility software which converts files created by the UNIX workstation into a format which
conforms to the PostScript language loaded in the multifunction printer. The utility provides software that
converts text files, SunRaster image files (for Sun/Solaris only), TIFF image files and XWD image files into
the PostScript language program. Also, it makes use of the printer features to output in the following
manner.
Input paper selection
Double-sided printing
Output paper selection
NOTICE: Depending on the configurations of the printers, some may not be able to use the UNIX
filter.
Operating Environment
Text files, SunRaster image files (for Solaris only), TIFF (Tagged Image File Format) image files and XWD (X
Windows Dump) image files received from a workstation connected to the multifunction printer by a USB
cable or parallel cable (hereinafter referred to as the local workstation), or from one located on the network
(hereinafter referred to as the remote workstation), can be converted into the PostScript language program
and output to the multifunction printer.
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
In addition, it can also be used in an environment where a multifunction printer, installed with an interface
board, is connected directly to the network.
Before Using UNIX Filter
Check the following items before using the UNIX filter.
Before setting up the workstation, set up the multifunction printer as follows:
1. Ensure that the lpd port is working or not when using the network environment. If the lpd port is not
working, set LPD to On on the operator panel. (Mandatory) See "Protocol" for more information.
When a parallel or USB port is to be used, ensure that the USB ports are working. (Mandatory)
2. Set up IP address and subnet mask when the multifunction printer is used in the network environment.
(Mandatory)
3. Make TBCP (Tagged Binary Communication Protocol) Filter function available if TBCP (Tagged Binary
Communication Protocol) Filter function is installed on the multifunction printer. See "Adobe Protocol"
for more information.
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Installing the UNIX Filter
Before Installation
The following are required for the installation.
Supported operating system is described in "Page Description Language (PDL)/Emulation, Operating
System, and Interface".
Disk capacity: 20 MB of free disk space required, including temporary working space for installation.
Log on as a root account to perform the operation here. If you have no root privilege, contact your
system administrator.
Output printer must be registered in the workstation before using UNIX filter. (HP-UX)
Use sam command for registration of output printer.
For more information, see the HP-UX related manual.
Files Added by the Installation
The following files will be added when the UNIX filter is installed.
Solaris
Directory
File name
/usr/local/dellbin3115 txt2ps2
Contents
Text conversion utility
sunras2ps2
SunRaster conversion utility
tiff2ps2
TIFF conversion utility
xwd2ps2
XWD conversion utility
dellpsif
Input filter
/usr/lib/lp/postscript dellposttxt3115cn
Symbolic link file to call txt2ps2
dellpostps3115cn
Symbolic link file to call dellpsif
dellbinpath3115
Directory description file for the UNIX filter print tool
/usr/lib/lp/model
Model interface
program
Source file of the model interface program (stored as
the printer name during registration)
/etc/lp/interfaces
Model interface
program
Interface program for PRINTER (stored as the printer
name during registration)
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
/etc/lp/fd
/usr/share/man/man1
posttxt3115cn.fd
Filter description file for txt2ps2
dell3115cn.fd
dell3115cn filter description file for Dell Multifunction
Color Laser Printer 3115cn
postio3115.fd
postio3115 Filter description file
download3115.fd
download3115 filter description file
txt2ps23115cn.1
Manual page file for txt2ps2
sunras2ps23115cn.1
Manual page file for sunras2ps2
tiff2ps23115cn.1
Manual page file for tiff2ps2
xwd2ps23115cn.1
Manual page file for xwd2ps2
dellpsif3115cn.1
Manual page file for dellpsif
NOTE: The directories listed are default directories.
Linux
Directory
File name
Contents
/usr/local/dellbin3115 txt2ps2
Text conversion utility
tiff2ps2
TIFF conversion utility
xwd2ps2
XWD conversion utility
printcap. sample
Printcap file sample
dellpsif
Input Filter
.dellpsdefault3115 Default command option file
/usr/share/man/man1
txt2ps23115cn.1
Manual page file for txt2ps2
tiff2ps23115cn.1
Manual page file for tiff2ps2
xwd2ps23115cn.1
Manual page file for xwd2ps2
dellpsif3115cn.1
Manual page file for dellpsif
NOTE: The directories listed are default directories.
HP-UX
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Directory
File name
Contents
/usr/local/dellbin3115
txt2ps2
Text conversion utility
xwd2ps2
XWD conversion utility
tiff2ps2
TIFF conversion utility
dellbinpath3115
Directory description file for the UNIX filter print tool
/usr/lib/lp/postscript
/usr/spool/lp/interface Model interface
program
/usr/share/man/man1
Interface program for PRINTER (stored as the printer
name during registration)
txt2ps23115cn.1
Manual page file for txt2ps2
tiff2ps23115cn.1
Manual page file for tiff2ps2
xwd2ps23115cn.1
Manual page file for xwd2ps2
NOTE: The directories listed are default directories.
Installation Procedure Overview
This section provides information on the installation of the UNIX filter using the UNIX workstation.
Linux
1. Setup the multifunction printer and network.
2. Insert the Drivers and Utilities CD into the local workstation.
3. Run the installer and begin the installation.
4. Edit /etc/printcap and print for testing the multifunction printer.
Solaris
1. Setup the multifunction printer and network.
2. Insert the Drivers and Utilities CD into the local workstation.
3. Run the installer and begin the installation.
4. Print for testing the multifunction printer.
HP-UX
1. Setup the multifunction printer and network.
2.
3.
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
1.
2. Insert the Drivers and Utilities CD into the local workstation.
3. Run the installer and begin the installation.
4. Print for testing the multifunction printer.
Operation on Linux
Installation of Software
1. Insert the Drivers and Utilities CD in the CD-ROM drive of the local workstation.
If CD-ROM drive is not mounted on your workstation, extract files by using another workstation that
has a CD-ROM drive to transfer those files to your workstation.
2. Log on as a root account and extract the installation script from the Drivers and Utilities CD.
NOTICE: If you have no root privilege, contact your system administrator.
#
#
#
#
mount /dev/cdrom /mnt/cdrom
cd /tmp
cp /mnt/cdrom/UXFILTER.tar /tmp
tar xvf ./UXFILTER.tar
NOTE: CD-ROM is sometimes mounted automatically.
3. Type ./install.sh and run the installer.
#./install.sh
4. Select the printer model to install.
Printer Model?
1. Dell MFP Color Laser 3115cn
2. Exit
Enter Process No(1/2)? : 1
5. It asks whether you want to install the filter. Type <y>.
Install Filter? (y/n) [y] : y
NOTE: If [ ] appears in a message, the default value will appear inside the [ ]. It will be selected when
you press the <Enter> key.
The disk status on the workstation appears. 20 MB of free disk space is required for the installation of
the filter.
6.
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
6. Specify the directory to install the filter. To install into /usr/local/dellbin3115, press the <Enter>
key. To change the directory, specify one. Change the directory to.
Enter Library directory name [/usr/local/dellbin3115]
7. Confirm the directory to be installed.
directory is '/usr/local/dellbin3115' (y/n)[n] : y
The software installation is complete.
Setting the Multifunction Printer
Write system settings in /etc/printcap or /etc/printcap.local
referencing/usr/local/dellbin3115/printcap.sample.
Linux (LPRng):
/etc/printcap.local or /etc/printcap
lp:\
:bk:\
:bkf:\
:lpd_bounce=true:\
:sd=/var/spool/lpd/lp:\
:af=/var/spool/lpd/lp/lp.acct:\
:lf=/var/spool/lpd/lp/log:\
:rm=PrinterHostName:\
:rp=ps:\
:if=/usr/local/dellbin3115/dellpsif:
NOTICE: The directory to spool can be created in the partition with sufficient disk space. If there is
no spooling directory, it is not possible to print large files.
NOTICE: The account files or logging files can be created with the file name specified in the directory
path specified.
Operation on Solaris
Installation/System Setting
1. Insert the Drivers and Utilities CD in the CD-ROM drive of the local workstation.
If CD-ROM drive is not mounted on your workstation, extract files by using another workstation that
has a CD-ROM drive to transfer those files to your workstation.
2.
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
2. Log on as a root account and extract the installation script from the Drivers and Utilities CD.
NOTICE: If you have no root privilege, contact your system administrator.
# cd /tmp
# cp /cdrom/cdrom0/UXFILTER.tar /tmp
# tar xvf ./UXFILTER.tar
3. Type ./install.sh and run the installer.
# ./install.sh
4. Select the printer model to install.
Printer Model ?
1. Dell MFP Color Laser 3115cn
2. Exit
Enter Process No (1/2)? : 1
5. The following menu appears. Select <1> and set up the local printer.
Solaris Installation for Dell MFP Laser Printer 3115cn Type Printer
1. Set Local Printer
2. Set Remote Printer
Enter Process No (1/2)? : 1
6. Type the device name of the connection port.
Enter port-device-name? [/dev/ecpp0] : /dev/bpp0
NOTICE: Specify the device file in the communication port available.
7. When Set Remote Printer is selected, type the host name of the server or the host name of the
multifunction printer.
Enter server-hostname? : server
server-hostname is 'server' (y/n)[y] : y
NOTICE: The host name of the server must be pre-registered with DNS, NIS, NIS+ or /etc/hosts.
8. When Set Remote Printer is selected, type the remote printer name.
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
8.
Enter server-printer-name? : ps
server-printer-name is 'ps' (y/n)[y] : y
NOTICE: Type ps when the multifunction printer is a network connection printer.
9. Type the printer name to be registered with the system.
Enter printer-name? [dell3115cn] : dell3115cn
Printer-name is 'dell3115cn' (y/n)[y] : y
10. Specify the directory to install the utility. To install into /usr/local/dellbin3115, press the <Enter>
key. To change the directory, specify one.
Enter Binary directory name? [/usr/local/dellbin3115] :
11. If this utility has been installed earlier, the user will be prompted whether to overwrite the earlier
version.
directory is '/usr/local/dellbin3115' (y/n)[n] : y
12. If the server input at 5 the multifunction printer connected by the network, type <y>. If the server and
the multifunction printer are connected locally, type <n>.
'dell3115cn'is network printer?:(y/n)[y] : y
The software installation is complete.
NOTICE: When the printing settings are modified or changed by the Administration Tool (admintool)
after the installation, printing may not work.
Operation on HP-UX
Installation Procedure
NOTE: The host name of the output printer which you want to specify in 6 must be pre-registered
with a sam command.
1. Insert the rivers and utilities CD into the CD-ROM drive of the local workstation.
2. Log on as a root account and extract the installation script from the Drivers and Utilities CD.
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
2.
NOTICE: If you have no root privilege, contact your system administrator.
#
#
#
#
mount -F cdfs -o cdcase /dev/dsk/c1t2d0 /cdrom
cd /tmp
cp /cdrom/uxfilter.tar /tmp
tar xvf UXFILTER.tar
NOTE: /dev/ds/clt2d0 is an example. Specify the CD-ROM device file for all workstations.
3. Type ./install.sh and run the installer.
# ./install.sh
4. Select the printer model to install.
Printer Model ?
1. Dell MFP Color Laser 3115cn
2. Exit
Enter Process No (1/2)? : 1
5. Specify the directory to install the utility.
Enter install directory name /usr/local/dellbin3115] :
directory is '/usr/local/dellbin3115' (y/n)[n]: y
6. Type the name of the output printer. Type delllp3115cn. Type the printer name to be registered with
the system.
Enter output-printer-name? : delllp3115cn
output-printer-name is 'delllp3115cn' (y/n)[y]: y
NOTE: The registered printer name can be verified by executing lpstat -v.
7. Type the logical printer name. Register dell3115cn. Type a printer name that has not already been
registered with the system.
Enter logical-printer-name? : dell3115cn
Printer-name is 'dell3115cn' (y/n)[y]: y
8. The utility will be installed in the directory specified at 5. Registration will be executed here so that the
logical printer registered at 7 can access the utility. As this process is automatically executed, no input
is required. With the above steps, the installation is complete.
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Uninstalling the UNIX Filter
About Uninstalling
The UNIX filter does not come with an uninstaller. To uninstall the UNIX filter, follow the following procedure.
NOTICE: Log on as a root account to perform the operation here. If you have no root privilege,
contact your system administrator.
Linux
1. Delete the descriptions for each multifunction printer from /etc/printcap.
2. Delete the added spool directory.
3. Restart lpd.
4. Delete all the directories that contain the UNIX filters and the files in these directories created during
the installation. The following directories must be deleted.
/usr/local/dellbin3115
The above directories are standard directories created during the installation. If you had specified other
directories for the installation, delete those directories.
Solaris
1. Delete the multifunction printer that was registered with the system. Use the printer name created
during the installation and the lpadmin command.
# lpadmin -x printername
2. Delete the filters registered with the system. Delete the filters registered during the installation using
the lpfilter command.
#
#
#
#
lpfilter
lpfilter
lpfilter
lpfilter
-f
-f
-f
-f
dell3115cn -x (for Dell Multifunction Color Laser Printer 3115cn)
download3115 -x
postio3115cn -x
posttxt3115cn -x
3. Delete the symbolic files required to call up the filter.
Delete the following files from /usr/lib/lp/postscript.
dellposttxt3115cn
dellpostps3115cn
dellbinpath3115
4.
5.
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
4. Delete the interface program files of Selected printer type name from /usr/lib/lp/model.
Please also delete the interface program files of Selected printer name from /etc/lp/interfaces.
5. Delete all the directories that contain the UNIX filters and the files in these directories created during
the installation. The following directories must be deleted.
/usr/local/dellbin3115
6. Delete the filter description files. Delete the following files from /etc/lp/fd.
Filter description files for various printers.
dell3115cn.fd (for Dell Multifunction Color Laser Printer 3115cn)
download3115.fd
postio3115cn.fd
posttxt3115cn.fd
HP-UX
1. Delete the multifunction printer that was registered with the system. Use the sam command to delete
the printer set up during the installation.
# sam
2. Delete all the directories that contain the UNIX filters and the files in these directories created during
the installation. The following directories must be deleted.
/usr/local/dellbin3115 (directory specified during the installation)
Printing and Using the Utilities
Printing (Linux)
This section provides information on printing with the filter.
To print, specify the multifunction printer registered with /etc/printcap as the output destination.
Printing From Linux
To print to the default printer:
If the multifunction printer is registered as the default printer, the name of the multifunction printer
can be shortened and specified as shown in the following example.
% lpr filename
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
To print to other multifunction printer:
To print to a multifunction printer named dell3115cn, type as follows:
% lpr -Pdell3115cn filename
To select a paper tray for printing:
To select a paper tray for printing, the .dellpsdefault3115 file must be executed in advance to define
the multifunction printer which uses the desired paper tray.
To select tray 2 (optional 550-sheet paper feeder) for printing, execute the .dellpsdefault3115 file and
define the multifunction printer so that it feeds paper from tray 2. Specify tray2, which is the defined
printer name, as follows:
% lpr -Ptray2 filename
About /usr/local/dellbin3115/.dellpsdefault3115:
This is the file for system default settings when using various utilities via /etc/printcap. Hereinafter,
it is referred to as the default command option setting file.
Method:
To define a multifunction printer named a4d which prints on A4 with the long-edge binding feature turned
on, follow the following steps.
Procedure:
1. Register the printer a4d with /etc/printcap.
Linux (LPRng):
/etc/printcap.local or /etc/printcap
a4d:\
:bk:\
:bkf:\
:lpd_bounce=true:\
:sd=/var/spool/lpd/a4d:\
:af=/var/spool/lpd/a4d/a4d.acct:\
:lf=/var/spool/lpd/a4d/log:\
:rm=PrinterHostName:\
:rp=ps:\
:if=/usr/local/dellbin3115/dellpsif_a4d:
2. Log on as the root account and create the symbolic links for dellpsif_a4d of IF Filter for printing on
A4 with the long-edge binding feature turned on.
# ln -s /usr/local/dellbin3115/dellpsif /usr/local/dellbin3115/dellpsif_a4d
3.
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
3. Add the following descriptions to the default command option setting file that specifies the user defined
commands of the dellpsif_a4d of IF Filter.
/usr/local/dellbin3115/.dellpsdefault3115
dellpsif_a4d -IA4 -D
4. When the printer name a4d is specified, printing can be done on A4 with the long-edge binding feature
turned on.
% lpr -Pa4d filename
Printing (Solaris)
This section provides information on printing that makes use of the filter. To print from Solaris, specify the
multifunction printer registered during the installation of filters as the output destination.
NOTICE: To use the lp command, ensure that the operating environment of the spooler has been set
up correctly (enabled, available) using the lpstat command (lpstat-p all). For details on the
options of the lp command and the lpstat command or how to make use of them, see the related
manuals of Solaris.
Printing From Solaris
To print to the default printer:
If the multifunction printer is registered as the default printer, the name of the multifunction printer
can be shortened and specified as shown in the following example.
% lp filename
To print to other printers:
To print to a multifunction printer named dell3115cn, type as follows:
% lp -d dell3115cn filename
NOTE: The name of the printer can be confirmed by executing lpstat -v.
To change the default printer temporarily for printing:
To change the default printer, set the printer name in the environment variable LPDEST.
To set a multifunction printer named dell3115cn as the default printer for printing, type as follows:
% setenv LPDEST dell3115cn
% lp filename
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
NOTE: Using this method, a default printer can be set up for each user.
NOTE: The above example describes the setup method executed when csh is used.
To select a paper tray for printing:
To select a paper tray for printing, specify the paper tray after the -y option of the lp command.
NOTE: Depending on installed options, the available paper trays are different.
To set a multifunction printer named dell3115cn as the default printer for printing, type as follows:
% lp -d dell3115cn -y landscape -y letter filename
The following options can be specified by the lp command.
To print text files:
NOTE: It prints according to the length and width specified by the lpadmin command.
-y double
Sets printing to two-column printing.
-y landscape
Rotates the image by 90° and uses the paper in the landscape orientation.
-y size=n
Sets the font size to n point.
-y outcolumn=n
This option converts text to single-byte text and sets printing to start from the nth column.
-y outline=n
Sets printing to start from the nth line.
-y font=font
Sets the font for printing single-byte alphanumeric characters. If the font specified is not
available for the multifunction printer, the default fonts are used.
NOTE: To specify a font, type the font name as-is after the -y font= option.
% lp -y font=Courier-Oblique filename
NOTE: For information on the available fonts, see the PS Fonts List.
-y margin=u:b:r:l
Specifies the margin of a page in inches. The u (upper margin), b (bottom margin), r (right
margin), and l (left margin) are positive real numbers (up to two decimal points). The default is
0.
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
-y ps
The input file will be processed as the PostScript file. If the file does not begin with "%!", "%!"
will be output to the beginning line. Whether the file contains "%!" will be ignored.
To print text/PostScript files:
-y DuplexBook
Enables the long-edge binding feature. When it is specified, the printing direction or position will
be adjusted and both sides of the paper printed so that the longer edge of the pages can be
bound.
-y DuplexList
Enables the short-edge binding feature. When it is specified, the printing direction or position
will be adjusted and both sides of the paper printed so that the shorter edge of the pages can
be bound.
-y tray-input
The paper tray-related parameters that can be specified by the lp command are as follows:
tray1
Feed paper from tray 1 (Standard 250-sheet tray).
tray2
Feed paper from tray 2 (Optional 550-sheet paper feeder).
a4
Feed paper from the tray loaded with A4 (210 x 297 mm).
a5
Feed paper from the tray loaded with A5 (148 x 210 mm).
b5
Feed paper from the tray loaded with B5 (182 x 257 mm).
letter
Feed paper from the tray loaded with Letter (8.5 x 11 inches).
folio
Feed paper from the tray loaded with Folio (8.5 x 13 inches).
legal
Feed paper from the tray loaded with Legal (8.5 x 14 inches).
executive
Feed paper from the tray loaded with Executive (7.25 x 10.5 inches).
monarch
Feed paper from the tray loaded with Monarch (3.875 x 7.5 inches).
com10
Feed paper from the tray loaded with Envelope #10 (4.125 x 9.5 inches).
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
dl
Feed paper from the tray loaded with DL (110 x 220 mm).
c5
Feed paper from the tray loaded with C5 (162 x 229 mm).
MxNmm
Feed paper from the tray loaded with MxNmm defined by users.
Possible range specified:
Width: 76.2-220.0 mm
Length: 98.0-355.6 mm
MxNin
Feed paper from the tray loaded with MxNinches defined by users.
Possible range specified:
Width: 3.00-8.66 inches
Length: 3.86-14.0 inches
If this option is not specified or the tray specified tray is not available, feed paper from the
default tray.
-y toner_save
Turns on the save toner mode for printing. The print result will be fainter than that of normal
printing.
-y nc=n
Specifies the number of output copies (the value of copies must be a positive integer). If this
option is not specified, 1 will be selected.
-y cl
Specifies that printing be collated. If the copies option is not specified, this option will be
ignored.
-y ps
The input file will be processed as the PostScript file. If the file does not begin with %!, %! will
be output to the beginning line. If a file contains %!, this option will be ignored.
-y msi
Specifies multipurpose feeder.
-y m=type
Specifies multipurpose feeder Paper Type.
Available multipurpose feeder Paper Types are as follows:
B
FinePaper/Bond/Plain Paper 2
BB
FinePaperBack/Bond/Plain Paper 2 - Side 2
P
Stationary/Plain/Plain Paper 1
PB
StationaryBack/Plain/Plain Paper 1 - Side 2
H1
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
ThickPaper/Heavyweight 1/Covers 1
H1B
ThickPaperBack/Heavyweight 1/Covers 1 - Side 2
H2
ThickPaper2/Heavyweight 2/Covers 2
H2B
ThickPaper2Back/Heavyweight 2/Covers 2 - Side 2
OHP
Transparency
L
LabelPaper/Labels
C2
Coated/Coated 2/Coated Paper 2
C2B
Coated Back/Coated 2/Coated Paper 2- Side 2
C3
Coated Thick/Coated 3/Coated Paper 3
C3B
Coated Thick Back/Coated 3/Coated Paper 3- Side 2
E
Envelope
If this option is not specified, multipurpose feeder Paper Type for the multifunction printer can
be used.
-y mfo=mode
Specifies orientation for multipurpose feeder.
Available orientations for multipurpose feeder are as follows:
le
Landscape
ler
Landscape (Rotated)
se
Portrait
ser
Portrait (Rotated)
-y po=n
Specifies alternate tray.
Available alternate trays are as follows:
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
0
Use system settings
1
Display message
2
Feed from multipurpose feeder
3
Use nearest size (Adjust to fit)
4
Use larger size (Adjust to fit)
5
Use nearest size (No zoom)
6
Use larger size (No zoom)
-y st=mode
Specifies feed separators from.
Available feed separators from the following:
auto
AutoTray/Auto
1
1stTray/Tray 1 (Standard 250-sheet tray)
2
2ndTray/Tray 2 (Optional 550-sheet paper feeder)
off
Off
-y sp
Specifies printed separators.
-y sb
Specifies Skip Blank Pages.
-y cm=mode
Specifies output color.
Available output colors are as follows:
c
Color (CMYK)
k
Black
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
-y pr=mode
Specifies print mode.
Available print modes are as follows:
hs
High speed
hq
High quality
-y cc=mode
Specifies image types.
Available image types are as follows:
0
Off
1
Photo
2
sRGB
3
Standard/ Normal
4
Presentation
This option is available only for color printing and when entry data is RGB data.
-y gc=mode
Specifies RGB gamma correction.
Available RGB gamma corrections are as follows:
1.0
1.0
1.4
1.4
1.8
1.8
2.2
2.2
2.6
2.6
off
Off
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
This option is available only for color printing and when entry data is RGB data.
-y sc=mode
Specifies screen.
Available screens are as follows:
0
Fineness
1
Gradation
2
Auto
3
For Transparency
-y gg=mode
Specifies gray guaranteed.
Available gray guaranteed modes are as follows:
on
On
off
Off
This option is available only for color printing.
-y ct
Specifies color transformation.
This option is available only for color printing.
-y br=mode
Specifies brightness adjustment.
Available brightness adjustment option value are as follows:
+5
Bright 5
+4
Bright 4
+3
Bright 3
+2
Bright 2
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
+1
Bright 1
+0
Normal
-1
Dark 1
-2
Dark 2
-3
Dark 3
-4
Dark 4
-5
Dark 5
-y rgbc=mode
Specifies RGB color correction.
Available RGB color corrections are as follows.
10
Perceptual
11
Saturation
12
Relative Colorimetric
13
Absolute Colorimetric
This option is available only for color printing and when entry data is RGB data.
-y rgbpr=mode
Specifies RGB input profile.
Available RGB input profile option value are as follows:
0
sRGB
1
AdobeRGB
This option is available only for color printing and when entry data is RGB data.
-y rgbtb=mode
Specifies RGB color temperature.
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Available RGB color temperature option value are as follows:
5000
5000K
6000
6000K
9300
9300K
This option is available only for color printing and when entry data is RGB data.
-y cb=cyan-low:cyan-middle:cyan-high:magenta-low:magenta-middle:magenta-high:yellowlow:yellow-middle:yellow high:black-low:black-middle:black-high
Specifies adjustment value for color balance of each color/density:
Available adjustment values are as follows:
+3
Dark 3
+2
Dark 2
+1
Dark 1
0
Normal
-1
Light 1
-2
Light 2
-3
Light 3
-Cb
Option value must be specified in the following order:
Cyan low density, Cyan medium density, Cyan high density, Magenta low density, Magenta
medium density, Magenta high density, Yellow low density, Yellow medium density, Yellow high
density, Black low density, Black medium density, Black high density
If no value is specified, it is treated as "0"(Normal).
For example, if you want to specify "Light 2" for Cyan medium density, "Dark 3" for Yellow high
density, and "Dark 2" for Black low density, it can be specified using either of the following:
-Cb=0:-2:0:0:0:0:0:0:+3:+2:0:0
-Cb=:-2:::::::+3:+2::
-y -hld=PrintType:UserID:Password:DocumentName
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Secure Print
PrintType
store
Secure Print/Store Print
proof
Proof Print
UserID
Up to eight single-byte characters from 0x20 to 0x7E, except 0x20 " " (blank) and 0x3A":"
(colon).
Password
Up to 12 single-byte characters from 0x30 to 0x39 (numeric characters).
DocumentName
Up to 12 single-byte characters from 0x20 to 0x7E, except 0x20 " " (blank) and 0x3A":"
(colon).
Secure Print
-y hld=store:UserID:Password:DocumentName
-y hld=store:UserID:Password:
Store Print
-y hld=store:UserID::DocumentName
-y hld=store:UserID::
Proof Print
-y hld=proof:UserID::DocumentName
-y hld=proof:UserID::
-y -jown= jobownername: Password Authentication Setting
Specifies the job owner name and password for authentication.
When only job owner name is specified (-Jown=jobownername:) (no password specified),
authentication password is treated as not specified.
When only password is specified (-Jown=:password) (no job owner name specified), login
user name is used as job owner name. Entered password is used as authentication
password.
When neither of job owner name nor password is specified (-Jown=:), login user name is
used as job owner name, and authentication password is treated as not specified.
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
When a job owner name exceeds allowable character length, the extra characters are
ignored.
When an unacceptable character is specified for job owner name, "Unknown User" is used
as job owner name.
NOTE: Characters acceptable for job owner name are alphanumeric characters and symbols, except
for space and colon.
NOTE: Up to 32 characters are acceptable for job owner name.
When an unacceptable character is specified for password, or when a specified password is
not within the range of the allowable character length, the authentication password is
treated as not specified.
NOTE: Only numbers are acceptable for password.
NOTE: Acceptable password length is between 4 and 12 characters.
Incomplete form of -Jown option is treated as no authentication setting being made. In such
case, if authentication setting is made with the environmental variable, it is used as setting
information.
Printing (HP-UX)
This section provides information on printing from the registered logical printer during the installation.
Printing From HP-UX
To print to the default printer:
If the multifunction printer is registered as the default printer, the name of the multifunction printer
can be shortened and specified as shown in the following example.
% lp filename
To print to other printers:
To print to a multifunction printer named dell3115cn, type as follows:
% lp -d dell3115cn filename
To change the default printer temporarily for printing:
To change the default printer, set the printer name in the environment variable PRINTER.
To set a multifunction printer named dell3115cn as the default printer for printing, type as follows:
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
% setenv PRINTER dell3115cn
% lp filename
To print with added options:
To print with the options, specify the option of the lp command using -o as follows:
The available options are the same as txt2ps2/tiff2ps/xwd2ps2.
Depending on installed options, the available paper trays are different.
%lp -d dell3115cn -o r -o ILT filename
To print using file format:
To print text files:
% lp -d dell3115cn filename
To print XWD files:
% lp -d dell3115cn -o XWD filename
To print TIFF format files:
% lp -d dell3115cn -o TIF filename
To print PostScript files:
% lp -d dell3115cn filename
To print PostScript files as text files:
% lp -d dell3115cn -o TX filename
However, for PostScript files with options set up, such as paper selection, etc., when the same option
is specified, it will be ignored.
Authentication Printing
This section provides information on how to specify the user name and password used for
authentication printing in the environment variable.
Specifying the User Name
To specify the User Name for Authentication Printing:
You can specify a unique user name in the environment variable as follows:
% setenv JOWN3115U " jobownername"
You can specify the login name as the user name as follows:
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
% setenv JOWN3115U ""
NOTE: Up to 32 characters are acceptable for the user name. When a user name exceeds allowable
character length, the extra characters are ignored.
NOTE: If you specify the filter option when authentication printing is already specified, the filter option
has the higher priority over authentication printing.
Specifying the Password
To Specify the Password for Authentication Printing:
If you need to specify the password in authentication printing, you can specify the password in the
environment variable as follows:
% setenv JOWN3115P "password"
If you do not specify the password inexplicitly, type as follows:
% setenv JOWN3115P ""
NOTE: Acceptable password length is between 4 and 12 characters. When an unacceptable character
is specified for password, or when a specified password is not within the range of the allowable
character length, the extra characters are ignored.
NOTE: If you specify the filter option when authentication printing is already specified, the filter option
has the higher priority over authentication printing.
NOTE: If you only specify the password without specifying the user name in the environment variable,
the login name is assumed as the user name.
NOTICE: If you enter the password in the login file for automatically allocating the environment
variable when you log in, you are recommended to specify the appropriate access privilege that
prevents unauthorized users from reading the login file.
txt2ps2 (Linux/Solaris/HP-UX)
Format
/usr/local/dellbin3115/txt2ps2 [-d] [-D] [-Itray-input] [-t] [-2] [-r] [-F] [-llines] [wcolumns] [-ooutcolumns] [-Loutlines] [-en] [-ssize] [-E] [-ffont] [-Nc=copies] [-cl] [-ps]
[-mg=up:bottom:right:left] [-Hd=position:format:page] [-Hffont] [-MSI] [-M=type] [-Mfo=mode]
[-Pon] [-St=mode] [-Sp] [-Sb] [-Cm=mode] [-Pr=mode] [-Cc=mode] [-Gc=mode] [-Sc=mode] [Gg=mode] [-Cb=cyan-low:cyan-middle:cyan-high:magenta-low:magenta-middle:magenta-high:yellowlow;yellow-middle:yellow high:black-low:black-middle:black-high] [Hld=PrintType:UserID:Password:DocumentName] [-Jown=jobownername:password] [filename...]
Function
Reads text, converts it to the PostScript language program, and writes to standard output. If the filename is
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
not specified, the standard input will be taken as the command input.
By typing character strings in the environmental variable TXT2PS2OPTION, the input of option at the
command line can be omitted.
At the environmental variable TXT2PS2OPTION and the command line, if no option is specified, the
multifunction printer will output in 10-point font size in the portrait orientation.
At the environmental variable TXT2PS2OPTION and the command line, if the same option is specified, the one
specified at the command line will prevail.
txt2ps2 outputs the PostScript language program that adjusts the line/column according to the paper size.
For this reason, the user need not be aware of the paper size. If there is an option to specify the
line/column, automatic line feed according to the paper size will not be executed. Printing will be output
according to the line/column specified.
txt2ps2 interprets the following control codes. Other control codes/undefined codes will be converted to octal
numbers and output as-is.
LF
Line feed
FF
Form feed (modifiable by option)
TAB
8-column tab stop (modifiable by option)
BS
Backspace 1 character
Option
-d
Enables the short-edge binding feature. When it is specified, the printing direction or position will be
adjusted and both sides of the paper printed so that the shorter edge of the pages can be bound. This
option is available only when optional duplexer is installed on the multifunction printer.
-D
Enables the long-edge binding feature. When it is specified, the printing direction or position will be
adjusted and both sides of the paper printed so that the longer edge of the pages can be bound. This
option is available only when optional duplexer is installed on the multifunction printer.
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
-Itray-input
Specifies the paper tray. A paper tray can be selected by directly specifying a tray or by specifying a
paper size.
When a paper size is specified, the tray loaded with paper of the specified size will be found and
selected automatically.
The parameters for selecting a paper tray are as follows:
1
Feed paper from tray 1 (Standard 250-sheet tray).
2
Feed paper from tray 2 (Optional 550-sheet paper feeder).
A4
Feed paper from the tray loaded with A4 (210 x 297 mm).
A5
Feed paper from the tray loaded with A5 (148 x 210 mm).
B5
Feed paper from the tray loaded with B5 (182 x 257 mm).
LT
Feed paper from the tray loaded with Letter (8.5 x 11 inches).
FL
Feed paper from the tray loaded with Folio (8.5 x 13 inches).
LG
Feed paper from the tray loaded with Legal (8.5 x 14 inches).
EX
Feed paper from the tray loaded with Executive (7.25 x 10.5 inches).
MO
Feed paper from the tray loaded with Monarch (3.875 x 7.5 inches).
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
COM10
Feed paper from the tray loaded with Envelope #10 (4.125 x 9.5 inches).
DL
Feed paper from the tray loaded with DL (110 x 220 mm).
C5
Feed paper from the tray loaded with C5 (162 x 229 mm).
MxNmm
Feed paper from the tray loaded with MxNmm defined by users.
Possible range specified:
Width: 76.2-220.0 mm
Length: 98.0-355.6 mm
MxNin
Feed paper from the tray loaded with MxNinches defined by users.
Possible range specified:
Width: 3.00-8.66 inches
Length: 3.86-14.0 inches
If this option is not specified or the tray specified is not available, feed paper from the default tray.
-t
Turns on the save toner mode for printing. The print result will be fainter than that of normal printing.
In some cases, this option will be ignored.
-2
Sets printing to two-column printing.
-r
Rotates the image by 90° and uses the paper in the landscape orientation.
-F
Ignores the form feed code (FF).
-llines
Specifies the number of lines per page.
-wcolumns
Specifies the number of columns per line.
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
-ooutcolumns
Converts print data to single-byte text and sets printing to start from outcolumns.
-Loutlines
Prints text from the outline columns.
-en
Expands horizontal tabs to n columns (space). The default is 8.
-ssize
Specifies the font size as point size. The default is 10.
-E
This function turns on the image enhancement function. For models without the image enhancement
mechanism, this option will be ignored.
-ffont
Sets the font.
NOTE: The available fonts are limited to the font in the multifunction printer. For more information,
see "Understanding Fonts."
-Nc=copies
Specifies the number of output copies (the value of copies must be a positive integer).
-cl
Specifies that printing be collated. If the copies option is not specified, this option will be ignored.
-ps
The input file will be processed as the PostScript file. If the file does not begin with %!, %! will be
output to the beginning line. If a file contains %!, it will be processed in the same way as dellpsif.
-mg=up:bottom:right:left
Specifies the margin of a page in inches. The upper margin, bottom margin, right margin, and left
margin are positive real numbers (up to two decimal points). The default is 0.
-mg=0:0:0:3
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Sets the left margin to 3 inches.
-mg=3:3:0:5
Sets the upper margin to 3 inches; bottom margin, 3 inches; and left margin, 5 inches. If the
margin is 0, it can be omitted.
-mg=:::3
Sets the left margin to 3 inches.
-Hd=position:format:page
Specifies the position that the user information of the header or footer is output at.
position specifies output position. But this option is available only for converting text files.
ul
Output on the upper left corner of the paper.
ur
Output on the upper right corner of the paper.
dl
Output on the lower left corner of the paper.
dr
Output on the lower right corner of the paper.
format specifies the contents and the order to output. This option is omissible.
If this option is omitted, uh is specified as the default value.
u
User name
h
Host name
t
Date and time
If the output contents are specified as tuh, it is output as follows:
Date and Time User: username Host: hostname
page specifies the page to output. This option is omissible.
f
Output the top page only.
(default in case of PostScriptfiles conversion)
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
a
Output all pages.
(default in case of Text files conversion)
Specify these options as follows:
In the case that convert text file, output the host name following the user name on the upper right
corner of the paper, output all pages.
(User name, Host name, all page output are default)
-Hd=ur
-Hd=ur:uh
-Hd=ur:uh:a
In the case that convert PostScript file, output the host name following the date and time on the lower
left corner of the paper, output all pages (a option value is necessary because output the top page
only is default when PostScript file is converted.)
-Hd=dl:th:a
NOTICE: If the paper size is not specified, it outputs the header and footer at the position of A4 size
by default. If the paper size is specified by lp command, the output position of the header or footer is
not changed from the position of the paper size specified by txt2ps2. Specify the paper size at the
same time when the header and footer option is used. Sometimes all pages are not printed despite
specifying all page output when PostScript file conversion is specified. In such cases, specify output
the top page only. By using TZ environmental variable, specify time zone (GMT etc.).
-Hffont
Specify the font to print the header and footer. European fonts the same as half size alphanumeric
fonts can be specified. Helvetica is specified as default. If the wrong font is specified, the default
European font of the multifunction printer can be used. If the header/footer output option is specified,
the font specification for the header/footer is ignored.
-MSI
Specifies multipurpose feeder.
-M=type
Specifies multipurpose feeder Paper Type.
Available multipurpose feeder Paper Types are as follows:
B
FinePaper/Bond/Plain Paper 2
BB
FinePaperBack/Bond/Plain Paper 2- Side 2
P
Stationary/Plain/Plain Paper 1
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
PB
StationaryBack/Plain/Plain Paper 1 - Side 2
H1
ThickPaper/Heavyweight 1/Covers 1
H1B
ThickPaperBack/Heavyweight 1/Covers 1 - Side 2
H2
ThickPaper2/Heavyweight 2/Covers 2
H2B
ThickPaper2Back/Heavyweight 2/Covers 2 - Side 2
OHP
Transparency
L
LabelPaper/Labels
C2
Coated/Coated 2/Coated Paper 2
C2B
Coated Back/Coated 2/Coated Paper 2- Side 2
C3
Coated Thick/Coated 3/Coated Paper 3
C3B
Coated Thick Back/Coated 3/Coated Paper 3- Side 2
E
Envelope
If this option is not specified, multipurpose feeder Paper Type of the multifunction printer can be used.
-Mfo=mode
Specifies orientation for multipurpose feeder.
Available orientations for multipurpose feeder are as follows:
le
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Landscape
ler
Landscape (Rotated)
se
Portrait
ser
Portrait (Rotated)
-Pon
Specifies alternate tray.
Available alternate trays are as follows:
0
Use system settings
1
Display message
2
Feed from multipurpose feeder
3
Use nearest size (Adjust to fit)
4
Use larger size (Adjust to fit)
5
Use nearest size (No zoom)
6
Use larger size (No zoom)
-St=mode
Specifies feed separators from.
Available feed separators froms are as follows:
auto
AutoTray/Auto
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
1
1stTray/Tray 1 (Standard 250-sheet tray)
2
2ndTray/Tray 2 (Optional 550-sheet paper feeder)
off
Off
-Sp
Specifies printed separators.
Available only when the paper tray for separators is specified.
-Sb
Specifies Skip Blank Pages.
-Cm=mode
Specifies output color.
Available output colors are as follows:
c
Color (CMYK)
k
Black
-Pr=mode
Specifies print mode.
Available print modes are as follows:
hs
High Speed
hq
High Quality
-Cc=mode
Specifies RGB Color Correction.
Available RGB Color Corrections are as follows:
0
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Off
1
Photo
2
sRGB
3
Standard/ Normal
4
Presentation
This option is available only for color printing and when entry data is RGB data.
-Gc=mode
Specifies RGB gamma correction.
Available RGB gamma corrections are as follows:
1.0
1.0
1.4
1.4
1.8
1.8
2.2
2.2
2.6
2.6
off
Off
This option is available only for color printing and when entry data is RGB data.
-Sc=mode
Specifies screen.
Available screens are as follows:
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
0
Fineness
1
Standard
2
Auto
3
Gradation
-Gg=mode
Specifies gray guaranteed.
Available gray guaranteed options are as follows:
on
On
off
Off
This option is available only for color printing.
-Ct
Specifies color transformation.
This option is available only for color printing.
-Br=mode
Specifies brightness adjustment.
Available brightness adjustment option value are as follows:
+5
Bright 5
+4
Bright 4
+3
Bright 3
+2
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Bright 2
+1
Bright 1
+0
Normal
-1
Dark 1
-2
Dark 2
-3
Dark 3
-4
Dark 4
-5
Dark 5
-RGBc=mode
Specifies RGB color correction.
Available RGB color corrections are as follows:
10
Perceptual
11
Saturation
12
Relative Colorimetric
13
Absolute Colorimetric
This option is available only for color printing and when entry data is RGB data.
-RGBPr=mode
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Specifies RGB input profile.
Available RGB input profile option value are as follows:
0
sRGB
1
AdobeRGB
This option is available only for color printing and when entry data is RGB data.
-RGBTp=mode
Specifies RGB color temperature.
Available RGB color temperature option value are as follows:
5000
5000K
6000
6000K
9300
9300K
This option is available only for color printing and when entry data is RGB data.
-Cb=cyan-low:cyan-middle:cyan-high:magenta-low:magenta-middle:magenta-high:yellowlow:yellow-middle:yellow high:black-low:black-middle:black-high
Specifies adjustment value for color balance of each color/density.
Available adjustment values are as follows:
+3
Dark 3
+2
Dark 2
+1
Dark 1
0
Normal
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
-1
Light 1
-2
Light 2
-3
Light 3
-Cb
Option value must be specified in the following order:
Cyan low density, Cyan medium density, Cyan high density, Magenta low density, Magenta
medium density, Magenta high density, Yellow low density, Yellow medium density, Yellow high
density, Black low density, Black medium density, Black high density
If no value is specified, it is treated as "0"(Normal).
For example, if you want to specify "Light 2" for Cyan medium density, "Dark 3" for Yellow high
density, and "Dark 2" for Black low density, it can be specified using either of the following:
-Cb=0:-2:0:0:0:0:0:0:+3:+2:0:0
-Cb=:-2:::::::+3:+2::
-Hld=PrintType:UserID:Password:DocumentName
Secure Print
PrintType
store
Secure Print/Store Print
proof
Proof Print
UserID
Up to eight single-byte characters from 0x20 to 0x7E, except 0x20 " " (blank) and 0x3A":"
(colon).
Password
Up to 12 single-byte characters from 0x30 to 0x39 (numeric characters).
DocumentName
Up to 12 single-byte characters from 0x20 to 0x7E, except 0x20 " " (blank) and 0x3A ":"
(colon).
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Secure Print
-Hld=store:UserID:Password:DocumentName
-Hld=store:UserID:Password:
Store Print
-Hld=store:UserID::DocumentName
-Hld=store:UserID::
Proof Print
-Hld=proof:UserID::DocumentName
-Hld=proof:UserID::
NOTICE: Ensure that you specify Secure Print only when you directly print data to a multifunction
printer. Secure Print may not be available if you specify it when data need to be printed through
another server or data need to be handled by another program such as PostScript files. Collate is
automatically specified when you specify Proof Print.
-Jown=jobownername: Password Authentication Setting
Specifies the job owner name and password for authentication.
When only job owner name is specified (-Jown=jobownername:) (no password specified),
authentication password is treated as not specified.
When only password is specified (-Jown=:password) (no job owner name specified), login
user name is used as job owner name. Entered password is used as authentication
password.
When neither of job owner name nor password is specified (-Jown=:), login user name is
used as job owner name, and authentication password is treated as not specified.
When a job owner name exceeds allowable character length, the extra characters are
ignored.
When an unacceptable character is specified for job owner name, "Unknown User" is used
as job owner name.
NOTE: Characters acceptable for job owner name are alphanumeric characters and symbols, except
for space and colon.
NOTE: Up to 32 characters are acceptable for job owner name.
When an unacceptable character is specified for password, or when a specified password is
not within the range of the allowable character length, the authentication password is
treated as not specified.
NOTE: Only numbers are acceptable for password.
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
NOTE: Acceptable password length is between 4 and 12 characters.
Incomplete form of -Jown option is treated as no authentication setting being made. In such case, if
authentication setting is made with the environmental variable, it is used as setting information.
Example
To convert the program list of the file.txt file into the PostScript language program that sets the paper to
the landscape orientation and prints in the 2-up mode, type as follows:
% txt2ps2 -r -2 file.txt | lpr (for Linux)
% txt2ps2 -r -2 file.txt | lp (for Solaris/HP-UX)
To convert file.txt to the PostScript language program and output it to the file.ps file, type as follows:
% txt2ps2 file.txt > file.ps
% lpr file.ps (for Linux)
% lp file.ps (for Solaris/HP-UX)
To convert the output result of the command into the PostScript language program using txt2ps2 and print it
to the multifunction printer, type as follows:
% ls -alF | txt2ps2 | lpr (for Linux)
% ls -alF | txt2ps2 | lp (for Solaris/HP-UX)
Environmental Variable
TXT2PS2OPTION
Optional settings based on the environmental variable. To output in the 2-up mode, 8 points and the
landscape orientation, type as follows:
% setenv TXT2PS2OPTION "-2 -s8 -r"
To use the same options as those of the dellpsif filter specified by printcap, type as follows:
% setenv TXT2PS2OPTION "<dellpsif>"
File
/usr/local/dellbin3115/.dellpsdefault3115
This is the default command option setting file for individual users.
Important
When the same option is specified twice, the later setting will prevail. As TXT2PS2OPTION is analyzed
before the option of the command line, it is possible to temporarily modify the options already set in
TXT2PS2OPTION by typing at the command line.
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
The comment description (%%page:m n) of the page number cannot be output to the PostScript
program file which is output by the default option of txt2ps2. Thus, when the output of txt2ps2 is to be
taken as the output of another application (psrev of TRANSCRIPT, etc.), add the page number
description by inserting the line command (-Ilines).
If a BS code is found at the beginning of a line, the print position of the next character will be located
at the left of the beginning of the line.
When there are multiple tab codes in one line, the tab position may be off as a result of automatic line
feed. In such case, use the -I or -w option.
The number of columns specified by the -w option is not the actual number of printed characters. The
actual number of single-byte characters to be printed is derived by deducting the output column
position (outcolumns) specified by the o option from the number of columns specified by the -w option.
The -mg option cannot be specified when -w, -l, -o, and -L option are specified.
The start positions of margin of the margin command (-mg=u:b:r:l) are not set against the edge of
the paper. The margins are set against the printable area of the paper allowed by the multifunction
printer.
Use the -ps option only when a PostScript file that contains no %! at the beginning of the file is used as
the PostScript file. If a normal text file is input, it will not function correctly.
In HP-UX, txt2ps2 considers files written by PostScript that contain %! at the beginning of the file as
the PostScript files. To print PostScript files as text files, specify the TX option. With this option,
PostScript files will be processed as text files.
sunras2ps2 (Solaris)
Format
/usr/local/dellbin3115/sunras2ps2 [-d] [-D] [-Itray-input] [-t] [-r] [-n] [-l=left,bottom]
[-s=width,height] [-S=width] [-E] [-Nc=copies] [-Cl] [-Hd=position: format] [-Hffont] [-MSI]
[-M=type] [-Mfo=mode] [-Pon] [-St=mode] [-Sp] [-Sb] [-Cm=mode] [-Pr=mode] [-Cc=mode] [Gc=mode] [-Sc=mode] [-Gg=mode] [-Ct] [-Br=mode] [-RGBc=mode] [-RGBPr=mode] [-RGBTp=mode] [Cb=cyan-low:cyan-middle:cyan-high:magenta-low:magenta-middle:magenta-high:yellow-low;yellowmiddle:yellow high:black-low:black-middle:black-high] [Hld=PrintType:UserID:Password:DocumentName] [-Jown= jobownername:password] [filename...]
Function
Reads SunRaster data, converts it to the PostScript language program and writes to standard output. If the
filename is not specified, the standard input will be taken as the command input. SunRaster files with a pixel
depth of 1, 8, 24, and 32 bits can be specified.
sunran2ps2 takes filename as having been created in 72dpi and calculates the output size. Thus, to convert
SunRaster files created in other resolutions, specify the size option (-s, -S) explicitly.
Option
-d
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Enables the short-edge binding feature. When it is specified, the printing direction or position will be
adjusted and both sides of the paper printed so that the shorter edge of the pages can be bound. This
option is available only when the optional duplexer is installed on the multifunction printer.
-D
Enables the long-edge binding feature. When it is specified, the printing direction or position will be
adjusted and both sides of the paper printed so that the longer edge of the pages can be bound. This
option is available only when the optional duplexer is installed on the multifunction printer.
-Itray-input
Specifies the paper tray.
A paper tray can be selected by directly specifying a tray or by specifying a paper size.
When a paper size is specified, the tray loaded with paper of the specified size will be found and
selected automatically.
The parameters for selecting a paper tray are as follows:
1
Feed paper from tray 1 (Standard 250-sheet tray).
2
Feed paper from tray 2 (Optional 550-sheet paper feeder).
A4
Feed paper from the tray loaded with A4 (210 x 297 mm).
A5
Feed paper from the tray loaded with A5 (148 x 210 mm).
B5
Feed paper from the tray loaded with B5 (182 x 257 mm).
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
LT
Feed paper from the tray loaded with Letter (8.5 x 11 inches).
FL
Feed paper from the tray loaded with Folio (8.5 x 13 inches).
LG
Feed paper from the tray loaded with Legal (8.5 x 14 inches).
EX
Feed paper from the tray loaded with Executive (7.25 x 10.5 inches).
MO
Feed paper from the tray loaded with Monarch (3.875 x 7.5 inches).
COM10
Feed paper from the tray loaded with Envelope #10 (4.125 x 9.5 inches).
DL
Feed paper from the tray loaded with DL (110 x 220 mm).
C5
Feed paper from the tray loaded with C5 (162 x 229 mm).
MxNmm
Feed paper from the tray loaded with MxNmm defined by users.
Possible range specified:
Width: 76.2-220.0 mm
Length: 98.0-355.6 mm
MxNin
Feed paper from the tray loaded with MxN inches defined by users.
Possible range specified:
Width: 3.00-8.66 inches
Length: 3.86-14.0 inches
If this option is not specified or the tray specified is not available, feed paper from the default tray.
-t
Turns on the save toner mode for printing. The print result will be fainter than that of normal printing.
In some cases, this option will be ignored.
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
-r
Rotates the image by 90° and uses the paper in the landscape orientation.
-n
Disables the addition of the showpage. It is used when files converted to the PostScript language
program are merged with files created with other applications.
-l=left,bottom
Specifies the print position. Printing will be executed from the left and bottom of the page. The default
is 0.25 inches for both left and bottom.
-s=width,height
Specifies the output size. Printing will be executed with the width and height in inches.
-S=width
Sets the width of the output size in inches. The height will be calculated automatically according to the
width.
-E
This function turns on the image enhancement function. In some cases, this option will be ignored.
-Nc=copies
Specifies the number of output copies (the value of copies must be a positive integer).
-Cl
Specifies that printing be collated. If the copies option is not specified, this option will be ignored.
-Hd=position:format
Specifies the position to be output the user information as the header or footer.
position specifies output position. But this option is available only for converting text files.
ul
Output on the upper left corner of the paper.
ur
Output on the upper right corner of the paper.
dl
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Output on the lower left corner of the paper.
dr
Output on the lower right corner of the paper.
format specifies the contents and the order to output. This option is omissible.
If this option is omitted, uh is specified as the default value.
u
User name
h
Host name
t
Date and time
If the output contents are specified as tuh, it is output as follows:
Date and Time User: username Host: hostname.
Specify these options as follows:
In the case that convert text file, output the host name following the user name on the upper right
corner of the paper, output all pages.
(User name, Host name, all page output are default)
-Hd=ur
-Hd=ur:uh
-Hffont
Specify the font to print the header and footer. European fonts the same as half size alphanumeric
fonts can be specified. Helvetica is specified as default.
If the wrong font is specified, default European font of the multifunction printer can be used.
If header/footer output option is specified, the font specification of header/footer is ignored.
-MSI
Specifies multipurpose feeder.
-M=type
Specifies multipurpose feeder Paper Type.
Available multipurpose feeder Paper Types are as follows:
B
FinePaper/Bond/Plain Paper 2
BB
FinePaperBack/Bond/Plain Paper 2 - Side 2
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
P
Stationary/Plain/Plain Paper 1
PB
StationaryBack/Plain/Plain Paper 1 - Side 2
H1
ThickPaper/Heavyweight 1/Covers 1
H1B
ThickPaperBack/Heavyweight 1/Covers 1 - Side 2
H2
ThickPaper2/Heavyweight 2/Covers 2
H2B
ThickPaper2Back/Heavyweight 2/Covers 2 - Side 2
OHP
Transparency
L
LabelPaper/Labels
C2
Coated/Coated 2/Coated Paper 2
C2B
Coated Back/Coated 2/Coated Paper 2- Side 2
C3
Coated Thick/Coated 3/Coated Paper 3
C3B
Coated Thick Back/Coated 3/Coated Paper 3- Side 2
E
Envelope
If this option is not specified, multipurpose feeder Paper Type of the multifunction printer can be used.
-Mfo=mode
Specifies orientation for multipurpose feeder.
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Available orientations for multipurpose feeder are as follows:
le
Landscape
ler
Landscape (Rotated)
se
Portrait
ser
Portrait (Rotated)
-Pon
Specifies alternate tray.
Available alternate trays are as follows:
0
Use system settings
1
Display message
2
Feed from multipurpose feeder
3
Use nearest size (Adjust to fit)
4
Use larger size (Adjust to fit)
5
Use nearest size (No zoom)
6
Use larger size (No zoom)
-St=mode
Specifies feed separators from.
Available feed separators from the following:
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
auto
AutoTray/Auto
1
1stTray/Tray 1 (Standard 250-sheet tray)
2
2ndTray/Tray 2 (Optional 550-sheet paper feeder)
off
Off
-Sp
Specifies printed separators.
Available only when the paper tray for separators is specified.
-Sb
Specifies Skip Blank Pages.
-Cm=mode
Specifies output color.
Available output colors are as follows:
c
Color (CMYK)
k
Black
-Pr=mode
Specifies print mode.
Available print modes are as follows:
hs
High speed
hq
High quality
-Cc=mode
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Specifies image types.
Available image types are as follows:
0
Off
1
Photo
2
sRGB
3
Standard/ Normal
4
Presentation
This option is available only for color printing and when entry data is RGB data.
-Gc=mode
Specifies RGB gamma correction.
Available RGB gamma corrections are as follows:
1.0
1.0
1.4
1.4
1.8
1.8
2.2
2.2
2.6
2.6
off
Off
This option is available only for color printing and when entry data is RGB data.
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
-Sc=mode
Specifies screen.
Available screens are as follows:
0
Fineness
1
Gradation
2
Auto
3
For Transparency
-Gg=mode
Specifies gray guaranteed.
Available gray guaranteed options are as follows:
on
On
off
Off
This option is available only for color printing.
-Ct
Specifies color transformation.
This option is available only for color printing.
-Br=mode
Specifies brightness adjustment.
Available brightness adjustment option value are as follows:
+5
Bright 5
+4
Bright 4
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
+3
Bright 3
+2
Bright 2
+1
Bright 1
+0
Normal
-1
Dark 1
-2
Dark 2
-3
Dark 3
-4
Dark 4
-5
Dark 5
-RGBc=mode
Specifies RGB color correction.
Available RGB color corrections are as follows:
10
Perceptual
11
Saturation
12
Relative Colorimetric
13
Absolute Colorimetric
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
This option is available only for color printing and when entry data is RGB data.
-RGBPr=mode
Specifies RGB input profile.
Available RGB input profile option value are as follows:
0
sRGB
1
AdobeRGB
This option is available only for color printing and when entry data is RGB data.
-RGBTp=mode
Specifies RGB color temperature.
Available RGB color temperature option value are as follows:
5000
5000K
6000
6000K
9300
9300K
This option is available only for color printing and when entry data is RGB data.
-Cb=cyan-low:cyan-middle:cyan-high:magenta-low:magenta-middle:magenta-high:yellowlow:yellow-middle:yellow high:black-low:black-middle:black-high
Specifies adjustment value for color balance of each color/density.
Available adjustment values are as follows:
+3
Dark 3
+2
Dark 2
+1
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Dark 1
0
Normal
-1
Light 1
-2
Light 2
-3
Light 3
-Cb
Option value must be specified in the following order:
Cyan low density, Cyan medium density, Cyan high density, Magenta low density, Magenta
medium density, Magenta high density, Yellow low density, Yellow medium density, Yellow high
density, Black low density, Black medium density, Black high density
If no value is specified, it is treated as "0"(Normal).
For example, if you want to specify "Light 2" for Cyan medium density, "Dark 3" for Yellow high
density, and "Dark 2" for Black low density, it can be specified using either of the following:
-Cb=0:-2:0:0:0:0:0:0:+3:+2:0:0
-Cb=:-2:::::::+3:+2::
-Hld=PrintType:UserID:Password:DocumentName
Secure Print
PrintType
store
Secure Print/Store Print
proof
Proof Print
UserID
Up to eight single-byte characters from 0x20 to 0x7E, except 0x20 " " (blank) and 0x3A":"
(colon).
Password
Up to 12 single-byte characters from 0x30 to 0x39 (numeric characters).
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
DocumentName
Up to 12 single-byte characters from 0x20 to 0x7E, except 0x20 " " (blank) and 0x3A ":"
(colon).
Secure Print
-Hld=store:UserID:Password:DocumentName
-Hld=store:UserID:Password:
Store Print
-Hld=store:UserID::DocumentName
-Hld=store:UserID::
Proof Print
-Hld=proof:UserID::DocumentName
-Hld=proof:UserID::
NOTICE: Ensure that you specify Secure Print only when you directly print data to a multifunction
printer. Secure Print may not be available if you specify it when data need to be printed through
another server or data need to be handled by another program such as PostScript files. Collate is
automatically specified when you specify Proof Print.
-Jown=jobownername: Password Authentication Setting
Specifies the job owner name and password for authentication.
When only job owner name is specified (-Jown=jobownername:) (no password specified),
authentication password is treated as not specified.
When only password is specified (-Jown=:password) (no job owner name specified), login
user name is used as job owner name. Entered password is used as authentication
password.
When neither of job owner name nor password is specified (-Jown=:), login user name is
used as job owner name, and authentication password is treated as not specified.
When a job owner name exceeds allowable character length, the extra characters are
ignored.
When an unacceptable character is specified for job owner name, "Unknown User" is used
as job owner name.
NOTE: Characters acceptable for job owner name are alphanumeric characters and symbols, except
for space and colon.
NOTE: Up to 32 characters are acceptable for job owner name.
When an unacceptable character is specified for password, or when a specified password is
not within the range of the allowable character length, the authentication password is
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
treated as not specified.
NOTE: Only numbers are acceptable for password.
NOTE: Acceptable password length is between 4 and 12 characters.
Incomplete form of -Jown option is treated as no authentication setting being made. In such
case, if authentication setting is made with the environmental variable, it is used as setting
information.
Example
To output the displayed screen image to a file using the snapshot command and convert the file into the
PostScript language program using the sunras2ps2 command, type as follows:
% sunras2ps2 file.rs > file.ps
To output the displayed screen image to a file using the snapshot command, convert the file into the
PostScript language program using the sunras2ps2 command and output it to a multifunction printer, type
as follows:
% sunras2ps2 file.rs | lp
Important
When -s and -S are specified at the same time or when the same option is specified twice, the later
setting will prevail.
If the output size option (-s, -S) is not specified, scaling will be executed taking one pixel of the raster
data as one pixel of the multifunction printer.
If the print position option specifies a point beyond the printable area of the multifunction printer, data
beyond the printable area will not be printed.
tiff2ps2 (Linux/Solaris/HP-UX)
Format
/usr/local/dellbin3115/tiff2ps2 [-d] [-D] [-Itray-input] [-t] [-r] [-n] [-l=left,bottom] [s=width,height] [-S=width] [-E] [-Nc=copies] [-Cl] [-Hd=position:format] [-Hffont] [-MSI] [M=type] [-Mfo=mode] [-Pon] [-St=mode] [-Sp] [-Sb] [-Cm=mode] [-Pr=mode] [-Cc=mode] [Gc=mode] [-Sc=mode] [-Gg=mode] [-Ct] [-Br=mode] [-RGBc=mode] [-RGBPr=mode] [-RGBTp=mode] [Cb=cyan-low:cyan-middle:cyan-high:magenta-low:magenta-middle:magenta-high:yellow-low;yellowmiddle:yellow high:black-low:black-middle:black-high] [Hld=PrintType:UserID:Password:DocumentName] [-Jown= jobownername:password] [filename...]
Function
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Reads TIFF data, converts it to the PostScript language program and writes to standard output. If the
filename is not specified, the standard input will be taken as the command input. TIFF files with a pixel depth
of 1, 4, 8, 24, and 32 bits can be specified.
There are four types of supported compression formats.
Huffman compression (CCITT Group 3 transformed Huffman run length encoding)
Fax-CCITT3 compression (facsimile-compatible CCITT Group 3)
PackBits compression
Non-compression
Even in the above compression format, the TIFF file that has multiple images in one file is not supported.
tiff2ps2 takes filename as having been created in 72 dpi and calculates the output size. Thus, to convert TIFF
files created in other resolutions, specify the size option (-s, -S) explicitly for conversion.
Option
-d
Enables the short-edge binding feature. When it is specified, the printing direction or position will be
adjusted and both sides of the paper printed so that the shorter edge of the pages can be bound. This
option is available only when the optional duplexer is installed on the multifunction printer.
-D
Enables the long-edge binding feature. When it is specified, the printing direction or position will be
adjusted and both sides of the paper printed so that the longer edge of the pages can be bound. This
option is available only when the optional duplexer is installed on the multifunction printer.
-Itray-input
Specifies the paper tray.
A paper tray can be selected by directly specifying a tray or by specifying a paper size.
When a paper size is specified, the tray loaded with paper of the specified size will be found and
selected automatically.
The parameters for selecting a paper tray are as follows:
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
1
Feed paper from tray 1 (Standard 250-sheet tray).
2
Feed paper from tray 2 (Optional 550-sheet paper feeder).
A4
Feed paper from the tray loaded with A4 (210 x 297 mm).
A5
Feed paper from the tray loaded with A5 (148 x 210 mm).
B5
Feed paper from the tray loaded with B5 (182 x 257 mm).
LT
Feed paper from the tray loaded with Letter (8.5 x 11 inches).
FL
Feed paper from the tray loaded with Folio (8.5 x 13 inches).
LG
Feed paper from the tray loaded with Legal (8.5 x 14 inches).
EX
Feed paper from the tray loaded with Executive (7.25 x 10.5 inches).
MO
Feed paper from the tray loaded with Monarch (3.875 x 7.5 inches).
COM10
Feed paper from the tray loaded with Envelope #10 (4.125 x 9.5 inches).
DL
Feed paper from the tray loaded with DL (110 x 220 mm).
C5
Feed paper from the tray loaded with C5 (162 x 229 mm).
MxNmm
Feed paper from the tray loaded with MxNmm defined by users
Possible range specified:
Width: 76.2-220.0 mm
Length: 98.0-355.6 mm
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
MxNin
Feed paper from the tray loaded with MxNinches defined by users
Possible range specified:
Width: 3.00-8.66 inches
Length: 3.86-14.0 inches
If this option is not specified or the tray specified is not available, feed paper from the default tray.
-t
Turns on the save toner mode for printing. The print result will be fainter than that of normal printing.
In some cases, this option will be ignored.
-r
Rotates the image by 90° and uses the paper in the landscape orientation.
-n
Disables the addition of the showpage. It is used when files converted to the PostScript language
program are merged with files created with other applications.
-l=left,bottom
Specifies the print position. Printing will be executed from the left and bottom of the page. The default
is 0.25 inches for both left and bottom.
-s=width,height
Specifies the output size. Printing will be executed with the width and height in inches.
-S=width
Sets the width of the output size in inches. The height will be calculated automatically according to the
width.
-E
This function turns on the image enhancement function. In some cases, this option will be ignored.
-Nc=copies
Specifies the number of output copies (the value of copies must be a positive integer).
-Cl
Specifies that printing be collated. If the copies option is not specified, this option will be ignored.
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
-Hd=position:format
Specifies the position to be output the user information as the header or footer.
position specifies output position. But this option is available only for converting text files.
ul
Output on the upper left corner of the paper.
ur
Output on the upper right corner of the paper.
dl
Output on the lower left corner of the paper.
dr
Output on the lower right corner of the paper.
format specifies the contents and the order to output. This option is omissible.
If this option is omitted, uh is specified as the default value.
u
User name
h
Host name
t
Date and time
If the output contents are specified as tuh, it is output as follows:
Date and Time User: username Host: hostname.
Specify these options as follows:
In the case that convert text file, output the host name following the user name on the upper right
corner of the paper, output all pages.
(User name, Host name, all page output are default)
-Hd=ur
-Hd=ur:uh
-Hffont
Specify the font to print header and footer. European fonts the same as half size alphanumeric fonts
can be specified. Helvetica is specified as default.
If the wrong font is specified, default European font of the multifunction printer can be used.
If header/footer output option is specified, the font specification of header/footer is ignored.
-MSI
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Specifies multipurpose feeder.
-M=type
Specifies multipurpose feeder Paper Type.
Available multipurpose feeder Paper Types are as follows:
B
FinePaper/Bond/Plain Paper 2
BB
FinePaperBack/Bond/Plain Paper 2 - Side 2
P
Stationary/Plain/Plain Paper 1
PB
StationaryBack/Plain/Plain Paper 1 - Side 2
H1
ThickPaper/Heavyweight 1/Covers 1
H1B
ThickPaperBack/Heavyweight 1/Covers 1 - Side 2
H2
ThickPaper2/Heavyweight 2/Covers 2
H2B
ThickPaper2Back/Heavyweight 2/Covers 2 - Side 2
OHP
Transparency
L
LabelPaper/Labels
C2
Coated/Coated 2/Coated Paper 2
C2B
Coated Back/Coated 2/Coated Paper 2- Side 2
C3
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Coated Thick/Coated 3/Coated Paper 3
C3B
Coated Thick Back/Coated 3/Coated Paper 3- Side 2
E
Envelope
If this option is not specified, multipurpose feeder Paper Type of the multifunction printer can be used.
-Mfo=mode
Specifies orientation for multipurpose feeder.
Available orientations for multipurpose feeder are as follows:
le
Landscape
ler
Landscape (Rotated)
se
Portrait
ser
Portrait (Rotated)
-Pon
Specifies alternate tray.
Available alternate trays are follows:
0
Use system settings
1
Display message
2
Feed from multipurpose feeder
3
Use nearest size (Adjust to fit)
4
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Use larger size (Adjust to fit)
5
Use nearest size (No zoom)
6
Use larger size (No zoom)
-St=mode
Specifies feed separators from.
Available feed separators from the following:
auto
AutoTray/Auto
1
1stTray/Tray 1 (Standard 250-sheet tray)
2
2ndTray/Tray 2 (Optional 550-sheet paper feeder)
off
Off
-Sp
Specifies printed separators.
Available only when the paper tray for separators is specified.
-Sb
Specifies Skip Blank Pages.
-Cm=mode
Specifies output color.
Available output colors are as follows:
c
Color (CMYK)
k
Black
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
-Pr=mode
Specifies print mode.
Available print modes are as follows:
hs
High speed
hq
High quality
-Cc=mode
Specifies image types.
Available image types are as follows:
0
Off
1
Photo
2
sRGB
3
Standard/Normal
4
Presentation
This option is available only for color printing and when entry data is RGB data.
-Gc=mode
Specifies RGB gamma correction.
Available RGB gamma corrections are as follows:
1.0
1.0
1.4
1.4
1.8
1.8
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
2.2
2.2
2.6
2.6
off
Off
This option is available only for color printing and when entry data is RGB data.
-Sc=mode
Specifies screen.
Available screens are as follows:
0
Fineness
1
Gradation
2
Auto
3
For Transparency
-Gg=mode
Specifies gray guaranteed.
Available gray guaranteed options are as follows:
on
On
off
Off
This option is available only for color printing.
-Ct
Specifies color transformation.
This option is available only for color printing.
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
-Br=mode
Specifies brightness adjustment.
Available brightness adjustment option value are as follows:
+5
Bright 5
+4
Bright 4
+3
Bright 3
+2
Bright 2
+1
Bright 1
+0
Normal
-1
Dark 1
-2
Dark 2
-3
Dark 3
-4
Dark 4
-5
Dark 5
-RGBc=mode
Specifies RGB color correction.
Available RGB color corrections are as follows:
10
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Perceptual
11
Saturation
12
Relative Colorimetric
13
Absolute Colorimetric
This option is available only for color printing and when entry data is RGB data.
-RGBPr=mode
Specifies RGB input profile.
Available RGB input profile option value are as follows:
0
sRGB
1
AdobeRGB
This option is available only for color printing and when entry data is RGB data.
-RGBTp=mode
Specifies RGB color temperature.
Available RGB color temperature option value are as follows:
5000
5000K
6000
6000K
9300
9300K
This option is available only for color printing and when entry data is RGB data.
-Cb=cyan-low:cyan-middle:cyan-high:magenta-low:magenta-middle:magenta-high:yellowlow:yellow-middle:yellow high:black-low:black-middle:black-high
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Specifies adjustment value for color balance of each color/density.
Available adjustment values are as follows:
+3
Dark 3
+2
Dark 2
+1
Dark 1
0
Normal
-1
Light 1
-2
Light 2
-3
Light 3
-Cb
Option value must be specified in the following order:
Cyan low density, Cyan medium density, Cyan high density, Magenta low density, Magenta
medium density, Magenta high density, Yellow low density, Yellow medium density, Yellow high
density, Black low density, Black medium density, Black high density
If no value is specified, it is treated as "0"(Normal).
For example, if you want to specify "Light 2" for Cyan medium density, "Dark 3" for Yellow high
density, and "Dark 2" for Black low density, it can be specified using either of the following:
-Cb=0:-2:0:0:0:0:0:0:+3:+2:0:0
-Cb=:-2:::::::+3:+2::
-Hld=PrintType:UserID:Password:DocumentName
Secure Print
PrintType
store
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Secure Print/Store Print
proof
Proof Print
UserID
Up to eight single-byte characters from 0x20 to 0x7E, except 0x20 " " (blank) and 0x3A":"
(colon).
Password
Up to 12 single-byte characters from 0x30 to 0x39 (numeric characters).
DocumentName
Up to 12 single-byte characters from 0x20 to 0x7E, except 0x20 " " (blank) and 0x3A ":"
(colon).
Secure Print
-Hld=store:UserID:Password:DocumentName
-Hld=store:UserID:Password:
Store Print
-Hld=store:UserID::DocumentName
-Hld=store:UserID::
Proof Print
-Hld=proof:UserID::DocumentName
-Hld=proof:UserID::
NOTICE: Ensure that you specify Secure Print only when you directly print data to a multifunction
printer. Secure Print may not be available if you specify it when data need to be printed through
another server or data need to be handled by another program such as PostScript files. Collate is
automatically specified when you specify Proof Print.
-Jown=jobownername: Password Authentication Setting
Specifies the job owner name and password for authentication.
When only job owner name is specified (-Jown=jobownername:) (no password specified),
authentication password is treated as not specified.
When only password is specified (-Jown=:password) (no job owner name specified), login
user name is used as job owner name. Entered password is used as authentication
password.
When neither of job owner name nor password is specified (-Jown=:), login user name is
used as job owner name, and authentication password is treated as not specified.
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
When a job owner name exceeds allowable character length, the extra characters are
ignored.
When an unacceptable character is specified for job owner name, "Unknown User" is used
as job owner name.
NOTE: Characters acceptable for job owner name are alphanumeric characters and symbols, except
for space and colon.
NOTE: Up to 32 characters are acceptable for job owner name.
When an unacceptable character is specified for password, or when a specified password is
not within the range of the allowable character length, the authentication password is
treated as not specified.
NOTE: Only numbers are acceptable for password.
NOTE: Acceptable password length is between 4 and 12 characters.
Incomplete form of -Jown option is treated as no authentication setting being made. In such case, if
authentication setting is made with the environmental variable, it is used as setting information.
Example
To convert the TIFF image into the PostScript language program and output it to a file, type as follows:
% tiff2ps2 file.tiff > file1.ps
To output the TIFF image to a multifunction printer, type as follows:
% tiff2ps2 file.tiff | lpr (for Linux)
% tiff2ps2 file.tiff | lp (for Solaris/HP-UX)
Important
When -s and -S are specified at the same time or when the same option is specified twice, the later
setting will prevail.
When the output size option (-s, -S) is not specified, scaling will be executed taking one pixel of the
TIFF data as one pixel of the multifunction printer.
If the print position option (-lleft bottom) specifies a point beyond the printable area of the
multifunction printer, data beyond the printable area will not be printed.
xwd2ps2 (Linux/Solaris/HP-UX)
Format
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
/usr/local/dellbin3115/xwd2ps2 [-d] [-D] [-Itray-input] [-t] [-r] [-n] [-l=left,bottom] [s=width,height] [-S=width] [-E] [-Nc=copies] [-Cl] [-Hd=position:format] [-Hffont] [-MSI] [M=type] [-Mfo=mode] [-Pon] [-St=mode] [-Sp] [-Sb] [-Cm=mode] [-Pr=mode] [-Cc=mode] [Gc=mode] [-Sc=mode] [-Gg=mode] [-Ct] [-Br=mode] [-RGBc=mode] [-RGBPr=mode] [-RGBTp=mode] [Cb=cyan-low:cyan-middle:cyan-high:magenta-low:magenta-middle:magenta-high:yellow-low;yellowmiddle:yellow-high:black-low:black-middle:black-high] [Hld=PrintType:UserID:Password:DocumentName] [-Jown= jobownername:password] [filename...]
Function
Reads XWD data, converts it to the PostScript language program and writes to standard output. If the
filename is not specified, the standard input will be taken as the command input. XWD files with a pixel
depth of 1, 4, 8, 24, and 32 bits can be specified.
There are three types of supported compression formats.
The visual class is Static Gray and the pixel is 1 bit.
The visual class is Pseudo Color and the pixel is 4 bits or 8 bit. The image format is Zpixmap.
The visual class is True Color and the pixel is 24 bits or 32 bit. The image format is Zpixmap.
xwd2ps2 takes filename as having been created in 72dpi and calculates the output size. Thus, to convert
XWD files created in other resolutions, specify the size option (-s, -S) explicitly for conversion.
Option
-d
Enables the short-edge binding feature. When it is specified, the printing direction or position will be
adjusted and both sides of the paper printed so that the shorter edge of the pages can be bound. This
option is available only when the optional duplexer is installed on the multifunction printer.
-D
Enables the long-edge binding feature. When it is specified, the printing direction or position will be
adjusted and both sides of the paper printed so that the longer edge of the pages can be bound. This
option is available only when the optional duplexer is installed on the multifunction printer.
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
-Itray-input
Specifies the paper tray.
A paper tray can be selected by directly specifying a tray or by specifying a paper size.
When a paper size is specified, the tray loaded with paper of the specified size will be found and
selected automatically.
The parameters for selecting a paper tray are as follows:
1
Feed paper from tray 1 (Standard 250-sheet tray).
2
Feed paper from tray 2 (Optional 550-sheet paper feeder).
A4
Feed paper from the tray loaded with A4 (210 x 297 mm).
A5
Feed paper from the tray loaded with A5 (148 x 210 mm).
B5
Feed paper from the tray loaded with B5 (182 x 257 mm).
LT
Feed paper from the tray loaded with Letter (8.5 x 11 inches).
FL
Feed paper from the tray loaded with Folio (8.5 x 13 inches).
LG
Feed paper from the tray loaded with Legal (8.5 x 14 inches).
EX
Feed paper from the tray loaded with Executive (7.25 x 10.5 inches).
MO
Feed paper from the tray loaded with Monarch (3.875 x 7.5 inches).
COM10
Feed paper from the tray loaded with Envelope #10 (4.125 x 9.5 inches).
DL
Feed paper from the tray loaded with DL (110 x 220 mm).
C5
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Feed paper from the tray loaded with C5 (162 x 229 mm).
MxNmm
Feed paper from the tray loaded with MxN mm defined by users.
Possible range specified:
Width: 76.2-220.0 mm
Length: 98.0-355.6 mm
MxNin
Feed paper from the tray loaded with MxNinches defined by users
Possible range specified:
Width: 3.00-8.66 inches
Length: 3.86-14.0 inches
If this option is not specified or the tray specified is not available, feed paper from the default tray.
-t
Turns on the save toner mode for printing. The print result will be fainter than that of normal printing.
In some cases, this option will be ignored.
-r
Rotates the image by 90° and uses the paper in the landscape orientation
-n
Disables the addition of the showpage. It is used when files converted to the PostScript language
program are merged with files created with other applications.
-l=left,bottom
Specifies the print position. Printing will be executed from the left and bottom of the page. The default
is 0.25 inches for both left and bottom.
-s=width,height
Specifies the output size. Printing will be executed with the width and height in inches.
-S=width
Sets the width of the output size in inches. The height will be calculated automatically according to the
width.
-E
This function turns on the image enhancement function. In some cases, this option will be ignored.
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
-Nc=copies
Specifies the number of output copies (the value of copies must be a positive integer).
-Cl
Specifies that printing be collated. If the copies option is not specified, this option will be ignored.
-Hd=position:format
Specifies the position to be output the user information as the header or footer.
position specifies output position. But this option is available only for converting text files.
ul
Output on the upper left corner of the paper.
ur
Output on the upper right corner of the paper.
dl
Output on the lower left corner of the paper.
dr
Output on the lower right corner of the paper.
format specifies the contents and the order to output. This option is omissible.
If this option is omitted, uh is specified as the default value.
u
User name
h
Host name
t
Date and time
If the output contents are specified as tuh, it is output as follows:
Date and Time User: username Host: hostname.
-Hffont
Specify the font to print header and footer. European fonts the same as half size alphanumeric fonts
can be specified. Helvetica is specified as default.
If the wrong font is specified, default European font of the multifunction printer can be used.
If header/footer output option is specified, the font specification of header/footer is ignored.
-MSI
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Specifies multipurpose feeder.
-M=type
Specifies multipurpose feeder Paper Type.
Available multipurpose feeder Paper Types are as follows:
B
FinePaper/Bond/Plain Paper 2
BB
FinePaperBack/Bond/Plain Paper 2 - Side 2
P
Stationary/Plain/Plain Paper 1
PB
StationaryBack/Plain/Plain Paper 1 - Side 2
H1
ThickPaper/Heavyweight 1/Covers 1
H1B
ThickPaperBack/Heavyweight 1/Covers 1 - Side 2
H2
ThickPaper2/Heavyweight 2/Covers 2
H2B
ThickPaper2Back/Heavyweight 2/Covers 2 - Side 2
OHP
Transparency
L
LabelPaper/Labels
C2
Coated/Coated 2/Coated Paper 2
C2B
Coated Back/Coated 2/Coated Paper 2- Side 2
C3
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Coated Thick/Coated 3/Coated Paper 3
C3B
Coated Thick Back/Coated 3/Coated Paper 3- Side 2
E
Envelope
If this option is not specified, multipurpose feeder Paper Type of the multifunction printer can be used.
-Mfo=mode
Specifies orientation for multipurpose feeder.
Available orientations for multipurpose feeder are as follows:
le
Landscape
ler
Landscape (Rotated)
se
Portrait
ser
Portrait (Rotated)
-Pon
Specifies alternate tray.
Available alternate trays are as follows:
0
Use system settings
1
Display message
2
Feed from multipurpose feeder
3
Use nearest size (Adjust to fit)
4
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Use larger size (Adjust to fit)
5
Use nearest size (No zoom)
6
Use larger size (No zoom)
-St=mode
Specifies feed separators from.
Available feed separators from the following:
auto
AutoTray/Auto
1
1stTray/Tray 1 (Standard 250-sheet tray)
2
2ndTray/Tray 2 (Optional 550-sheet paper feeder)
off
Off
-Sp
Specifies printed separators.
Available only when the paper tray for separators is specified.
-Sb
Specifies Skip Blank Pages.
-Cm=mode
Specifies output color.
Available output colors are as follows:
c
Color (CMYK)
k
Black
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
-Pr=mode
Specifies print mode.
Available print modes are as follows:
hs
High speed
hq
High quality
-Cc=mode
Specifies image types.
Available image types are as follows:
0
Off
1
Photo
2
sRGB
3
Standard/ Normal
4
Presentation
This option is available only for color printing and when entry data is RGB data.
-Gc=mode
Specifies RGB gamma correction.
Available RGB gamma corrections are as follows:
1.0
1.0
1.4
1.4
1.8
1.8
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
2.2
2.2
2.6
2.6
off
Off
This option is available only for color printing and when entry data is RGB data.
-Sc=mode
Specifies screen.
Available screens are as follows:
0
Fineness
1
Gradation
2
Auto
3
For Transparency
-Gg=mode
Specifies gray guaranteed.
Available gray guaranteed options are as follows:
on
On
off
Off
This option is available only for color printing.
-Ct
Specifies color transformation.
This option is available only for color printing.
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
-Br=mode
Specifies brightness adjustment.
Available brightness adjustment option value are as follows:
+5
Bright 5
+4
Bright 4
+3
Bright 3
+2
Bright 2
+1
Bright 1
+0
Normal
-1
Dark 1
-2
Dark 2
-3
Dark 3
-4
Dark 4
-5
Dark 5
-RGBc=mode
Specifies RGB color correction.
Available RGB color corrections are as follows:
10
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Perceptual
11
Saturation
12
Relative Colorimetric
13
Absolute Colorimetric
This option is available only for color printing and when entry data is RGB data.
-RGBPr=mode
Specifies RGB input profile.
Available RGB input profile option value are as follows:
0
sRGB
1
AdobeRGB
This option is available only for color printing and when entry data is RGB data.
-RGBTp=mode
Specifies RGB color temperature.
Available RGB color temperature option value are as follows:
5000
5000K
6000
6000K
9300
9300K
This option is available only for color printing and when entry data is RGB data.
-Cb=cyan-low:cyan-middle:cyan-high:magenta-low:magenta-middle:magenta-high:yellowlow:yellow-middle:yellow high:black-low:black-middle:black-high
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Specifies adjustment value for color balance of each color/density.
Available adjustment values are as follows:
+3
Dark 3
+2
Dark 2
+1
Dark 1
0
Normal
-1
Light 1
-2
Light 2
-3
Light 3
-Cb
Option value must be specified in the following order:
Cyan low density, Cyan medium density, Cyan high density, Magenta low density, Magenta
medium density, Magenta high density, Yellow low density, Yellow medium density, Yellow high
density, Black low density, Black medium density, Black high density
If no value is specified, it is treated as "0"(Normal).
For example, if you want to specify "Light 2" for Cyan medium density, "Dark 3" for Yellow high
density, and "Dark 2" for Black low density, it can be specified using either of the following:
-Cb=0:-2:0:0:0:0:0:0:+3:+2:0:0
-Cb=:-2:::::::+3:+2::
-Hld=PrintType:UserID:Password:DocumentName
Secure Print
PrintType
store
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Secure Print/Store Print
proof
Proof Print
UserID
Up to eight single-byte characters from 0x20 to 0x7E, except 0x20 " " (blank) and 0x3A":"
(colon).
Password
Up to 12 single-byte characters from 0x30 to 0x39 (numeric characters).
DocumentName
Up to 12 single-byte characters from 0x20 to 0x7E, except 0x20 " " (blank) and 0x3A ":"
(colon).
Secure Print
-Hld=store:UserID:Password:DocumentName
-Hld=store:UserID:Password:
Store Print
-Hld=store:UserID::DocumentName
-Hld=store:UserID::
Proof Print
-Hld=proof:UserID::DocumentName
-Hld=proof:UserID::
NOTICE: Ensure that you specify Secure Print only when you directly print data to a multifunction
printer. Secure Print may not be available if you specify it when data need to be printed through
another server or data need to be handled by another program such as PostScript files. Collate is
automatically specified when you specify Proof Print.
-Jown=jobownername: Password Authentication Setting
Specifies the job owner name and password for authentication.
When only job owner name is specified (-Jown=jobownername:) (no password specified),
authentication password is treated as not specified.
When only password is specified (-Jown=:password) (no job owner name specified), login
user name is used as job owner name. Entered password is used as authentication
password.
When neither of job owner name nor password is specified (-Jown=:), login user name is
used as job owner name, and authentication password is treated as not specified.
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
When a job owner name exceeds allowable character length, the extra characters are
ignored.
When an unacceptable character is specified for job owner name, "Unknown User" is used
as job owner name.
NOTE: Characters acceptable for job owner name are alphanumeric characters and symbols, except
for space and colon.
NOTE: Up to 32 characters are acceptable for job owner name.
When an unacceptable character is specified for password, or when a specified password is
not within the range of the allowable character length, the authentication password is
treated as not specified.
NOTE: Only numbers are acceptable for password.
NOTE: Acceptable password length is between 4 and 12 characters.
Incomplete form of -Jown option is treated as no authentication setting being made. In such case, if
authentication setting is made with the environmental variable, it is used as setting information.
Example
To convert the XWD image into the PostScript language program and output it to a file, type as follows:
% xwd2ps2 file.xwd > file.ps
To output the XWD image to a multifunction printer, type as follows:
% xwd2ps2 file.xwd | lpr (for Linux)
% xwd2ps2 file.xwd | lp (for Solaris/HP-UX)
Important
When -s and -S are specified at the same time or when the same option is specified twice, the later
setting will prevail.
When the output size option (-s, -S) is not specified, scaling will be executed taking one pixel of the
TIFF data as one pixel of the multifunction printer.
If the print position option (-lleft bottom) specifies a point beyond the printable area of the
multifunction printer, data beyond the printable area will not be printed.
dellpsif (Linux)
Format
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
/usr/local/dellbin3115/dellpsif -w width -l length -i indent -n login -h host accountfile
Function
If the first two characters of the input data are not %!, the dellpsif filter will convert it to the PostScript
language program that can be output according to the paper size. If the first two characters of the input data
are %!, it will be considered the PostScript language program and no data conversion will be executed. The
following control codes are interpreted for the conversion of input data.
LF
Line feed
FF
Form feed
TAB
8-column tab stop
BS
Backspace 1 character
The dellpsif is the hard link file of txt2ps2.
The dellpsif filter will be used as the IF filter specified by /etc/printcap.
The lpd daemon will specify the following command options and start up the dellpsif filter.
dellpsif -w width -l length -i indent -n login -h host accountfile
In addition, options usable by txt2ps2 can be specified by the
/usr/local/dellbin3115/.dellpsdefault3115 file. With this option, detailed control can be achieved.
However, if the input data are PostScript files, only the following options of txt2ps2 will become valid.
-d
Enables the short-edge binding feature. When it is specified, the printing direction or position will be
adjusted and both sides of the paper printed so that the shorter edge of the pages can be bound. This
option is available only when the optional duplexer is installed on the multifunction printer.
-D
Enables the long-edge binding feature. When it is specified, the printing direction or position will be
adjusted and both sides of the paper printed so that the longer edge of the pages can be bound. This
option is available only when the optional duplexer is installed on the multifunction printer.
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
-Itray-input
Specifies the paper tray.
The parameters to be able to specify are the same as txt2ps2.
-t
Turns on the save toner mode for printing. The print result will be fainter than that of normal printing.
In some cases, this option will be ignored.
-E
This function turns on the image enhancement function. In some cases, this option will be ignored.
-Nc=copies
Specifies the number of output copies (the value of copies must be a positive integer).
-Cl
Specifies that printing be collated. If the copies option is not specified, this option will be ignored.
-ps
The input file will be processed as the PostScript file. If the file does not begin with %!, %! will be
output to the beginning line. For files with %!, this option will be ignored.
-MSI
Specifies multipurpose feeder.
-M=type
Specifies multipurpose feeder Paper Type.
If this option is not specified, multipurpose feeder Paper Type of the multifunction printer can be used.
-Mfo=mode
Specifies orientation for multipurpose feeder.
-Pon
Specifies alternate tray.
-St=mode
Specifies feed separators from.
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
-Sp
Specifies printed separators.
-Sb
Specifies Skip Blank Pages.
-Cm=mode
Specifies output color.
-Pr=mode
Specifies print mode.
-Cc=mode
Specifies image types.
This option is available only for color printing and when entry data is RGB data.
-Gc=mode
Specifies RGB gamma correction.
This option is available only for color printing and when entry data is RGB data.
-Sc=mode
Specifies screen.
-Gg=mode
Specifies gray guaranteed.
This option is available only for color printing.
-Ct
Specifies color transformation.
This option is available only for color printing.
-Br= mode
Specifies brightness adjustment.
-RGBc= mode
Specifies RGB color correction.
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
This option is available only for color printing and when entry data is RGB data.
-RGBPr= mode
Specifies RGB input profile.
This option is available only for color printing and when entry data is RGB data.
-RGBTp= mode
Specifies RGB color temperature.
This option is available only for color printing and when entry data is RGB data.
-Cb=cyan-low:cyan-middle:cyan-high:magenta-low:magenta-middle:magenta-high:yellowlow;yellow-middle:yellow high:black-low:black-middle:black-high
Specifies adjustment value for color balance of each color/density.
-Cb Option value must be specified in the following order:
Cyan low density, Cyan medium density, Cyan high density, Magenta low density, Magenta medium
density, Magenta high density, Yellow low density, Yellow medium density, Yellow high density, Black
low density, Black medium density, Black high density
If no value is specified, it is treated as "0"(Normal).
File
/usr/local/dellbin3115/.dellpsdefault3115
This is the default command option setting.
Important
The dellpsif filter ignores the pw and pl entries of /etc/printcap. Thus, the pw and pl entries cannot
be used to change the option of each paper size.
If the same option is specified for PostScript files which already have added options, such as paper
selection, it will be ignored.
Use the -ps option only when a PostScript file that contains no %! at the beginning of the file is
processed as the PostScript file. If a normal text file is input, it will not function correctly.
Precautions and Limitations
During Installation
Pay attention to the following points during the installation.
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Solaris
Use lpadmin command to register the default printer.
# lpadmin -d PrinterName
To inhibit the banner sheets output, change the value of nobanner=no to nobanner=yes that includes in
the file corresponding to the printer name in /etc/lp/interfaces/.
The printer registered by UNIX filter must not be changed by admintool.
When Content types: postscript is displayed by typing lpstat -p printername -l, it's necessary
to delete the printer and reinstall.
To install UNIX filter into the default directory (/usr/local/dellbin3115), it's necessary to create
/usr/local directory in advance.
HP-UX
The multifunction printer to specify as an output printer must be registered in your system. To register
an output printer, use sam command and so on. See the HP-UX related manual for details.
To install UNIX filter into the default directory (/usr/local/dellbin3115), it's necessary to create
/usr/local directory in advance.
Linux
To install UNIX filter into the default directory (/usr/local/dellbin3115), it's necessary to create
/usr/local directory in advance.
During Printing
Pay attention to the following points during printing.
Using lp/lpr Command (Linux/Solaris/HP-UX)
If an option is specified incorrectly, no error message will be output. If printing is not executed after
the lp command is executed, activate each utility individually and error messages will be output.
(Using Solaris, the error message is displayed on the screen. Using Linux, the error message is written
into the error log file specified by printcap.)
In text printing, the environmental variable TXT2PS2OPTION will be ignored.
In text printing, if a BS code is found at the beginning of a line, the print position of the next character
will be on the left of the beginning of the line.
In text printing, when there are multiple tab codes in one line, the positions of tab may be off due to
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
automatic line feed. If this happens, specify l or w option.
In text printing, the number of columns specified by the w option does not reflect the number of
characters actually printed. The actual number of single-byte characters to be printed is derived by
deducting the output column position (out columns) specified by the o option from the number of
columns specified by the w option.
If the same option is specified, or if s, S are both specified, the one specified later will prevail.
In printing images, If the print position option (l) specifies an area beyond the printable area of the
multifunction printer, data beyond the printable area will not be printed. (Using Solaris, it's impossible
to output images by lp command.)
Using txt2ps2 (Linux/Solaris/HP-UX)
When the same option is specified twice, the later setting will prevail. As TXT2PS2OPTION is analyzed
before the option of the command line, it is possible to temporarily modify the options already set in
TXT2PS2OPTION by inputting at the command line
The default output of txt2ps2 cannot output the comment description (%%page:m n)of the page
number. This is because the converted PostScript language program controls line feed and form feed.
Thus, when the output of txt2ps2 is to be taken as the output of another application (psrev of
TRANSCRIPT, etc.), add the page number description by inserting the line command (-Ilines).
If a BS code is found at the beginning of a line, the print position of the next character will be on the
left of the beginning of a line.
When there are multiple tab codes in one line, the positions of tab may be off due to automatic line
feed. If this happens, specify the -l or -w option.
The number of columns specified by the -w option does not reflect the number of characters actually
printed. The actual number of single-byte characters to be printed is derived by deducting the output
column position (out columns) specified by the o option from the number of columns specified by the w
option.
The -mg option cannot be specified when -w, -l, -o, and -L option are specified.
The start positions of margins of the margin command (-mg=u:b:r:l) are not set against the edge of
paper. The margins are set against the printable area for paper allowed by the multifunction printer.
Use the -ps option only when a PostScript file that contains no %! at the beginning of the file is used as
the PostScript file. If a normal text file is input, it will not function correctly.
To use the same options as those of the dellpsif filter by TXT2PS2OPTION, set the user's home directory
in the environmental variable HOME. If the environmental variable HOME is not set up, the same options
as those of the dellpsif filter cannot be used. (Linux)
Using sunras2ps2/tiff2ps2/xwd2ps2 (sunras2ps2 apply to Solaris only)
If the same option is specified, or if s, S are both specified, the one specified later will prevail.
If the size option (s, S) is not specified, scaling will be executed taking one pixel of the image data as
one pixel of the multifunction printer.
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
If the print position option (-l left bottom) specifies a point beyond the printable area of the
multifunction printer, data beyond the printable area will not be printed.
Using tiff2ps2 (Linux/Solaris/HP-UX)
There are four types of supported compression formats.
Huffman compression (CCITT Group 3 transformed Huffman run length encoding)
Fax-CCITT3 compression (facsimile-compatible CCITT Group 3)
PackBits compression
Non-compression
Even if the format is a supported format, the tiff that has multiple images in one file is not supported.
Using xwd2ps2 (Linux/Solaris/ HP-UX)
There are three
The visual class
The visual class
The visual class
types of supported compression formats.
is Static Gray and the pixel is 1 bit.
is Pseudo Color and the pixel is 4 bits or 8 bit. The image format is Zpixmap.
is True Color and the pixel is 24 bits. The image format is Zpixmap.
Using dellpsif (Linux)
Use the -ps option only when a PostScript file that contains no %! at the beginning of the file is used as
the PostScript file. If a normal text file is input, it will not function correctly.
-w, -l option usually correspond to pw, pl entry of /etc/printcap. However, this UNIX filter ignore
pw, pl entry of /etc/printcap. So, the option cannot be changed by each page size using pw, pl entry.
Printing PostScript Files (Linux/Solaris/ HP-UX)
If same options for the PostScript file that contains options, such as paper size, are specified using
dellpsif (Linux) or the lp command (Solaris/HP-UX), the specified option will be ignored.
Printing Image Files (Solaris)
To print image files from Solaris the user cannot specify the image file directly with the lp command for
printing. Make use of sunras2ps2, tiff2ps2, xwd2ps2 and convert the file to a PostScript file. Output it
using the lp command after the conversion.
% xwd2ps2 file.xwd | lp
The double-sided printing (Linux/Solaris/HP-UX)
The multifunction printer without an optional duplexer is unable to do double-sided printing.
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Header/footer Option (-Hd=position:format:page, -Hfheaderfont)
(txt2ps2,sunras2ps2,tiff2ps2,xwd2ps2)
If the paper size is not specified when using options, it outputs the header/footer at the position of A4size paper. To specify the paper size at the same time to use header/footer option. (If the paper size
for the PostScript file converted by using the option is specified by the option of lp command for
example, the position of the header and footer cannot be changed.)
The margin is specified automatically when the option is used. When the option to specify the margin is
used at the same time, the value that is smaller than the value specified automatically as follows is
ignored.
In case of text files
Upper margin: 0.23 inch
Lower margin: 0.06 inch
Right margin: 0.03 inch
Left margin: 0.09 inch
In case of images
Lower margin: 0.3 inch
When using the option, the number of lines and the number of columns specified are ignored. Also, it is
impossible to specify landscape and 2-column.
In case of the PostScript file, it happens that the multifunction printer doesn't output all pages despite
that output all page is specified. In such a case, specify print the only top page.
It's impossible to use lp command in Solaris.
TBCP Filter (Solaris/Linux/HP-UX)
Ensure that the TBCP Filter is available so the multifunction printer can specify the availability of the
TBCP Filter.
For Libtiff Software
Copyright © 1988-1997 Sam Leffler
Copyright © 1991-1997 Silicon Graphics, Inc.
THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS-IS" AND WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS, IMPLIED OR
OTHERWISE, INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION, ANY WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
IN NO EVENT SHALL SAM LEFFLER OR SILICON GRAGHICS BE LIABLE FOR ANY SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL,
INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OF ANY KIND, OR ANY DAMAGES WHATSOEVER RESULTING FROM
LOSS OF USE, DATA OR PROFITS, WHETHER OR NOT ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF DAMAGE, AND ON
ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, ARISING OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR PERFORMANCE OF
THIS SOFTWARE.
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Printing With CUPS (Linux)
This section provides information for printing or setting up the printer driver with CUPS (Common UNIX
Printing System) on Turbolinux 10 Desktop, RedHat ES 3/4 or SUSE 9.2/9.3.
Operation on Turbolinux 10 Desktop or RedHat ES 3/4
Operation on SUSE 9.2/9.3
Operation on Turbolinux 10 Desktop or RedHat ES 3/4
Installing the Printer Driver
1. Double-click Dell-MFP-Laser-3115cn-x.x-x.noarch.rpm in the Drivers and Utilities CD.
2. Type the administrator's password.
3. Click Continue in the Completed System Preparation window.
Installation starts. When the installation is complete, the window is automatically closed.
Setting Up the Queue
To execute printing, you must set up the print queue on your workstation.
1. Start the Web browser. Type http://localhost:631/ in Location, and then press the Enter key.
2. Click Manage Printers.
3. Click Add Printer at the bottom of the window.
4. Type root as the user name, and type the administrator's password.
5. Type the printer's name in the Name box in the Add New Printer window, and then click Continue.
The Location and Description do not have to be specified.
6. Select LPD/LPR Host or Printer from the Device menu, and then click Continue.
7. Type the printer's IP address in Device URI.
Format: lpd://xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx (printer's IP address)
8. Select Dell from the Make menu, and then click Continue.
9. Select Dell MFP Laser 3115cn... from the Model menu, and then click Continue.
The message Printer xxx has been added successfully. appears.
The set up is complete.
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
When you have finished setting up the queue you can print jobs from the software program. Start the print
job from the software program, and then specify the queue in the print dialog box.
However, sometimes you can only print from the default queue depending on the software program (for
example Mozilla). In these cases, before you start printing, set queue you want to print to as the default
queue. For information on specifying the default queue, see "Setting the Default Queue."
Setting the Default Queue
1. Click Start System Terminal.
2. Type the following command in the terminal window:
su
(Type the administrator's password)
lpadmin -d (The queue name)
Specifying the Printing Options
You can specify the printing options such as color mode or double-sided printing.
1. Start the Web browser. Type http://localhost:631/ in Location, and then press the Enter key.
2. Click Manage Printers.
3. Click Configure Printer of the queue for which you want to specify the printing options.
4. Type root as the user name, and type the administrator's password.
5. Specify the required settings, and then click Continue.
The message Printer xxx has been configured successfully. appears.
The setting is complete. Execute printing from the software program.
Uninstalling the Printer Driver
1. Click Start System Terminal.
2. Type the following command in the terminal window:
su
(Type the administrator's password)
rpm -e Dell-MFP-Laser-3115cn
The printer driver is uninstalled.
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Operation on SUSE 9.2/9.3
Installing the Printer Driver
1. Double-click Dell-MFP-Laser-3115cn-x.x-x.noarch.rpm in the Drivers and Utilities CD.
2. Click Install package with YaST.
3. Type the administrator's password.
Installation starts. When the installation is complete, the window is automatically closed.
Setting Up the Queue
To execute printing, you must set up the print queue on your workstation.
1. Click Start Applications
System YaST.
2. Type the administrator's password.
YaST Control Center is activated.
3. Select Hardware from Printer.
4. Printer setup: Autodetected printers is activated.
For USB connections:
a. Select Dell MFP Laser 3115cn on USB (//Dell/MFP%20Laser%203115cn or /dev/usblp*)
as Available are, and then click Configure....
b. Confirm the settings in Edit configuration, and then click OK.
For parallel connections:
a. Select Other (not detected) as Available are in Printers to configure, and then click
Configure....
b. Select Parallel printer as Printer Type, and then click Next.
c. Click Next.
d. Set the name of the printer queue in Queue name, and type the queue name for printing in
Name for printing.
The Description of Printer and Location of Printer do not have to be specified.
e. Select the Do Local Filtering check box, and then click Next.
f. Select DELL in Select manufacturer. Select Dell MFP Laser 3115cn in Select Model, and
then click Next.
g.
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
f.
g. Confirm the settings in Edit configuration, and then click OK.
For network connections:
a. Select Other (not detected) as Available are in Printers to configure, and then click
Configure....
b. Select the Print via LPD-Style Network Server as Printer Type, and then click Next.
c. Type the printer's IP address in Host name of the printer server. And type the name of the
printer queue in Name of the remote queue, and then click Next.
d. Set the name of the printer queue in Queue name, and type the queue name for printing in
Name for printing.
The Description of Printer and Location of Printer do not have to be specified.
e. Select the Do Local Filtering check box, and then click Next.
f. Select DELL as Select manufacturer. Select Dell MFP Laser 3115cn as Select Model, and
then click Next.
g. Confirm the settings in Edit configuration, and then click OK.
5. Click Finish.
Printing From the Application Program
When you have finished setting up the queue you can print jobs from the application program. Start the print
job from the application program, and then specify the queue in the print dialog box.
However, sometimes you can only print from the default queue depending on the application program (for
example Mozilla). In these cases, before you start printing, set queue you want to print to as the default
queue. For information on specifying the default queue, see "Setting the Default Queue".
Setting the Default Queue
1. To activate the Printer setup: Autodetected printers, do the following:
a. Click Start Applications
System YaST.
b. Type the administrator's password.
YaST Control Center is activated.
c. Select Hardware from Printer.
2. Printer setup: Autodetected printers is activated.
3. Click Change....
4.
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
2.
3.
4. Select the multifunction printer you want to set to default, and then click Set as default.
5. Click Finish.
Specifying the Printing Options
You can specify the printing options such as color mode or double-sided printing.
1. Start the Web browser. Type http://localhost:631/ in Location, and then press the Enter key.
2. Type root as the user name, and type the administrator's password.
The CUPS window appears.
NOTE: Set the password for authority as the printer administrator before setting the printer queue. If
you have not set it, go to "Setting the Password for Authority as the Printer Administrator".
3. Click Manage Printers.
4. Specify the required settings, and then click Continue.
The message Printer xxx has been configured successfully. appears.
The setting is complete. Execute printing from the application program.
Setting the Password for Authority as the Printer
Administrator
You must set the password for authority as the printer administrator to do operations as the printer
administrator.
1. Click Start Applications
System Terminal
Konsole.
2. Type the following command on the terminal window:
su
(Type the administrator's password.)
lppasswd -g sys -a root
(Type the password for authority as the printer administrator after the Enter password prompt.)
(Retype the password for authority as the printer administrator after the Enter password again
prompt.)
Uninstalling the Printer Driver
1. Click Start Applications
System Terminal
2.
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Konsole.
1.
2. Type the following command on the terminal window:
su
(Type the administrator's password)
rpm -e Dell-MFP-Laser-3115cn
The printer driver is uninstalled.
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Safety and Regulatory Information
Safety Information
Regulatory Information
Noise Emissions Levels
Laser Notice
Energy Star
MSDS Materials for Dell Printer
Telecommunication Line Cord
When Using the Telephone Equipment
Safety Information
CAUTION: Read and follow all safety instructions in your Owner's Manual or Product
Information Guide prior to setting up and operating your printer.
Regulatory Information
Federal Communications Commission (FCC) Compliance
Information Statement (US Only)
The Dell™Multifunction Color Laser Printer has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B
digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1)
this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired operation.
The FCC Class B limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a
residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not
installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio
communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If
this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by
turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of
the following measures:
Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is
connected.
Consult your point of purchase or service representative for additional suggestions.
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
The manufacturer is not responsible for any radio or television interference caused by using other than
recommended cables or by unauthorized changes or modifications to this equipment. Unauthorized changes
or modifications could void the user's authority to operate this equipment.
NOTE: To assure compliance with FCC regulations on electromagnetic interference for a Class A
computing device, use a properly shielded and grounded CABLE. Use of a substitute cable not properly
shielded and grounded may result in a violation of FCC regulations.
FCC Identification Information
The following information is provided on the device or devices covered in this document in compliance with
FCC regulations:
Model number: Dell™ Multifunction Color Laser Printer
Company name:
Dell Inc.
One Dell Way
Round Rock, Texas 78682 USA
512-338-4400
FCC Information
This device, IEEE 802.11g Wireless LAN USB Adapter, complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any interference received; including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
Warning: Changes or modifications to this unit not expressly approved by the party responsible
for compliance could void the user authority to operate the equipment.
Tested to comply with FCC standard. FOR HOME OR OFFICE USE.
FCC RF Radiation Exposure Statement:
1. This equipment complies with FCC RF radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled
environment, under 47 CFR 2.1093 paragraph (d)(2).
2. This Transmitter must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or
transmitter.
The IEEE 802.11g Wireless LAN USB Adapter has been tested to the FCC exposure requirements
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
(Specific Absorbtion Rate).
Industry Canada Compliance Statement
This Class B digital apparatus meets all requirements of the Canadian Interference-Causing Equipment
Regulations.
Avis de Conformité aux Normes de l'industrie du Canada
Cet appareil numérique de la classe B respecte toutes les exigences du Règlement sur le matériel brouilleur
du Canada.
European Community (EC) Directives Conformity
This product has been determined to be in compliance with 73/23/EEC (Low Voltage Directive), 89/336/EEC
(EMC Directive), and amendments of the European Union.
This product satisfies the Class B limits of EN 55022 and safety requirements of EN 60950.
CE Notice (European Union)
Marking by the symbol
indicates compliance of this Dell printer to the EMC Directive and the Low
Voltage Directive of the European Union. Such marking is indicative that this Dell system meets the following
technical standards:
EN 55022 - Information Technology Equipment - Radio Disturbance Characteristics - Limits and
Methods of Measurement.
EN 55024 - Information Technology Equipment - Immunity Characteristics - Limits and Methods of
Measurement.
EN 61000-3-2 - Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) - Part 3: Limits - Section 2: Limits for Harmonic
Current Emissions (Equipment Input Current Up to and Including 16 A Per Phase).
EN 61000-3-3 - Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) - Part 3: Limits - Section 3: Limitation of
Voltage Fluctuations and Flicker in Low-Voltage Supply Systems for Equipment With Rated Current Up
to and Including 16 A.
EN 60950 - Safety of Information Technology Equipment.
NOTE: EN 55022 emissions requirements provide for two classifications:
Class B is for typical domestic areas.
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
This Dell device is classified for use in a typical Class B domestic environment.
A Declaration of Conformity in accordance with the preceding directives and standards has been made and is
on file at Dell Inc. Products Europe BV, Limerick, Ireland.
CE Mark Notice
This equipment complies with the essential requirements of the European Union Directive 1999/5/EC.
Información NOM (únicamente para México)
La información siguiente se proporciona en el dispositivo o en los dispositivos descritos en este documento,
en cumplimiento con los requisitos de la Norma Oficial Mexicana (NOM):
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Exportador:
Dell Inc.
One Dell Way
Round Rock, TX 78682
Importador:
Dell Computer de México, S.A. de C.V.
Paseo de la Reforma 2620 - 11° Piso
Col. Lomas Altas
11950 México, D.F.
Enviar a:
Dell Computer de México, S.A. de C.V.
al Cuidado de Kuehne & Nagel de México S. de R.L.
Avenida Soles No. 55
Col. Peñon de los Baños
15520 México, D.F.
Número del modelo:
Dell Multifunction Color Laser Printer 3115cn
Tensión de alimentación: 110-127 VAC
Frecuencia:
50/60 Hz
Consumo de corriente:
11 A
Noise Emissions Levels
The following measurements were made in accordance with ISO 7779 and reported in conformance with ISO
9296.
1-meter average sound power level, B
Printing
Without option: 6.3B
With full option: 6.8B
Idling
4B
Laser Notice
The printer is certified in the U.S. to conform to the requirements of 21CFR, Chapter 1, Subchapter J for
Class I (1) laser products, and elsewhere is certified as a Class I laser product conforming to the
requirements of IEC 60825-1.
Class I laser products are not considered to be hazardous. The printer contains internally a Class IIIb (3b)
laser that is nominally a 5 milliwatt gallium arsenide laser operating in the wavelength region of 770-795
nanometers. The laser system and printer are designed so there is never any human access to laser
radiation above a Class I level during normal operation, user maintenance, or prescribed service condition.
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Energy Star
ENERGY STAR® Compliance
Any Dell product bearing the ENERGY STAR® emblem on the product or on a start-up screen is certified to
comply with Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) ENERGY STAR® requirements as configured when
shipped by Dell.
ENERGY STAR® Emblem
The EPA's ENERGY STAR® program is a joint effort between the EPA and manufacturers to reduce air
pollution by promoting energy-efficient products.
You can help reduce electricity usage and its side effects by turning off your product when it is not in use for
extended periods of time, particularly at night and on weekends.
MSDS Materials for Dell Printer
All MSDS materials for Dell Printers can be found at the following URL:
http://www1.us.dell.com/content/topics/global.aspx/corp/environment/en/prod_design?
c=us&l=en&s=corp&~section=001
Telecommunication Line Cord
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
CAUTION: To reduce the risk of fire, use only No. 26 AWG or larger telecommunication line
cord.
When Using the Telephone Equipment
When using your telephone equipment, basic safety precautions should always be followed to reduce the risk
of fire, electric shock and injury to persons, including the following:
Do not use this product near a bath tub, wash bowl, kitchen sink or laundry tub, in a wet basement or
near a swimming pool.
Avoid using a telephone during an electrical storm. There may be a remote risk of electric shock from
lightning.
Do not use the telephone to report a gas leak in the vicinity of the leak.
Use only the power cord indicated in this manual.
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Appendix
Dell Technical Support Policy
Contacting Dell
Warranty and Return Policy
Dell Technical Support Policy
Technician-assisted technical support requires the cooperation and participation of the customer in the
troubleshooting process and provides for restoration of the operating system, software program and
hardware drivers to the original default configuration as shipped from Dell, as well as the verification of
appropriate functionality of the printer and all Dell-installed hardware. In addition to this technician assisted
technical support, online technical support is available at Dell Support. Additional technical support options
may be available for purchase.
Dell provides limited technical support for the printer and any Dell-installed software and peripherals.
Support for third-party software and peripherals is provided by the original manufacturer, including those
purchased and/or installed through Software & Peripherals (DellWare), ReadyWare, and Custom Factory
Integration (CFI/DellPlus).
Contacting Dell
You can access Dell Support at http://www.support.dell.com/. Select your region on the top page, and
fill in the requested details to access help tools and information.
You can contact Dell electronically using the following addresses:
World Wide Web
http://www.dell.com/
http://www.dell.com/ap/ (for Asian/Pacific countries only)
http://www.euro.dell.com (for Europe only)
http://www.dell.com/la/ (for Latin American countries)
Anonymous file transfer protocol (FTP)
ftp://ftp.dell.com/
Log in as user: anonymous, and use your email address as your password.
Electronic Support Service
[email protected]
[email protected]
[email protected] (for Asian/Pacific countries only)
support.euro.dell.com (for Europe only)
Electronic Quote Service
[email protected] (for Asian/Pacific countries only)
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Electronic Information Service
Warranty and Return Policy
Dell Computer Corporation ("Dell") manufactures its hardware products from parts and components that are
new or equivalent to new in accordance with industry-standard practices. For information about the Dell
warranty for your printer, see the Owner's Manual or Product Information Guide.
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project
advertisement
© 2021